geyys tj CZ, ty Z titi ty Vs Yee 5. ©, BERRY JA5 WEST HIGHLAND AVENUE ’ REDLANDS. CAL. Sehr. 24, \AlG. PRESEN ED BY The Trustees THE BRITISH MUSEUM. SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION LIBRARIES |f B4.2 SA MoLL REPORT ON THE COLLECTIONS OF Neel ELESTORY MADE IN THE ANTARCTIC REGIONS DURING THE VOYAGE OF THE “SOUTHERN CROSS.” LONDON: PRINTED BY ORDER OF THE TRUSTEES. SOLD BY LONGMANS & Co., 39 PATERNOSTER ROW, E.C. ; B. QUARITCH, 15 PICCADILLY, W.; DULAU & Co., 37 SOHO SQUARE, W. ; KEGAN PAUL, TRENCH, TRUBNER & Co., CHARING CROSS ROAD, W.C. ; AND AT THE BRITISH MUSEUM (NATURAL HISTORY), CROMWELL ROAD, S8.W. 1902. a — iri All rights reserved. £ ‘ ra . _ LONDON: PRINTED BY WILLIAM CLOWES AND SONS, LIMITED, DUKE STREET, STAMFORD STREET, S.E., AND GREAT WINDMILL STREET, W. ie vee BAL © ix. THE expedition of the ‘Southern Cross’ was fitted out by Sir George Newnes, Bart., in 1898. Everything that experience could suggest for an Antarctic Expedition was amply provided for by him, and it is certain that he spared no expense to render it successful. The scientific staff on board the ‘ Southern Cross’ appears to have been well chosen. Mr. Nicolai Hanson, the Zoologist, was an indefatigable collector and taxidermist, and Mr. Hugh Evans was an excellent Assistant-zoologist. They were supported by Lieut. Colbeck, Mr. Louis Bernacchi, Dr. Klovstad as the surgeon, and Mr. Anton Fougner; Mr. C. E. Borchgrevink was in command of the expedition. The ‘Southern Cross’ sailed from the Thames on the 22nd of August, 1898, touched at Madeira and St. Vincent, and reached Hobart Town on the 28th of November. After a fortnight spent in Tasmania, the ship sailed for Victoria Land on the 17th of December, and met with the first of the ice-pack on the 30th of the same month. The initial attempt to reach Victoria Land was not successful, and the result was that the ‘Southern Cross’ was hemmed in in the ice-pack for forty days, and was at last headed northwards and returned for a second attempt to penetrate to Cape Adare, the future winter residence of the landing-party. The open sea was once more attained on the 10th of February, and on the 14th the ‘Southern Cross’ successfully passed through the ice-pack in six hours. During the time that the ship was shut up in the ice-pack, Mr. Hanson made large collections of the Seals and Birds, and the natural history notes recorded by him in his private diary are published in the present volume, by permission of his widow. Before starting on the voyage, Mr. Hanson spent some weeks at the iv Prejace. Biological Station near Christiania, in Southern Norway, receiving instructions from Professor Hjorth as to the proper methods of the capture and preservation of marine Invertebrata, Algw, &c. His death in October, 1899, was a great loss to the expedition, as it was to Science generally, for, either from want of knowledge or want of care on the part of the survivors, his collections suffered consider- ably, especially in the case of the Invertebrata, as will be seen from the reports of the various specialists who have described them. The Seals, of which there was a large series, were sent home in brine, but the tubs in which they were packed were not labelled in any way, and only a few specimens had leaden tickets attached to them. These had unfortunately become so corroded from immersion in the brine as to be, in nearly every case, undecipherable, and no list of the collection of Seals was forthcoming. The memoir on the White Seal, which Mr. Hanson prepared, and which would un- doubtedly have added much to our knowledge of this animal, was, I am informed, lost by some mischance on the voyage home. It is, therefore, to be regretted that the work will have to be done again by the naturalists on board the ‘Discovery’ and other expeditions which may visit “ Antarctica ” in the future. Sir George Newnes has presented to the National Museum the first set of all the specimens collected, and by his directions I have distributed the duplicates to various Museums and Public Institu- tions in Great Britain and abroad, so that many of these have been enriched by his generosity. There were very few duplicate bird- skins, but the collection of eggs, mostly preserved by Mr. Hugh Evans, was a fine one. A good many duplicate fishes remained, and these have been given to Museums where they were likely to be useful for study. Of the Invertebrata there were not many to distribute. The second set has been sent to Professor Collett for the Christiania Museum, in acknowledgment of the assistance rendered by him in promoting the objects of the expedition, and in considera- tion of the nationality of the commander. The task of preparing for publication the various memoirs on the different classes of Vertebrata was assigned by me to Dr. Bowdler Sharpe, and the Invertebrata have been edited by Professor Jeffrey Bell. Preface. Vv I have to acknowledge the kindness of Sir George Newnes in lending several blocks for the purpose of illustrating the present memoir; they appeared in Mr. Borchgrevink’s ‘First on the Antarctic Continent.’ Messrs. Hurst & Blackett have also been good enough to allow the reproduction of many of the illustrations from Mr. Bernacchi’s work ‘To the South Polar Regions.’ EK. RAY LANKESTER, Director. British Museum (Nat. Hrsv.), April 20th, 1902. 1 In Of TV; va: VIl. WAIT: CON THN Ts: . MAMMALIA By Capt. G. E. H. " Baraetr= Haminrow, F.Z.8., &c. NOTES ON ANTARCTIC SEALS collected during the Expedition of the ‘ Southern Cross’ .. By Epwarp A. Wison, MB, ELS. EXTRACTS FROM THE PRIVATE ‘DIARY’ OF THE LATE NICOLAI HANSON AVES By R. BowDiEr ‘Suanre, ibid Dy, F.LS., &e., Assistant Keeper, iDeroamaaanth of Zoeleee! British Museum (Sub-Dept. of Vertebrata). . PISCES By, G. A: BouLENarn, F. R. 8. TUNICATA By W. A. HerpMay, D.Sc, ERS, Derby Bie fessor of Natural History in University College, Liverpool. MOLLUSCA Sb By Enear A. Suita, F. Z. 8., Assistant ieenee Department of cele British Museum (Sub-Dept. of Invertebrata). ECHINODERMA . By F. JEFrrey Bute, M.A. Dlasains Peoteneat and Fellow of King’s College, London. PAGK ai 67 106 174 190 201 214 PLATE I II-VI VII-xX XI-X VII XIX-XXIII XXIV, XXV XXVI-XXVIII Vill Contents. IX. INSECTA. APTERA. CoLLEMBOLA By Gro. H. Carpenter, B.Sc. (ane 8 cience and Art Museum, Dublin. PTERYGOTA. HEMIPTERA PARASITICA. PEDICULIDZ , By the Hon. N. C. Rema, B.A. 4 . ARACHNIDA. ACARINA By Dr. EL. Thamar Brenden de ia Société Zoologique de France, Membre Corre- spondant de la Zoological Society of London. XI. CRUSTACEA By T. V. Hopeson. XII. POLYCHAETA By Artruur WILLEY, D. Sc., F. VA S. XIII. GEPHYREA By A. E. SarPLey, M.A. XIV. NEMATODA By Dr. von Linstow. XV. CESTODA .. 60 ee a By Dr. von Linstow. XVI. POLYZOA By R. Kirkpatrick. XVII. ANTHOZOA. ALCYONARIA . By Dr. Louis Rove, ad SvpNey J. Hinton, F.R.S., Professor in Owens College, Man- onesies XVIII. ACTINIZA : With an account of “hee pecuhan Chambers, by Joseru A. CLuss, M.Sc., sistant Curator of the Lord Derby Natural History Museum, Liverpool. PAGE 224 225 228 262 284 285 286 294 PLATE XLVII XXIX-XL XLI-XLVI XLVII XLVIII-LII Contents. XIX. HYDROZOA : A preliminary account, b University College, London. XX. PORIFERA .. By R. Kirkpatrick. XXI. CRYPTOGAMIA Muscr. By A. Gerp, M.A., F.L.S. LIcHENES. By V. H. Buackman, M.A., F.L.S. ALGAE. By Miss E. 8. Barron. PERIDINEAE. By V. H. Buackmay, M.A., F.L.S. XXII. REPORT ON THE ROCK SPECIMENS By G. T. Prior, M.A., F.G.S., Assist. Mineral Dept., British Museum. XXIII. INDEX y Epwarp ‘I. Browne, 319 321 Ooo LIL 1X THE NATURAL HISTORY COLLECTIONS OF THE Sou matin “CROSS.” V) dees I. MAMMALIA.’ By G. E. H. BARRETT-HAMILTON, Capt. 5th Royal Irish Rifles. (PLATE I.) INTRODUCTION.—When it is considered how frequently sealing and whaling vessels have visited the Antarctic seas, and how heavy has been the toll levied upon the marine Mammalia of those regions, it is astounding to find how little is really known of these animals. Leaving out of the question the Elephant-Seal (Macrorhinus), whose valuable commercial properties early made it the object of a pursuit so keen that it seems to have been well-nigh wiped out of existence, we find four species of true Seals represented in collections from the Antarctic. These are the Crab-eating or White Seal (Lobodon 1 This report on the Antarctic Seals was written by Capt. Barrett-Hamilton before his departure with his regiment for South Africa: it has been incorporated in the ‘Antarctic Manual for 1901’ (pp. 209-224). Since that publication appeared, I have received corrected proofs from the author from South Africa, and he has made a good many emendations and corrections; so that his account of the Seals, as here published, will be found to differ slightly from the report in the ‘Antarctic Manual. I have received valuable assistance from my colleague, Mr. R. I. Pocock, who undertook to look over the proofs in Capt. Barrett-Hamilton’s absence. Mr. Pocock has been at great pains to supply some of the details which the author’s departure for the front had prevented him from completing. [ have also added references to certain books which have appeared since Capt. Barrett-Hamilton left England. He was only acquainted with Mr. Borchgre- vink’s paper in the Geographical Journal, and | have, therefore, added references, as far as possible, to the latter’s book, ‘ First on the Antarctic Continent’ (Newnes, 1901), and to Mr. Bernacchi’s ‘To the South Polar Regions’ (Hurst and Blackett, 1901), in order to bring the synonymy up to date. I have also inserted a few blocks kindly lent by the publishers of the above-mentioned volumes.—R. B. 8. Bb 2 Southern Cross. curcinophagus), Weddell’s Seal, or the False Leopard-Seal (Leptony- chotes weddelli), the True Leopard-Seal (Ogmorhinus leptonyx), and Ross’s Seal (Ommatophoca rossi). All these are at home on the pack-ice of the extreme South Polar regions, probably at all portions of this area, a region where neither the Elephant-Seal nor any species of Eared Seal are known to exist. Three of them are not confined to the pack-ice, but have been found elsewhere ; the single exception being Ross’s Seal. No other mammal has ever been brought from the Antarctic, and it is highly unlikely, in spite of certain statements to the contrary, that any remarkably new form of mammalian life, at least among the Pinnipeds, remains to be discovered. Of the above-mentioned four species the earliest to attract the attention of Zoologists, and perhaps the best known to science at the present day, is the Leopard-Seal, a species which was first recognised as distinct by De Blainville in 1820. In 1822 appeared the first notice of Weddell’s Seal in the shape of a short description by Professor Jameson in ‘ Weddell’s Voyage to the South Pole,’ to be followed by its correct description in binominal terms by Lesson in 1826. Next in order comes the Crab-eating Seal, discovered by the French expedition of 1837-1840. This species formed the subject of two plates in Jacquinot’s and Pucheran’s ‘ Atlas,’ published some time between 1842 and 1844. Lastly, Ross’s Seal was discovered by Sir James Clark Ross during his voyage of 1839-1848, and was described by Dr. J. E. Gray in his account of the ‘ Zoology of the Voyage of H.M.S. “ Erebus” and “ Terror,”’ published in 1844, Sir James Ross’s expedition obtained specimens ofeach of the four species, and accordingly Gray’s work became, and still remains, the standard description of them all. It contains in fact the first written descrip- tion of the Crab-eating Seal and of Ross’s Seal, and the first intelligible description of Weddell’s Seal. From 1844 until the nineties, practically no specimens, except those brought home by sealers, reached our museums; and even the ‘Challenger’s’ share of the spoil, although fortunately described by Sir William Turner in 1888, was meagre enough. It is not surprising then, that while we actually knew nothing of the appearance and habits of any of the four species, two of them (Weddell’s and Ross’s Seals) might, until a year or two ago, have claimed, and claimed justly, to be considered amongst the rarest and most obscurely known of all Mammals. Of the latter species, in fact, only the two original specimens were known to exist. A third skin, the skull once attached to which has disappeared, is preserved, as Prof. Mammalia. 2 D’Arey W. Thompson has been good enough to inform me, in the Town museum at Dundee. Very welcome, then, were the specimens brought back by the ‘ Belgica’ in 1899. Although not numerous, they were excellently preserved and carefully labelled, and in all cases the sex of each specimen had been ascertained. I count it a distinct privilege to have been permitted to describe and study the first scientifically- prepared specimens of Antarctic Seals which have reached Europe. In the ‘ Belgica’ collection all four species of Seal were represented, and the four skulls of Weddell’s Seal, and the two of Ross’s Seal, which formed a part of it, must be regarded as special prizes. The present collection, like that of the ‘ Belgica,’ contains specimens (both skins and skulls) of each species, the greatest rarities being the skins and skulls of Ross’s Seal. Weddell’s Seal is poorly represented ; of the Leopard-Seal there is one skin and skull, and there are several skins and skulls of Zobodon. It is unfortunate that, owing to the death of Mr. Nicolai Hanson, the Zoologist to the expedition, his notes on the Seals have been lost to science. This, and the fact that the metal labels which had been attached to the specimens have been in nearly all cases corroded through immersion in brine, detract greatly from the importance of what would otherwise have been a most valuable collection. Habits, Life-history, &c.—It may be said with truth that until the last decade of the nineteenth century we knew practically nothing of the habits of the Antarctic Seals. During that period, with reviving interest in the exploration of the South Polar regions, several efforts were made to supplement our information on these subjects, so that at the present time our knowledge, although far from adequate, is no longer a complete blank. I have thought that, in the present incomplete state of our knowledge, it is better to give in detail the observations of the various naturalists rather than to attempt a summary which, at the best, would need almost immediate revision. The Antarctic summer of 1892-93 found the Scottish whalers -* Diana, ‘ Balaena’ and ‘ Active’ in the neighbourhood of Joinville Island and Louis Philippe Land. Mr. W.S. Bruce, who accompanied the ‘ Balaena’ as naturalist, has given us a few notes on the Seals which he observed. These—although I suspect that his identification may have been in some cases mistaken—are graphically written, and give us a fair picture, in a general way, of the mammalian life of the Antarctic. B 2 4 Southern Cross. Mr. Bruce found all four species on the pack-ice, where, “ loving the sun, they lie on the pack all day, digesting their meal of the previous night, which had consisted of fish or small crustaceans, or both. . . . All the Seals were obtained from the pack-ice, in bluest and clearest water. ... The present generation had never seen man, and at his approach they did not attempt to flee, but surveyed him open-mouthed and fearful, during which process they were laid low with club or bullet. Sometimes they were so lazy with sleep that I have seen a man dig them in the ribs with the muzzle of his gun, and, wondering what was disturbing their slumbers, they raised their head, only too quickly to fall pierced with a bullet. “. . In December all the Seals were in bad condition, thinly blubbered, and grievously scarred, and it is noteworthy that the females appeared to be as freely scarred as the males. During January their condition improved, and by February they were heavily blubbered and full of scars. The males were apparently as numerous as the females, but I made no definite statistics... . By February the embryo is well developed, gestation probably beginning in December. . . . Almost every female, towards the end of January and February, is with young. In no individual did I find more than one embryo. 3 The Seals showed great power of jumping out of the water. On one occasion some were found “on a tilted berg, and so high was the ledge above the level of the water,’ that Mr. Bruce relates that the sealers only “clambered up with difficulty and secured their prey.” He has seen the Seals “rising 8 or 10 feet above the sea, and covering distances of fully 20 feet in length.” The extraordinary scars and wounds observed on the Seals, as described by Mr. Bruce, have been already noticed by previous naturalists and attributed to various causes. One of the most fanciful theories ascribes them to the attacks of a large and unknown terrestrial carnivorous mammal corresponding to the Polar Bear of Arctic regions. No traces of any such mammal have been found by later expeditions. Mr. W. G. Burn-Murdoch, who visited the Antarctic in 1892-93 on board the ‘ Balaena,’ writes -—The “Seals evidently consider the centre of the snow-pieces their refuge from danger; probably the Orca or Grampus treats them here as it does the Seals in the north. We found some of the Seals very much scarred with long parallel wounds almost encircling their bodies. I think that these were marks left by the Grampus ; the smaller cuts about their necks and Mammalia. 5 shoulders were signs of domestic worries.”1 These scars are also described by Mr. H. J. Bull, who gained his experiences of the Seals in 1894-95 during a sealing and whaling trip to Victoria Land.” Mr. Bull states that nearly one-half of the seals captured exhibited these peculiar scars or wounds. The wounds, which were in some cases “ quite fresh—in fact bleeding—were not found about the necks and heads of the animals, but about their body, more particularly the lower parts.” Their peculiarity consisted in their great length—“up to twelve inches,” and their frequently parallel arrangement at a distance of “about one inch apart.’ Their nature and appearance as described above, together with the fact that “the wounded Seals were met with throughout the pack, consequently in many cases hundreds of miles away from the nearest land,” are, thinks Mr. Bull, a death-blow to the theories which ascribe them either to the work of a “huge land mammal” or to the fighting of the males in the breeding season. Far more likely is it that they are caused by the attacks either of some Shark, or more probably still by the Killer Whale, a cosmopolitan Cetacean with a well-known reputation for a partiality for Seal-flesh. Mr. Bull’s opinion is strengthened by the fact that “ the scars were rarely, if ever, found on the Sea-Leopards,” “as if the size of this animal rather awed the mysterious enemy of his smaller cousins.” Mr. Bull’s theory, which has certainly much to recommend it, is commented on by Dr. C. Hart Merriam,* who says :—‘ The long scars on Hair-Seals in the North Atlantic are believed to be caused by Sharks’ bites, and the same may be true in the Antarctic Ocean.” My own experience of the Northern Fur-Seal (Callotaria ursina), and its apparent apathy in the water, when in close proximity to its enemy, the Killer, makes it seem highly probable that if the Seals of the Antarctic be only half as foolishas the Fur-Seals—a supposition which seems to be well-nigh proved by the ease with which they allow themselves to be killed by man—then many would easily fall victims to the Killers or Sharks, who might scar many more than they eat, either in a mere spirit of wantonness, or, if well fed, through sheer half-heartedness in securing their prey. It is sig- nificant that Mr. Bull’s experience of the pack was gained in December and January, exactly at the time when Mr. Bruce found the Seals heavily scarred, but improving in condition. It seems 1 ¢FWrom Dundee to the Antarctic: an Artist’s Notes and Sketches during the Dundee Antarctic Expedition, p. 237, 1892-93.’ London, 1894. 2 ¢The Cruise of the “ Antarctic” to the South Polar Regions.’ London, 1896. See pp. 139, 187-194. . 3 Century Magazine for January, 1896. 6 Southern Cross. probable that on the pack, in January and February, they are safe from their enemies, whoever they be. It may be that food is then so abundant that there is no need to leave the pack for the purpose of obtaining it, and so the Seals escape exposure to the attacks of their enemies. It may be that those enemies are migratory, as the Killer is said to be, and have already betaken themselves to other regions. At all events the subject is well worthy of further attention. Besides his account of the scars observed on the Seals, Mr. Bull’s most interesting statement is (for a naturalist) that, while all four species were observed in the pack, they were evidently in no great numbers. The whole catch, in fact, reached only 180 skins. Capt. C. A. Larsen, of the Norwegian whaler ‘Jason,’ has given us a few notes! as the result of his visits to the regions east of Graham Land in 1892-93 and 1893-94. At some places Seals (the species not specified) were found in enormous numbers, especially in localities “where there were plenty of small fishes and shrimps.” One hundred and twenty-five Miskerel killed on December Ist, 1893, are described as being “ very big and fat.” On December 11th near Christensen Island, “the Seals lay in places so closely packed that we had to make circles in order to advance. It was a delightful sight to see those masses of animals, most of which proved to be youngsters of the Fiskerel, which already had changed hair; they were beautifully fed, and looked like so many balls. Here and there an old animal was amidst the youngsters. The Seals were not a bit afraid of us; on the contrary, they stretched their flippers towards us as we pelted them. ... There must have been here abundant food for the Seals, as the ice was everywhere strewn with fishes and fish-bones. When I opened their stomachs, I saw them filled with a fish which has a white flesh, and which we call at home Avitting (Whiting), and also with sharp bones.” Like other explorers, Capt. Larsen sometimes found dead Seals. “Tn one of the valleys,” near Cape Seymour, Louis Philippe Land, “many dead Seals were seen, one of which was almost petrified, while others seemed to have come only recently; and there were corpses in which the fat still contained some streaks of blood.” Dr. Racovitza, the naturalist of the ‘ Belgica, has also published some highly interesting observations on the Seals which he encountered in the pack-ice in the neighbourhood of Palmer Land in the same region. These will be recorded under the heading of 1 See the Geographical Journal, vol. iii., January-June 1894, pp. 289-336 ; also vol. iv. pp. 303-044. Mammalia. a each species. Of special novelty is the description of the appear- ance and of the strange and unexpected vocal powers of Ommatophoca. As regards food, it would seem that small Crustaceans and other Invertebrates are so abundant, that the life of all, with the single exception, probably, of the Leopard-Seal, consists, except in the breeding season, of a monotonous alternation of heavy gorging and long sleeps during the digestion of a meal which needs no trouble to procure. Dr. Racovitza has something to say about the temperature of the Seals, which, as in the case of the Penguins, he found to be remarkably low. In the case of the Seals it did not exceed 37°. So efficacious is the protection against the cold afforded by the thick layer of blubber which underlies the skin in these animals, that the carcase of a Seal, exposed to a temperature of 20°, was still warm inside, twenty-four hours after death. It is obvious that we are still in sore need of careful and detailed studies of the life-history of each species, of their habits during the breeding season; and, above all, of the circumstances which admit the existence side by side of four species each distinct enough to form a separate genus, and whose very dentition differs in a highly remarkable degree. Such marked diversity of teeth and skull cannot be meaningless; yet (except in the case of Ogmorhinus) no observer has as yet laid special stress upon any corresponding divergences of habits or life-history. Owing to the unfortunate death of Mr. Hanson and the loss of his zoological notes, the ‘ Southern Cross’ Expedition has made no striking addition to our knowledge of the habits and life-history of the Antarctic Phocidae. No MS. of any sort dealing with this subject has been placed in my hands, but Mr. Borchgrevink occasionally mentions Seals in a paper read before the Geographical Society." These notes, wherever they deal with a particular species, are alluded to under the heading of that species. The more im- portant entries tell us that Seals were scarce in the pack, increasing in numbers, however, as the ship proceeded southwards, when the number of Seals basking together increased considerably, and in the vicinity of Coulman Island, Cape Constance, and in Lady Newnes Bay, there were as many as three hundred Weddell’s Seals together. In the vicinity of Cape Adare they were to be found nearly all the winter, either on the ice near their blow-holes, or in the water at these holes, which they managed to keep open in Robertson Bay 1 4s 2400 Length of hind-flippers measured along centre to base of lobes . F ; 5 : > =) OO) 9:or ee eed The flippers were in each case completely clothed with hair. The fore-flippers were proportionately narrower and longer than those of either of the other Antarctic species. There are five claws on the hind-flippers. I could find only one rudimentary claw. It is probable that in regard to the number and size of the Mammatia. aI claws, the hind-flippers may show some variation, as this species is not, like Leptonychotes and Ommatophoca, one of those to which attention has been directed as lacking hind claws on its hind- flippers. As regards the sexes Mr. Bruce makes the interesting and unexpected statement that “ Dr. Donald also noted that the females of the larger species were larger than the males’-—a statement to which I would draw the attention of future explorers as well worthy of confirmation. SKULL. The tabular record given below corresponds to that given in the case of Leptonychotes. Distinguishing characteristics.——The skull of the Leopard-Seal needs no description. It is well known, and has been described by Owen in the Catalogue of the Osteological Museum of the Royal College of Surgeons of London (see Nos. 3938 to 3941). It is at once distinguishable by two characters from the skull of any other living Seal. These characters are—(1) the great length and size of the skull, and (2) the powerful teeth which are recognisable at all ages by their large proportions, and the peculiar arrangement of the cusps. Of these there are three, placed one after the other in a line running parallel to the long axis of the jaw. The apices of the two smaller and outer cusps usually incline towards the larger central cusp, which itself bears a recurved apex. In addition, it should be noticed that in no Seal of the Antarctic are the lambdoid and sagittal crests so prominently developed as in this species. Sex.—The young male brought home by the Belgian Expedition is the only one of which the sex has been definitely ascertained. This is regrettable, since very considerable differences of size and proportions occur amongst the skulls of this species. I had supposed that these must represent sexual characters, and I further believed that the larger specimens with stronger canines, enormous develop- ment of the lambdoid, and, in some cases, of the sagittal crests, would prove to be males. Quite upsetting this supposition is the observa- tion of Dr. Donald, as reported by Mr. Bruce, that in this species the females are larger than the males—a statement which, if not based upon some error, is of considerable interest, since it is, so far as I am aware, not applicable to any other species of the Pinni- pedia, At all events, until the point be finally settled by further Southern Cross. 32 “THUL J JSOIO [B}JLOVS JO JY SOFT ‘poesviMep pus WIOA TON 1499, T, “MUL ZT (As¥q 4B) 4sato [By -JISes JO JYSIOFT “UAOM 99, ‘TAU TT S910 [eyyjloes Jo 4ystoyy ‘WIOM ATVYSYS Jnq pus weep yyea7, "s91)2)90) snoLwna U2 pausnzqo ‘hsojsUTT poungoNy fo ‘pap Moro 44904-yo9ayo :UI0OMUn puB uBefo TI, ‘puny wunyp.y pun obnjadryospy sawjog ai} 4nau 0 yo p “pasopo IepIseq pesojo ysoure [epromeyds [SOINJNG “YUSITS 480.00 [BIS VG ‘ G-LT | G-GT | ¢-21 FI 9T 61 ¢.91 $61 | 61 SI LI SI | 6 MONE || Gogh | *49003 | *q3003 | -yaeqo | -yaeqo |*sauTuR | dao, | aamot | seddn | pag Jo | pig Jo jo | todod | q33ueq | s0j0ur |pesudxa| Iolo} -vIp ee) -sod 4soywoly | JYUDSIOF |-o1aguy | “xoa ddyw *paueg a8 |@-16 | cs 18 08 9un}qo | ¢-06 |¢-6 |¢-F6 “saurmBo | “Salles | ‘Salles aaddn jo) 3003 9003 uoy}od | -yaeyo | -yaeqo pesodxa| semot | teddn | jo jo Jo qysueyT | yjsuey | qysueT | LG ¢-00L &-TOT | OOT CII SIT c&L 0GG 1OL GSL GGG | | | LOL GST OIG L8 OST | él ‘uorynpadary 9270.00, = 18 SSL GST | | *Oul] | a[ppra | ‘mini |*emosAz ur B19 JO ye sjesvu | ayprerq | qypeerq JO —|asayBa14)|}S0}R014)| qysuary S9I | zse GLE | 068 | Zsl | 26g 9S. | 682 upwbjag ay} fo CFI | Sté ‘TB U9] | . [eyeped qiaue] -osRg Ufectss | AVIATIILOON “f. ‘ES8T ydag ‘ppp. oy, jo osvkog ‘puULps] EMO] PlOT “plo “ezE “ON ‘pveys -WOFH VW AN «‘Spuvysy puvy “TVA “PIO “(ugzE) 1°06" OT E8 ON | ‘SPST -6E81 Jo wontpedxsa oyoreyuy ssoy somve mg “AZ, VIITUpy 943 Aq poyueseig ‘svag oroieyuy ‘supe ‘(pgzg) So'Sl'F'9F “ON munasna Ysyoug ayy fo woyoapjop ay, woLg--"— “ant *P “668 ‘ON UWOYIYOD ay} WOlJ—'| S66 Cheon LIe ON 22 a i i cs ee “‘PUnT DLL0}0LA LDAW 10 JD paunzqo “Uuoyrpaday ,ss04Q ULayynoY , ay} fo WON ANOD ay} WOL—W “XANOLdUHT SQNIHYOWDNO—II ATaAV EL op) : =e ‘podojaaspun 4so10 [e415 | | | “US “PepMoro puw yeoay qjeoy, | ¢-81 | 62 | 6L|¢-S¢| 28 | 88 GSt | 9LT | Isl] ste ‘oINpBULUL “({EZE) BF" 6" LE ON | -JUY ssoyy souve mg “AZ [RALUL 9809 ATOA YY90}-YVOYO Ysa | | /-PV out Aq poymosorg “stag OAT Ee Use OR Uta rial) ela) 8 OL e108. |, P80) 68 = GSI | GLI | StL | 2g | oyorjuy ‘omnzeurmmt ‘hezg “ON CMAV » SNH J0 “SOA 8Tqy | desutddoy iq ‘spur[sy pury -daored Ajareq ysoro peqySeg | ‘posvuleg 6ZT \¢-GLT | LET | OFS | -AlVA “IMPs ‘(7¢%S) G°8m°L° 08 ON s “UU 9-¢ | | | “TaNesny]L ysaro yeiqises jo yysioH | | | | oyg UL st woeumttoods siq1 jo “Mio Yj09} ‘posemup [MAG | Gl S| G-6l G-t8, 86 | 86 | * | ET /G-98E |-p3eeq 09E | UopoToys ONT, “()HINpL ‘oGzE ‘ON “SPSI-6E8T JO BOI}Ip -od xq OTjOIRJTYW Ssoy SoMVE IG ‘Ayeuupy oy} Aq pojuosarg sgl 09 | ‘sBeg otOIeJUy “4[Npw “YyCZE ‘ON i *‘paseulep 4sor0 | | | Teyeeg ‘aio ATyyStIs qyooT, | ¢-LT | ¢-LT |G 61, 8! 86 ¢-86 SOL |‘p3meq) §€% “WIUT G 48910 [B}}LOBS JO YY SIOF] ‘HIOMUN pur uvep Yay, | ¢.SI N Mammalia. 61 1G LE | 86 | 86 ee SsI | L0G} &9T D 96 | ° * 4ynpe (wcZE) $°8°1' SF “ON uotITOedsS SIT} Jo ULTS OUT, “SFST | -6E8T JO wotpedxg onoreyoy | | Ssoy sourve mg “Ajetupy oy} | | Aq poyuosetg ‘svog oyo1eyuy | G-9L | ¢-GT 61 | ¢-98 ¢-F6 86 2 cel | 206 | ZOT| 628 | ‘sINpe “(@czs) FZ°ST'F'9F “ON ‘aseq ye UM e.Z qnoqe | rae , | 48010 ][BVI5¥S JO 4YSIOFT *SoNLaBd 0} aSOTO Y4904-Yooyo | zoddn 4saiiq | | | “mnasny, 9} UL ST | | “WUUI 9-G 489010 [84 -JLOVS JO SLOP] “UO YY, “KVL ‘TIOMTN pus | ‘qd ‘ydeQ ‘vtSi0og MON «BON uvefo qyooL, “Mel Jamo, ON | °° a 06 Cea ROU yee PEI | SST} S9T | 28s | 4impe opmb you ‘T'F1'6'S6 ‘ON 34 Southern Cross. investigations, it is unsafe to attempt to guess the sex of any skull of this Seal. Whether, however, the larger skulls be those of males or of females, there are, as in the case of Zobodon, so many specimens of intermediate proportions that the determination of the sex they represent must always be a matter of difficulty. It can only be supposed that, as in the case of the male of Otaria ursina and O. jubata, the size and development of the larger sex of the Leopard Seal are exceedingly variable characters. Age.—As might have been expected, the cheek-teeth of this species show, in a far more marked degree than those of the other three Antarctic Seals, the effects of use and wear. But although there is a very great difference between the clean and unworn teeth of some specimens, and the worn teeth of others, it is strange that those of the largest specimens which I have examined are clean and unworn. In young individuals the cheek-teeth are much crowded. In some specimens the sagittal crest is prominently developed : the largest which I have measured reached a height of twelve milli- metres. In all the lambdoid crest is large. Individual variation.—Conspicuous individual variations in the skulls of this species seem to be rare. It may be worth placing on record that the posterior margin of the palate of No. 325d of the British Museum Collection is formed as a crescent and not as a Y as in all the other specimens. This variation is said to be paralleled in the case of a single specimen (No. 1095), which forms part of the collection in the Royal College of Surgeons of London. Teecth.— The massive teeth and prominent crests at once stamp the Leopard-Seal as distinct from the other three Antarctic species, and demonstrate, as I have already argued, that the dentition is adapted to a different kind of food. Skeleton.—The skeleton has been fully described by Sir William Turner, who used it for comparison in his detailed description of that of Leptonychotes (see Table II, pp. 32, 33). Mammalia. 35 LOBODON. Leptorhynchus, J. E. Gray, (by misquotation of Owen’s Stenorhynchus). Lobodon, Gray, Zool. Voy. ‘ Hrebus’ and ‘ Terror, vol. i. Mammalia, pp. 5 & 6, pls. 1 & 2, 1844; Barrett Hamilton, Antarctic Manual, p. 220 (1901). Type LI. carcinophagus. 3. LOBODON CARCINOPHAGUS.! Antarctic WHITE or CraB-HATING SEAL. Phoca carcinophaga, Jacq. & Pucher. Zoological Atlas Voy. Pole Sud’; no description; plates 10 (animal) and 10a (skull) good, 1842-1853 (prior to 1844). Lobodon ecarcinophaga, J. E. Gray, Zool. Voy. ‘ Hrebus’ and * Terror, p. 5, 1844 ; Jacq. & Pucher. Voy. Pole Sud, Zoologie iii. Mammitéres et Oiseaux, pp. 27 to 81,1853; J. E. Gray, Cat. Bones of Mammalia Brit. Mus. p. 141, 1862; Cat. of Seals and Whales Brit. Mus. p. 10, 1866; Hand-List. of Seals Brit. Mus. p. 13, 1874; Gill, Prodrome of a Monograph of the Pinnipedes, Comm. Essex Institute, v. p. 6, July 1866; Allen, Hist. N. Amer. Pinnipedes, p. 466 (see also pp. 413, 414, 416, 419, 420 & 463),1880; W. 8. Bruce, Report Sixty- third Meeting Brit. Ass. Nottingham, September 1893, p. 807, 1894; E. G. Racovitza, La Vie des Animaux et des Plantes dans |’Antaretique, p. 29, 1900 ; Cook, First Antarctic Night, pp. 257, 280 (photo.); Bernacchi, To the South Polar Regions, pp. 37, 44, 274 (1901). Stenorhynchus serridens, Owen, Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. xii. p. 332, 1843; Cat. of Osteological series Mus. College of Surgeons, pp. 641 & 642, 1853. Leptorhynchus serridens, J. E. Gray (misquoting Owen), Zool. Voy. ‘ Hrebus’ and ‘ Terror, p. 5, 1844. Stenorhynchus carcinophagus, Flower & Garson, Cat. Osteology Vertebr. Anim. Mus. College of Surgeons, part. iii. p. 213, 1884. > Ogmorhinus carcinophagus, Tumer, Rep. Seals Voy. ‘ Challenger, p. 64, 1888. Stenorhynchus carcinophaga, Bruce, Proc. R. Phys. Soc. Edinburgh, vol. xii. 1892-94, p. 350, 1894. Lobodon carcinophagus, 0. Berg, Com. Mus. Buenos Aires, i. p. 15, 1898. Stenorhynchus vetus, Leidy, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philad. vi. p. 877, 1853. White Seal, Borchgrevinck, First on the Antarctic Continent, p. 81, 1901 (photo.). Weddellii, Borchgr., ¢. c., p. 103 (figures of skull, upper and lower aspect, wrongly identified as that of the Leopard Seal). 1 Halicherus antarctica, Peale, described in Cassin’s edition of ‘The United States Exploring Expedition during the years 1838, 1839, 1840, 1841, 1842, under the command of Charles Wilkes, U.S.N. Mammalogy and Ornithology,’ 1858, is sometimes referred to Lobodon ecarcinophagus, but Gill, who examined the type in the Smithsonian Institution at Washington, found it to be a skull of a species of Phoca, inhabiting the coast of Oregon and California, and renamed it P. pealei. See Prodrome of a Monograph of the Pinnipedes, Comm. Essex Institute, vol. v. pp. 4 & 6, footnotes, July 1866. 2 The exact date of publication of these plates is unknown. It was at all events prior to 1844, for they are alluded to by Gray in ‘The Zoology of the Voyage of H.M.S. “ Erebus” and “ Terror.”’ D 2 36 Southern Cross. Types.—No actual specimen was indicated by the describers of this species. One of the specimens brought home by the French Antarctic Expedition is in the University Museum of Zoology at Cambridge. It is a skull numbered 897, and was presented to the museum by Professor J. W. Clark. Dr. S. F. Harmer has been good enough to inform me that this specimen, together with a skull of Ogmorhinus leptonyx (De Blainville), was purchased in Paris in 18535 of M. Dumortier, by whom they had been obtained, and “who had accompanied MM. Quoy and Gaimard on board the ‘Astrolabe.’ ” Synonymy and history—The tooth figured by Leidy under the name of Stenorhynchus vetus bears such a remarkably close resem- blance to those of Lobodon carcinophagus that I provisionally regard the two species as identical. Without an actual examina- tion of the tooth it is impossible to come to any final decision in regard to it. It is possible that there may have been some mistake as to its origin, which is stated to be the Cretaceous Greensand of New Jersey. Owen’s description of Stenorhynchus serridens was taken from a skeleton presented by Dr. McCormick, the Surgeon of H.MLS. ‘Zerror,’ to the museum of the Royal College of Surgeons of England. It had been obtained during Sir James Ross’ expedition in a high latitude in the Australian seas. The Crab-eating or Antarctic White Seal was first made known to science by the two good plates, the one of the animal, the other of the skull, which were published in the “ Zoological Atlas” of the French Voyage to the South Pole. The exact year of publication of these plates is doubtful, since the series bears only the vague date of 1842 to 1853. All we know for certain is that the written descrip- tion of the animal did not make its appearance until after Gray had described the skins and skulls brought home by Sir James Ross. Gray, however, could not but recognise his specimens as belonging to the same species as that already figured; he therefore, while insti- tuting the new genus Lobodon, felt bound to accept the specific name carcinophaga, a compliment which the French naturalists returned by adopting the generic term proposed by the Englishman. The first specimens were captured on the South Polar ice, between the islands of the Sandwich and Powel group, at a distance of 150 leagues from either. The specific name had its origin in the food of the animals, which is stated to have consisted principally of shrimps (“crevettes”), as a result of eating which their excrement was coloured red. As already stated, this species was met with by Sir James Ross, Mammata. 27 but no exact locality is attached to the specimens which he brought home, apart from that mentioned in the statement appended to the type of Owen’s Stenorhynchus serridens. The species, although often reported and no doubt frequently killed by sealers, has been hitherto very poorly represented in museums. No scientific account of its habits has yet been written. Distribution—Most of the later expeditions, whether to the neighbourhood of Victoria or Graham Land, have met with Lobodon. It is, therefore, probable that it is also found on the pack-ice of the intermediate localities all round the circle. That it may sometimes stray to quite a distance from the Antarctic pack-ice is shown by the record by Mr. C. Berg of the capture of a specimen, now in the La Plata Museum, near San Sidro, north of Buenos Aires, in latitude 34° 28' South. Habits—Until quite recent years, our only information regarding the habits of this Seal was that conveyed by its specific name, namely that it feeds on crustaceans of some sort. Mr. Bruce seems to have missed a great opportunity of dis- tinguishing the various Antarctic Seals by their habits, but his notes can only be read as applying to all four, with the single exception of his remark that the “creamy white seals,” as he calls this species, were, with what he supposed to be Ross’s Seal, in greatest abundance ; there lay four, five, or even ten on a single piece of pack-ice ; the greatest number he saw on one piece of ice at a time was forty-seven. Most interesting is the graphic, although short, account of Dr. Racovitza, who states (thus corroborating Mr. Bruce), that the Belgian Expedition found Zobodon the most frequent species on the pack-ice. It was also present with Zeptonychotes in the Straits of Gerlache, in the Palmer Archipelago. On being approached it showed a great anxiety to make its visitors acquainted with its dental armature, displaying its teeth, and, in the words of Dr. Racovitza, “en souftlant violemment par les narines.” The young, which when born are already of a considerable size, make their appearance on the pack-ice in September. Their first coat is thicker than that of their parents. The mother suckles her offspring for some days, and afterwards leaves it to look out for itself. Dr. Racovitza’s most interesting account of the feeding of this seal has already been quoted,’ as well as my suggestion as to the supposed use of the extraordinarily cusped teeth. _ Based upon specimens from a quite different region, Mr. Nicolai ' See page 14. 33 Southern Cross. Hanson’s notes on this species should have been of considerable value, especially as he was instructed, at the “special request” of Mr. Borchgrevink, to make “as good a study of this interesting species as time, specimens, and opportunity allowed.” This Mr. Hanson seems to have done, according to the verbal testimony of his colleagues of the scientific staff of the ‘Southern Cross’ ; but the sole information relating to the animal brought home by the Expedi- tion is the statement by Mr. Borchgrevink that it was found in ereater numbers than in 1894, and that it was not so well represented as Weddell’s Seal. Mr. Borchgrevink had expected to find the White Seal breeding in Robertson Bay, but this was not the case, although both the Leopard-Seal and Weddell’s Seal bred in that locality.’ According to Mr. Bull,? this Seal is particularly afflicted with the scars which have been alluded to above. | External appearance—Externally the Crab-eating Seal would appear to be the most conspicuous Antarctic species, as the names applied to it by the various explorers indicate. Thus Mr. Bruce calls it “the Creamy White Seal,’ Mr. Borchgrevink styles it “the characteristic white seal of the Antarctic,” and Mr. Bull writes of it as “ the whitish-yellow or light grey Seal which goes under the name of the White Antarctic Seal, though it is never found of such whiteness that it cannot readily be distinguished on the ice-floes” (op. cit. p. 139). Yet, beyond the fact that it is, at all ages, of far lighter coloration than any of the other three species, we are as yet in some doubt as to its exact hues and their arrangement—a doubt which can only be dispelled when a detailed description of the animal, taken from specimens still in the flesh by a competent naturalist, shall be forthcoming. Meanwhile, it may be well to compare the various descriptions which have reached us. The original was as follows :—“ Pelage brun olive, parsemé ¢a et la, en dessus, aussi bien qwen dessous, de grandes plaques de couleur jaunatre,’ a description borne out by the plate (No. 10), in which, however, the animal is represented as having the nose white. Mr. Bruce, on the other hand, writes of “a darker dorsal stripe,’ contrasted with the “ creamy white” general body colour. The skins of all ages, collected by the ‘ Belgica, are nearly white, with only indistinct traces of mottling. In life they were, once more to quote Dr. Racovitza, “d'un blanc pelucheux a reflet verdatre.” Lastly, the skins brought home by the ‘Southern Cross’ show, as far as I could ascertain from an examination of them while in salt, a considerable indication of 1 Geographical Journal, October 1900, p. 400. 2 Op. cit: p. 139: Mammata. 39 indistinct spots or mottling, a character which is quite borne out by the specimens in the British Museum. Immature skins exhibit a considerable amount of mottling, and I strongly suspect that the Crab-Eating Seal is one of those species, the young of which shows traces of spots, which are gradually lost as the animal grows older. Dr. Cook’s photographs seem to show us in Zobodon an animal somewhat intermediate in its proportions between Leptonychotes and Ommatophoca. Both head and body are thicker and blunter than in the former, but not so thick and blunt as in the latter form. The long flat anterior portion of the skull has a distinct effect on the physiognomy. The total length of the flat skins (in salt) reaches from 6 to 7 feet (2000 millimetres) when measured from the tip of the nose to the end of the tail. The thick and hairy tail itself reaches a length of from 34 to 4 inches (100 millimetres). All the flippers are clothed with hair throughout their extent. The fore-flippers reach a length of about 14 inches (550 millimetres) and have a greatest breadth of 55 inches (137 millimetres). They are provided with 5 nails. The bilobed hind-flippers are provided with 3 rudimentary nails. They are somewhat constricted at the base, where their width is only about 7 inches (175 millimetres), but gradually expand posteriorly until at about their centre their width is about 11 inches (265 millimetres), and at their termination about 13 inches (325 millimetres), measured from the extreme tip of one lobe to that of the other. Along their outer edge, from the base to the tip of either lobe, their length is about 16 inches (400 millimetres), measured along the centre, from their base to the bifurcation of the lobes they reach about 10 inches (250 millimetres). The lobes therefore extend posteriorly for a distance of about 6 inches (150 millimetres) beyond the remainder of the flipper. The details above may be taken as the average of the skins brought home by the ‘Southern Cross. An immature specimen, evidently moulting, since its back is smooth, whereas its flanks and flippers are still woolly, supplies the following dimensions: total length of skin (from tip of nose to tip of tail) 3 feet 6 inches (1050 millimetres), leneth and greatest width of fore-flipper 9 inches xX 5 inches (225 millimetres x 125 millimetres), greatest length and width at centre of hind flippers 10 inches x 6 inches (250 millimetres x 150 millimetres). 1 See Dr. Wilson’s notes, infra, pp. 74, 75.—R. B.S. 4O Southern Cross. SKULLS. In the tabular records will be found the principal dimensions of the skulls brought home by the ‘Southern Cross,’ to which are added for purposes of comparison similar details of those collected by the ‘ Belgica, as well as of the specimens contained in the collection of the British Museum. The only specimens, of which we know the sex from examinations made in the flesh, are those collected by the Belgian expedition. These are therefore arranged according to their sex, the males first, and each sex in order of size from largest to smallest. The British Museum specimens are arranged simply in order of size, as are also those brought home by the ‘ Southern Cross.’ The numbers attached to the latter are simply those which were placed upon them in order to prevent confusion when first received. They have no other significance, but a knowledge of these facts will probably be of interest to the authorities of the various museums into whose hands they may find their way.’ Distinguishing characteristics.—The skull of this species is well known, so that a detailed description is uncalled for. Although not possessing the enormous dimensions of that of Ogmorhinus, it may be at once distinguished at all ages from that of any other species by the peculiar cheek-teeth. These are both large and remarkable for the complicated arrangement of their cusps. As in Ogmorhinus, there is a principal central cusp, but this is supported, not by two others, one anterior, the other posterior, but by one quite small cusp in front, and by from one to three behind. The central cusp is far larger than the remainder, and its apex is usually bulbous; all have a tendency to point backwards. In addition to these dental characters, the skull of this species differs from that of Leptonychotes, which it approximately equals in size, in its longer palate, and longer, broader, anterior portion, as well as in the shape of the lower jaw. This is in Lobodon far deeper, stronger, and more massively built than in Leptonychotes. Sex.—An attempt has been made in the “Table” of dimensions to determine the sex of each specimen, both in the case of the ‘Southern Cross’ and the British Museum collections, from the data supplied by those collected by the members of the Belgian expedi- _ | Doubtless all the specimens collected by Mr. Hanson were fully described in ne ae and could have been identified, if these notes had been properly cared for after his death. Mammalia. AI tion. This cannot, however, be regarded as having been very suc- cessful. It seems certain that those specimens which possess the largest canine teeth are males, while those with the smallest are females. But between the two extremes there are so many indi- viduals in which these characters are intermediate that my deter- minations can only be regarded as quite hypothetical. As far as the evidence presented by the skull goes, there is no very marked sexual difference. The differences of size would, however, I suspect, arrange themselves more definitely about a mean, were it possible to collate the specimens exactly by their sexes. Age.—Here again, except in the case of the specimens brought home by the ‘ Belgica,’ the remarks in the first column of my “Table” must be regarded as purely hypothetical, although certainly resting upon a securer foundation than in the case of sex. Both the basilar and sphenoidal sutures close completely before the animal becomes very old, in contradiction to what occurs in the case of Ommatophoca and Ogmorhinus, in which the sphenoidal suture seems to remain open throughout life. As in Ommatophoca, the development of the sagittal crest is very slightly marked, and the lambdoid crest is even weaker than in that species. Similarly the nearest approach to vhe formation of the former crest is to be found along the parieto- frontal junction, near the middle line. The extraordinary cheek-teeth, although apparently so liable to suffer from wear and tear, yet seem to preserve their form in a very remarkable manner. They wear away, in fact, at a far less rapid rate than do the massive canines and incisors. Such damage as makes its appearance is for the most part confined to the anterior teeth and to the anterior portions of these. In contradistinction to the cheek-teeth, the canines and incisors may be broken and cut as if by use in fighting. The skeleton has been described in detail by Sir Richard Owen in the catalogue of the Osteological Museum of the Royal College of Surgeons of London (p. 642), and also in the ‘ Annals and Magazine of Natural History’ for 1845 (p. 351). (See Table III, pp. 42-45.) Southern CYOss. A2 ; Cg ON poTpeqey ‘q8alo [B}LSVsSON “YSolf TOA, eerily ul 91 9L 6L Fle Oot |) OFT | 09% | ULYS 0} ssuojoq) “(2) $—gT ‘ON ‘posop) somyns | | jeplousydg 4soro [eqyLoes | oN ‘usom Ansys yyooy,; SL] 1 )G-I1] 21) 92/9-Lb) ~ 4 TFT | 096 | (2) 4Impe Aptwon (g) “@) d—'F ON *“pasoyo | oyIMb you omyns [eprousydg | | "ysor0 [eISVsON “Yseryyyoog, | CT SI HDAC OGay emGZaleer Gees 09) CRT Ne CET e008). 2 ae ce, ce eo LONT ‘posopoun aangns Teprousydg ‘qsoT0[BISVSON “YsozypooL, | Cl] FI HE pe reg) AS ee Sy eariedit |) Zt | 96 | ° ()Mpe AjteoN “G) P—'G ON ‘JSO10 [B}JLGVS ON “peparoro SIVpO “WOM ATPTSTS T[09J, SI Zl SI VA Ned, | yet | RCIA GVA OS ers | Maya ON A SEL ONE *pasoyo jou omgns yeprousydg ‘48010 [BIJISVSON ‘“YsSot} Yoo, FI FI SI 02 6L MN Goya || GHB |) SSI | 692 —) @) py, 3G) 6 —90N CT ‘ON peTeqet -ayds pue Aepiseg¢ “4IpsI[s cr| erle1z| | ¢8| 82| Tor \e-9rr | eet | oz | EIS 0 s8uojeg) @) P—zZ ‘oN qso1o0 [Ryiseg ‘ysay moog, | ¢.cT *paso]o AVpIseq {pasopo you [eprousyds :semyng “4ULsI]s | | *posoypo Sainjns [Bplou | | | | | | solo [VIJISVQ ‘“WIOMTN YQOOT, Cy FI €1| 02] G¢-I8 #8 | IL/ GIT oe TR Gael 400 ‘()ampy ‘(@) 6—¢ ‘ON “posoyo soinjns [eproueyds | | pue Ivpiseg 4soto [eVyQLees | | | ON “JNO soUTUYO puu siostouy |* OT} CL |¢.F. | ¢-22| 68] €8| 88] Gal) PSL] Spr) O8@|° © © ° * © — #&— TON “49004 | M004 *(auty | -$20T9,| joy |'SeuyUvo ‘somruvo| ‘sates | ‘saqtes | aTpprur | TaMoy Ben aoddn |zaddn yo) 43004 113009 ary} ‘tanim |*eut0sAz| , quer | pag jo Fe M jo | uonszod | -yooyo | -yooyo | Suoje | -e10jo | 4e eisied “yysu9y | — uor10d Oa Jajom ~pesodxa} aamoz | seddn | pains | qypeeiq TIpPretq) _4.,, | yeseg posod le ain -vIp | jo jo 10 -woul) |48o}BaIy) JSo}wolH)| =~ ‘d | -Xo Jo SODInY. qysoyeary qysuey | yySuery | yySuey sjesvu jo } NBPPH | ; | yysue'T ——————— ee eee eee eee eee Ee ‘PUNT DLL0JILA WAU 0 WD pauanjgo ‘Uuoyrpaday , S806 ULAYINOY , AY}2 fO UO2N9A]]0D AYP WOLJ—V ‘SQOVHAGONIOUVO NOGOPOT— II ATAVL Se a 2 Fo‘ TYS1TS ys910 [RyVISvg “waxoIq puBe UIOM sIOsIOUL { TIO APYSYS Yy09J-3ooyo IOWoJUW “yy SI18 4SaI0 [RJISVG ‘UIOA SIOSTO -UL pue Yyoe}-YooyO IOLIOJOW "480.10 [e}}15es ON ‘FG "ON SB OATS -SBUI PUB WaTJOMS os ATvoT jou [InyQ “Mel oy} oaoqe Ay[N} Jo Jou suAOID dI]} ‘ysotj pue Weepd YIde4-ooyH “JSITS JSOl0 TVPISBG ‘HIOM PUB WoyoIq s1OsIoUL S A[IOMI}UB TIOM T]Y994-Ya0qO “puypy wyypLy puvy Mammalia. *posopoun oinyns jeplousydg ‘qso10 [BIJISVSON “YSalJ Y499T, “48010 [BJLSBS ON “YSaty Y}09T, *pasoyo | jou sainjns yeptouerdg "4s010 [BIJISVSON “YSolJ} [99 T, ‘pasop) IB[IsBVq ! posoTo you yuptousyds +: seinyng ‘4S910 [BIJISVBON “YSorj [09 J, 1D rm al er | ¢.$1 obnpadyoa.y saupog ay, nau v0 7 paurnjigo ‘uonrpaday onowmupy unrbpag ayz fo wor9ap]09 ay; WoLg—'q al &I &I GI ¢-SI Gl ail FI FI FI | Ee) t~ gs | 061 F&I S61 OGL Fol CGL LET GOT | | (‘poatooort SBA OST ULYS oT.L) : 4 9.1} CULUL Ty ‘68 “ON * 4jnpe Ayuoiwddy *4 —'196 ON * 4inpe Ajyueivddy +4 —yE9 ‘ON ci ee eas P amMyeuuy “969 ‘ON (‘poatadar OSTR SVM Uys ONL) IMPVY °“2P—t68 ON C$ ON porteqey Uys 0} SSuOTe_) ‘“poinsvour you a10F -e1oy} ‘peseuep [[NMYS—cl “ON *pamnsvoul oN ‘posvueq (‘FON PLA] ULYS 07 ssuojog )— FT ‘ON - * gfape jon “() &©—OT ON C66TIT poyep pur ‘z ‘ON P2elqel UTYS 0} Ssuojoq )—ZT “ON > (2)ampe Aptwon (4) 6 —"L ‘ON > (2)4mnpe Aprwon (2) 5 —"G ON Southern CvYoss. “pose -mBp []UYG 4seaio ]vqyWLo¥Vs ON ‘ABI OF STIMALSIq 4I9J, ‘posemep TonU 1IMYS [eu sor [eyYLOUg ‘HI0M ATplVy puv Uvefo T4997, | ‘T[VUS 4So10 [BIJISVQ “IBOM =—-OF- SMLUUISaY =YJoay, "JSO1O [VPJLSVS ON “WIOM 999, -atquydaoaed ysnf jSo10 [BIJISVQ “WIOM .10STO -UL PUB Y}00}-YovoYyoO AOMIOUW §1 ¢-FI ¢-CL ST (eels cr | G-8l | $0 GE. | &1 | ib Pin G81 | 8 IG 06 ¢-@8 9L | LL | 9b Pe S| es | ¢-g8 | 19 ¢8 | 9g ¢.08 | 8¢ S6L Gl Ist OST CSI StL ¢-0ST C&T StL 6F1 OFT *xoiddy 892 OLS OLZ C86 “5 qupe ae “bsg “Uy “WM ue Apjuoiddy ‘['$'S'L6 CL°ST'$'9F ON SE pure “uory -O9][00 OY} UI OsTe SI ULYS oy.) “Ayemupy 43 Aq poeyweselg ‘SE-GE8T JO ToTpodxg ooreyay ssoy somere mug “PP 4yupe Ajiwou ev A[qeqotq ‘§°C1'F'9F “ON “NU ‘UJIUIG yNoIT ‘“SF-6E8I jo woutpodxp o1joreyuy .ssoy souve Ig ‘svag = OLJOIBJU VW “P ynpe Apuoreddy “p9zg “ON (Gir) lays) § (os) oY} Ul OsTe St UIyS oyT,) “WoHTp | -odxq oljoiujuy ssoy some Mg “Pf plo ‘(S'9L' IL Sh) 1928 “ON “PLEL «8 I-PUPH 5» ‘vin jo gt ‘d ye ()0 SI NU “WWWS ynoryT = “eF-6E81 jo woytpodxy ooreyay ssoy somve IgG ‘svoag ore -& Alquqoig “‘yNpy ‘7968 ON "892]2]000) snorima U2 paurnzgo ‘fwojsrzT poungony fo wnasnyy Ys2pug ay} fo W02}99}]00 ay, WoL.J—) ad | “ael odoge Sutteodde ysnl T9007, +4003 -\jaayo JAMO] pag Jo uo iod posod -Xa jO FIO H "IPOOATS UL TTS 309, SOT | 901 | BALES *souluRa 49279 | Jaddn | Ianol yo pig jo Jojo eee ae AIGLI9}SO. oh |-o10y Vy eehseng) *S3UIMVO | *SaT1as azaddn jo} 3003 uodod | -xjeaq9 pasodxe| IaMo[ | jo jo qysueT | yysaeTq | | | 801 SIL ‘Culy | *solles | a[pprur | qj003 | out -yeoo | Suoje aeddn | pains yo 5 | q}suary sTrseu jo ysae'y “unt -B19 JO “eros AZ 48 TpBeaq | qypKeq -votl) |}jseyvely sayva.y oe —_$__—_ *W8u9] 878 [8d -ostg S9L G-OST | ipbslec)| [eseg | (‘poeateoad OSTB SVAL UIys oy) ‘snyoy 6—'669 ON & aimjyeuruy “968 ON ee ‘panurvwoo—S VOVHAMONIOUVO NOGOPOI— II AIAVL 45 Mammatia. | | | | | CL'CL'F'9F ON ST pus “aor, | -99] [09 9} UL OSTB SL UTYS otLT,) ‘Ayeuupy sayy Aq poezyuoeser : “Tmy8 | ‘EE-6E8T Jo uwotpedxsa oF Sunok oqinb Vo ‘pepaoro | -OIBJILVW SSO SOMIBE TIG ‘“SBay Ts sel too, pue soddn | | | onoiyuy “4 osimyemur ue yjog Jo Yjoo}-Yooyo IoMoyUy OL | ¢-SI 6 | ¢-ST cg 9 | 3c AIL | SILT | OOL | L6T | Atjucaeddy -(61'C1't'9F)/9zE ON ‘posvuiep yonu ‘![jnys sunok apnb ys! | | | ‘mul UL popAodO Y}90}-Yooy/) Si FL FL | ¢-LT 99) G9 22 GUL BS JUL oe * P omMyvuUlUl UB ATGVqoIg “Y9ZE ‘ON | | | | | ‘yynpe Ajrveu ynq ‘T[MAS poseurep youu w FL | G-ZT EL (Ste) 92/2, pape, Se ey 2 a us He ‘UIejIooUN XOQ ‘“f'OT IL’ St “ON COZ" STF 9F | | ‘ON SI pue ‘morjooT[oo ey} UL | | | Os[’ st uTys oy.) ‘AI BILUpy oy} Aq poyuesatq “Sh-6E8T jo woljtpedxg olo1eyay §,ss0y] "S010 [Bq4ISVS ON | | | | souve ug “Pf oaINyeuUt ue RSE ONG) UBL pe oh ee ZAG) OL | &-SI | ¢-&T GG | 99 LIL) GIL | GIL | 01% | Atyuoreddy -(0G° ST F'9F) 99ZS ON pler) Jo) je) ie) | | | (‘uoTyoaT[OO OY} UT OsTB | | | SI UIYS poynjs oy) l0llay, , pues .snqaiy , “SNH Jo osvAoa | oyy jo ASopooZ oy} UL pamsty ‘Aqpeuupy oyy Aq pojuosotg | ‘Eh-6E81 Jo woHTpedxpp o1orey UV SSsoy somlVe TIQ ‘sBag ‘yso10 [ByYISvs ON “MRL Oy | | | | oorejuy °*& omyvurtut ue A]}Ue eaoqe uMoIs ATINJ you WaT, OL CT ZI 81} 99|¢-L9] 09 | FIL| SIL; FIL] L1G | teddy ‘(COZ'9L' ILS) P9ZE “ON CE CL FOF (ON SE pues “MOTo9] -[oo oY} UL Os[w SL ULYs etT,) | | “Aqpeatuupy ayy Aq poayuesorg ‘SSOIOR JILSIA Woyoiq puw | | | CE-GEST Jo worrpodxay o1jorey ‘peseuep youu ‘{nyssunok | | | uy ssoyy some? IG ‘sBeg eyinb W -4so10 [eyISes ON | | oyorsyuy “& oinjeuut ue ‘saef UL popadoso 4490}-Y90G) | GIL | SL} GIT] 91 ¢9)G-29] * SII Isl ‘* | 212 | Ayuereddy “(CIT 94) 2986 ‘ON "ysor0 [eyVL3es | | | *S qmpe ue ON ‘G1OoMUN puv yseyy qeT,| ZI; GI] sf] 06,¢-eL) Lb} °° GGL | StI | 681 | 092 Aljuereddy ‘(4°91 IL’ FF) 992 ON 46 Southern Cross. OMMATOPHOCA. Ommatophoca, J. E. Gray, Zool. Voy. ‘ Hrebus’ and ‘ Terror,’ p. 7, 1844; Barrett- Hamilton, Antarctic Manual, p. 221 (1901). Type Ommatophoca rossi. Ommatophora (misprint for Ommatophoea), Turner, P. Zool. Soc., 1848, p. 88. OMMATOPHOCA ROSSI.—Ross’s SEAL. Ommatophocea rossii, J. E. Gray, Zool. Voy. ‘Hrebus’ and ‘ Terror,’ pp. 7-8, pls. vii. & viii. 1844; Cat.of Bones of Mammalia, Brit. Mus. p. 142, 1862; Cat. Seals, Brit. Mus. pp. 13 to 15, 1866; List of the Seals, &c. Brit. Mus. p- 15, 1874; T. Gill, Prodrome of a Monograph of the Pinnipedes, Comm. Essex Institute, p. 6, July 1866; Allen, Hist. N. Amer. Pinnipeds, p. 467 (see also pp. 418, 414, 416, 419, 420, 449, 451, 453, 458, 459 & 463), 1880; ‘Turner, Rep. Seals, Voy. ‘ Challenger’ in the years 1873-76, pp. 65-66, 1888 ; Bateson, P. Z. S. 1892, pp. 106-7 to 114-15, 1894, pp. 237-238; W. Kiikenthal, Denkschr. Medic. Natur. Gesellsch. Jena, iii. p. 443, 1893, & Jenaischen Zeitschrift, xxviii. Bd. N. F. xxi. p. 115, 1893; EK. G. Racovitza, La Vie des animaux et des plantes dans lAntarctique, p. 30, 1900; Bernacchi, To the South Polar Regions, pp. 44, 45, 1901 (photo.). “New (Species of) Seal discovered January 21, 1899” (with figure), Sir George Newnes, Strand Magazine, September 1899, pp. 283 & 284; Borchgrevink, Geogr. Journ. October 1900, p. 403. “Rossii,” Borchgrevink, First on the Antarctic Continent, pp. 74, 103, 1901 (figs. of skull, upper and lower aspect). Type.—No. 45.11.25.4 (324A) of the British Museum collection. The synonymy of this species presents no difficulties. Fistory.—F¥or the first description of this Seal, as also of Lobodon and Leptonychotes, we are indebted to Dr. J. E. Gray. Until the return of the ‘ Belgica’ from her imprisonment in the Antarctic pack-ice our knowledge of Ross’s Seal was of the most slender description. The first known specimens were those brought home by Sir James Ross from an unknown locality in the South Polar regions. These, a skin and two skulls, for many years remained the unique representa- tives of their race in Europe, if not in the world. I am indebted to Professor D’Arcy W. Thompson for the information that a skin and skull of this rare species were presented to the Town Museum of Dundee, but that the skull seems to have been lost, and its where- abouts cannot be traced. No specimens, therefore, of those brought home by the ‘ Belgica’ and ‘Southern Cross’ could exceed in value those of Ross’s Seal. The first naturalist to lay claim to the rediscovery of Ross’s Seal was Mr. W. 8. Bruce, who states that the “ Mottled Grey Seal,” as he calls it, was with the Crab-Eating Seal ‘in greatest abundance” on the pack-ice. ‘They were usually associated with the Creamy-White Seals (Lobodon) on the pack, and I found many to be with young.” Mammatia. A7 It is, however, questionable whether Mr. Bruce’s identification was correct (vide infra, p. 49). Following Mr. Bruce, came the Belgian Antarctic Expedition, which, however, found this Seal but rarely. According to Dr. Racovitza, it was encountered on only thirteen occasions during the sojourn of the ‘ Belgica’ in the ice. To this expedition we owe the first photographs ever taken of this rare Mammal, and our interest in it is but heightened by Dr. Racovitza’s vivid description of its peculiar appearance and strange voice. So little known, in fact, was Ross’s Seal that the members of the ‘Southern Cross’ Expedition did not at first recognise it. The result was the announcement in the Strand Magazine of the discovery of a new species of Seal on January 27th, 1899. Ilus- trations taken from photographs were also published, from a glance at which Dr. Racovitza was able to surmise that the supposed new Seal was in reality the present species." Like the ‘ Belgica, the ‘Southern Cross’ found this species “ very poorly represented.” Only four specimens were secured, all in the pack; of these one only was a female. These, no doubt, represent the four skins and skulls which have been examined by me, and two of which are now in the collection of the British Museum. Distribution —Although probably poorer in numbers than the other three species, Ross’s Seal is thus shown to have a fairly wide distribution, having been found (excluding Ross’s own specimens, the locality for which is uncertain), so far as we know, in all cases on the pack-ice in the neighbourhood of Joinville Island and Louis Philippe Land (Bruce), west of Alexander Land (‘Belgica’), and in the neighbourhood of Victoria Land (‘Southern Cross’). Habits—Of the habits of Ross’s Seal practically nothing was known until the publication of Dr. Racovitza’s interesting notes. As has been already stated, that naturalist found it, hke Weddell’s Seal, the White Seal and the Leopard-Seal, an inhabitant of the pack-ice, where it feeds exclusively on large Cephalopods. The most novel observation, however, is that which has regard to its voice, which is said to be very curious. The sounds which it emits are very varied. “Son larynx fortement gonflé constitue une caisse de résonance, et le voile du palais tres développé, distendu par de lair, constitue a l’animal une sorte de cornemuse. On entend @abord, chez la béte irritée, une sorte de roucoulement de tourterelle enrouée, auquel succede le gloussement d’une poule affolée de terreur, 1 Mr. Hanson, as I learn from the other officers of the scientific staff on the ‘ Southern Cross,’ always maintained that the supposed new Seal was nothing but Ross’s Seal. See also Bernacchi (¢.c. pp. 44, 45).—R. B.S, 48 Southern Cross. et la finale c’est un reniflement sans harmonie produit par lair violemment expulsé par les narines.” External appearance-—As in the case of the other species, the exact details of the coloration of Ommatophoca are still very imperfectly known. Gray’s plate tells us very little. In his written description of the type-specimen he stated that the colour was “greenish-yellow, with close oblique yellow stripes on the side, pale beneath.” The present coloration of the skin I should describe as being as nearly as possible olive above, shading gradually into tawny-olive beneath, with regions of lighter yellowish shades on the breast and neck. MR. NICOLAI HANSON, WITH ROSS’S SEAL. (By permission of Messrs. Hurst & Blackett.) There is no very distinct line of demarcation between the colours of the upper and under surfaces; neither are there many spots. The “stripes” described by Gray are, however, present at about the place where a line of demarcation might be expected to occur. On the flanks they occur as streaks of the colour of the under surface, having a breadth of about a quarter of an inch, which running obliquely forwards invade the colour of the upper surface. Occasionally in places where the streaks are interrupted a spot or two is formed. Otherwise the creature is spotless. Mr. Bruce in his very brief allusion to the coloration of this species makes no mention of these streaks, but merely compares it with the Crab-eating Seal, adding that its coat is “somewhat sleeker, Mammalia. 49 of a beautiful pale mottled grey colour, darker on the back and lighter on the belly, and varying in intensity in different individuals.” The streaks are so well represented in the reproductions of Dr. Cook’s photographs published both in his own book and in Dr. Racovitza’s paper, that I cannot help regarding them as highly characteristic of the species. Mr. Bruce compares Ommatophoca with Lobodon, to which, he states, “in form and size” it is “very like.” This remark about an animal which has been described by Dr. Racovitza in such vivid language as so highly distinct from all the other species makes me suspect that Mr. Bruce may have been mistaken in his identification of Ross’s Seal. Unfortunately no skins of Ommataphoca were entrusted to me for examination by Dr. Racovitza. The skins secured by Mr. Hanson were in salt, and not in a condition suitable for description. From the account of Dr. Racovitza, Ommatophoca would appear to be of very remarkable form. It is, he says, “le plus phoque des phoques, car chez lui toute forme de quadrupede a disparu. Son corps n’est plus quun sac fusiforme pourvu de membres tres réduits ”—a description completely borne out by Dr. Cook’s photographs, as well as by Mr. Borchgrevink’s note (op. & loe. cit.), that the body of the first specimen of his supposed new species “ was not unlike that of the ordinary Seal, but the neck was of more than ordinary thickness, and under the chin it extended to a great round muscular purse. The head was short and broad, the eyes jarge and protruding, and the mouth short. The eyes were somewhat slanting. It had six front teeth in the upper jaw, two in the under jaw, but no back teeth.” ' The four skins brought home by the ‘ Belgica’ are those of an animal distinctly smaller than the other three species. Their total length, measured from the tip of the nose to that of the tail, reaches only from 4 feet 4 inches to 4 feet 10 inches (1400 millimetres). The thick and hairy tail presents no characteristic features, having a length of about 4 inches (100 milli- metres). The flippers, as in the other species, are completely covered with hair. They are decidedly smaller than those of Lobodon or Leptonychoies. The fore-flippers carry five, the hind two to five, in the latter case rudimentary, claws. The greatest length is, for the fore-flippers 9 to 12 inches (300 millimetres), for the hind 10 to 12 inches (300 millimetres). It is due to those who have worked only at the type skin to say that, like them, in examining it, I have completely failed to find any traces of claws on the hind-flippers. 1 See Mr. Hanson’s account of the capture of this specimen, as recorded in his private ‘ Diary’ (infra, pp. 89).—R. B.S. E 50 Southern Cross. SKULLS. In the specimens brought home by the ‘Southern Cross’ the numbers are those used by Mr. Hanson. Of these four, one (No. 1) is the smallest adult, another (No. 2) the largest known, the latter exceeding slightly in size No. 897 of the ‘ Belgica’ collection, which considerably exceeds the largest of Ross’s own specimens (No. 43, 11, 25, 4). Distinguishing characteristics. —The skull of Ross’s Seal cannot possibly be confounded with that of any other living Pinniped. As regards general appearance, its nearest resemblances lie with Cysto- phora cristata, Erxleben, of Arctic waters. In size it about equals that of Leptonychotes, and is slightly smaller than that of Zobodon. Here the resemblance ceases: the feeble dentition, broad inter- zygomatic and short naso-palatal regions, together with the vertical inclination of the nares, at once mark its distinctness. The cranial characters of Ommatophoca are exceedingly puzzling. Were it not for the differences of dental formulae (Ommatophoca possessing one more incisor on each side of the lower jaw than Cystophora), we should have very strong grounds for including it in the Cystophorinae. Indeed, its resemblances to Cyslophora are very remarkable. As pointed out by Sir W. Turner, the two skulls approach each other in the vertical inclination of the anterior nares, in their relation to the infraorbital foramina, in the great width of the orbits and interzygomatic regions, and in the length of the ascending portions of the premaxillae. These are so short as to leave a definite part of the anterior nares bounded by the superior maxillae. He might have added the feebleness of the post-canine dentition. They differ, however (besides the dental formula), in the greater length of the nasals of Ommatophoca, in which also the superior maxillae articulate with their outer border as far as the tip, and do not leave the anterior part of their border free. Further, the palate plates of the palatal bones are shorter in Ommatophoca—a character evidently connected with the resonant vocal powers of the animal—the upper incisors are immensely more feeble, and the shape of the crowns of the cheek-teeth is quite distinct. Most of these characters are peculiar to Ommatophoca and are not found in any other genus, but, in addition to its dental formula, which allies it to the Stenorhynchinae, it finds a connection with that family through Lobodon, in which genus I find to a lesser degree a similar conformation of the pre-maxillae. An account of the teeth will be given below. They do not help Mammatia. oa us to discover the relationships of this strange form, but are as distinct from any other genus of Stenorhynchinae as each of them is in this respect from the rest. Altogether, I can only regard Ommatophoca as a most interesting eeneralised form, an annectant genus, showing affinity both to the Stenorhynchinae and the Cystophorinae, to both of which it stands in a quasi-ancestral relationship. I think it more convenient that it should remain included in the Stenorhynchinae than that it should form the type of a new family or sub-family. To come to individual differences (apart from the teeth) I find little variation in the eight skulls before me. The most variable character in the cranium appears to be the amount of the superior maxillae which enters into the boundary of the superior nares. The length of this section of the boundary varies in the different specimens from 5 to 17 millimetres. As in Lobodon and Leptonychotes there is practically no develop- ment of the sagittal crest. The lambdoid crest is, however, well developed. Sex.—The sex of Ross’s specimens is unknown. One skull of those collected by the ‘ Belgica’ was that of an adult female, the other that of a young male. Since one of the known females is the largest skull of the four and there are no apparent differences in the size of the teeth, I see no way of telling the sex of the two unknown skulls. Neither can the one unknown female amongst the skulls brought home by the ‘ Southern Cross’ be certainly indicated—unless, indeed, it be No. 1, which, although distinctly adult, is the smallest skull of the eight known. All things considered, it is evident that there can be no striking differences between the sexes of this Seal, and it is as likely as not that differences of size represent age and not sex. Age.—There is little to be said on this point. In many of the skulls, even the larger examples, the teeth are fresh or but slightly worn. Yet, in the smallest skull of all (No. 1 of the ‘Southern Cross’ collection) not only have the cheek-teeth completely disappeared from both jaws, but in some cases hardly a trace of the alveoli is discernible, Dentition— Undoubtedly a great deal of the interest aroused by Ommatophoca centres in its dentition. The first striking point in this connection is the remarkable feebleness of the teeth. Thus, with a skull attaining to more than double the size of that of Phoca grocenlandica or P. vitulina, the teeth are about equal in size to those of the former, and actually inferior to those of the latter E 2 52 Southern Cross. species. The only southern Seal which at all nearly approaches Ommatophoca in the size of the teeth is Leptonychotes ; but here again the canines of the latter species are many times larger than those of the former, while the cheek-teeth are also larger and of a different shape. In Ommatophoca the cheek-teeth are provided with three cusps, the central one being the largest. In Leptonychotes the rudiments of posterior or anterior cusps, even when present, are obscured by the prominence of the central cusp. In spite of their feebleness, the teeth of young specimens of Ommatophoca may, as 1s usual with other Pinnipeds, be so crowded in the jaw as to overlap one another. With the lengthening of the bone in which their roots are embedded, the space between them increases, and the position of their long axis becomes parallel to that of the jaw itself. The second point in connection with the teeth of Ross’s Seal is the remarkable instance of variation with which they present us. This had attracted attention even when the species was represented in collections only by the two skulls brought home by Ross, and formed the subject of discussion by Mr. Bateson’ and Dr. Kiken- thal.? The difficulties and interest of the subject have been doubly increased by the specimens brought home by the ‘Belgica’ and the ‘Southern Cross.’ Before dealing with these it will be well to describe the peculiarities of the teeth of Ross’s specimens. In one of these skulls (No, 43.11.25.4) the single-rooted first post- canine is followed on each side of either jaw by three double-rooted pre- molars and one true molar, that is to say, if, taking the analogy from 4x4 Loxal m. ———, ae Sd at Ix This dentition has been supposed by Mr. Bateson to represent the normal arrangement in the animal. In No. 3248, on the contrary, the upper jaw is provided with six cheek-teeth on the left side, the first two of which are smaller, and it is reasonable to suppose that they represent the first cheek-tooth of No. 43.11.25.4, since the corresponding tooth on the right side, although single, is provided with two distinct crowns, and looks, when zn situ, exactly like two teeth united in a single cavity. Presumably then, although the first cheek-tooth of the left side is represented by two distinct teeth, these have apparently originated from some kind of splitting process, since on the right side this process has been imperfectly carried out, leaving an organ which is exactly half-way between other Seals, we regard the dental formula as p.m. * P. Z. 8. 1892, pp. 106-108; also ‘ Materials for Study of Variation,’ pp. 237- 238, 1894. ? Jena. Zeitschr. (2), xxviii. pp. 76-118, pl. III., 1V. 1893. Mammalia. 53 one and two teeth, being in fact a single root with two crowns. The remaining teeth differ markedly from the corresponding teeth of No. 43.11.25.4 in that only one of them is distinctly double- rooted. The bifurcation of the root is represented in the remainder merely by a slight basal notch, most prominent in the last tooth on the left side, and by a central groove which, passing up each side of the root and being deeper externally, evidently represents the double- rooting of the cheek-teeth of No. 43.11.25.4. The groove is so prominent in the last tooth on the right side that this tooth is double-rooted, although not so prominently so as is the corresponding tooth of No. 43.11.25.4. The teeth of the lower jaw in 3240 represent in various degrees the steps between single- and double-rooted teeth. Each of the first pre-molars is double-crowned, but single-rooted, like the first tooth on the right side of the upper jaw. The second and third teeth on each side possess a broad, compressed, single root, divided by a rather deep, central, longitudinal groove on each side. The fourth and fifth are distinctly double-rooted, but not so prominently as are the corresponding teeth of No. 43.11.25.4. Of the two ‘ Belgica’ skulls, No. 897 agrees, in the number of its cheek-teeth and the character of their roots, with No. 43, 11, 25, 4. The teeth, however, especially the lower incisors, are rather small. No. 700, on the other hand, presents us with an entirely new combination. In this head there are six teeth on either side of the upper jaw, but here, if we are to apply the same hypothesis as before, the splitting process has apparently taken place not at the anterior, but at the posterior, end of the series. Thus the two last teeth on either side are much smaller than the remainder, and may be taken to represent the fifth tooth of a normal head. The first of the pair is in each case double-rooted ; the second is single- rooted on the left and imperfectly provided with two roots on the right. The remaining teeth of the upper jaw are similar to those of No. 43, 11, 25, 4, except only that the double root of number two is very feebly developed and the small basal notch runs up the tooth as a groove as in No. 324). In the teeth of the lower jaw we have every gradation, from the tapering single-rooted number one, through the flattened and grooved number two, and the slightly double-rooted number three, to numbers four and five, both double- rooted, and with, in the latter case, widely separated fangs. The four specimens brought home by the ‘Southern Cross’ are invaluable as presenting us with further modifications of the same type of variation. All are adult, but not one of them agrees with 54 Southern Cross. the normal formula for other Seals. In skull No. 4 the formula for the cheek-teeth is p.m. and m. : : : In the case of the upper jaw the lesser size of the last two teeth suggests that, as in skull No. 700 (‘ Belgica’), they are the representatives of the typical fifth grinder. On the right side and on the left side each is provided with double roots. The remaining teeth resemble those of No, 43.11.25.4, being all, with one exception, more or less provided with double roots. The single exception is the first, which, as in every other known instance, is single rooted. In No. 3 the formula is again p.m. and m. ae still apply Mr. Bateson’s hypothesis, it appears to be the last tooth which has undergone reduplication. The supposed “ daughter” teeth * are, however, remarkable in two ways. In the first place they are not small teeth as is the case in the two instances already described (Nos. 700 and 4). On the contrary, one of them (the anterior one), is, like all the teeth of this particular specimen, uncommonly robust, and probably larger than any single fifth tooth of any known skull of this species. The posterior one is smaller than its comrade ; but still not small when measured by the standard of the “daughter ” teeth of other specimens. Secondly, these teeth are unique, amonest four similar instances, in being both single-rooted. | Opposite to these teeth in the lower jaw we have a tooth which is again unique of its where, if we kind, being the only absolutely single rooted m. aL in the whole series. It looks as if the development of the teeth of one jaw had had some influence on those of the other. All the cheek-teeth of the left upper side are single-rooted, the roots of the third, fourth, and fifth being broad and grooved. Those of the right upper side, with the exception of the first, second, and last, are double-rooted. In the lower jaw all are double-rooted except the first and last. Of 1 2 these p.m. — and — are crowded and slightly overlap each other. The whole head is remarkable for the great size of the teeth. These are as remarkable for their unusually Jarge, as are those of No. 897, for their unusually small size. No. 2 presents us with a fourth instance where the formula is 6 x 6 . again p.m. and m. Be In this case each supposed “ daughter ” a) » tooth is fully provided with double roots, those of the last forming 1 T borrow this term from Mr. Bateson. Mammalia. 55 a particularly wide angle. They are slightly smaller than the remainder of the series. All the teeth of this specimen, except the first premolars, both upper and lower, possess well-developed double roots. Pm.z is a remarkable tooth. Its crown is, for Ommatophoca, particularly well formed and carries three cusps. The central cusp is far more prominent than either of the others, and is partially split into two by a groove. This seems to me to afford an exact parallel to the “ cloven” cusp of a specimen of Phoca groenlandica, as described and figured by Mr. Bateson at p. 239 of his work. But in this instance the “cloven” tooth is not opposite to a reduplicated tooth on the corresponding side of the same jaw, as in the case of Ommatophoca. Dr. Forsyth Major has been good enough to draw my attention to a similar occurrence in Didelphys marsupialis. Ina specimen of this species (No. 93.12.24.1)in the British Museum, if ss) on the left side is an exceptionally well-developed tooth, and is cloven in an exactly similar manner. In No. 1 we come toa completely new phase of the question. This specimen, which, although fully adult and the smallest known example of the species, is, as regards its post-canine dentition, absolutely toothless. Not only have all the cheek-teeth dis- appeared, but even the alveoli have partially or wholly vanished with them. We have then in Ommatophoca a highly remarkable instance of variation in the teeth—an instance which, I believe, is unique amongst the mammalia. It may be, perhaps, well to summarise the main points :— (I.) Disregarding the toothless skull (No. 1) we have seven specimens. -Of these only two (Nos. 43. 11. 25. 4 and 897) have : ; ese 15) : the normal Phocid formula of p.m. and m. paver For four of the : : : 5) 8% ‘ 2 remainder the formula is p.m. and m. Beas? and for one (No, 524d) 6X 5 pin andin. dX 9 &v (II.) In all cases where six cheek-teeth occur in the upper jaw, “two adjoining individuals of the series are smaller than the remainder, and are sometimes also so closely associated, that it may reasonably be supposed (as in the case of the original specimens) that they represent a corresponding single tooth of an individual possessing only five upper cheek-teeth. In one case only (No. 3) 56 Southern Cross. are the “daughter” teeth almost equal in size to the remaining individuals of the series. (III.) In four of these five cases, on the above reasoning, the 1 extra tooth is apparently the product of m.—. Jn one only (No, 3246) is it apparently the product of p.m. is (1V.) In addition to the above, there occur several instances of what, following the above suppositions, can only be regarded as abortive or incomplete division or reduplication of teeth. Such abortive reduplication may be of two kinds. (V.) Either it occurs (a) as if by some kind of sympathy in a tooth closely related to an individual supposed to have undergone reduplication, either on the opposite side of the same jaw or in the opposite jaw. Thus in No. 5240 (a highly interesting specimen, since sco ae 1 it presents the only instance of reduplication in p.m.—,— the only instance of complete reduplication on one side accompanied by only abortive reduplication on the other—also the only instance of, in addi- tion to the above, abortive variation in m. ——in which the formula is p.m. and m. e A 2 5x5 the road to division. Each, although singly rooted, is provided with two, in most cases quite distinct and perfect, crowns, and is grooved along the most probable line of division into two teeth. (VI.) or (8) it may occur independently, as has happened in the ), all the first premolars being halfway along case of m. bof the same head (No. 3240), or in p.m. ae of No. 2. (VII.) In addition to the supposed reduplication or splitting a very wide range of variation is observable in regard to the rooting of the teeth. Almost any of these, except the first premolars, may appear either with two perfect roots or with a single root only. (VIII) But between these forms there are many gradations represented by flattened single roots—flattened single roots grooved along the plane where a division into two roots would occur—flattened single roots in which incipient division is indicated by a terminal notch and all stages of development of this terminal notch, until it becomes a cleft deeply dividing the pillars of a fully developed double root. These gradations are most easily seen in the teeth of a single head, such as the lower molars of No. 3246 or of No. 700: Mammatia. 57 they occur, however, with much completeness in certain teeth taken 2, . . throughout the series, such as premolar— of either jaw, and I have nut the slightest doubt that in a series of sufficient size they would be exhibited in every cheek-tooth. (IX.) It seems fair to regard this variability of the rooting as closely connected with the actual reduplication of the teeth, so that a tooth with double roots would, perhaps, in this species, be regarded as no less on the way to reduplication than a tooth with double crowns. At all events this possibility is strongly sug- gested by the numerous intermediate steps which occur between a tooth with a single columnar root and a fully double-rooted tooth. (X.) This variability in respect to the roots is not confined to the original teeth, but may occur also in the supposed “daughter ” teeth. A pair of these may occur in any of the following combinations :-— (a) both single-rooted; (8) both double-rooted; (y)* one double- rooted and the other single-rooted; or (6) one fully, and the other only partially double-rooted. Further, a single-rooted pair of “daughter” teeth on one side of the jaw may be represented by a double-rooted pair on the other side, as in No. 4. (XL) The variability in respect to the roots is greater in some teeth than in others. Thus (although one or both of the “daughter” : if : teeth of m. — may be single-rooted), in no head except No. 3 does this tooth itself, if unreduplicated, possess less than two roots. Where reduplication is supposed to have occurred, one or both of the “daughter” teeth may be single-rooted. It is remarkable that the only instance of a single-rooted m. aT is due, apparently, to a case of “sympathy.” This occurs in No. 3, a head in which both » 1 : sg + “daughter” teeth of m.— are single-rooted. Similarly, p.m.—., although very variable in the nature and development of the two roots, only once appears (in No. 324d), with a single flattened and grooved ; 3 root, while p.m. Z 1 never single-rooted. P.m. — and 3 appear © 2 each once single-rooted (both again in No. 3240). P.m. and = D pai each appear twice, with single roots, and to these exceptions No. 324) 1 Cases y and 6 occur opposite to each other in the same jaw. y I ] 58 Southern Cross. again contributes largely. On the contrary, there is no instance of a ue and of p.m. 7 it may be said that in all cases where this tooth was found i situ it also was single-rooted. In a single case (No. 4), where all the teeth had been removed from the skull, and could not be certainly identified, I suspect it to have been double-rooted. (XII.) Besides variation in number and shape there is also variation in size. The teeth of No. 897 are abnormally small; those of No. 3 abnormally massive, and crowded together in the jaw. (XIII) Further, the size of the incisors is conspicuously variable, as exhibited by the large incisors of No. 324) and the small ones of No. 897. Having thus described the variations to which the teeth of the known specimens of Ommatophoca are subject, it is time to turn to what has been written on the subject by Mr. Bateson and Dr. Kiikenthal. In fairness to these writers it should be at once stated that Mr. Bateson’s remarks were based upon an examination of only two skulls—those brought home by Ross,—while, so far as I know, Dr. Kiikenthal never had an opportunity of seeing the actual specimens, but based his conclusions on mere descriptions and upon Mr. Bateson’s arguments. It will not then appear surprising, if I find myself, after the advantages of examining no less than eight skulls, unable to agree with all that has been written on the subject. To deal first with Mr. Bateson. That naturalist has found in the variations of skull No. 324 the material for a highly ingenious paper, wherein he has used them in conjunction with other like variations as a ram wherewith to batter the prevailing views on the homologies of mammalian teeth. As the result of an examination of great numbers of skulls of the Primates, Carnivora and Marsupialia, he finds that in many examples of various genera and species “reduplication of teeth may occur in such a way that a tooth which is usually single may be represented by two teeth, and that the two teeth thus formed may either (1) both take place in the ordinary series, or (2) may stand externally and internally respectively.” The prevailing hypothesis, as Mr. Bateson points out, necessarily “involves a definite conception of the mode in which variation works,” and, further, that “in variation the individuality of each member of the series is respected.” But, as in the case also with other multiple parts, such as digits and phalanges, the difficulty in applying this principle and in double-rooted p.m. Mammalia. 59 following the individual history of each tooth is notorious. Espe- cially is this the case because “though variation may sometimes respect the individual homologies, yet this is by no means a universal rule; and, as a matter of fact, in all cases of Multiple Parts, as to the variation of which any considerable body of evidence has been collected, there are numerous instances of new forms arising in which what may be called the stereotyped or traditional individuality of the members has been superseded.” Judged by the ordinary rules of morphological criticism, this [original] specimen [of Ommatophoca vossii| shows one or both of two things :— (1) The first premolar of Ommatophoca may in itself represent two premolars of an ancestor ; Or (2) in the descendants of Ommatophoca the single first premolar may be represented by two distinct and separated pre- molars. One or both of these propositions may be true. If the division of the other three first premolars were as complete as that of the left >m,—, there would be no indication of their origin. But if it is ) fo) possible for a premolar to represent or to be represented by two premolars, without any visible indication of its double nature, may not the same be true of the premolars of other forms ? may it not be true of teeth generally? And if it is true, how are the homologies of teeth to be determined ? Mr. Bateson’s arguments carry with them all the virtues and vices of brilliant destructive criticism. He has seized a tempting opportunity to attempt the downfall of, or at least to heap discredit upon, the theory of homology, a theory which, like all other human theories, is but a working hypothesis, and as such no more unsatis- factory or satisfactory than others of its kind. Without the theory of homology, much of the best biological work of the past century would be barren. and meaningless. Regarded by its light, a good deal of it seems to tend towards the same goal. To brand our system as “imperfect” is to tell us what we already knew. To discredit that system is to retard rather than to advance knowledge —unless the objector can produce another system better and more workable in its stead. This Mr. Bateson, like many other destructive critics, con- spicuously fails to do. In fact he does not even attempt a task which he probably regards as impossible. The weakness of his position is best demonstrated by his concluding paragraph, wherein 60 Southern Cross. he confesses that “the present system of homology must probably be retained as a basis of notation, imperfect though it is, and although it is founded on a misconception of essential facts.” It is unnecessary, in the present connection, to deal further with Mr. Bateson’s arguments. He has certainly indicated the difficulties of reading homologies; he has not necessarily proved the impossi- bility. As a critic of Mr. Bateson, Dr. Kikenthal acknowledges the probable existence of numerous instances of (to use Mr. Bateson’s term) reduplication in teeth, and believes that such reduplication or splitting may in certain cases occur in any cheek-tooth. But, since all intermediate stages of the phenomenon may be found, there is nothing to prevent the reading of the homologies. Thus in the case of skull No. 3240, he finds no difficulty in believing that at the anterior end of the series two teeth on the left are homologous with one on the right, and, that being so, there is nothing to prevent us from regarding each of the remainder, starting from the last two, as homologous—a supposition which is, indeed, not denied by Mr. Bateson. Continuing, Dr. Kiikenthal thinks that, since in some cases each of a pair of these reduplicated teeth may attain to the same size as the remainder of the series, there may in this way arise a permanent increase in number and the formation of a new species possessing six cheek-teeth. The more often the new six-toothed form alone occurs, the less frequent will be intermediates, and the more difficult, although not impossible, will it be to follow the phylogeny. Even were the original five-toothed forms entirely ousted, and the new six-toothed forms predominant, there would still occasionally occur five-toothed individuals to indicate the origin of the former. Difficulties in reading homologies might increase ; impossibility would not exist. Turning to another form of variation in Mammalian teeth, the appearance of extra teeth, as in Halichwrus,’ in which the upper jaw may possess six instead of five cheek-teeth, Dr. Kikenthal remarks that in this case the new teeth are always at the same place at the posterior end of the jaw. They are not the result of redupli- cation, but represent an entirely new factor. Here again homology is still possible and even easy, the five teeth of a typical skull corre- sponding to the first five of a six-toothed skull, and the sixth tooth of the latter being something new. 1 See A. Nehring, Ueber Gebiss und Skellett von Halicherus grypus. Zool. Anzeiger, p. 610, 1873. Mammalia. 61 Kikenthal’s opinion seems to be that the increase of teeth amonest the Pinnipedia, whether by reduplication or by the addition of new teeth, is due to a tendency to lengthen the jaw amongst a group of animals whose development is still going on, and to whom in the execution of their main object in hfe, namely the capture of fish, such a lengthening would be useful. He finds a parallel between the reduplication of the teeth of Ommatophoca and the development of teeth in young Whalebone Whales, in which his studies have shown that, while the rudimentary cheek-teeth of the youngest embryos are many-cusped, those of older embryos are single-cusped, and occasionally reduplicated. With the earler portion of Dr. Kikenthal’s remarks few, no doubt, will be found to disagree. The suggestion that a new tooth may arise either as an offshoot of one already in existence or as a new and independent organ is indeed not without probability. When, however, he comes to deal with increase of the teeth amongst the Pinnipedia, he gives vent to suggestions which, however probable they may have appeared at the time when they were written, certainly do not apply to Ommatophoca as we now know it in the light of Dr. Racovitza’s description. According to that naturalist, the animal never catches fish ; its jaw is extremely short and feeble, and there is no evidence whatsoever to justify us in supposing that a lengthening of the jaw would be either useful or probable in the future. Whatever applications Dr. Kiikenthal’s remarks may bear to other Pinnipeds they can have no meaning whatsoever as applied to Ommatophoca. To consider the specimens once more, the most striking charac- teristic of the series is, to my mind, not any possible increase or reduction of the teeth, but the exceeding variation which they exhibit. The most noticeable feature of this variation is certainly its quantity: its quality (for a knowledge of which we are so largely indebted to Mr. Bateson) may be found exhibited in numerous other instances amongst the Mammalia. As compared with this variation, questions of increase or decrease of teeth are evidently, in this case, even if proved, subsidiary. The one thing obvious is that we have in Ommatophoca an animal in which the dentition is, whether in number of teeth, in their size or form, vastly more variable than it is in any other known Heterodont Mammal. Recent investigation has shown that teeth, like every other character, are subject to variation. They are not the entirely stable organs they were at one time believed to be. Yet no instance of instability so remarkable as that of Ommatophoca has, I believe, been 62 Southern Cross. described—an instance in which, of eight known examples, only two resemble each other. The first problem then which confronts us is the explanation of such variability. It can be no more meaningless than is, as a rule, the remarkably definite form and condition of Mammalian dentition. The question is—can we possibly find the meaning ? To my mind there is one point which stands out most clearly in regard to a case like the present. The animal whose teeth are subject to such variation can have no use for a stable dentition. Just as the highly specialised complications of the crowns of the cheek-teeth of Zobodon must have arisen through some very special need of the animal—some very specialised manner of feeding for which the particular form of tooth must be an advantage—so it seems clear that Ommatophoca must be an animal, the capture and ingestion of whose food is not affected by changes in its dentition. I go further even than this, since I believe that, as already explained, the animal is in the course of losing its teeth. The dentition shows a condition of extreme weakness. The teeth are small and feeble, and it is to this very feebleness that I feel inclined to attribute the variability as regards the roots. It seems to me, in fact, as if the streneth to form a completely double-rooted tooth is frequently absent. I would suggest then that except for p.m. Re and T the double-rooted tooth must be the normal, the single-rooted a variation. My supposition gains strength from the fact that in all the eight skulls there is no instance of a double-rooted first premolar—a variation which should assuredly, one would think, occur, were variations towards strength and not towards weakness the rule. Taking the remaining cheek-teeth of the left side, of sixty teeth 49 or over 80 per cent. are more or less double-toothed, while of the remainder many are small, imperfectly formed, or mere “ daughter ” teeth of one of the supposed cases of reduplications. It seems impossible to doubt then that, following the analogy of other Seals, the posterior cheek-teeth of Ommatophoca are normally double- rooted. Lastly comes the question of the supposed reduplication of teeth, a point upon which I have, in the earlier part of this article, followed the nomenclature and suggestions of previous writers. Viewed in the light of my previous suggestions, the possibility of reduplication or the reverse loses much of its importance, since it is probable that, where variation is so rife, it may take the form either of increase or of decrease in the number of the teeth. In the former case the new Mammata. 63 teeth, as is actually the case, would not be so strong as those of the original series. Yet it is necessary to consider the matter, especially in view of what has already been written concerning it. And first it is advisable to consider what is the normal cheek- dentition of Ommatophoca. As long as only two skulls were known, I think there could be no doubt that it was necessary to regard it as sant m. HES, i This 4x 4 ca view was certainly not shaken by the arrival of the two specimens brought home by the ‘ Belgica, since this dental formula was then represented on both sides of two skulls and on one side of a ee as 5 xX 6 i ae Now, however, that the ‘ Southern Cross’ specimens are added to the series, we may divide the skulls before us into the following classes :— (following the analogy of other Seals) p.m. against only one skull with a complete dentition of pm. and m. BS ae + (nos, 43.11.25.4 and liga h zs (1.) Those wit aa cee ° 700). (II.) One with practically the same dentition, but with an extra tooth, apparently as a‘ daughter’ of p.m. > on the left 1 side and the remaining premolars apparently in a state of semi-reduplication (no. 3240.) : : OME (III.) Those with p.m. and m. ve Sin each case at first 0X0 4 sight by reduplication of m. 1 (nos. 700, 4, 3 and 2). —a result in the face of which it clearly behoves us to reconsider our opinions as to what must be properly regarded as the normal dentition of Ommatophoca. In view of the probable capture in the near future of further examples of this most interesting Seal, it is not safe to venture on positive assertions as to the intricacies of its dentition. It is impossible, however, to avoid the suspicion that the four skulls of Class III. are those of individuals in which a normal complement of two upper molars is in process of reduction, that those of Class I. are skulls of individuals in which such a reduction has taken place, and that No, 324d is an altogether abnormal and unusual variation — an example, in fact, of quite a different class of variation. Coupled with the feebleness of dentition, which I have already pointed out, nothing could be more natural than reduction of the teeth. This is, as is so well shown in the short-jawed races of the human species, first manifested by a lessening in size of the last 64 Southern Cross. molar, as so well paralleled in Ommatophoca in the case of the last two molars. For in no one of the instances of supposed reduplica- : 1 ; tion of m. — are either of the “daughter” teeth so well formed or rooted as the remainder of the series. This process of reduction is admirably in keeping with the anatomy of an animal whose teeth are feeble, jaws short, and whose prey requires neither holding nor much mastication. Further, the fact that, except in the case of No. 3246, the supposed Neha : ; A : 1 cases of reduplication were in each case in connection with m. — and never in the lower jaw, does not point to a meaningless reduplication of any tooth of the series. Lastly, it seems hardly advisable or possible to take as normal any condition other than that of the majority, in this case 4x4 2x 2 oe ea it not for the existence of No. 324+. This skull is undoubtedly the most curious of the whole series. I look on it as one of those quite abnormal specimens which must in all cases be eliminated from questions of the present kind. It seems to be a skull in which both reduction and reduplication of the teeth have occurred—the former in p-m. Nor could we indeed attempt to do so were 2 : 1 regard to m. —, the latter in regard to p.m. —. I believe, then, that until the accumulation of more specimens proves the contrary, we must regard Ommatophoca as having originally possessed two upper molars, one of which it is now in process of losing—a supposition which, if borne out, may have far- reaching results, and may even turn the scale in favour of the formation of a new family for the sole reception of Ommatophoca. A distinct parallel to such a state of things occurs in Halichwrus, as has been shown by Professor Nehring. No other species of Earless Seal possesses a similar dental formula, but Omma- tophoca is just that cranially generalised species in which we should expect such a type of dentition to occur—a dentition which, perhaps, suggests an interesting bridge between the Phocidae and Stenorhynchinae. In my previous remarks I have not attempted to discuss the causes of reduplication in teeth, nor alluded to those hypotheses which view with favour the rise of the Cetacean dentition by means of a wholesale process of this kind. As to the former matter, the exact causes of such reduplication hardly lend themselves to Mammalia. 65 discussion—unless such discussion be based upon minute histo- logical, physiological, or embryonical research. Why two teeth may occasionally grow where it appears to us that there should be one, is as yet—and perhaps always will remain—a mystery. That the -phenomenon does occur we may regard as proved; no other hypo- thesis. will account for the instances collected by Mr. Bateson, nor, as I think, for the vagaries exhibited by skull No. 3246. Further, it seems certain that in the cited instances of the occurrence of “ cloven” _teeth, this condition is due to what I may call a process of incomplete or abortive reduplication—a process of reduplication which has com- -menced, but never reached completion. But here again the cause is at present beyond conjecture. . As to the second point, the possible origin of the Cetacean dentition by some wholesale process of reduplication, this may or may not have happened. ‘There is, I believe, no real evidence one way or the other. I cannot help thinking, however, that those who rack their brains for complicated theories in explanation of Cetacean dentition, have overlooked the simplest explanation of all. For, if it be admitted, as I think has already been suggested by Mr. Bateson —a not very difficult or unreasonable concession—that the power of forming teeth is distributed along the whole length of the jaw, what is more easy than the formation of many teeth in a long jaw, of fewer teeth in a shorter jaw? The exact size of such teeth, like the size of an Amoeba, would be governed primarily by mechanical reasons of unknown scope, secondarily by Natura] Selection. Their shape would fall easily under the influence of the latter force. (See Table IV, p. 66.) EXPLANATION OF PLATE I. To ILLUSTRATE THE VARIATION IN THE CHEEK-TEETH OF THE KNOWN SKULLS OF Ommatophoca rosst. 1 (upper) and 1’ (lower), teeth of skull numbered 3244 (43.11.25.4), collected by r James Ross’s Antarctic Expedition. 2 and 2’ ditto of skull numbered 3248, with same history as No. 324a. 3 and 3’ ditto of skull numbered 700, obtained by the ‘ Belgica.’ 4 and 4’ ditto of skull numbered 897, with same history as No 700. 5 and 5’ ditto of skull numbered 4, obtained by the ‘ Southern Cross.’ 6 and 6’ ditto of skull numbered 3, obtained by the ‘ Southern Cross.’ 7 and 7’ ditto of skull numbered 2, obtained by the ‘ Southern Cross.’ R F Southern Cross. 66 “ArepuoW Sey [LNA [e}}1L088 ON ‘paseulep [[nyG ‘uoutoads sty} ut pesodxe ATPeuLsi1o WoyAod ayy Jo YISue, oy} sessordxo stsayjuored ur ounSy omy, SI posodxe souluvo oy} Jo qunome oyy AprepIUty [,] jo uoystod roddn pesodxe ey souIs "48010 ‘UIOMUN Y499J, “qS8o.00 [84 -JISVsON ‘uIOM ATIYSI[S WOT, ON ON ‘utoM ATYY.STIS "48010 [Bq }Lovs ‘UIOMUN PUB YSoIF W997, *qSa10 [BI}Loes q9T, "Y1}004-3990T]9 ON “UIOMUN 99 T, “UMOLO S91 ‘o88 SULOUBAPR T}IM osvotoop AT[eNyow Avut ‘ase aq} Jo YyStoy oy} Mel oy} UIOIZ YY90} OYY JO SuIsIA yuBjsuod 94 07 SutMg [,] Teas a — ita ae a hr as Ty tp = ail, ee aCe Sa ce ae “OTQBITBA 4B MOUTOS avy} Ax[Nq sseT ST Y}00}-Yoato v Jo yoor omy q oY} 78 poansvout sv ‘sattos 4490}-yaoyo ‘Opts JOT = 'T ‘opis ays = y | | C.ppul ¢- Cru GL 8 8 | &-SL | ¢-FFT qLF7 a GOL | &-L9T| 6 GGG | | C-$Fu eFu ¢-8 | ¢-8 ¢-8 ICD 91] ¢-cp1|‘e.z71) °° LIL LLL) 06 0&6 | Le Cr) *89142)090] snoiwna ur pauzn{go ‘fwoysey Josngony fo wnasn W ys ayy fo woroarjoy ay} | | G 8 | G-9 8 |°o:-9F 6F a SOL | LOT) 82 066 T‘0¢ GHG Gay) 1 Gap IL|*e¢!¢.op! - | zIt| 921] 88 | 2F% ‘PUNT wnynigy pun obyjadiyospy samppg ayy tvau Lo yo pauywjqo ‘uoypadar oyjowmyup unrbyag ay fo | ‘PIO | ‘PIO |69-8¢ | ¢-8 cl 0a ||| neg at ists) | oe SI@ cg *xolddy, 6|G-8 | G-2o |} OL | G-91|¢-9%| Of | Ter | G8] Sst] ose “psueq *xoiddy *xoiddy | ms 3 6F OL | G-&L |} &% O¢ SII | &-G8 | SLL} 9&6 *xoiddy 81¢-6 |69-99|¢.6 | ¢-IT | g¢ | ¢¢ |psueq) $6 |psurq| FFZ L. ee Sf | ihe ee =| Sees “43004 “49003 “q3300| -yoaqo | _ y 5 |Seurmvo |‘souriBs| ‘salles | ‘sellas |yseyveI5 IOMOT ee Jeddn jzaddn jo} yy003 | yy00} | 48 puv | ‘um |-emoSAz , 4300] pag jo , I jo uondod | -yaayo | -yeoqo | ‘aut, | -e10 Jo 4B Rasa, “q9 Bue] uoeli0d Bee. Jayomt |pesodxe} a19Moy | woddn | ofpprut | qypeaiq | yypeerq sei [eseg pesodxe ue ai -BIp jo jo jo UL = |}S09A.14)/yS09ReI15 a jo ie i 4807BaL)| q450e7] | YySueT | yySuey |sieseu jo ‘eefeyae || oN! qysuerT ‘VECE “ON JO 78} SB | oles O44 ST ALOJSIY OY, *d ony -vuut ATjuorvdde uy—aqtze ‘on Cumnosny, af} UL 4STX9 Os[B UaUITOedS sTqy Jo ULYS PUB UOJOTOS oY) “satoeds | 099J0 df oy} pur , \woLsay, ,, pure ec 8NQAUT ,, 0 2BBL0 A 944 JO ABO007, ey, UL wodizseg puv omns1q S Avi) Jo [RULSIIO OUT, “SF-6EST jo woljipedxg oyorjuy ssoxy souve Ug “6 4npe ue Ayu reddy “(FCS L1Sh) PFZE ‘ON WOLT—'O ‘q[Npe you P W—0OL ‘ON ‘UMOUy [[Nys qysesivy oy} !4inpe $—76Eg ‘oN WOYIAPJOD AY} WOLT—'F es OS POT ON pie: "@? 4mpy—s on TS EOP APN FON ‘@) TInys UMOUY JSaSIVy OUT, JUpy—z ‘ON —— SS ES NE EE EE —EEE—E—E—E———E—————————————— eee “PUVT v}407014 Lvau yond-ao2 ayy U2 paurnygo ‘uoyrpadary ., 8801 ULayINoY ,, ay) fo U0NIA]]}0Q BY} WOLJ~— Vv ISSOU VOOHAOLVNNWO— AI WIGViI. IE NOTES ON ANTARCTIC SEALS. COLLECTED DURING THE EXPEDITION OF THE ‘SOUTHERN CROSS.’ —— By EDWARD A. WILSON, M.B., F.Z.S.2 (Puates II.-VI.) Owing to the death of Mr. Nicolai Hanson (the zoologist. best qualified to have written an account of the Antarctic Seals), the task of describing his specimens has devolved upon one, who though at present unacquainted with these animals in a state of nature, has nevertheless a great interest in the work, from the fact that he shortly hopes to cover the same ground in search of the still (unfortunately) hidden treasures of knowledge concerning the Seals of the Antarctic ' Dr. Wilson has sailed as the naturalist on board the ‘ Discovery.’ Before he left for the Antarctic, he made a special study of the animals known to inhabit the southern seas, and, shortly before his departure, he forwarded to Professor Ray Lankester the notes now published on the Pinnipedia, accompanied by coloured drawings of the Seals taken from the newly-mounted specimens presented by Sir George Newnes to the British Museum. These notes are supplementary to the memoir prepared by Captain Barrett-Hamilton, which is an excellent reswmé of our knowledge of the Seals of the Antarctic. The enforced departure of the latter naturalist for South Africa took place before Sir George Newnes’ specimens of the Antarctic Seals had been mounted in the Museum, and he was only able to determine the species of Seals brought home by the ‘ Southern Cross’ from the skins roughly preserved in brine. A few leaden labels were attached to some of the specimens, but these had perished in nearly every case, and the two or three which remained on the skins no one was able to decipher. Dr. Wilson managed to identify the characters stamped by Mr. Hanson on the labels which were attached to one or two of the skins, and he was thus able to connect a few of the skulls with the actual specimens to which they belonged. He examined the types of Antarctic Seals in our Museum, and compared with them the specimens brought home by the ‘ Southern Cross.’ The pictures which form the subject of the plates in the present volume have been lithographed by Mr. H. Grénvold from Dr. Wilson’s paintings, and Mr. Bernacchi’s photographs of the Seals in life were of great assistance in determining the natural form of the animals. To Dr. Wilson’s notes have been added the accounts given by Mr. Bernacchi in his work ‘'l'o the South Polar Regions’ (pp. 318-320), which give us a good idea of the habits and distribu- tion of the species of Seals met with by the ‘ Southern Cross’ ; and many interestinz records will be found in the private Diary of the late Mr. Nicolai Hanson, printed below (pp. 79-105.)—E. R. L. F 2 % 68 Southern Cross. regions. A lamentable succession of accidents has succeeded in robbing the collection of the ‘ Southern Cross’ of a very considerable part of its value. Through the death of Mr. Hanson most of the details as to the preservation of the animals and the labelling of the skins have been lost. Thus the possibility of properly attaching the skulls to their own several skins, and of correctly determining the sexes of the latter, has also vanished. That he was extremely careful in recording these details may be gathered by a perusal of his private diary and from the verbal testimony of his surviving colleagues of the scientific staff of the expedition. In only a few cases has it been possible to connect certain skins with the zoological notes incidentally included in his private journal, but we are deeply indebted to his near relations for the care and trouble with which they have sought out and given for our use these very valuable extracts. I am also personally deeply grateful to Mr. Bernacchi, the Meteorologist on the ‘ Southern Cross, for his information respecting the life-history of the Seals, and for the use of his very excellent photographs, which demonstrate how different is the appearance of the living Seals from any illustrations which have hitherto appeared. Seals of five species are represented in the collection. Of these, four only were taken in the Antarctic regions, all of which were already known to science as examples of the Earless Phocidw. The fifth was an immature Eared-Seal, one of the Otariidw, which was apparently captured by Captain Jensen on Campbell Island, and can- not properly be included among the Seals of the Antarctic collection. The four Antarctic Seals have been named thus: The Crab-eating Seal (Lobodon carcinophagus) ; Weddell’s Seal (Leptonychotes weddelli) ; the Leopard-Seal (Ogmorhinus leptonyz); Ross’ Seal (Ommatophoca TOSS1). The question of right in these four Seals to generic distinction must be left to others to determine. The name Zeptonychotes for Weddell’s Seal has been preferred in this paper to connect it superficially, more than really, with Ogmorhinus leptonyx. There is probably no more real connection between these two Seals than between any other two of the series, and even the superficial resemblance between them is far more obvious in the tanned skin than in the living animal. Mr. Bernacchi states that there is no possibility of confusing a living Ogmorhinus with a living Lep- tonychotes, the former having a speed and energy, strength and ferocity, which makes it as different from Weddell’s Seal, as the skull and dentition of the one are different from those of the other. Notes on Antarctic Seals. 69 1. LEPTONYCHOTES WEDDELLI. Weddell’s Seal. (Puate II.) Weddell’s Seal is found in great numbers on the coast of South Victoria Land, and is the species most commonly met with in Ross’s Sea. At almost the farthest southern point reached by the Southern Cross Expedition these Seals were numerous, and even in a piece of water south of the edge of the Great Barrier, which apparently com- municated under ice with the sea, a number of them were found (cf. Borchgrevink, ‘ First on the Antarctic Continent,’ p. 286).’ Not a single Weddell’s Seal was met with in the pack-ice by the ‘ Southern Cross, and the numbers which were found on landing at Cape Adare are mentioned by Mr. Hanson as belonging to a species not before met with by him (¢f. infra, p. 93). Weddell’s Seal is therefore a shore Seal, and it remained through- out the winter with the party which was landed at Cape Adare. Mr. Bruce confirms this view of the distribution of the two Sea-Leopards when he says that they were the most rare species in the pack-ice about Louis Phillipe Land: and since, in speaking of Ross’s Seal there can be little doubt that Mr. Bruce is describing the new coat of the Crab-eater (Lobodon), the former species may, without doubt, be added to the two Leopard-Seals, and all three classed as rave in the pack-ice. The only common Seal in the pack is the White Crab-eater (Zobodon), and the only common Seal on the - coast-line of the Antarctic regions is Leptonychotes weddellt. Weddell’s Seal was the only species found breeding in any con- siderable numbers by the ‘Southern Cross’ Expedition. Some dead young Seals were found buried in guano at Camp Ridley on Cape Adare, but apparently no Weddell’s Seals breed there now, though in Robertson Bay, close by, a large number of them were breeding, and many young were born. Three fcetal Seals of this species were brought home in spirits by the ‘ Southern Cross’ with the membranes and placenta more or less intact. Two quite small specimens were taken from the mothers on March 25th and March 29th. Both were females and measured but 28 centimetres in length. The third specimen was taken from the mother on May 5th and measured 45 centimetres in length. This was a male, and it showed the typical marking of Leptonychotes, though no hairs were visible to the naked eye, save on the face and 1 Although many examples of this Seal were killed by the members of the expedition, and several preserved, only a single specimen has reached the British Museum.—R. B.S. 70 Southern Cross. muzzle. The former was covered with fine and silky hairs. the latter carried numerous fine black bristles. Mr. Bernacchi (p. 318) writes as follows: ‘“ Weddell’s Seal (Leptonychotes weddelli) is found in great numbers along the coasts of the Antarctic lands, but rarely in the pack-ice. As many as two hundred of these Seals were seen together by the ‘Southern Cross’ Expedition, even at the farthest point south reached by the ship. In the depths of winter it is still to be found near open pools of water around large icebergs, which are kept open by the movements of the bergs. In appearance it is the most rownded of all the Antarctic Seals, with a bullet-like head, and large and prominent dark-brown eyes, which appear bloodshot and protruding, though always full of expression and pathos. It is slow, quiet, and very inoffensive. The staple food of this Seal is crustaceous matter and small fish. In colour the back and sides are dark grey, shading off into a tawny orange colour underneath. It was found breeding in considerable numbers in Robertson Bay during the spring of 1899, the first young appearing early in September. In the latter month Mr. Bernacchi says that a common red crustacean and a small fish like an anchovy, form the principal food of the species, and on February 17th Mr. Hanson notes that the stomach of a Leptonychotes was quite full of a small fish like a whiting (infra, p. 93). Perhaps the most characteristic point in the colour of the skin of this Seal is the absence of vivid black amongst its many splashes and spots of grey. The back and sides are dark grey, darker, as usual, mid-dorsally, and shading off into a tawny-orange colour under- neath, which is streaked in a very liberal fashion from head to tail with grey of a varying depth, but not with black. Again, on the upper parts, where the ground colour is dark grey, shading off down the sides into tawny orange, there are also longitudinal streaks and splashes of pale tawny colour, often very pale, but none of black as are found in the Ogmorhinus. There is considerable difference apparently in the ruddiness of the under parts of the two Leopard-Seals—the True and the False. In Ogmorhinus the colour is more fulvous; whereas in Weddell’s Seal the tawny colour exhibits almost a greenish tinge by the free admixture of grey markings of varied intensity. Mr. Borchgrevink (¢.c. p. 236) mentions Weddell’s Seal as the “best represented” species in the pack,’ which, however, was not the case; but he does not seem to be well acquainted with the Seals 1 Mr. Bernacchi (p. 73) says that not one Weddell’s Seal was met with in the pack, Notes on Antarctic Seats. 71 obtained by his expedition, as he also figures the skull of a Lobodon (t.c. p. 103), and calls it “ Weddellir.” In his account of the ‘ Southern Cross’ expedition, he mentions the present species as being met with on his winter sledge journey (p. 159), near Coulman Island and near Cape Constance, where about three hundred were seen together (p. 237), as well as in Lady Newnes Bay, on the 4th of February (p. 260), and again in a bay in the ice- barrier (p. 286). He writes: “Towards the south some Seals were basking on the ice. I sent a boat to the end of the bay after them, and found that they were Weddell. A party of ski-runners which I despatched to the west came upon a large number of Seals in a lake, or large deep basin, formed in the plateau of the barrier. Although the plateau at that place fell with a gentle slope, it evidently reached the level of the sea, as the Seals shot up through blow-holes in the ice at the water’s edge.” Mr. Bernacchi mentions the species as occurring on one of the Possession Islands (p. 235). He further describes the finding of Weddell’s Seal on the ice-barrier: “ Round this Cape [Constance] we found low land, or, I should say, the edge of the great ice-cap at this spot was low. Steaming along the edge of the ice-barrier, we discovered a kind of inlet or ‘arm’ running into the glacier for a distance of about three miles, with perfectly smooth ice between, and fastened to the walls of the glacier. This spot was well sheltered from winds, and the great inland ice-cap was easily accessible. A rookery of Seals, some hundreds in number, could be seen lying on the ice at the bottom end of the arm, and two Emperors and one Adelia Penguin were observed. These Seals proved to be Leptony- chotes weddellii. They were lying alongside a crack in the ice, most of them asleep; they were totally unconcerned at our presence, and evinced not the slightest interest in us.” He also gives (p. 274) an account of the Seal rookery in the ice-barrier. 2. OGMORHINUS LEPTONYX. Leopard-Seal. (Puate III ) The Leopard-Seal was nowhere, and at no time, common. ‘Two young ones were captured in the pack-ice on January 3rd. A male was killed at Cape Adare on December 22nd, and another was seen and successfully photographed by Mr. Bernacchi, also at Cape Adare. V2: Southern Cross. They are therefore obviously rare at all times, though widely distributed. A female of the Leopard-Seal was found on September 11th in Robertson Bay, containing a young male ready for birth. As September is also the month when Weddell’s Seal gives birth to its young, there can be no doubt that the Leopard-Seal had come to the coast for the same purpose. The food of this Seal, the most active, powerful, and ferocious of all the southern Seals, and the most truly carnivorous in its dentition, consists mainly of fish, though it is stated by Dr. Racovitza that Penguins were accepted as food when thrown overboard by him from the ‘ Belgica.’ Sir James Ross found in the stomach of one of these animals no less than 28 lbs. of fish, including Sphyrenia of 28 inches length, and Notothenia of 634 inches. The stomachs of the two young Leopard- Seals killed in the pack-ice contained the remains of Octopus. Mr. Bernacchi (p. 319) gives the following note: “ The Leopard- Seal (Ogmorhinus leptonyx) is readily distinguished by the great size of its elongated body, by its large, flat square head, with small fierce slit-lke eyes set sloping inwards, and by a greater number of spots upon its body than any of the other species. It is not a common Seal, for only three or four specimens were secured by the ‘ Southern Cross’ Expedition. It is the largest and fiercest of all the Seals, not hesitating to attack a man on being molested. It is a most voracious animal, and feeds upon fish and Penguins. I have seen one near Possession Island give chase to a Penguin in the water; the latter appeared to have little chance against such a determined and rapidly- moving foe. In colour the back is of a dark hue, but the most characteristic point seems to be the presence of black as well as tawny spots on the grey of the upper part of the sides. The young of this Seal is born during the month of September.” These Seals are easily recognised by their activity and strength, and are the largest of all the species of the Antarctic regions. Sir James Ross gives 850 lbs. as the weight of one of these Seals, measuring 12 feet from nose to the tip of the tail, and 6 feet round the body. The largest skin of the Ogmorhinus brought home by the ‘ Southern Cross’ measured nearly 11 feet from nose to tail. When lying on the ice, as is well seen in Mr. Bernacchi’s excellent photographs of this Seal, the sides bulge and the whole animal is flattened out, much as a Lizard spreads itself to catch the full rays of a hot sun. The “ True Sea-leopard,” as this species is sometimes called, is Notes on Antarctic Seals. ne distinguished from the “ False Sea-leopard” or Weddell’s Seal, mainly, so far as the skin is concerned, by the length of the fore limbs, and the presence of vivid black spots in addition to the tawny spots encroaching upon the dark grisly-grey of the back and sides. The line of division between this grey colour, which deepens to grisly- black on the mid-dorsal line, and the tawny orange of the belly and lower part of the sides, is very distinct, though broken by a number of irregular mottlings of black and dark grey. These dark irregular markings are most plentiful on the orange colour of the shoulders and flanks, where they are almost confluent; on the sides they are less frequent, and, though plentiful on the sides of the face and jaw and under the chin, there is a large space of almost unspotted orange skin under the throat and neck, and another immediately behind the spotted shoulder. The hind-flippers are richly marked with black and orange spots and splashes, very much more so than on the fore- flippers ; and whereas the ends of the digits of the hind limbs are black, those of the fore limbs are of a rich orange colour. Nails are discoverable on all the flippers, and the same may be said of the nails in every one of the four species of southern Seals. They are perhaps least conspicuous in Ommatophoca rossit. In the fore limbs of the Leopard-Seal they are very long and well formed. But in colouring, the most characteristic point seems to be the presence of black, as well as pale tawny, spots on the grey of the upper part of the sides. Mr. Borcherevink (p. 65) first mentions the species in the pack- ice early in January, when two young ones were obtained, and he also speaks of a “large sea-leopard” in whose stomach was found remains of an octopus. He also says that it bred in Robertson Bay (p. 237), and that young were frequently found on the sledge journeys. It is a pity that more specimens were not brought home. Mr. Borchgrevink also writes (p. 170) on Sept. 11th: “TI killed a female Seal near the edge of Dugdale glacier. It was a Leopard (Steno- rhynchus leptonyx). When I had skinned it, I cut it open, and, to my surprise, found a nearly full-grown male young one alive in her. As I had freed him, he seemed quite happy as he rolled about on the ice in his soft smooth coat. I put him on my sledge, and drove him to the stone hut, where we kept him alive on condensed milk, until we were later on able to send him by sledge to Camp Ridley, where Dr. Klovstad fed him from a bottle!” The arrival of this living Seal at the Camp is not mentioned in Mr. Hanson’s Diary. 74 Southern Cross. LOBODON CARCINOPHAGUS. White Seal. (Puares IV.-V.) The White Seal, or Crab-eater, is the common Seal of the pack ice, at any rate during the months of Antarctic summer. It is, however, not confined to this belt of ice, but is also to be found sparingly as far south as the great Ice Barrier, in company with Weddell’s Seal, which is the most common Seal of Koss’s Sea and of South Victoria Land. Of the breeding habits of the Crab-eater practically nothing is known. Its food is said by Dr. Racovitza to consist of Huphausia, and in this connection may be quoted the interesting suggestions of Capt. Barrett-Hamilton, “that the teeth of Zobodon may possibly serve the animal as a sieve whereby to rid its mouth of the water taken in with the Huphausia, somewhat after the manner of baleen in the Lalenidw. For this purpose the teeth seem to be exactly suited. They do not fit closely, but alternate with those of the opposite jaw, so that the cusps form a perfect sieve.” The teeth show no evidence of mastication. It is worthy of notice that in the pack-ice the stomachs of all the White Seals were quite empty. This was in the summer months, when the moult was in progress, and probably points to the fact that, while the new hair is still thin, the Seals, like the Penguins, object strongly to entering the water, even for food. The moult starts in the first week of January, and is often far advanced by the 16th of that month. It always begins with a line down the middle of the back and on the flippers, both hind and fore, spreading from these points till only a few patches of old hair remain upon the sides. (Cf also Borchgrevink, ‘First on the Antarctic Continent,’ p. 382.) In life, the shape of the Crab-eater is less rounded than that of Weddell’s Seal, but when lying on the ice flattens out less than Ross’s Seal and the Leopard Seal. The colouring of this Seal shows great variation. It is known as the “ White” Seal from the creamy whiteness of its old winter coat. This is changed during the summer for a very beautiful silky ereyish-brown coat, with more or less richly-marked mottling on the shoulders, flanks, and sides of the head, and on the dark-brown flippers. I have given illustrations (Plate V.) of the old winter coat (Fig. 1), the coat in change (Fig. 2), and the new summer Notes on Antarctic Seats. 75 coat (Fig. 3). So much does the coat of this Seal vary in colour and marking with age, sex, and season, that much confusion has arisen in the description of its skin. There is nuw in the Museum a fairly complete series of skins, preserved by Mr. Hanson, showing how this Seal changes from a creamy-white, faintly mottled with a pale rusty colour on the flanks, shoulders, and sides of the head, to the very beautiful and characteristically silky coat of warm brownish grey, darker mid-dorsally, silvery white ventrally, mottled as before, but now with a very rich warm brown, instead of the hardly perceptible rusty colour. That these are merely seasonal changes is evident from the fact that in the creamy-white skins can nearly always be found a mid-dorsal line of the new and darker hair appearing; whereas in the more handsomely mottled dark skins, a few belated patches of the old white fur can still be found attached to the sides of the animal. The largest, and presumably the oldest, of the Seals, probably males, still in their creamy white coat, show no trace of mottling anywhere; but on the flippers, both hind- and fore-, where the moult first takes effect, there appears, without exception, the rich and beautiful dark brown mottling of the new coat, with its characteristic silky gloss. The flippers share in the change. From being covered with a rusty or creamy-white hair to the end of each digit, they moult to a very rich brown colour, in some cases very dark, marbled with silky pale-grey spots. Mr. Bernacchi observes :—‘“ One of the first Seals to be met with on entering the pack-ice is the Crab-eating or White Seal (Zobodon carcinophagus), which is a Seal common during the summer months in the pack-ice, and even seen far south towards the Great Ice Barrier, but rarely met with near the shores of the Antarctic lands. In appear- ance this Seal varies somewhat; or, more correctly speaking, its colour varies according to the seasons of the year, and also according to the age and sex of the animal. The long old winter coat is creamy-white, hiding almost completely the mottlings on the shoulders and flanks and sides of the head. During the early part of January the Seal commences to moult, discards its old coat, and by the end of the month emerges with a beautiful silky-grey brown skin, with richly- marked mottlings. The body of this Seal is not rounded like the Weddell seal, but is rather slim and slightly flattened out when lying on the ice. It is somewhat solitary, pugnacious when disturbed, and feeds principally on Huphausia.” “The only young of this Seal procured by the ‘ Southern Cross’ Expedition was the specimen killed near its mother in Robertson 76 Southern Cross. Bay on the 29th of November, 1899. It was the only one we saw during the fourteen months we spent within the Antarctic Circle. It was by no means so far developed as the young of Weddell’s Seal, which were quite common. The following are the dimensions of the calf of this White Seal :—- Length, 4 feet 11 inches ; Girth round flippers, 2 feet 5 inches ; Girth round hips, 1 foot 9 inches.” Mr. Borchgrevink, in his narrative of the ‘Southern Cross’ Expedition (p. 65), mentions the occurrence of the White Seal in the pack early in January, 1899. By the 5th of that month ten specimens had been preserved, and on that day Mr. Hanson’s diary records the capture of another kind of Seal, like the White Seals in appearance, but having a different cranium (vide, infra, p. 86). Mr. Borchgrevink also seems to have been aware of the circumstance (p. 65), but no further attempt at identification apparently took place. In the south-east part of Robertson Bay he also found two of this species (p. 234). On page 102 of Mr. Borchgrevink’s book, the skull of the Crab-eating Seal is figured, but under the name of ‘ Weddellia, The mummies of most of the Seals found buried in the guano on Cape Adare were those of the White Seal. Mr. Borchgrevink (p. 237) suggests that they were all undoubtedly of this species, and adds that some of them were quite young. It will be seen (infra, p. 95), that Mr. Nicolai Hanson includes some Leptonychotes weddelli in his list, and does not mention any young ones, beyond the two embryos which he found inside the females. Mr. Bernacchi in his book (p. 37) gives an account of an encounter between one of these Seals and Mr. Hanson, showing that the animals can be very fierce on occasion. [See also Hanson’s account of the adventure (infra, p. 84).]| He also (p. 274) describes a meeting with a solitary White Seal, far to the south, on the Ice Barrier in company with a number of Weddell’s Seals. OMMATOPHOCA ROSSI. _ Ross’s Seal. (PrAcn, VI) Ross’s Seal is nowhere common. From Mr. Hanson’s private diary we learn, however, that no less than four specimens of this Seal were captured in the pack-ice: it was not seen elsewhere. Notes on Antarctic Seals. ag Of its breeding habits nothing is known. Three beautiful skins of this Seal now rest in the British Museum, and two skulls, one having no molar teeth whatever, the other having six molars on each side in the upper jaw, and five on each side in the lower. The latter skull was that of a female, belonging to one of the steel-grey skins, whereas the former was the skull of a male which belonged to the brownish-grey individual. The food of this species consists of Octopus and vegetable stuff or sea-weeds, as was proved in three cases by Mr. Hanson from an examination of the contents of the stomach (vide infra, pp. 89, 90, 92). The vocal powers of this Seal have been well described by Dr. Racovitza, and, apart from this remarkable characteristic, the thickness of its neck and the enormous protrusion. of the chin and throat are peculiarities of the species. The colour of this species is either of a pure steel- erey or of a ereyish-brown colour, deepening considerably in tone towards the middle line of the back, and becoming almost white on the under surface. Starting from the upper lip, which is nearly white, a broad band of pale grey extends backwards on the neck to be lost in the grey of the shoulder. Just below this, starting from the lower lip and the chin, which are nearly black, a broad dark grey band passes backwards and fades into the lighter colour on the chest and shoulders. These two bands are in perfect harmony both in colour, tone, and direction, with a somewhat limited number of indistinct pale and narrow markings which streak and line the sides of the animal from the shoulder almost to the tail. These parallel stripes, some inches in length in the region of the shoulder, are somewhat broken into splashes and spots towards the sides and flanks of the animal. Nails are present on both hind and fore-limbs, but are small on the latter and still smaller on the former. The dark colour of the back is continued on to the dorsal digit of the hind limb, the other digits and the ventral aspect of the limb being pale. Mr. Bernacchi gives the following note :—“The least known of all the Antarctic Seals is the Ross’s Seal (Ommatophoca rossi). Only a few specimens of it have ever been procured, four of them by the ‘ Southern Cross’ Expedition. Of its breeding habits nothing is known. It, however, has a very wide distribution, having been found on the pack-ice in the neighbourhood of Victoria Land (‘Southern Cross’), Alexander Land (‘ Belgica’), and by Dr. Bruce near Joinville Island and Louis Philippe Land.* In 1 As before mentioned, however, the Seals identified by Mr. Bruce as Omma- tophoca were probably White Seals in summer coat. 78 Southern Cross. colour the back is greyish-brown, and under the belly silver-grey, with lighter spots in the division. A specimen I saw soon after it had been shot appeared to me to be distinctly slaty-colour ; this specimen measured nearly eleven feet in length. ‘The eyes were very large, and underneath the chin was a most extraordinary protuberance or sack, which is evidently inflated when the animal is angered. The greatest interest centres in the skull, which is quite different to that of any other known Seal. The dentition is exceedingly feeble; of two of the skulls procured by the ‘ Southern Cross, one had no molar teeth whatever, and the other six molars on each side in the upper jaw, and five on each side in the lower. “The food of this Seal is much the same as that of Weddell’s and the White Seals. The remains of Octopus were found in the stomach examined by Mr. Hanson.” An interesting account of the capture of the first Ross’s Seal will be found in Mr. Nicolai Hanson’s private diary (infra, p. 89). See also Mr. Borchgrevink’s book (p. 74). 79 III. EXTRACTS FROM THE PRIVATE DIARY OF THE LATE NICOLAI HANSON.’ [Published by permission of Mrs. Nicolai Hanson, and translated from the Norwegian by his father, Mr. Anton Hanson, of Christiansund.] September 15th, 1898.—In the forenoon I observed a shoal of fish, apparently Bonitoes, and a few Flying-fish. A number of Petrels (Puffinus) followed the fish, among them a Frigate-bird. In the afternoon some small whales, like Bottlenoses, approached the ship. I fired two shots with explosive shells at two of them, but killed none, though one was hit pretty hard. October 5th.—{ Nicolai had been dangerously ill from September 15th until to-day.—A. H.] Have seen my first Albatros. It is strange how very few birds there are here; for the last few days I have only seen some little Petrels. Yesterday I saw five birds, like Terns, which were fishing a short distance away from us. 1 This excellent young naturalist and collector was appointed to the post of Zoologist on the ‘ Southern Cross,’ on the recommendation of Professor Robert Collett, of Christiania University. A better appointment could not have been made. As to the esteem in which Hanson was held, nothing need be added to the tribute paid to his memory by Mr. Bernacchi in his book ‘To the South Polar Regions’ (pp. 184-190), and this appreciation of the dead naturalist has been personally con- firmed to me by his colleagues of the scientific staff, Dr. Klovstad, Lieut. Colbeck, Mr. Hugh Evans, and Mr. Anton Fougner. His notebooks were handed to the Commander of the Expedition by the dying naturalist (Bernacchi, t.c. p. 185) on the 14th of October, 1899, Mr. Borchgrevink has published some observations from one of these books in his ** Appendix ”’ (pp. 320-324), and he has handed to me one other book, which contains a mere list of the Procellariidae collected during the voyage out, and the details are also to be found on the labels attached to the specimens themselves. Knowing, however, from personal experience, and from the verbal testimony of his colleagues, that Mr. Hanson was in the habit of making careful notes on every natural history fact that came under his observation, I wrote to Mrs. Nicolai Hanson, to ask whether she had in her possession any private letters from her late husband, which contained natural history notes. In return she kindly placed her husband’s private diary at my disposal, and the notes which Nicolai Hanson wrote for his wife’s information are here reproduced, having been translated by his father, Mr. Anton Hanson, of Christiansund. I think that, in the absence of the official note-books, Zoologists throughout the world will rejoice that, by means of these private records, written without any idea of their subsequent publication, and merely for the amusement and instruction of his young wife, some details of the strenuous work done by Mr. Hanson during the expedition of the ‘ Southern Cross’ have been rescued from oblivion.—R. B. 8. 80 f s eee Southern Cross. CAPTIVE EMPEROR PENGUIN ON BOARD THE ‘ SOUTHERN CROSS.’ (By permission of Messrs. Hurst & Blackett.) Fixtracts from Diary of Nicolai Hanson. 81 October 6th.—To-day we have had a visit from the first Cape Pigeon. It was a pretty little bird, with grey back, grey neck and white belly ; very tame, often coming close under our stern [see October 8]. October 7th. Have seen some Petrels and an Albatros to-day. October 8th.—More birds have been noticed than on any previous day. Two Albatroses and a great number of the Petrel I observed the day before yesterday, which I then took to be the Cape Pigeon, but I was wrong. To-day I have seen the first Cape Pigeons, very pretty birds, a little larger than a Tern, with black head, white belly, grey back and wings with white spots. They have more rounded wings than the other Petrels I have seen, but do not fly with less speed on that account. October 9th.Shot two Cape Pigeons to-day, but did not get them, though I tried to fire when they were over the ship. A large number of birds noticed, of five different kinds. October 10th.—Have seen the same kinds of birds to-day as yesterday, and probably also a kind of Albatros I have not observed before. — It was very dark on the back. October 12th.—There have been a great number of birds round the ship to-day. We have tried to snare some of them, but caught none. Borchgrevink went out in a boat to shoot, and killed three Albatroses of two different kinds (not of the large species) and also two Petrels of the size of a Pigeon. ‘The dogs would not eat the flesh of the Albatroses. October 13th. Lat. 33° 37' S., Long. 9° 54° W.—A number of birds round the ship to-day. I snared two Albatroses (Diomedea melanophrys). The doctor killed them with chloroform, which was quickly and neatly done. Saw a shoal of Dolphins and some Whales. [Cymodroma melano- gastra has put in an appearance. N. H. in Borchgr. App., p. 321.] October 14th.—Have prepared the skins of the two Albatroses killed yesterday. October 15th.—-Caught and prepared two Cape Pigeons to-day. October 16th. Lat. 38° 29' S., Long. 5° 51' W.—Rose early and began catching Cape Pigeons with a line and hook. Caught six during the day. Have seen two new species of birds to-day, one a white-headed Petrel, and a Lestris. October 17th.—Saw a new kind of Petrel to-day (Prion). October 18th. Lat. 40° 27' S., Long. 0° 21' H—A number of birds about the ship. I caught (with hook and line) one Mollymawk and seven Cape Pigeons.! October 19th. Lat. 39° 55' S., Long. 3°16’ HA number of birds about the ship. I have caught seven Cape Pigeons and two Puffinus (Kuhli ?).? This is ashy-grey on the back, but for the rest exactly like Puffinus major. October 20th. Lat. 40° 27' S., Long. 5° 22’ H—Caught a Puffinus. Have seen a large number of this species to-day. [October 21st. Lat. 41° 14’ G., Long. 8° 44' E..—Two Petrels, Prion desolatus and P. vittatus, have been seen for the first time to-day. N. H. in Berchgr. App., p. 322.] [October 22nd. Lat. 41° 20' S., Long. 13° 1' E—We saw some ' “ Most of the birds caught up to date have recently started moulting.”—N. H. in Borchgrevink’s book, App. p. 321. * These proved to be Priofinus cinereus.—R. B.S. G 82. Southern Cross. specimens of Diomedea fuliginosa, the first of this kind we have seen on the voyage, t. ¢., p. 323.] October 23rd. Lat. 42° 1' S., Long. 20° 32' E.—Caught a Cape Pigeon. [“ It had not started moulting.” N.H. App. to Borchgrevink, p. 32 22] October 24th. Lat. 42° 23! S., Long. 20° 32! E.—This morning, as soon as I came on deck, I caught a large Albatros and two other Diomedex with black-and-yellow bills.!. In the afternoon we shot some birds. The Englishmen shot from a boat sixteen birds. I shot sixteen birds from the ship and eleven from the boat. Saw two nearly white birds to-day about the size of a Kittiwake (Larus tridactylus). October 27th.—Have to-day prepared the last of the birds we killed on the 24th. I have now forty-one skins and eight skeletons.2 I hope we may soon get a calm again, so that I can get some more work. Numbers of birds follow the ship every day. October 29th. Lat. 44° 26' S., Long. 37° E.—This morning I caught a large Albatros. It is a little darker than the first, and perhaps a year younger. The number of Albatroses about the ship increases every day. Last night I observed at one time eight large ones. October 30th.—Saw a white bird as large as a Mollymawk. Short ; high bill ; a few dark spots under the belly and wings; wings narrow ; tail straight across, On the 24th I observed two similar birds, but smaller (of the size of a Puffinus). November 1st.—Passed the Crozet Islands, ten miles off, but out of sight. Saw some Penguins. November 2nd.—Caught this evening three Cape Pigeons, two Alba- troses with black-and-yellow bills, and one Sooty Albatros. Saw a Giant Petrel this afternoon (I am, however, not quite sure of it). This was the last time I observed Cape Pigeons in flocks before we came to Tasmania. Saw a small Whale while I was busy catching birds; it was like a “ Bottle-nose.” November 6th. Lat. 44° 20' S8., Uong. 68° 28' H—Numbers of birds about the ship. Have caught four black-billed? and two Yellow-billed Mollymawks.°® November 7th.—Caught six Mollymawks (two Yellow-billed) and four Cape-hens.* November 8th.—Caught a yellow- billed Mollymawk.® This afternoon Bernacchi, Evans and it went out in a boat shooting. Bernacchi shot two birds, I shot one Yellow-billed Mollymawk and four Cape-hens. Colbeck shot a Sooty Albatros from the ship. November 9th.— Caught two grey- -headed Mollymawks with entirely black bills, probably young birds.* November 10th.—This evening Colbeck caught two Sooty Albatroses and one black-billed Mollymawk.* I caught three of the latter species. November 13th to 18th.—During these days I have caught four Molly- mawks (three with black bills) and a Puffinus, but I have skinned none of them, as at present we have no more room for storing the skins. The Cape Pigeons have now left us entirely, and the birds which are usually seen about the ship are: The large Albatros, the Sooty Albatros, Molly- 1 Thalassogeron culminatus. Vide infra, p. 82.—R. B.S. * No skeletons of birds were received by the British Museum.—R. B. 8S. 3 Thalassogeron culminatus, juv.—R. B.S. * Majaqueus aequinoctialis.—R. B. 8. ° Diomedea melanophrys.—R. B.S, Extracts from Diary of Nicolai Hanson. 83 mawks (with black and with yellow bills), also Cape-hens, Giant Petrels, Prion, Pujfinus, Whale-birds, and two small Storm Petrels. This evening (the 18th) I saw a flock of Mollymawks resting on the sea. November 25th.—More of the large Albatros are seen now. ) Species indeterminable. Male. Lobodon carcinophagus. Old. Sex indeterminable. Leptonychotes weddelli. Female with embryo. Lobodon carcinophaqus. 3 5 “3 & Sex indeterminable. Uncertain. Young. Sex indeterminable. Lobodon carcinophagus. Old. 5 Ll. Leptonychotes weddelli. Old. Male. 5, 12. Lobodon carcinophagus. Old. Female. — OOS ee) CU Se What does this list tell us? Shall we here find a solution of the Zoological problem :—-Where do the Antarctic Seals bring forth their young? It would be of great interest to get this problem solved, as the 96 Southern Cross. life and resort of the Seals during the breeding season is entirely unknown. March 21st (A hurricane has been blowing for the last two days).— The gale has carried away my Penguin, from which I was to have studied the moulting problem. The wind took the box with the bird in it, and I presume that he is now sailing merrily along to New Zealand. March 22nd.-Found two young Skuas, hardly able to fly, at an altitude of 1,050 feet, but some of the dogs, which followed us, killed them, so they were of no use for the collection. Went out with the Finns and killed three Seals, one young female without embryo, and two males, also young animals. The contents of their stomachs were remnants of fish. Found Seal mummy, No. 13, to-day, a. full-grown Lobodon, sex indeterminable. March 23rd.—Borchgrevink and I shot some Skuas to-day. I killed A WEDDELL’S SEAL. (By permission of Sir George Newnes, Bart.) nine. No Seals observed to- SEN: neither in the sea nor on the ice, which again fills the bay. March 25th. —The Finns and I were out Seal-hunting to-day. We killed four, three of which were males, the fourth a female with an embryo 9 inches long. Seven Penguins visited us to- day and were killed. Their tail-feathers were three-fourths dev eloped. March 26th.—The Finns and I went again Seal-hunting. We killed one—-an old male. March 29th.—A couple of Seals (Leptonychotes weddelli) have been killed to-day. One was a female with an embryo nine inches long. During these last few days the bay has been filled with ice which has been in incessant motion. One of the Finns and myself had to run away three times from a Seal we were skinning, only about 100 yards from the land, Extracts from Diary of Nicolai Hanson. 97 owing to the violent swerving of the ice. At last we got through with our work, and not a bit too soon, for half a minute afterwards the floe on which we had been was swept out to sea. A few Megalestris are still to be seen, but apparently the cold now becomes too much for tiem, so I expect it will not be long before the last bird will have left us. March 31st.—No Seal has been seen or killed. Saw an Ossifraga gigantea to-day. Borchgrevink saw a Pagodroma nivea to-night. April 1st.—This morning I shot a Seal, a female of the Leptonychotes weddelli, which is very common here. At the same time I observed nine other Seals swimming and playing among the ice. These were all White Seals (Lobodon carcinophagus). There appears to be a great deal of animal life on the drift ice to-day, as I saw two large flights of Megalestris and also some of the common Leptonychotes, but too far out for me to reach them. The one I killed had no embryo, but its stomach was filled with remnants of fish, Among these I found a lower jaw, three inches broad, with a construction of the teeth very much like that of the Térsk (Brosmius vulgaris). April 5th.—Walked along the beach to-day with Fougner and Evans to see if the sea had washed anything ashore of any value for my col- lection during the last gale. Besides a number of Sand-skippers of several different kinds, we also found a grey Holothurian and a large brown Jelly-fish. Of birds we saw a Pagodroma and some Megalestris maccormicki. April 6th.—To-day I have assorted the small animals I gathered yesterday. All in all, there seem to be eight different species, all sea- bottom torms. April 7th.— When the gale had moderated, Borchgrevink and I walked along the beach to collect, and we had not gone far before we had gathered so much that Borchgrevink had to return to the house to fetch two knapsacks to carry our collection in, We found three different kinds of Polypus, one yellow, one grey, and one white. Of the two first- mentioned we found a large number. Besides these we obtained seven beautiful Star-fish and two or three other species of Invertebrata. April 8th.—Walking along the beach this morning, all IT found was one little fish. I saw, however, large numbers of this fish, apparently of the Cottus scorpius kind, but I had no gear with me to catch them. iL also saw a large Jelly-fish, like the Stinging Medusa we have at home, but the stinging threads on this one were thicker. Of Seals I saw only one Lobodon in the sea, and two Leptonychotes, of which I killed one, a male, perhaps the biggest I yet have seen of this species. In its stomach I found a number of fish of three different species. April 13th.—The day before yesterday we tried a cast with a sein-net on the outside of the point to see if we could catch some fish. The only results were wet clothes and frost-bitten fingers, but of fish we got none, as the current and the cold were both too strong. While we were busy with the sein, two dogs drifted out on an ice-floe, and Ole and I, who were in the, boat, had to pull away to save them. It was certainly not with the most amiable feelings towards the animals that we pulled the deserters into the boat, as we had more than 100 yards of drift-ice in rapid motion to pass through in a canvas boat, without mittens—I had left mine on shore—and the temperature at -—26° Fahr. My temper, too, H 98 Southern Cross. was not improved by the dogs, who twice jumped out of the boat, so that we had to catch them again. I got some relief to my anger by thrashing them soundly. I saw a number of Pagodroma and some Megalestris. This afternoon Fougner and I went out on the ice to fish, with “ pilk,” and I had the pleasure of catching the first six fishes taken here by our Norwegian method. The largest were from six to eight inches long. There were two different species, one grey and one brown, both bottom species, very much like the Wolf-tish (Anarrichas), but with large scales and not such strong teeth. April 16th.—These last days the weather has been beautiful and invigorating. Wind calm, with the temperature down to 0° Fahr. ; but we do not feel the cold when there is no wind. Every day I have been on the ice, fishing. I am generally accompanied by Fougner and the two Finns when I indulge in this sport. All in all, we have caught fifty fish of the same species as before. To-day Fougner caught fourteen, of which one was a foot long. While we were on the ice to-day, the dogs found a Seal which they had nearly half eaten before Ole killed it. It was a female without an embryo. The Finns killed to-day a large Seal (Leptonychotes). No birds seen to-day. Yesterday I saw some Megalestris. April \8th.—The zoological results of this trip were two fishes and an embryo, 18 inches long, which they took out of an old Leptonychotes, which they killed for food for their dogs. They brought also the head of the Seal with them. On examination I found the teeth entirely worn out, so it must have been an uncommonly old animal. Yesterday and to-day I have been very busy preparing the fishes we have caught till now and photographing some of them. This forenoon Fougner was out fishing and brought back to me four small white fishes. Is this perhaps a new species ? ‘ April 20th.—It has been rather cold to-day. The temperature was this forenoon down to —10° Fahr., but to-night it has risen to —2°. To-day I took observations of the depth of the sea and the temperature and currents round the point. I was assisted by Fougner and Ole, and worked for some time on the north side of the Cape out towards the point, but the swerving of the ice drove us soon on shore again. It was only small floes of ice we had to walk on, and for the most part they were so small that they could barely carry us. It is not over pleasant to be dabbling in the water in a temperature such as we had to-day, and we were not sorry to be driven on shore. Saw some Pagodroma while we were out. No Megalestris and no Seals have been seen these last days. Evidently the Seals do not like the motion there has been in the ice. April 21st.—Evans, Ole and I were out taking observations of the temperature of the sea to-day; at 300 and 400 yards from the land we found the highest temperature + 28°8° Fahr., lowest + 27°5° Fahr. On the south side all our observations were below -+ 28° Fahr. April 24th.—A gale is blowing. Of zoological interest I can note that I saw a great number of the Brown-backed Petrel ( Thalassceca antarctica), and the Ice Petrel (Pagodroma nivea), which fished in the mashed up ice. We saw some Seals in the ice, white and grey, and on the beach I found washed up a brown thing, very much like a Hag (Myxine), about a foot long, without fins. Extracts from Diary of Nicolat Hanson. 99 April 25th.—The doctor, Colbeck, and I took a walk this forenoon round on the beach. We found three Heart Urchins! and a Sponge— both species quite new to me. Some Seals and birds have been observed to-day of the same species as yesterday. April 26th—Some birds have been seen to-day of the same species as those of the last days. To-night, at 9 p.m., I heard just above my head a bird cry four or five times. The note sounded like ‘‘ Kaw-kaw.” It was too dark to see the bird; but it was the ery of the Pagodroma. I had heard it before on the 30th of last month. April 28th.—I killed two Ice Petrels to-day while out for a walk. April 29th.—Walked on the beach to-day. Found three animals like Sand Worms four to six inches long.2 They were transparent, with brown stripes or bands, one millimeter in breadth, and a number of feet like the Millipedes. Some Ice Petrels seen to-day. April 30th.—Killed two male Leptonychotes and three Ice Petrels. May 3rd.—This afternoon an Emperor Penguin came to us and was immediately attacked and killed by our savage dogs and torn so badly that the skin was of no use for the collection, but I preserved the skeleton.* May 5th_—The Finns killed two large female Seals on the ice to-day. Only one had an embryo, 55 centimeters long. This had fully developed light and dark spots on the skin, but no hair anywhere except on the nose. It was preserved. Several other Seals were seen, amongst them a Lobodon. Some birds of the species lately observed were again seen to-day. Fougner and I were on the ice fishing, and we caught eleven fishes. May 6th.—Evans and I took a walk along the beach. We brought a gun with us in case a bird should happen to come near. As we walked along we observed two large Penguins far away—about 1,000 yards—on the ice. We went immediately out on the ice to take the shortest cut towards them. The birds appeared to be restless, so we thought it advisable to hurry on as fast as possible; this we soon found to be necessary, as some dogs which had followed the Finns, who were out on the ice fishing, had also got a scent of the Penguins, and were already far ahead of us before we saw these competitors. There was nothing else for us to do but to launch out as fast as possible, but we were nevertheless left behind in the race. The dogs reached the Penguins a good while before us and had already spoilt one of them before we arrived and killed the birds with two shots. Fougner came now to our assistance to bring the birds into camp, where they were admired, photographed, weighed, and at last preserved. I made one skin and one skeleton * of these our unexpected winter visitors. They weighed respectively 64 and 71 lbs. English. The layer of fat on their backs was one inch thick. The contents of their stomachs were fish, but no stones. Soon after the Finns also came in and brought with them upwards of twenty fish, which we had for supper, and found to be excellent eating. 1 Hemiaster.—F. J. B. 2 Probably Vanadis antarctica.—F. J. B. 3 This skeleton was not in the collection delivered to the British Museum.— Tey, 1s Sy * This second skeleton was also not brought to the Museum.—R. B. 5. Hie neve) Southern Cross. May 9th.—Ole and I were on the ice to-day fishing and caught fifty- seven fish. Twice Ole got two fish on the “ pilk” at the same time, and once even three fish. On two occasions Seals came up in the ice-holes in which we were fishing, and at last they frightened the fish away from us. Saw a Pagodroma nivea. May 10th.—To-day has been a very good day for my collection. Evans and I went out this morning, and we were very fortunate, as we shot twelve Ice Petrels, and we also collected a great number of Invertebrata. Among others we had five different species of Jelly-fish. We, moreover, found hundreds of those worms which I discovered on the 29th of last month. We also found some Fish-fry, nearly as transparent as water ; also a grey swimming thing, and some more small animals of species and forms we have not seen before. It was certainly not a very pleasant work to be dabbling with naked hands in the water with the temperature down to —5° Fahr. But when our fingers tingle the most and are stiff and numbed from the cold, we have this to comfort us, that we are suffering for the cause of science, and that many zoologists are waiting for the results we shall bring back and will thank us accordingly. May 15th.—These last few days we have only now and then seen a solitary Seal and two or three birds of those species we have been accustomed to see. To-day also some Seals and an Ice Petrel have been seen. In the forenoon I saw a troop of Seals, about a dozen, in the sea, presumably Leptonychotes. This evening, just as I was going to turn in, the three Englishmen came in and told me that they had seen and heard a “ Whistling” Seal out by the point, but they had not killed it, neither had they ascertained to which species it belonged. I hurried into my clothes again and in company with Fougner, Kolbein, and Evans as a guide, I set off armed with a rifle and a lantern. Evans could not find the place where the Seal was lying, and we searched a long time in vain, but at last one of the dogs began to bark a short distance off, and by going up to the dog we at last found the Seal. The light from the lantern made him lie still and stare without making any sign of moving away. I poked him on the nose with the barrel of my rifle, and then he gave vent to the before-mentioned ‘“ whistling” sound and also a sharp smacking noise, which seemed to come from the bottom of his chest. The whistling was quite shrill and clear, like the note of a canary-bird. The Seal was a young female of Leptonychotes weddelli, the smallest we haye seen as yet. She was only five feet long ; the skin and cranium we took for the collection. June 8th.—The Finns were far away on the ice to-day to look for some dogs. They found five Seals lying by a hole in the ice. As they had nothing with them wherewith to kill the animals, they stopped up the hole, so that we can find the Seals to-morrow. No birds of any kind seen. June Ith. We did not find the Seals by the hole the Finns had stopped up, but, on following up their track, we found that they had moved away to an iceberg about one kilometer away, where we discovered that they had gone into a narrow water-lane which ran round the iceberg. Near by we found on the ice a young Leptonychotes, half killed by our four-legged bandits. In the lane round the berg there were a number of Seals, and what interested me most was the fact that there were a large Extracts from Diary of Nicolat Hanson. 101 number of the White Seal, Lobodon carcinophagus ; some of them were immensely big animals. Here seemed a fine opportunity to get some good skins for the collection. There were about three Lobodon to every Leptonychotes. We walked about for a long time looking at the animals. It was like looking into an immense aquarium, as they were not in the least shy, and we might have touched them with our hands if we had wished. On the ice close by the side of the lane we found a fish, very much like a herring, five inches long. It was a new species for the collection, and presumably it had been frightened out of the water by the Seals. But it was of no use to us to be only looking at the Seals ; we had to secure a couple of them before the twilight disappeared and darkness set in. We had only one seal-pick, and with only this it was difficult, not to say impossible, for one man to drag these large animals up on the ice. We had to shoot them first and drag them up with the pick afterwards. A Seal, which was splashing in the water close by the edge of the ice, was approached by us. I held my rifle in readiness and fired the ball into his neck, and he was dead immediately ; Ole drove the pick into his neck, but although we thought we had a good hold of the animal, the pick slipped, and the Seal sank like a stone before we could get a new hold on him. The next one was also a large White Seal, but this sank so immediately after the shot that it was impossible to get hold with the pick. Seals lay blowing everywhere in the lane, but it took some time before any of them came to the spot where we had shot the two; but as this was by far the best place for hauling them up, we stayed there waiting for them to come near. After a quarter of an hour three came up close to me, and Ole stood ready with the pick, and soon the finest and biggest of the three lay dead with a ball between the eyes; but it took the strength of all five of us to haul him up on the ice. It was a male Seal, more than eight feet long, and very fat. I did not intend to shoot any more, but while I stood and skinned the one I had shot, a large Seal came and laid himself nicely up for a shot. In the next second he had a ball crashing through his head. When we got this Seal on the ice, I found it to be a female, and, to judge by her circumference, with young, so I did not regret having killed her, as I now could get the embryo from this Seal, and thereby the time of pairing approximately fixed. It was now quite dark, so we had to light our lanterns before we were half through with our work. We found large quantities of the above-mentioned herring-like fish in the stomachs of these two Seals, and these were so recently swallowed that I took some of them for the collection. The embryo was two feet long, and had just begun to get hair on its body. With the skin and flesh of one Seal and the embryo on a sledge, we started for camp. The other Seal we left behind to be fetched to-morrow or a following day. It was, however, easier said than done to pull the heavily-laden sledge along in the dark, as the ice was full of hummocks screwed up by the motion of the ice. By heavy pulling, and by one of us going before with a lantern to pick out the way, we had at last gone so far that we thought the worst of the job was over, when suddenly the sledge capsized on a little hummock, and broke one of the runners. Dark as it was, there was now nothing else for us to do than to let the sledge with the skin and the flesh lie where it fell and proceed to camp with the rest of the load. During the whole trip the temperature was down to — 32° Fahr. 102 Southern Cross. The skin we brought home measured eight feet five and a half inches in length and six feet round behind the fore flippers. June 14th.—Nothing to do and nothing done. We intended to take a trip to the iceberg where on the 9th saw so many Seals, to look for some addition to my collection ; but the sky has not been so clear in the middle of the day that we could go without lanterns, and under such circumstances the chances for collecting anything were very small. We therefore decided to put off the trip to a more favourable day. T hope it will not be for long, for the want of having something to do often becomes very depressing. June 17th.—Colbeck saw a Pagodroma nivea this morning. It came close to him when he was reading off the thermometers. June 24th.—¥our of us went for a walk on the ice looking for Seal for food for the dogs. Fortune favoured us, and we killed three large animals. The only thing of zoological interest on this trip was that we observed an immense number of Leptonychotes. Those we killed were two males and one female. Strangely enough this last had no embryo, although it was a full-grown animal. June 28th.—Went out for a walk and to look for Seals and specimens for the collection. Everywhere on the ice we found “ blow-holes,” but the Seals were all driven into the water by the number of dogs which, much against our wish, accompanied us and coursed all over the ice. I can note as a fact of zoological interest that we found several “ Seal caves” in the ice, where the Seal crawls in when the ice and weather is such that they do not care to be exposed to it. By the iceberg where I before killed the White Seal there were also now a number of Seals, but they all kept under the ice, so I got none. June 30th.—On the ice I found by the same hole I passed yesterday a large Seal, and to judge by its circumference, it appeared to be worth including in my collection ; when I returned to camp I therefore sent Ole away to kill it. He brought me an embryo about two feet long, which was well developed, and appeared to be more than half grown. To judge by the embryos I have now collected, the pairing season should be February and the breeding season September. The placenta, which in the Seals lies like a belt round the embryo was, in the one I got to-day, seven inches broad. The Seal was a Leptonychotes weddelli. July 8th.—To-day we killed two large Weddell’s Seals, male and female, but there was no embryo in this last. They were uncommonly fat, with five to six inches of blubber where it was thickest. July 15th.—Alongside of this iceberg there was a large seal-hole where we observed some Seals, both Lobodon and Leptonychotes. Some of them were very large animals. To judge from the different colouring of the hair, I believe I saw White Seals in three stages of fur. The colour varied rom greyish-brown, with darker spots on the fore and hind parts. The apparently oldest of them was dazzling white, without spots. This last, which was the only one of its colour in this hole, was an uncommonly large animal. July 17th.—The Finns killed a large female Leptonychotes, without embryo. July 23rd.—From his trip Borchgrevink brought back with him a cranium of Lobodon, which they killed last night. Extracts from Diary of Nicolai Hanson. 103 July 25th.— Ole killed an uncommonly handsome Lobodon yesterday. He was as white as an Ermine. August 3rd.—The three Englishmen went out to look for Seal to-day. They found none, but they observed a quite fresh track of a Penguin, which Evans followed till it grew dark, when he had to leave it. He took it to be that of a small Penguin. ‘The open sea can certainly not be far away when the Penguins are so near the land. August 6th—While walking on the ice, the Doctor found a dead Emperor Penguin, probably killed by the dogs. August 10th.—By the iceberg they found two dead Emperor Penguins, killed by the dogs. Last night Evans and Colbeck killed a large male Weddell’s Seal. He was very fat, with a layer of blubber six inches thick. August 20th.—It is strange that no Seal has been seen, neither in the BR ee ee age ie a ae : — eons aes ext . PR ee * eae Sree S & HERALDS OF SPRING-TIME. (By permission of Sir George Newnes, Bart.) open sea nor on the ice. Perhaps they travel to other parts to breed. It would be a great disappointment to me if this were the case, and leave a great vacancy in my collection, not only of specimens, but also of notes. August 21st.—Colbeck and Savio killed a large Weddell’s Seal, female, without an embryo. There was no milk in the breasts, so it was probably sterile. August 25th.—The Doctor and Colbeck returned to-day, without having found the other party. They had seen eight Seals, and of these three were females, to all appearance without embryo. This is strange. Where are the young? The Seals should have bred by now. They were all Weddell’s Seal. It is a pity I cannot get out and look for the Seal’s breeding-place, as it would be of great interest to know where it is. August 27th.—Last night Bernacchi and Kolbein returned from Duke of 104 Southern Cross. York Island. What interested me most was that they had found a number of Seals, but no young, neither did they find any females with embryos. August 29th.—Ole killed yesterday two females of Weddell’s Seal, but without embryos. One was a young animal, so this perhaps has had none, but the other was an old animal. I cannot understand where the young are. September 3rd.—To-day brought me a solution of the question, as to where Weddell’s Seal breeds, as they have found embryos, nearly ready for birth, in a couple of Seals of this species which they killed, and also a young one, which they had fouad on the ice. This appeared, however, not to be quite fully born, as it had not the covering-hair, peculiar to the young Seal. In one of the Seals they killed to-day, they found an embryo four feet long, with fully-developed covering-hair. Among the contents of the stomachs they found only little fish, but in several were fragments of a red Cray- fish, of which they brought mea tolerably well-preserved specimen. Every time they approached one of these animals, especially the females, they gave out an angry roar like that of a bull, which we never have heard before here. Only in April we heard this roar now and again, when the animals were in the sea. They saw not a single White Seal in their trip (to Duke of York Island), so where this Seal now dwells is still a mystery. Perhaps Evans will find it out when he starts on his next expedition. I am, unfortunately, still unable to move about. Kolbein saw a brown-backed Petrel (7. antarctica) outside the house last night. September 5th—Yesterday and to-day I have been busy, drawing and measuring the Cray-fish which Evans and Fougner brought me, and examining the embryos. The head of the young Seal which Borchgre- vink found, they also brought me, and, by its long woolly hair, it must have been full-born, but probably killed by the dogs. September 10th—The Seals are beginning to return here again now and to-morrow Fougner is going out to kill some for food. September 13th.—Yesterday they observed some Pagodroma nivea on Duke of York Island. They kept about 1000 feet up in the mountain, and when they flew they played about in pairs, incessantly giving vent to the before-mentioned sound, ‘“‘ kaw-kaw,” but they were perfectly silent when sitting on the rocks. They have also found a new species of fish, and also the backbone of a very large fish and some beaks of Octopus in the stomachs of some Weddell’s Seals they had killed. Four of these had full-grown embryos, which were fully capable of living after they came on the ice. Even if we should get no other proofs, I think this justifies me in putting the breeding-season for Weddell’s Seal as September, and this would agree with what I before have said about February being the season of pairing. Besides the new fishes, they have also caught some of the broad-headed bottom fishes which are common here. The temperature in the surface of the sea where they fished was + 28:6 Fahr.,and the new species of fish was caught only about one-half fathom (three feet) below the surface. September 14th.—To-day something of great zoological interest hap- pened. Fougner found a male White Seal far up in the land (about 500 metres) under the mountain. As he was very savage and wanted to attack Fougner when he approached him, he had to return to the hut and call Evans to come to his assistance with a rifle. They brought me Extracts from Diary of Nicolat Hanson. 105 the skin and skull and part of the intestines for the collection. To judge by the colour it was an exceedingly old animal—white as chalk—and he had not a sound tooth in his jaws. In the skin there was a number of large scars, but all old. The peritoneum was full of innumerable small, black, hard tumours, as big as shot of all sizes. What has brought this old Seal on shore? To judge by his tracks he has stayed there several days. He was presumably ill, as he was very lean—with only about half an inch of fat. Perhaps this is a solution of the question, as to where all the dead Seals come from, which I have found scattered about on the point here, and in the guano. Perhaps this is a burial-place for old Seals, and they crawl on land here to die. If this is so, my first suppo- sition that all the Seal-mummies are due to its being a breeding-place for the White Seal is thereby knocked on the head. But this does not decrease the interest of my last conjecture—if there is anything in it. September 16th.— Yesterday, Fougner and Ole and Evans were away to fetch a boat; they found a dead White Seal which the dogs had killed. The skin was torn and spoilt, so they brought only the head. They had seen one Weddell’s Seal, but did not Talis it. To-day Evans went out on the ice to look for White Seals. He was away for five hours, but saw only one Leptonychotes, which he killed. It was a small male, only six feet long; the skin went into my collection. He also saw some P.nivea. He found a little Penguin lying dead far in on the ice, killed by the dogs. September 24th.—Evans was away after Seals and killed two White Seals, but no sign of young, either born or unborn. [Note by Mr. Anton Hanson.—With the 24th September ends my son’s private Diary. Three weeks afterwards, on the 14th October, 1899, he died. May he rest in Peace !| P.S.—Four species of Seals brought home by the ‘ Southern Cross’ have been identified, but it would almost seem as if more than this number were procured by Mr. Hanson. On the 31st of December and on several subsequent days he speaks of the “ White Seal.” On the last- named day he killed a ‘“ Leopard Seal,” and again, on the 2nd and 4th of January, specimens were procured of the latter species. On the 6th, he procured a Seal like the others he had shot, but with a different cranium. On the 10th of January he killed two young female seals, “one of a new species which I have not seen before.” On the 14th one of the same kind was killed by Lieut. Colbeck, and another was obtained by himself on the 16th; so that, up to this date, he would seem to have obtained four species. On the 21st he killed his first Ross’s Seal, his second on the 24th, his third on the 28th, and a fourth on the 3rd of February. Thus all the four skins brought to the Museum are accounted for. On February 9th and | 1th Sea-Leopards were again procured. On landing at Cape Adare, Hanson killed sixteen Seals of a kind not seen before [= L. weddelli. This apparently makes a total of siz kinds of Seals recognised as different by the zoologist to the expedition.—R. B.S. 106 Southern CYvoss. LV. ANGHs: By R. BOWDLER SHARPE, 1.02); FS: are: (Plates: VIE; VIS ix x.) Mr. Howarpb SAUNDERS has contributed to the ‘ Antarctic Manual,’ published by the Royal Geographical Society, an admirable account of the birds which occur within the Antarctic regions. The list of specimens obtained by the ‘ Southern Cross’ was placed at his disposal, and I have had no hesitation in extracting from his memoir above-mentioned such notes as seem to me of importance for the present volume. I have received from Mr. Borchgrevink only one note-book of the late Nicolai Hanson, which consists merely of a list of the specimens collected by the latter between October 13th, 1898, and January 19th, 1899. This list is of no actual importance, and adds nothing to our knowledge, since Mr. Hanson, like the careful naturalist that he was, has given exactly the same information on the labels attached to the specimens. Of the Emperor Penguins (Aptenodytes forstert) there is no record in the note-book which I received from the commander of the ‘ Southern Cross’ expedition, and as there was only a number pinned on to the breast of each specimen, with no corre- sponding MS. notes handed over to me, the exact dates of the capture of these birds cannot be recorded. The list of the specimens delivered to the British Museum does not entirely correspond with that given in Nicolai Hanson’s note-book, and shows that several are missing. No skeletons were received by the Museum, though Mr. Hanson’s private ‘ Diary’ (vide supra, p. 99) expressly records the preparation of at least two of those of the Emperor Penguin. Eight skeletons are also mentioned by him on the 27th of October (infra, p. 82), but these also did not reach me. In the official account of his expedition, Mr. Borchgrevink (‘ First on the Antarctic Continent,’ App. pp. 320-324), publishes in the Appendia some “ Zoological Notes by Mr. Nicolai Hanson,” which, Aves. 107 it will be seen, correspond to the records of the same dates in his private ‘ Diary,’ as written to his wife (vide supra, pp. 80-83). In Mr. Hanson’s ‘ Diary’ mention is made of the shooting of numbers of specimens of birds in the pack-ice, few of which appear to have reached the British Museum: this is especially the case with the Adelia Penguins, and but for the series obtained by Mr. Hugh Evans near Cape Adare, there would have been but a poor series of this interesting species. Mr. Evans informs me that his notes on the Penguins were handed over to Mr. Borchgrevink, but they appear to have been lost or left behind at Hobart Town, and have not been available for the present memoir. Such skins as have reached the Museum were beautifully prepared: in fact, better specimens of taxidermy than those preserved by Mr. Hanson and Mr. Evans have never come under my notice. Under the heading of each species I have given a list of the specimens handed over to the British Museum by Mr. Borchgrevink. The first set has been presented to the nation by Sir George Newnes, who has given such duplicates as remained to public institutions at home and abroad. I have done my best, in the unexpected absence of official note- books, to afford some idea of the distribution and natural history of the various species, by giving a reference to the works which contain records of Antarctic zoology, as has been done by Captain Barrett Hamilton with the Seals, and the jottings from the MS. in Mrs. Nicolai Hanson’s possession are not the least interesting of the obser- vations on the zoology of the South Polar regions. Dr. H. O. Forbes gives a ‘List of the Birds in the Derby Museum collected in the Antarctic Regions’ (Bull. Liverp. Mus. ii. pp. 48-50), and records a Teal (Nettion flavirostre), a Plover (Hyialitis falklandica), and a Grebe (Podicipes calipareus). All three species are said to have been obtained at Victoria Land. Without affirming that this is impossible, it seems to me highly improbable. Southern Cross. 108 Cyayonrg p ysung *sussayy £0 uorssnusad fig) "KLIAILAVO NI SHOUAdNH Aves. 109 OrpDER SPHENISCIFORMES. FaMILy SPHENISCID 2. APTENODYTES, Forst. 1. APTENODYTES FORSTERI. Aptenodytes forsteri, Gray, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., XIII., p. 815 (1844, 8S. lat., 64° 77’ 8.); Sclater, Zbis, 1888, p. 325, figs. 2, 4; Donald, Pr. Roy. Soc., Kdinb., XX., pp. 172, 174 (1894, ‘ Erebus’ and ‘ Terror’ Gulf, lat. 64° 20’ S.); id., Pr. Roy. Phys. Soc., Edinb., XII., p. 329 (1894); Scl., Zbis, 1894, p. 499; Ogilvie Grant, Cat. Birds Brit. Mus., XXVL., p. 626 (1898, lat. 64° S., Pack Ice); Sharpe, Hand-list B., I., p. 117 (1899); Forbes, Bull. Liverp. Mus., ii. p- 49 (1899) ; Racovitza, Vie des Animaux dans l’Antarctique, p. 22 (photo., 1900); Borchgrevink, First on Antarctic Cont., p. 224 (1901); Bernacchi, South Polar Regions, pp. 44, 47 (photo.), 192, 513 (1901); Howard Saunders, Antarctic Manual, p. 234 (1901). King Penguin, Bull, Cruise ‘ Antarctic,’ p. 156, cum fig. (1896). Aptenodytes forsterii, Borchgrevink, Antarctic Continent, pp. 66, 71, 213 (photo), 292 (1901). Emperor Penguin, Borchgrevink, ¢. ¢ p. 286 (1901); Bernacchi, South Polar Regions, pp. 129, 225, 240 (1901); Hanson, antea, pp. 87-90 (1902). Aptenodytes patachonica (nec Forst.), Coues, Pr. Philad. Acad., 1872, p. 192; Sharpe, Voy. ‘ Hrebus’ and ‘ Terror, Birds, App., p. 38, pl. 31 (1875). Royal Penguin, Cook, First Antarctic Night, pp. 193, 210, 229, 234, pl., to pp. 332, 384, 382 (1900). No. 3. Adult, apparently about to commence moulting.’ No. 4. Adult. No. 5. “Adult. No. 6. Adult. No. 7. Adult No. 8. In nearly completed moult. All these splendid birds were in full plumage, and had a number pinned on the breast, but there were no further particulars attached to them : the original labels have been removed, and there are no details of the colours of the soft parts, or of the exact localities where the specimens were procured. One of them is evidently the moulting individual described by Mr. Nicolai Hanson in his ‘ Diary’: this is a most interesting specimen, and, in connection with it, Mr. De Winton’s papers on the moult of the King-Penguin (Aptenodytes pennanti) should be studied (‘ P. Z. 8.,’ 1898, p. 900; 1899, pp. 980-981.) 1 Nos. 1 and 2 are missing from the collection, and none of the specimens had a label. Line) Southern Cross. The distribution of the Emperor Penguin is given by Mr. Howard Saunders in the ‘ Antarctic Manual’ (p. 227), as “ranging longitu- dinally to 151° E. in Victoria Quadrant, through Ross Quadrant, and to about 50° W. in Weddell Quadrant.” No authenticated egg of this bird is known to exist; but Mr. Saunders mentions a large Penguin’s ege in the possession of Mr. J. H. Walter, of Drayton House, Norwich, said to have been procured in the “ Antarctic regions,’ prior to 1855, which is bigger than any King Penguin’s egg, and may well be that of an Emperor Penguin. EMPEROR PENGUINS. (By permission of Sir George Newnes, Bart.) Mr. Bull, in his ‘ Cruise of the “ Antarctic,’’ mentions meeting with the large Penguin in the pack-ice in about 68° 21’ §., 176° 15' E., but he calls it by mistake the ‘ King’ Penguin, instead of the ‘Emperor.’ The latter is first recorded by Mr. Borchgrevink as having been met with in the pack-ice on January 8th, and he chronicles the capture of a pair on the 18th of the same month. His account of these birds is practically the same as that in Mr. Hanson’s private ‘Diary’ (wntea, p. 87), and need not be repeated here. On p. 224 of his book, Mr. Borchgrevink writes: “We saw com- paratively few of the Emperor Penguins (A. forsteri), and were not able to find their nesting-places. We came across odd ones in the Aves. jaya pack at intervals, and not before the Antarctic autumn of :1900 did we see several together. At the end of November we saw more than twenty (?) at a time. They were then walking slowly into Robertson Bay. I secured ten of these, and kept them for some time alive at Camp Ridley. They came in shoals, swimming just like the small Penguins, with whom they, however, did not mix. Undoubtedly, they were on their way to their old nesting-places, and some of them had pretty large eggs inside them. ‘Their stomachs generally con- tained crustacea, very small fish, and a quantity of pebbles.” He also records (p. 286) the occurrence of an Emperor Penguin, who “ walked philosophically up and down upon the ice towards the E.,” as the ‘Southern Cross’ entered the harbour in the ice barrier, the furthest south reached by the ship. He likewise seems to have taken some living specimens on board the ship, as we read that on March 4th, 1900, he “ordered the last live Penguin (4. forsteriv) to be thrown overboard, as he looked miserable, would not eat, and his spirits sank with the rise of the temperature.” Mr. Bernacchi writes (p. 44):—“ We saw the large Emperor [in the pack] rarely, and nearly always solitary... .On one occasion three of these Penguins suddenly leapt up on a floe quite close to the ship. . . . Two of these birds were procured one day that weighed between seventy and eighty pounds. They were found on an ice-floe, seeking shelter from the wind behind a hummock. One was moulting, and, from the stained appearance of the ice upon which he was resting, had been perched there some days. It took nearly twenty minutes to asphyxiate them with chloroform. On dissecting one, the contents of the stomach were examined, and found to hold red crustaceous matter, small fish, some two to three inches in length, some green matter like seaweed, and a few small rock-fragments. Three of these fragments presented granitoid characters, and the fourth was a greenish-grey lava-rock.” [These are doubtless the pair of birds whose capture is described by Mr. Nicolai Hanson in his ‘ Diary’ of Jan. 18th, 1899.] About the end of May Mr. Bernacchi records the capture of a very fine specimen on the ice-pack near Cape Adare, “a big, sad, solitary bird, over four feet high.” He remarks that the presence of these birds so far south (late in the year) proves that they do not migrate far north during the Antarctic winter. He also mentions the species as occurring near Cape Adare about the middle of November—“ A large handsome Emperor Penguin suddenly shot out of the water on to the ice within a few yards of us, and gazed around in a quiet, dignified fashion, looking like a giant among the 112 Southern Cross. smaller ones. Strange to say, the smaller Penguins were afraid of him, and gave him a very wide berth. We endeavoured to get between him and the water’s edge, so as to capture him, but he was much too wise for us; he perceived our little manceuvre, and quietly took a header back into the sea. Ten of these large Penguins were, however, captured some days afterwards, and were incarcerated in a square made of boxes, but somehow they overturned the cases, and effected their escape.” In the inlet of the ice barrier, at about the southernmost point reached by the ‘Southern Cross, Mr. Bernacchi found a couple of Emperor Penguins, inhabiting the same ground as a large rookery of Weddell’s Seal. In the appendix to his book (p. 313), he says that “the species is rarely seen further north than Lat. 63° S., but some had been seen by the ‘ Southern Cross’ expedition as far south as 78° S. At Cape Adare specimens were procured both in summer and in winter. They were generally solitary, or in small groups of five or six. Its food consists principally of crustaceans, Great pains were taken to find a clue to the breeding-place of the Emperor Penguin, but unsuccessfully.” Dr. Racovitza, of the ‘ Belgica, gives an interesting account of the species on the pack-ice (¢.¢. p. 22), with an excellent photograph by Dr. Cook. The latter also has many notes in his book, ‘ Through the First Antarctic Night, on the “Royal” Penguin, as he terms the species, which was met with by the ‘ Belgica’ in the pack-ice early in March. He says :—“ The Penguins we saw were stragglers which failed to go to more congenial regions before the new ice formed ; they remained near icebergs, where they are sure to find new crevices in the next few days, and to be deprived of food and water for a few days does not seem to seriously disturb a Penguin. About the bergs we found some small holes through the new ice, out of which there came a puff of vapour with a hiss, at regular intervals. These were the breathing holes of the crab-eating Seals, who, like the stranded Penguins, awaited a change in the movement of the ice, when new crevices, with open spaces of water, will again appear.” The Emperors also occurred during the winter, as Dr. Cook observes that on the 14th of July, though no life was visible, the tracks of both the Royal and the smaller Adelia Penguins were seen. AVES. 113 PYGOSCELIS, Wacler. PYGOSCELIS ADELIA. (Plates VIL, VIIL., X., figs. 4-6.) Catarrhactes adeliz, Hombr. and Jacq., Ann. Sci. Nat. (2), p. 320 (1841, Adélie Land). Pygoscelis brevirostris, Gray, List B. Brit. Mus., Part III., p. 154 (1844, Ice off Louis Philippe Land, lat. 64° 72’ §., long. 171° 6’). Aptenodytes longicaudata, Peale, U.S. Expl. Exped., Birds, p. 261 (1848, lat. 64° 40’ S., long. 103° 4’ E.). Eudyptes adeliz, Sharpe, Voy. ‘Hrebus’ and ‘Terror, App. pp. 38, pl. 28 (1875); Borchgrevink, First on Antarctic Cont., pp. 198-217 (photos.), p. 257 (photo., Possession Island), p. 286 (Ice barrier, Robertson Bay). Spheniscus adeliz, Schl., Mus. Pays Bas, Urinat., p. 4 (1867, Adélie Land, Victoria Land). Dasyrhamphus adeliz, Donald, Proc. Roy. Soc., Edinb., XX., p. 170 (1894, lat. 61° 14’ 8., long. 52° 27’ W., Danger Islands). Pygoscelis adelize, Coues, Proc. Ac. Philad., 1872, p. 196; Scl., Lhis, 1894, p- 499; Ogilvie Grant, Cat. B. Brit. Mus., XXVI., p. 632 (1898); Forbes, Bull. Liverp. Mus., IL., pp. 49 (1899); Racovitza, Vie des Animaux, etc., pp. 28-27 (1900, with photos.); Bernacchi, South Polar Regions, pp. 44, 58, 190, 192, 814 (1901); Howard Saunders, Antarctic Manual, p. 235 (1901). Eudyptes adaliea, Borchgrevink, First on Antarctic Continent, pp. 64, 102. a. 9 ad. Kulled on the pack-ice, 64° 8’S.L., 16° 52’ E.L., Jan. 5th, 1899. “Tris dark brown; eyelids white; bill crimson and black; feet flesh-colour in front, dark blue-grey behind; webs flesh-colour on top, dark blue-grey underneath ; claws reddish.” (H. B. Evans.) 6b. 9 ad. Gn moult). Caught on pack-ice, 64° 43’ S.L., 161° 6’ Hal, Jan, (th, 1899: “Tris dark brown; eyelids white; bill crimson and black ; feet flesh-colour in front, dark blue-grey behind; webs flesh-colour on top, blue-green underneath ; claws reddish.” (H. B. Evans.) ce. 6 ad. Caught on the pack-ice, 66° 16’ 8.L., 166° 56’ E.L., Jan. 22nd, 1899. “Tris dark brown; eyelids white; bill crimson and black; feet flesh-colour in front, dark blue-grey behind; webs flesh-colour on top, dark blue-grey underneath ; claws reddish-black.” (1. b. Evans.) d. 9 ad. In the pack-ice. Feb. 5th, 1899. e. 6 ad. (in moult). In the pack-ice. Feb. 7th, 1899. 1 This is one of the two specimens mentioned in Mr. Hanson’s private ‘ Diary’ (vide supra, p. 92). The other one did not reach the Museum. I Southern Cross. A if (yung ‘saumayr aB.woay wis fo uorssvuwad fig) ‘ONTUdS NI HOI AHL NO SNINONAd VITAAY Aves. 115 6 ad Cape Adare. Oct. 14th, 1899. g. 6 ad. Cape Adare. Nov. 21st, 1899. 3 aoa Cape Adare. Dec. 12th, 1899. : pull.f! Cape Adare. Dec. 12th, 1899. kl. m. 6 p. 2 pull. Cape Adare. Dec. 29th, 1899. nm. 0. 6 Q pull. Cape Adare. Jan. 4th, 1900. p. 6 imm. Cape Adare. Jan. 18th, 1900. q- 2 pull. Cape Adare. Jan. 22nd, 1900. r. 9 pull. Cape Adare. Jan. 24th, 1900. The nestlings of this Penguin, obtained in December, are pretty little creatures, covered with silvery-grey down, witha black head and face; the throat also is shaded with sooty-black. Even in the nestling ADELIA PENGUINS AND YOUNG. (4y permission of Sir George Newnes, Bart.) stage there is considerable difference in the colour of the down, for one specimen is sooty-brown all over, excepting on the head, which is blackish, though not in very strong contrast to the back. As the bird increases in size the silvery-grey appearance gives place to sooty down, and a little black spot shows the position of the tail. A nearly full-grown young bird, killed on the 24th of January, 1s entirely clothed in sooty-grey down and has lost the black head, but the stiffened tail-feathers are fairly developed and have flat and glossy black shafts. The thighs are beginning to show white plumes. 12 116 Southern Cross. In another, a female, procured on the 22nd of January, the thighs are entirely white, and the grey down is being shed, so that on the lower back the blue plumage is already visible. On the breast, however, the grey down is changing to an isabelline colour, which forms the downy top to the true feathers, these being deve- loped from oblique transverse rows. Two white-throated birds were obtained, one on the 22nd of January, 1899, and another on the 18th of January, 1900, They are in pale and bleached plumage, and have, as Mr. Ogilvie Grant has pointed out, no black patch at the end of the flipper. This ADELIA PENGUIN FEEDING ITS YOUNG. (By permission of Sir George Newnes, Bart.) character, however, varies in extent in adult birds, and is not of any great importance. It thus appears that some of the young birds of the previous year come back in the next breeding season without having moulted into the adult livery. The nestlings were obtained in the middle of December, and by the end of January were nearly of full size, though still clothed in down. The old birds, or at least some of them, must commence to moult early in January, and one bird ‘killed on the 7th of February has almost completed its change. Another female, obtained on the 5th of February, is in excellent feather, with the exception of the tail, which is still undeveloped, 17 Aves. (ypayovlg » ysuneT *sussayy fo uorssrvutad figr) ‘HUVGVY AdvVO LV ANAMOOU NINONAA 118 Southern Cross. A male killed on the 21st of November has a curious patch of white feathers on the nape. The Adelia Penguin apparently does not extend its range far to the north of the Antarctic Circle, and the exact habitat is given by Mr. Howard Saunders as follows :—“ This is the black-headed species found in immense ‘rookeries’ on Victoria Land and Adélie Land, as well as in the area round Louis Philippe and Graham Lands, and at the South Shetland Islands.” Mr. Borchgrevink says that the species was seen soon after entering the pack-ice (p. 67). On landing at Cape Adare on the 17th of February, 1899, only a few Penguins were left (p. 86), and all had departed by the 14th of March (p. 105). Mr. Borchgrevink mentions the 14th of October (the day of Mr. Hanson’s death) as the day on which the first Penguin returned (p. 190), and on the 19th many arrived: “some stood at their old nests, which they occasionally left to pick up pebbles, arranging them about their nests (p. 190). The first eggs were gathered on the 3rd of November (p. 198). Mr. Borchgrevink [p. 247] says that the young Penguins during the stay of his expedition at Cape Adare were not so far advanced as when he first landed there (with Mr. Bull’) on the 23rd of January, 1894 [sic]. On Possession Islands on the 3rd of February very few Penguins were left (p. 257). Near Mount Melbourne, “a small Penguin colony was thriving, and, as the young ones were not so far advanced as those few which were still left at Cape Adare when we departed, they did not seem to have any immediate intentions of leaving their breeding-place. At all events they were evidently well protected by the cone of Mount Melbourne from the south” (p. 262). On Franklin Island “there were very many Penguins on the peninsula, many more than were left at Cape Adare when we said farewell to Camp Ridley” (p. 268). At the foot of Mount Terror, “a large Penguin colony seemed to flourish ” (p. 276), a pair were seen in the harbour in the ice-barrier (lat. 80° S.), ‘who discussed our boldness with the utmost interest” (p. 286). On p. 291, Mr. Borchgrevink speaks of the “hoarse scream” of the Penguin. He devotes an interesting chapter to the habits of the bird (pp. 198-224). Mr. Bernacchi’s work also contains numerous references to Pygoscelis adeliw, part of which I have quoted. It was “very common” in the ice-pack. “Once a party, headed by Lieutenant Colbeck, set out across the ice to hunt some small Penguins. At about the same time the Penguins set out for the party, in order * See Bull’s ‘Cruise of the “Antarctic,”’ p. 180, where the first landing on the Antarctic Continent is said to have taken place at 1 a.m. on the 24th of January, 1895. Aves. 119 to investigate the strange animals coming towards them; for their curiosity was astonishing. Along the floes they came waddling from side to side, and raising and lowering their flippers in a most ludicrous fashion. At last they came right up to the men, walked round, and surveyed them critically in a most comical manner” (p. 44). “On the morning of the 6th of February, we passed an ice-floe upon which there was quite a small colony of Penguins: some were moulting and had made themselves small cavities in the ice where they stood, until, apparently, the period of moulting was over” (p. 58). Of the landing at Cape Adare Mr. Bernacchi writes (p. 66): “We had not THE ‘‘ SECLUDED AND MELANCHOLY INHABITANTS.” (By permission of Messrs. Hurst & Blackett.) walked far before we met the secluded and melancholy inhabitants of that South Polar land; these were the Penguins scattered about in groups of a hundred and more. They extended us but cold courtesy and gravely regarded us from a distance; but on our approaching closer they evinced more interest, and commenced talking loquaciously together in their own particular vernacular. They had evidently discovered that there was something unusual about our appearance, and some were commissioned to investigate matters. These, with perfect sang-froid, slowly marched right up to our feet and ogled up at us in most ludicrous fashion. Having finished this scrutiny, they returned to their fellows as sedately as they had come, and thence- Southern CyYoss. 120 Cyayonig p asin *sussayy fo worssputad fg) ‘aUVaVY GdVO LY HOVAd ATAdad AHL NO SNIQONHd VITHCY Aves. 121 forth took no more notice of us. What impressed us was the general appearance of sadness prevailing among them: they seemed to be under the shadow of some great trouble. It is no small matter that will arouse them from their stolidity. There were many young birds among them, and no doubt most of the older ones had already migrated northwards, it being late in the year for them. The effluvium from the guano was very powerful. The strong ammoniacal odour at first gave us a sensation of nausea, but we soon got used to it, and never afterwards suffered from any unpleasantness. There was, however, no large accumulation of guano of any commercial value, for in no place was it deeper than from three to four inches, and this only in very small patches of only a few feet in extent. The powerful winds prevent any extensive formation by sweeping all accumulations into the sea.” On the beach at Cape Adare “ bleached remains of thousands of Penguins were scattered all over the plat- form, mostly young birds that had succumbed to the severity of the climate”’ (p. 73). On the climb to the top of Cape Adare, on February 17th, Mr. Bernacchi saw a few Penguins, and even at the top (950 feet by aneroid) there were traces of them. On the journey south after the return of the ‘Southern Cross’ to Cape Adare, he records numbers of Penguins as_ being observed on the Possession Islands on the 35rd of February, 1900 (p. 254), and on the inlet in the ice-barrier one of these birds was seen on the 4th (p. 240). They were again met with in Wood’s Bay at the foot of Mount Melbourne (p. 244). The pebbly beach on Franklin Island, “similar to the one in Wood’s Bay and at Cape Adare, was occupied by thousands of Penguins. The young birds were not in so advanced a state of development as those at Cape Adare and the Possession Islands (p. 252). On p. 260 he writes: “Even stranger than the absence of snow on Mount Terror is the existence of an exceedingly large Penguin rookery at the foot of the mountain, and near Cape Crozier. This rookery was occupied by millions of Penguins, and was far and away larger than any we had previously seen. The brown discolouration caused by these birds can be seen some miles off.” The earliest date of the return of the Penguins to the neighbour- hood of Cape Adare seems to have been the 16th of September, when Mr. Evans found one “lying dead far in on the ice, killed by the dogs ” (vide Mr. Nicolai Hanson’s ‘ Diary,’ antea, p.105). Specimen /. of my list was the one brought in to Mr. Hanson half-an-hour before he died (October 14th, 1899) (cf. Borchgrevink, ‘ Antarctic Continent,’ ¢ 122 Southern CvYoss. p- 198). In November Mr. Bernacchi writes (p. 222) :—“ Flocks of thousands of Penguins now toddled to and fro between the shore and the water, those arriving grimy and sordid in appearance, and those returning neat, clean, and glossy. Thousands were standing along the edge of the ice, ready to take their plunge into the brine, but hesitating like children. As soon as one plunged in, all followed in rapid succession. Others, again, were sporting about in the water, enjoying themselves immensely—racing along and leaping out like Dolphins ; by the uninitiated they might have been easily mistaken for ARRIVAL OF THE ADELIA PENGUINS IN THE SPRING. (By permission of Sir George Newnes, Bart.) such. Assoonas they tired of their frolics, they all leapt up again on to the ice, and then no amount of persuasion would induce them to enter again. In this respect, as indeed in all, they were most obstinate.” Mr. Bull in the ‘ Antarctic’ landed on the Possession Islands on the 19th of January, 1895 (see ‘Cruise of the “Antarctic,”’ p. 172). He writes :—“ Thousands of Penguins could be seen from the deck to occupy nearly the whole extent of one of the islands. We found the colony as it no doubt appeared in 1840 to Sir James Ross and his party, the foundation consisting of an extensive heap of guano mixed with pebbles and bones of Penguins, carried off by a natural or a violent death, chiefly the latter, as the numerous predatory Skua-Gulls look Aves. 122 upon the colony as a private and inexhaustible larder, from which they draw their supplies in the form of young Penguins, with the utmost insolence and contempt for parental feelings. The myriads of colonists are drilled to the same degree of perfection which excited our wonder in other Penguin’s rookeries. In spite of their bewildering numbers, all their functions of life ashore are carried out with a perfect absence of confusion ; the only scenes of disorder are caused by an occasional attack from Skua-Gulls, when the old ones are ‘played’ by some of the robbers, whilst others quietly haul away Cl ‘ LMS ADELIA PENGUINS NESTING ON CAPE ADARE. (By permission of Sir George Newnes, Bart.) and despatch the screaming youngsters with a few savage pecks from their powerful bills.” Mr. Bull also mentions having seen another colony on a beach off Cape Hallett (p. 175). Mr. Bull (p. 181) describes the landing of himself, with the captain and second mate of the “Antarctic, and Mr. Borcherevink, on the pebbly beach at Cape Adare in 1895. He writes (p. 181) :—“ The sensation of being the first men who had set foot on the real Antarctic mainland was both strange and pleasurable. . . . To commemorate our landing, a pole was erected, carrying a box on which was painted the Norwegian colours, the date, and the vessel's name. . . . “Our surroundings and our hosts were as strange and unique as 124 Southern Cross. our feelings. The latter—myriads of Penguins—fairly covered the flat promontory, many acres in extent, jutting out into the bay between Cape Adare and a more westerly headland; they further lined all accessible projections of the rocks to an altitude of 800 or 900 feet. The youngsters were now almost full-grown. In their thick, woolly, and grey down they exhibited a most remarkable and comical appearance. At a distance the confused din and screaming emanating from parents and children resembled the uproar of an excited human assembly, thousands in number. “ Our presence was not much appreciated, considering the millions of years which must have elapsed since the last visit by pre- historic man or monkey—before the glacial period. Our sea-boots were bravely attacked as we passed along their ranks. The space covered by the colony was practically free from snow; but the layer of guano was too thin, and mixed with too many pebbles, to be of commercial value in these days of cheap phosphates. Unless the guano has been carried out to sea from time to time by rains and melting snow, the thinness of the layers, compared with the massive- ness of similar deposits in other climes, would indicate that South Victoria land has only during comparatively recent ages been made use of by the Penguins during their breeding season. From this (assumed) fact, interesting inferences may again be drawn regarding changes in the climate of Antarctica during recent times; but men of science must weigh the pros and cons of this theory, and the most permissible deductions to be made. “The mortality in the colony must be frightful, judging by the number of skeletons and dead birds lying about in all directions. A raptorial (Skua) Gull was present here, as everywhere in the neighbour- hood of Penguin nurseries, and was busily occupied with its mission in life—viz., prevention of over-population in the colony. The patience and endurance of the Penguins are beyond praise, when it is considered that thousands of them have to scale ridges hundreds of feet in height to reach their nests, although their mode of locomotion ashore is painfully awkward and slow. Like so many other Polar animals, the full-grown bird is able to subsist on its own fat for long periods ; but the young birds require frequent and regular feeding, as in all other cases of animal life. The capacity of most Polar mhabi- tants for stowing away incredible quantities of food at one meal, and bringing it up again at will, explains no doubt how the young can be fed with fair regularity, although the parents may go for days without an opportunity of eating.” Aves. 125 From the ‘ Southern Cross’ Expedition, I have received the series of specimens recorded above, but no notes of any kind, beyond the record of the soft parts on the labels. The entire series seems to have been preserved by Mr. Evans, and no notes by Mr. Hanson have reached me. That he must have devoted some study to the species is certain, as he was always most interested in the moulting and changes of plumage in bird—witness his beautiful series of Eider Ducks (Somateria moliissima) and Black Guillemots (Cepphus grylle) procured off the Norwegian coasts, and now in the British Museum. He also kept a living Adelia Penguin in a box (see his ‘ Diary,’ supra, p. 95), in order to study the moult. Mr. Borchgrevink also writes: “Half an hour before he died, the first Penguin came back. Enthu- siastic as he had always been in his calling, he asked to see the bird, and, on its being brought to him, he was delighted to examine it.” Dr. Klovstad told me that Hanson had been much interested in the changes of plumage undergone by the Penguin, and, on examining the tail-feathers of the above-mentioned specimen, he pronounced it to be an “old bird.” Whether the development of the tail or the black throat were the points which Hanson was indicating, we cannot now determine, without his note-books. In his private ‘Diary’ there are not many observations concerning the Adelia Penguins, and it is possible that his account of the species was in one of the missing note-books. Mr. Hugh Evans tells me that his own note-books were delivered up to the commander, when the ship arrived at Stewart Island on the return voyage. He gave special attention to the habits of the species, and hoped that I should find his account of some interest. No note- books have been submitted to me; but, in answer to some of my inquiries, Mr. Evans has been kind enough to write me a letter, with some remarks about the Penguins, which are deserving of quotation : “ Your letter is rather a difficult one to answer, from the scanty data I have in my possession. Referring to the first question you ask me concerning the time the Adelia Penguin takes to get its full plumage, it only takes one year for the great majority of them; for we only came across a few isolated instances of birds having come to Cape Adare with the crowd, still with their throats not quite covered with black feathers, which seems to be the last stage of their change from young to adult plumage. The birds I took on January 15-22, 1900, were all that season’s young. There was a great difference of time between the hatching of the first and last young birds; the first being hatched out on the 9th of December, and the last ones not until 126 Southern Cross. January, the period of incubation lasting from thirty-one to thirty- four days. When we left Cape Adare, on the 2nd of February, although most of the young birds had completely lost their down, and had their full feathers, with the exception of the black ones on the throat, there were still very many young and tiny ones, only about a fortnight old. They seem to vary a good deal in the time they take to develop; for, even when we left Cape Adare, there were still some of the previous year’s birds with white or partly white throats, and I took some on board with me, but was unable to skin them. ADELIA PENGUINS ON THEIR NESTS. (By permission of Sir George Newnes, Bart.) The young birds seem to grow very rapidly, and, when once they start casting their down, they have it all off in a few days’ time.” From Mr. Borchgrevink’s account of the species I extract the following notes :— “ Although the Penguin colony seemed to fill the very ground of the peninsula, new arrivals continued even after the Penguins which arrived first had been sitting on their eggs for a fortnight. The Penguin rookery at the Peninsula of Camp Ridley, at Cape Adare, was the same as when I visited it in 1894. The Penguins literally covered the ground; their nests lying on the top of the guano deposits and consisting of small pebbles. I remembered I often Aves. E27 wondered, after my first visit, how the Penguins managed to get the material for their nests, and I presumed that they brought it from the sea-shore. This, however, they seldom did. The pebble supply generally came down to the Peninsula from the top of the Cape, driven by the furious gales, and I could not but recollect the old proverb which runs: ‘It’s an ill wind that blows nobody good,’ and the Penguins usually had a very busy time after one of those very strong gales, which we, however, did not appreciate. Those Penguins (Hudyptes adeliw) which we met on tle outward voyage have nearly all of them black throats, and so have the myriads on the peninsula at Cape Adare in the early spring. However, I was enabled to solve ADELIA PENGUINS PAIRED. (By permission of Sir George Newnes, Bart.) the question whether the black-throated Penguin is of the same species as the white-throated one or not, later in the season, when the young ones were nearly full-grown. The full-grown young ones had more or less white throats, and no doubt at my first visit to Camp Ridley in 1894, when I found the Penguin colony consisted almost entirely of white-throated birds, they were evidently well advanced young ones. The absence of the black-throated Penguin at that time is easily explained by the fact that the old ones, uncharit- able as it may seem, leave their young ones and go to sea towards the time their offspring should be able to look after themselves. Hence I believe that it had been a somewhat more favourable season for the Penguin colony at the time of my first visit to Cape Adare, as 128 Southern Cross. the date of that visit was much earlier in the season than when the old Penguins left their young ones in 1900. I noticed that the young birds generally found their mothers whenever they wanted food, and soon began to pay visits to their neighbours and mix amongst them; but a mutual understanding seemed to have been arrived at by the old Penguins not to quarrel as much as at the time of love-making. They seemed to realise the necessity of falling into each other’s peculiarities as much as possible. When the old Penguins left, the young ones, being able, like the rest of their kind, to live for a long while without food, remained on shore until starvation forced them to work for their own living, then they too went to sea and left their birthplaces until the next short summer.” Mr. Bernacchi (p. 192) also gives an excellent account of the habits of the Adela Penguin, from which the following extracts have been made :— “The arrival of the small Penguins at Cape Adare presented a most curious appearance. When walking on the rough ice they struttle along upright, but as soon as they reach ice upon which there is some snow, they drop down on their breasts and glide along toboggan fashion, making use of flippers as well as feet. They all travelled alone the same path, which soon became bloodstained from their bleeding feet cut by the projecting pieces of ice. They came from the north and must have travelled at least twenty miles over very rough ice. Some landed upon the pebbly shore at Cape Adare and nearly all at the same spot, but others continued to journey southwards towards the bottom of Robertson Bay, where there was another rookery. It was like an immense army. For fourteen days they came in an absolute unbroken continuation. One day we witnessed the black meandering line of Penguins from the summit of Cape Adare, and could trace it for quite two miles out towards the northern horizon. “They did not in the least hurry themselves, but trudged along steadily in their own phlegmatic way. Their pace was, perhaps, one mile an hour. When approached by anyone they stop and make no attempt to get out of the way, but they shorten their necks and lower their beaks until they assume the appearance of looking down their noses; then they slowly stretch their necks and raise their beaks until they point upwards towards the sky, making at the same time a droll raucous cry, all this with a most ludicrous aspect of indigna- tion, as no doubt they were—profoundly indignant. Sometimes one or more of the most audacious would rush out from among their 20 I Aves. ‘mayong P yun ‘sussayg fo uorssvuwad hg) “ONIATUUVY SNINONGd K 130 Southern Cross. companions and attack you furiously ; on presenting the sole of the foot, booted of course, they peck at it viciously and with such vigour as to leave marks upon the hard frozen leather. They do not give way an inch of ground, but stand up before you erect and deter- mined, | «As to their general habits. On landing they made straight for a certain spot; some to the summit of the Cape, up the snow slope of which they climb with great facility, some to the base of the mountain, and others scattered over the shore. They congregate = ADELIA PENGUINS AND YOUNG. (By permission of Messrs. Hurst & Blackett.) together in communities or social coteries of fifty and upwards. On reaching the spot they immediately start to build their nests, in which work the male as well as the female participates. The nests are crude affairs ; the first operation consists of scratching a small depression in the old guano, then pebbles are carried to it in their bills and piled around, and as soon as it is completed, which takes a day or so, the female sits in it and the male commences his courtship. It was highly amusing to watch their love antics. Some are industrious and pile around many hundreds of small pebbles, others— the lazy ones—were quite proud and delighted with only half-a- Aves. 131 dozen. On approaching the former nests, the occupants generally modestly retreated before the intruder, but on approaching the latter—the lazy ones with absolutely nothing to boast about—they made an enormous fuss and rushed at you to bluff you away with their own prowess! It was laughable to watch how they pilfered stones from each other’s nests; they are most shameless thieves. The thief slowly approaches the one he wishes to rob with a most ereditable air of nonchalance and disinterestedness, and if, on getting close the other looks at him suspiciously, he will immediately gaze around most childlike and bland, and appear to be admiring the scenery. The assumption of innocence is perfect; but no sooner does the other look in a different direction, than he will dart down upon one of the pebbles of its nest and secamper away with it in his beak as fast as his little legs will bear his fat body. If the theft is discovered, the injured party will give chase; then all the kind and sympathetic neighbours rush in and rob to their heart’s desire ! “Woe to the foolish Penguin that rambles about in a restless fashion among the community ; before making his escape outside the circle he will have left behind a large quantity of his plumage, with which the others will feather their nests; he must either have a home, i.¢c., a nest, or keep quiet on the outside of the circle if he wishes to be left alone; that is a sine qua non among them. The females generally fought whilst sitting in the nest by stretching out their necks and pecking at each other’s tongues; but the males fought in the orthodox and picturesque human fashion, with their arms, that is to say, their flippers, and their teeth, that is to say, their beaks. The pugilists stand erect and deal each other resound. ing blows with their flippers, first one and then the other, with astonishing rapidity. When one is knocked down the beak of his opponent is brought into play with no slight effect. The females rise from their nests and try to intervene and separate them, repeatedly getting between the combatants and moving their heads rapidly from side to side in protestation. I have seen the females drive the least attractive fighter right out of the circle, but, quite unabashed, he would at once rush back to his antagonist, and the fray would commence again. ‘These fights lasted as long as a quarter of an hour, in fact, they were not terminated until one was com- pletely conquered. The vanquished bird generally presented a pitiful appearance, being covered with gore and devoid of much of his plumage, and it took him some days to recover his equilibrium. The din that those thousands of Penguins made was deafening, and was like the roar of a vast multitude of people. K 2 122 Southern Cross. “The Antarctic Skua-Gull (Megalestris maccormickt) arrived on the same day as the Penguins, singly at first ; a few days after in great numbers. They are of a light brown colour and measure nearly five feet from tip to tip of the wings. Being of a most predatory nature, they played great havoc among the eggs and young of the Penguin. Indeed, they may be said to live entirely upon them during the breeding season, for, whenever there are Penguins, the Skua-Gulls are not far away. On November the 2nd the Penguins commenced to lay their eggs. Two is the number laid, and an interval of three days elapses between the laying of the first and second egg. They COLLECTING THE EGGS OF THE ADELIA PENGUIN IN THE SPRING. (By permission of Sir George Newnes, Bart.) are white, and average from two to more than three inches in length, and from one and a half to two inches in breadth; some are almost spherical in shape. The shell is thick, and the inside has a greenish tint; the yolk is comparatively small, the contents of the shell being mostly albumen. We collected some 4,000 of these eggs for dietary purposes and packed them in salt. They were a luxurious addition to our larder; being utterly devoid of any strong flavour, they were greatly relished. The poor Penguins, when robbed, looked extremely disconsolate ; however, there was some consolation to be derived from the fact that we were not the only thieves, for the rapacious Skua-Gull would walk up to a Penguin in the most Aves. 133 barefaced manner and extract the ege from underneath it. The eggs took exactly thirty-one days to incubate, the temperature beneath the bird being between 70° and 80° Fahr. An actual observation with a thermometer placed alongside the eggs gave 72° Fahr. “During the period of incubation absolutely no food of any kind was taken, but it was observed that large quantities of snow were frequently consumed. The first young appeared on December 9th. They were quaint little creatures, of a dark slatey colour, darkest towards the head, and with dark feet, and a dark rim around the eye, which, subsequently, changed into the spotless white circle of the ADELIA PENGUINS TURNING THEIR EGGS. (By permission of Sir George Newnes, Bart.) parent bird; they grew very rapidly, the dark legs at birth becoming, in a few days, quite pink. What a spirit of homeliness, peace and industry existed among them. There were no fights now. Indeed, the paterfamilias was much too engrossed to think of fighting ; family responsibilities rested heavily upon him. Poor fellow, he was really to be pitied; he had to work so hard to satisfy the insatiable appetites of the family. Thousands and thousands of ‘bread- winners ’ went fishing each day in the lanes of open water; when filled with crustacea, they return and disgorge into the open mouth of the youngster. This method of feeding the young was interesting. The baby places its head into the open mouth of the parent and 134 Southern Cross. devours the food forced up into the throat. By January 18th nearly all the young birds had discarded their downy coat, and been seduced to the water’s edge and taught how to swim by their ever-attentive parents. Strange to say, all the young birds, unlike the older, had white throats; evidently, they do not acquire the dark throat until the first or second year.” The account given by Dr. Racovitza (¢.c.) is also very entertaining. He writes (p. 24) :—‘“ As often happens with people of small size, this bird is nervous, lively in its movements and passionate. Its little personality, moreover, is full of an extravagant curiosity. As soon as it perceived us appearing on the pack-ice, it approached with the utmost celerity of which it was capable, and on arriving within two or three paces, it regarded us with a curious eye, agitating its wings, and uttering some interrogative interjections. Under ordinary conditions our relations were extremely friendly, but what a change took place when we laid hands on his back! Cries and violent protestations, and blows from his beak and wings fell like hail. “When it is not disturbed or annoyed, this Penguin walks on its two feet, inclining its body alternatively to the right and to the left, but when it wishes to advance quickly, it lies on its stomach and pushes itself with its feet and wings. Seen from a distance, it resembles a small up-to-date motor-car going at full speed. “At the approach of winter, these sensible beasts change their garments. The old dress, which has undergone the vicissitudes of the wear and tear of a year, can no longer serve as a protection against the snow-storms and colds of winter, so at the end of February they have begun to moult. It is a bad time for them to pass through! They cannot go into the water, because their old feathers have fallen off in patches, and the new ones are still too little developed. During the two weeks that the moult lasts the bird is an outcast, and lives on its provision of fat. Moreover, they suffer from the moulting-fever, as babies suffer in cutting their teeth. So to keep company together and for mutual consolation, they assemble in small companies of thirty or forty behind a hummock so as to shelter themselves from the winds, and there they wait, their heads sunk between their shoulders, morose and peevish, till the old plumes take themselves off, and the new ones attain their required length. All this time everything that comes into the neighbourhood of their retreat, be it Bird or be it Seal, is violently cursed and loaded with fierce invectives. I was obliged to admit that we were ourselves not spared in the least, notwithstanding the exalted position which we are supposed to hold in the animal scale.” Aves. Vs Mr. Burn-Murdoch, in his book, ‘From Edinburgh to the Antarctic, has also some notes on the Adelia Penguins. He tells of how a school of Grampuses came down from the northward when they were in the ice off Mount Haddington :—‘ Whales and Penguins fled before them, the Penguins leaping like shoals of Mackerel, and the Finners blowing along in great fright. The Penguins got on to the first ice for safety, and toddled into the centre as fast as their little legs would carry them. To-day we found another black Seal full of fish and Penguins. It is a wonder these birds continue to exist with such powerful and numerous enemies” (pp. 267, 268). On the 1st of January to the north-east of the Danger Islets he met with a “regiment” of Penguins standing at attention at the top of a dome-shaped ice-island in the open sea (p. 272). All this colony were sacrified for the larder. Mr. Burn-Murdoch says that the jumps the Penguins gave out of the water were astonishingly high; three feet seemed to be an easy jump, but he often saw them fail at higher attempts (pp. 272, 273). On the 31st of January, 1893, he writes :—“ Still blowing hard; but we are in splendid shelter behind a long ridge that was piled up last night. It is some thirty feet high—the highest pack that we have seen. The currents and wind have collected it between them; they have piled block upon block, and the new snow has rounded off the points and angles with a smooth white sheet, so that it does not look as if it had only been formed last night. It is amusing to watch the row of Penguins standing on the slope. The wind is driving the falling snow past them, and then blotting them out of sight, but they do not seem to mind in the least, but preen their thin, wiry feathers, apparently in perfect content” (pp. 314, 515). t Dr. Donald, who was on board the Dundee whaling-ship ‘ Active,’ in the Erebus and Terror Gulf, has written an account of the Penguins observed during the voyage (Proc. Roy. Soc., Edinb. xx., pp. 170-176). He writes:—“This bird was met with on making the ice, in the latitude of the S. Shetlands, and about thirty miles off the land (lat. 61° 14’ S., long. 52° 27’ W.); about a dozen or so were seen at a time sitting or lying in twos and threes on the floating cakes of ‘pan-ice.’ Passing further to the southward, and nearing the Danger Islands immediately to the east of Joinville Land, the birds increased greatly in number, and were seen in the water in small schools, or sitting on the ice by tens and twenties. We had ample opportunities of watching the peculiar gait and attitudes of the bird, which he shows in common with all his tribe, and which, indeed, have often been described before. Standing absolutely erect, 136 Southern Cross. he supports himself on the tripod feet and tail; as he waddles along, with his feet, as it were, tied together, and trying to balance himself by vigorous movements of his flippers, his tail cuts a deep furrow in the snow, broken at intervals as he half loses his balance and sways forwards; hurrying on, he soon loses his balance altogether and topples forward on his breast, in which attitude he progresses at an even more rapid pace, the flippers being used alternately as paddles, and the feet pushing behind, the tail in this posture not touching the ground. In the water his modes of progression are also two: usually he is seen to swim under water in a prolonged dive, broken at intervals of about thirty yards, as he rises for breath, leaping clean out of the water to the height of perhaps a foot, and immediately disappearing with scarcely a ripple, after clearing a space of 2 to 24 feet. Swimming in this way, the feet remain motionless, and only the flippers act as powerful paddles; in this manner the bird shoots along with great rapidity. The other mode of swimming develops but a slow pace ; floating on the surface like a Cormorant, he swims in the ordinary way by means of his webbed feet, his wings remain- ing idle. On leaving the water for the ice, he shoots straight up from below the surface, and lands in an erect position ; in this way he can jump on to a piece of ice as much as 24 feet above the water-line. “In Lieutenant Spry’s notes on the voyage of the ‘Challenger, he states, as the result of an experiment, that a Penguin perished on being held under the water for the space of one and a half minutes. To test this statement I repeated the experiment, and held a Penguin below the surface for the space of six minutes. At the end of two nunutes, among other violent struggles, convulsive pumping move- ments of the chest occurred; these were repeated at the end of four and a half minutes, and again immediately before I released the bird. Though considerably exhausted, it recovered satisfactorily, and was set at liberty half an hour afterwards. To account for this dis- crepancy in the two results, | may say that I carefully excluded water from the lungs by compressing the trachea, whereas in Lieutenant Spry’s experiment the bird was simply lowered below the surface in a lobster creel. “On one occasion (January 5th), in the north of the Erebus and Terror Gulf, we had an opportunity of seeing the birds swimming in large schools of from 200 to 300, the movements of the school being controlled by a single individual which followed in the rear, and which appeared to be of larger size, though we could not approach close enough to determinate its characters. When first seen, at a Aves. 137 distance of about 2000 yards, the school nearest the ship were leaping and diving noisily; on a croak from the leader this noisy sport instantly ceased, and the whole school swam quietly along for several minutes; in response to another and slightly altered croak, the leaping and diving recommenced; and on a third croak, the whole school disappeared in a prolonged dive. “On the evening of the same day we saw on a piece of ice, some eight or ten miles to the south-east, about forty black-throated Penguins grouped round a pair of large Penguins of a different species, possibly identical with those that had directed the schools. One of these was preserved, and is an Emperor Penguin in young plumage. On the same piece of ice was a Chionis and a Seal. It was found over and over again, from inspection of the Seal’s stomach, that the Penguins form the main portion of their diet, but at the same time the Penguins while on the ice show no fear of the Seals; and it is, therefore, probable that they are captured while in the water or during the night. The Seals mostly come upon the ice about nine o'clock in the morning, and leave it to feed about seven in the evening. “Three Penguin rookeries were seen in Joinville Land. Two of these were not visited; the other, a very large one, belonged to this species, and was situated on the north shore of the new inlet named by Captain Robertson the Firth of Tay, in lat. 63° 16'S., long. 55° 53’ W. I had not the good fortune to land upon this rookery. According to the boat’s crew who did so, the birds were in countless multitudes ; the nests were crowded together in blocks formed by pathways running nearly at right angles to one another, and the birds were uniformly of the same species. Two eggs from the rookery measured 2°5 by 2 inches, and 2°6 by 2°1 inches. “The ery is seldom heard, and mostly at night or when the birds are disturbed; it is a short, rather harsh ‘quaugk. Among them- selves, when undisturbed, they make a gentle crooning sound. Their food consists mainly of a rather large red shrimp, or rather Schizopod, of the genus Huphausia, and the stomachs frequently contained a number of pebbles. “The black-throated Penguin was seen as far south as lat. 64° 50’, and I have no doubt extended much farther. Within thirty miles of the land they were fairly numerous, but at a greater distance from shore, even in the midst of abundant ice of the same character, they became scarce, and only very few were seen ninety miles from the land.” The eggs of the Adelia Penguin are of a chalky nature, white 138 Southern Cross. with a tinge of green. The ground-colour of the egg beneath the chalky surface seems to be a pale bluish-green. As incubation proceeds, the eggs become stained and smeared with green and with brown. The shape varies from almost perfectly round to a lengthened and biconical form. The dimensions, therefore, vary considerably, the extremes in a series of fourteen clutches being 2°2 x 2°35 and 3°02) 2°35 imehes: MEGADYPTES, Milne-Edwards. MEGADYPTES ANTIPODUM. Catarrhactes antipodes, Hombr. and Jacq., Ann. Sci. Nat. (2), XVI, p. 820 (1841, Auckland Islands). Eudyptes antipodes, Gray, Voy. ‘ Hrebus’ and ‘ Terror, p. 17 (1845, Auckland and Campbell Islands, New Zealand). Aptenodytes flavilarvata, Peale, U.S. Expl. Exped., p. 260 (1848, Auckland Islands). Eudyptes antipodum, Buller, B. N. Zeal., p. 346 (1878, South Isl., N.Z.); Sharpe, Voy. ‘Hrebus’ and ‘ Terror, App., p. 35, pl. 27 (1875); Buller, B. N. Z., 2nd ed., II., ». 294, pl. 46, fig. 1 (1888); Scl., P Z. S. (1891), p. 121 (New Zealand). Megadyptes antipodum, Ogilvie Grant, Cat. B. Brit. Mus, XXVI, p 644 (1898, New Zealand, Auckland and Campbell Islands), Nos. 7, 8, 6, Campbell Island, June 18th, 1899. Noro, 9 ade Pe » dune 19th, 1899. Non wOs gn o June 20th, 1899. These birds were obtained by Captain Jensen during the cruise of the ship during the winter, when the ‘Southern Cross’ was absent from Cape Adare. The old female seems to resemble the male in every respect, excepting that the yellow on the head and nape is paler, and the sides of the face are browner with very little yellow. The light brown throat-mark is paler and not so strongly pronounced. In the young bird the throat is entirely white, and there is a little yellow on the cheeks and on the eyebrow, but no complete circle round the nape. Aves. 139 Orper PROCELLARITFORMES OCEANITIS, Keys. u. Blas. OCEANITES OCEANICUS. Procellaria oceanica, Kuhl., Beitr., p. 136 (1820), ex Banks’s Icon., no. 12. Oceanites oceanicus, Sharpe, Phil. Trans., CLXVIII. (extra vol.), p. 182 (1879, Louis Philippe Island, Royal Sound, Kerguelen Island) ; Racovitza, Vie des Animaux, p. 42 (1900); Borchgrevink, First on Antarctic Continent, p. 54 (1901, lat. 61° 56’S., long. 153° 53! E.), p. 64 (in the pack-ice, Jan. 3, 1899), p. 218 (Victoria Land, breeding, Nov.), p. 231 (eggs obtained, Robertson Bay, Dec. 10); Bernacchi, South Polar Regions, p. 204 (1901, South Victoria Land), p. 315 (Cape Adare) ; Howard Saunders, Antarctic Manual, p. 235 (1901); Hanson, antea, pp. 85-88. No. 64, L. @ ad. Killed on the pack-ice, 63° A Sale 1602 16: E.L., Jan. 2nd, 1899. Iris dark brown; bill black; feet black; webs yellow [vide supra, p. 85]. No. 65, L. ¢ ad. Killed on the pack-ice, 63° ASMA G76: E.L., Jan. 8th, 1899. Soft parts as above [vide supra, p. 86]. Nos. 78, 79, L. @ ad. Killed on the pack-ice, 65° selec Oil Soft parts as above [vide supra, p. 87]. No. 81, L. . Killed on the pack-ice, 66° 43’ S.L., 166° Bil! aki, Jan. 19th, 1899 [vide supra, p. 88]. a. b.c.d.e. & ad. Cape Adare. Dec. 13th, 1889. (HZ. B. Evans.) f. 9% ad. As Mr. Howard Saunders points out, the breeding-place of Wilson’s Petrel is undoubtedly in the southern area of the globe, and the occurrences of the species in higher latitudes take place after the nesting-season when the bird migrates in the direction of the equator, and occurs sometimes off the coasts of Great Britain and North America. I copy the following from Mr. Saunders’ article in the ‘Antaretic Manual’:—* This bird is not much larger than our familiar ‘Mother Carey’s Chicken, from which, as from any other of the small blackish Petrels, it can be distinguished by its unusually long legs, and the bright yellow colour of the webs between the toes. It was observed by Dr. McCormick hovering, like a Swallow or Martin, over the mast-heads of the ‘ Erebus’ when in the pack ; and, on the third attempt to go southwards, examples (now in the British Museum) were obtained off Louis Philippe Land in January, 1845. 140 Southern Cross. These birds were evidently incubating at no great distance, as their breasts were bare of feathers. Surgeon Webster, of H.ML.S. ‘ Chan- ticleer, refers to the abundance of this species at Deception Island, one of the South Shetlands; and I venture to surmise that this may be the small Petrel which the German expedition found breeding at the end of December, 1882, on South Georgia, and which is called O. melanogaster by Steinen. The ‘Belgica’ obtained specimens in Gerlache Strait in January, 1898, as well as in the pack at about 70° S. and 87° W. in January, 1899. The ‘ Challenger’ Expedition secured several off the ice-barrier in February, 1874, and examples were obtained on the ‘Southern Cross’ Expedition between 63° — 66° S. and 161° — 166° E. The first breeding-place definitely made known, however, in Kerguelen Island, where the bird was discovered by the Rev. A. E. Eaton, the naturalist to the ‘ Zransit of Venus’ Expedition in 1874-5. He found the single egg belonging to each pair of birds, laid in January or February, in some crevice or hole among shattered rocks or large boulders ; the egg, as usual with the Petrels, being of a dull white colour, with minute purplish-red spots tending to form a zone at the broader end; measurements, 1-3 by 0:9 in. Subsequently, Mr. R. Hall has contributed some interesting details on the breeding of this, as well as other species, on Kerguelen. Both sexes, he says, take turns at incubation, and about 8 P.M. the ‘night shift’ comes in from the sea to go on duty, when the relief is marked by loud croakings; and few birds are to be seen over the land in the day-time. After the breeding-season, Wilson’s Petrel wanders widely, and, owing to the fact that it has been often observed on the coasts of Western Europe, including the British Islands, as well as on those of America up to Labrador, some ornithologists have assumed that it bred on the islands of the North Atlantic. Of this there is not the slightest proof; on the contrary, some of the birds obtained between the spring and autumn of our Northern Hemisphere are in moult.” In My. Hanson’s ‘ Diary’ he records the present species as occur- ring on the 5th of October, 1898, when the ‘ Southern Cross’ was in Lat. 27° 27' S., Long. 23° 33’ W. He mentions Black Petrels again on the voyage out, but some of these may have been Hregetta melanogoster. Wilson’s Petrel was met with on reaching the ice- pack on December 30th, 1898 (Lat. 61° 56! 1S; Ihonernlpa- to5/oh) and again on the 31st, as well as on various dates in January, 1899, After the 30th he does not seem to have noticed the species till the ship approached Victoria Land, on the 15th of February. By the 7th of March it was getting scarce, and was only seen singly. On the 9th Aves. 141 of March he makes the interesting note respecting Wilson’s Petrel flying round the house like a Swift, as he had observed it doing round the ship on the voyage out (vide supra, p. 94). As will be seen by the list of specimens, the species was observed by Mr. Evans near Cape Adare on the 13th of December, 1899, and half a dozen were preserved. Mr. Borchgrevink likewise records the curious habit of Wilson’s Petrel “ flying round the vessel several times, sometimes straight into the rigging” (p. 54), as noticed by Mr. Hanson (supra, p. 94). He writes (p. 218): “The Occanites oceanicus also hatched on Victoria Land. I found their nests in the cracks of the rocks, under stones and boulders. Although we secured eges from them, we got no live young ones; but from the multitude of the dead young ones in their old nests, I should say that very many perish every year. Like the rest of the Petrels, they always spat out the yeliow, evil-smelling oil from their beaks when in danger. I caught several of them on their nests, and found that they behaved very much like the Pagodroma nivea, the elegant White Petrel, the life of which interested me even more than that of the Penguins.” It is to be regretted that no eggs of Wilson’s Petrel were brought home by the ‘Southern Cross, nor have any of the “ very valuable photos of these birds on their nests ” (cf. p. 251) been reproduced in Mr. Borchgrevink’s book, or been submitted to me. My. Bernacchi (p. 315) says that the present species was found nearly as far south as the Great Ice Barrier, and it bred high up on the mountain sides of South Victoria Land. He adds: “The eggs were very large for the size of the bird, and, strange to say, as many as five were found in the same nest. Mr. Evans, who had found the eggs of these birds on Kerguelen Island, assured us that this Petrel never laid more than one egg, so how five eggs came to be in the same nest is not very obvious. I may add, however, that the eggs were not all fresh when found.” FREGETTA, Bp. FREGETTA MELANOGASTER. Thalassidroma melanogaster, Gould, Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist., XIIL., p. 367 (1844, South Pacific and Indian Oceans); id. B. Austr., VII., pl. 62 (1847, Cape Lagullas). Fregetta melanogaster, Gigl., Faun. Vert. Oceano, p. 38 (1870) ; Salvin, P. Z.S., 1878, p. 736 (Betsy Cove, Kerguelen); Saunders, P. Z. 8., 1880, p. 164 (lat. 36° 57’ S., long. 40° 41’ E,); Buller, B. N. Zeal., 2nd ed., II., p. 249 142 Southern Cross. (1888); Wiglesw., Abh. K. Zool. Mus., Dresd., 1892, No. 6, p. 79; Sharpe, Hand-list B., L., p. 122 (1899). Oceanitis tropica (Gould); Sharpe, Phil. Trans. CLXVIII. (extra vol.), p- 180 (1879). Cymodroma melanogaster, Salvin, Cat. B. Brit. Mus., XXV., p. 364 (1896) ; Hanson in Borcher., First on Antarctic Cont., App., p. 821 (1901). Cymodroma grallaria, Hanson, supra, p. 83; Borchgr., First on Antarctic Cont., p. 54. No. 33 F, 9 ad. 35, 6 ad. [Cape Seas] 42° 23'S.L., 20° 32’ E.L., Oct. 24th, 1898. Iris dark brown ; bill, feet, and webs black. (WV. Hanson.) The first specimens of this species were observed on the 13th of October, 1898, and five were obtained on the 24th of that month, the day when Mr. Hanson and the other officers of the ‘ Southern Cross’ shot a large number of Petrels (vide supra, p. 81). These five specimens are recorded in Mr. Hanson’s private list given over to me by Mr. Borchgrevink, as two males and three females, but a single pair alone has reached me. The species is again mentioned by Mr. Hanson as having been noticed on the 30th of December, when the ‘ Southern Cross’ reached the ice-pack, but he says that it left the ship before they sighted the ice. Mr. Borchgrevink (p. 54) gives a list of the birds observed on this date, which not only agrees with that in Mr. Hanson’s ‘ Diary,’ but includes the present species, which is wrongly named Cymo- droma grallaria, in both instances. PRIOFINUS, Hombr. and Jacq. PRIOFINUS CINEREUS. Procellaria cinerea, Gm., Syst. Nat., I., p. 563 (1788); Milne Edwards and Grandid, Hist. Madag. Ois., p. 671 (1885). Priofinus cinereus, Gigl., Faun. Vert. Oceano, p. 34 (1870); Baird, Brewer and tidgway, Water Birds, N. Amer., IL., p. 875 (1884); Salv., Cat. B. Brit. Mus., XXV., p 390 (1896); Sharpe, Hand-list B., I, p. 124 (1899). Adamastor cinereus, Salvin, P. Z.8., 1878, p. 737 (South Pacific); Saunders, P. Z. S., 1880, p. 164 (lat. 85° 20’ S., long. 9° 43’ E.); Buller, B. N. Zeal., 2nd ed., II., p. 241 (1888). Puffinus, Hanson in, Borchgr., First on Antarctic Continent, p. 821 (1901). Nos. 21, 22, 9 ad. 39° 55'S.L., 3° 16’ E.L. [Cape Seas]. Oct. 19th, 1898. Tris dark brown ; bill horn-colour, yellowish on upper mandible, from nostrils to tip ; feet, including webs, grey. (NV. Hanson.) Aves. 143 Nes! 23, 24, 6. 25, 9 ad: 42° 23! S.1L., 20° 32’ EL, Oct. 24th, £S98.. (AV FL.) All the five specimens recorded above have been examined by me. Two were caught on the 19th of October, 1898, and Mr. Hanson thought that he had procured Pufinus kuhli (vide supra, p. 81). He says that the Pufinus (P. kuhli?) captured on this date were “ashy-grey on the body, but for the rest exactly like Pufinus major.” Three more specimens were obtained on the 24th of October with the mass of Petrels of different kinds obtained on that day. On the 25th they were “about in hundreds” (see Hanson App. to Borch- grevink’s book, p. 321) (vide supra, p. 81). THALASSGCA, Reichenb. THALASS@CA ANTARCTICA. Procellaria antarctica, Gm., Syst. Nat., I, p. 565 (1788). Thalassceca antarctica, Coues, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci., Philad., 1866, pp. 31, 192; Salv., P. Z. S., 1878, p. 737 (Ice Barrier, Jan.); Buller, B. N. Zeal., 2nd ed., p. 229 (1888) ; Sel., ‘Zbis, 1894, p. 498 (Antarctic ice-barrier, Feb.) ; Salvin, Cat. B. Brit. Mus., XXV., p. 392 (1896); Sharpe, Hand-list B., I., p. 125 (1899); Racovitza, Vie des Animaux Antarct., p. 18 (1900); Saunders, Antarctic Manual, Birds, pp. 229, 286 (1901); Bernacchi, 8. Polar Regions, pp. 62, 315 (1901). Priocella antarctica, Sharpe, Voy. ‘ Hrebus’ and ‘ Terror, App., p. 37, pl. 33 (1875). Brown-backed Petrel, Borchgrevink, First Antarctic Cont., pp. 55, 64, 120, 220, 226 (1901); Hanson, antea, pp. 84, 86, 87, 93, 94, 95, 98, 104. AQ ia ue) ade) Pack-icey 62° 52> S21, 159°°29" EL., Dee: 3st, 1898. Iris dark brown ; bill brown; feet and webs light grey. 501. 6 ad. Ditto ditto. (H. B. Evans.) ole) 6. ad: Ditto ditto. (NV. Hanson.) a. 6 ad. Cape Adare. April 27th, 1899. The last specimen is much darker than the other three, especially on the throat, where the colour is dark brown, even on to the sides of the fore-neck. | Of the range of the Antarctic Petrel, Mr. Howard Saunders gives the following account :—“ It was found by the ‘ Hrebus’ and ‘ Terror’ Expedition as far as Lat. 77° 49’ S. in Long. 181° 10’ E. It seems to occur along the ice-border, but I cannot find any definite account of 144 Southern Cross. its breeding-places. This species, which seems to be the “ Aglet ” or “ Kaglet ” of Weddell and early explorers, has the upper surface brown, and has twelve tail-feathers.” The first specimens met with by the ‘ Southern Cross’ were observed by Mr. Hanson on the 30th of December, 1898, when the ship entered the ice-pack; it is the “dark-coloured” bird mentioned by him (supra, p. 83). On Jan. 10th (supra, p. 86), he records that the “ brown-backed bird,” which was so common on the outer edge of the ice, had not been seen since the 6th of this month. The ‘Southern Cross’ was then fast in the ice-pack; but on the 18th of January, when the ship “moved into tolerably clear water,” he saw some birds, more, in fact, than he had seen for many days past, and among them was one of the Brown-backed Petrels. On Feb. 10 he writes: “None of the ordinary kinds of birds have been very numerous; only once in a while a single individual of the Brown- backed Petrel has been about. No Penguins” (p. 93). At this date the ‘ Southern Cross,’ after having been forty days in the pack (see Bernacchi, p. 61), was heading northward for the open sea again, in order to enter the pack further to the eastward. On the 12th and 13th of February, when the ship had regained the open sea, the Brown-backed Petrel was again observed in Lat. 65° 33'8., Long. 165° 48’ E. Hanson says that a number of them were seen on an iceberg, which had lately capsized. On the 14th the ship re-entered the pack, which was then traversed in six hours (¢f. Bernacchi, p. 61), and on the 15th, when there was a hurricane, and the ship was hove to off Victoria Land, Hanson records having seen “large numbers of the Brown-backed Petrel, as many as a hundred birds in a flock” (supra, p. 93). The species was again noticed on the 24th of April, off Cape Adare, when numbers were seen fishing in the mashed-up ice (supra, p- 98); one was shot on the 27th. The bird was once more seen on the 3rd of September, outside the house at Cape Adare (swpra, p. 104). Mr. Bernacchi (p. 315) says that 7. antarctica was found as far south as Lat. 78° S. At Cape Adare they were seen early in November, flying in large flocks towards the south. Mr. Borchgrevink also states that he saw one of these birds on the 5th of May (p. 120). His notes on the species are as follows:—“ The Brown-backed Petrel, with white borders on the wings, was also evidently nesting on Victoria Land, but we never found it on its nest. When we first approached Cape Adare, dense flocks of them sailed about in the gales. During the summer we saw few of them, but in the autumn they again sailed about in the air, at great heights, while during the gales Aves. 145 they swept low over the peninsula like a cloud. Although I never found them on Geikie Land, I believe that they have their nests in that vicinity.” On the 25th November, 1899, he says that a heavy gale started from the S.E. . . . and that large flocks of Brown-backed Petrels pierced the air (p. 226). Dr. Racovitza (p. 18) says that this species was a rare visitor to the ‘Belgica.’ PRIOCELLA, Hombr. and Jacq. PRIOCELLA GLACIALOIDES. Procellaria glacialoides, Smith, Il. Zool. S. Afr. Aves., pl. 51 (1840); Gould, B, Austr., VII, pl. 48 (1848); Buller, B. N. Zeal., p. 801 (1873); Moseley, Notes Nat. ‘ Challenger, p. 134 (1879, Tristan da Cunha), Thalassceca glacialoides, Coues, Proc. Nat. Sci., Philad., 1866, p. 393; Gigl., Faun. Vert. Oceano, p, 47 (1870); Salvin, P. Z. S., 1878 (ice-barrier, Feb.) ; Moseley, Notes Nat. Chall., p. 253 (1879, edge of pack ice); Buller, B. N. Zeal., 2nd ed., II., p. 228 (1888); Bernacchi, 8. Polar Regions, p. 315 (1901) ; Saunders, Antarctic Manual, pp. 280, 236 (1901). Thalassceca tenuinostris, Sharpe, Phil. Trans. CLX VIII. (extra vol.), p. 123 (1879, Kerguelen Isl.), Priocella glacialoides, Baird, Brewer, and Ridgw., Water Birds, N. Amer., II., p. 373 (1884); Salvin, Cat, B. Brit. Mus. XXV., p. 393 (1896); Sharpe, Hand-list B., 1., p. 125 (1899). Tagalassoica glacialoides, Borchgrevink, First on Antarctic Cont., pp. 65, 66 (1901). Silver Petrel, Hanson, /. s. ¢., pp. 86, 87, 90, 92, 93. Nos. 52, 54 K. 9 ad. Shot om the pack-ice, 62° 52’ SL, [oooh ie eos ho dg ad. Dec. sist, 1898: Iris brown; bill flesh-colour, tip and nostrils grey ; feet pale grey, webs flesh-colour. No. 62 K. 6 ad. Shot on the pack-ice, 63° 40’ S.L., 160° 36’ E.L., Jan. 4th, 1899. Nos. '73,74,75 K. ¢@. ‘72,76,77 K. @ ad. Shot.on the pack- ice, 65° 3’ S8.L., 161° 42! E.L., Jan. 12th, 1899. a. 6 ad. Shot on the pack-ice, Feb. 6th, 1899. Of this Silver-grey Petrel, Mr. Howard Saunders writes as follows (‘ Antarctic Manual,’ p. 230):—“The range of this species extends along the Pacific coast of America, occasionally as far north as Washington Territory, and also to the Cape Seas; while Kerguelen Island seems to be a breeding-place, although I am not aware of any authenticated eges. It reaches the ice-barrier, and a specimen was L 146 Southern Cross. obtained by the ‘ Belgica’ just before her escape from the pack-ice, on March 14th, 1899, in Lat. 70° 40’ S., and Long. 102° W.; while the ‘Challenger’ brought back one example, taken on the edge of the pack, in about 66° S. Lat., on the 14th of February, 1874.” This species is doubtless one of the “ three new species of birds ” which met the ‘ Southern Cross,’ when the ship entered the pack-ice on the 30th of December (supra, p. 83). On the 31st (supra, p. 84) Mr. Hanson shot several specimens of the Silver Petrel, which, as he truly observes, is very like the Fulmar (Fulmarus glacialis) of the northern seas. While laying fast in the ice, he shot a number of specimens on the 11th and 12th of January (supra, pp. 86, 87), and again on the 30th (p. 91). Two were shot by him on the 6th of February (p. 92); and he saw the species again on the 12th of that month, when the ‘ Southern Cross’ returned to the open sea, before making a second endeavour to get through the pack-ice. Mr. Borchgrevink (p. 65) speaks of this species as being, next to Pagodroma, the best represented in the pack-ice. “ They were always seen swimming about in the open spaces in the ice, seeking food, which mainly consisted of crustacea. Only in a few instances a very small fish, like a Herring in shape, has been found in them.” MAJAQUEUS, Reichenb. MAJAQUEUS AQUINOCTIALIS. Procellaria sequinoctialis, Linn., Syst. Nat., I., p. 213 (1766); Moseley, Notes Nat. Chall., p. 187 (1879, Tristan da Cunha); Milne-Edwards and Grand., Hist. Madag. Ois., p. 671 (1885). Procellaria conspicillata, Gould, B. Austr., VIL, pl. 46 (1848). Majaqueus zquinoctialis, Coues, Proc. Nat. Sci., Philad., 1864, pp. 118, 142; Gigl., Faun. Vert. Oceano, p. 35 (1870); Salvin, in Rowley’s Orn. Misc., L., p. 282 (1876); Sharpe, Phil. Trans., CLX VIII. (extra vol.), p. 119 (1879, Royal Sound, Kerguelen); Moseley, Notes Nat. Chall. p. 208 (1879, Kerguelen), p. 254 (edge of pack ice); Saunders, P. Z. S., 1880, p. 164 (lat. 29° 45’—84° 39’ 8., long. 8° 51’ E.); Sharpe, P. Z. 8., 1881, p. 12 (Valparaiso); Salvin, Cat. B, Brit, Mus., XXV., p. 395 (1896); Sharpe, Hand- list B,. L., p. 125 (1899). Majaqueus conspicillatus, Coues, Proc. Acad, Nat. Sci., Philad., 1864, pp. 118, 142; Gould, Handb. B. Austr., IL, p. 445 (1865); Gigl., Faun. Vert. Oceano, p. 86 (1870). Cape Hen. Hanson, /. s. ¢., pp. 81, 82. 960. gad. 42° 23’S.L., 20° 32’ EL., Oct. 24th, 1898. Iris dark brown; bill yellow; feet and webs black. ‘This specimen has a patch of white feathers in the middle of the abdomen. Aves. 147 37,380. 6 9 ad. 44°23'S.L, 72° 5 E.L., Nov. 7th, 1898. 400. 9 ad. 44° 23'S.L., 72° 5’ E.L. Soft parts as above. This large Petrel was first obtained in the Cape Seas on the 24th of October, 1898; and, on the voyage to Hobart Town, as many as eight specimens were obtained on Noy. 7th and 8th in Lat. 44° 23' S., Long. 72° 5’ E.; of these, three appear to have been preserved (supra, p. 82). Mr. Hanson also records the species as having been seen about the ship from Nov. 13th to the 18th; but by the 25th of that month he remarks that they had nearly all disappeared (p. 82). GSTRELATA, Bp. CESTRELATA MOLLIS. Procellaria mollis, Gould, Ann. and Mag. N. H., XIII, p. 363 (1844); id., B. Austr., VII, pl. 50 (1848); Layard, Zbis, 1862, p. 98 (lat. 44° S., long. 188° E.), 1872, p. 337 (lat. 8° 40’ N., long. 34° 31’ W.); Newton, bis, 1863, p. 186 (Madeira), 1868, p. 340. #Estrelata mollis, Coues, I'roc. Acad, Nat. Sci., Philad., 1866, pp. 150, 170; Gould, Handb, B, Austr., IL, p. 453 (1865); Gigl., Faun. Vert. Oceano, p, 42 (1870). Gistrelata mollis, Salvin, Zbis, 1877, p. 480; id., P. Z. S., 1878, p. 7388 (Nightingale Island); Sharpe, Phil. Trans., CLXVIII., p, 128 (1879); E. L. and L. C. Layard, Ibis, 1882, p. 539 (New Caledonia, Feb., breeding); Dalgleish, Zbis, 1890, p. 886 (Porto Santo); Salvin, Cat. B. Brit. Mus., XXV., p. 406 (1896), CGistrelata philippi, Saunders (nec Gray), P. Z. 8., 1880, p. 164 (South Trinidad Island), No. 36G. 9 ad. 42° 23’S.L., 20° 32’ E.L., Oct. 24th, 1898. Iris dark brown; bill black ; feet and web grey. The single specimen obtained forms part of the great capture of Petrels of Oct. 24th, 1898, all of which Mr. Hanson had prepared by the 27th of the month (supra, pp. 81, 82). This was probably the species which followed the ship on Oct. 6th and 16th (swpra, p. 81). 1 After leaving Hobart Town, Mr. Hanson (supra, p. 83) records some “ white- headed Petrels” as seen on the 24th of December, and it is doubtless this bird which he calls istrelata lessoni, on December 30th. The latter species, he says, left them on their approach to the ice-pack. Mr. Borchgrevink has a similar record (p. 54). No specimen of (2. lessont appears to have been secured. L 2 148 Southern Cross. CESTRELATA BREVIROSTRIS. Procellaria brevirostris, Less., Traité d’Orn., p, 611 (1828). Gistrelata brevirostris, Salvin, in Rowley’s Orn. Misc., L., p. 235 (1876); id., P. Z. §., 1878, p. 788; Sharpe, Phil. Trans., CLXVIII. (extra vol.), p. 124 (1879, Royal Sound, Kerguelen); Salv., Voy. ‘Challenger, H., Birds, p. 145 (1881); id., Cat. B. Brit. Mus., XXV., p. 409 (1896); Sharpe, Hand-list B., I., p. 126 (1899). No. 27D. 9. 42° 23'S.L., 20° 32’ E.L., Oct. 24th, 1898. Iris dark brown; bill grey; feet and webs black. Only one specimen was obtained, in the Cape seas on the 24th of October, the day when the officers of the ‘ Southern Cross’ captured so many Petrels of different kinds. PAGODROMA, Bp. PAGODROMA NIVEA. (Plate X., figs. 1-3.) Procellaria nivea, Gm., Syst. Nat., I., p. 562 (1788); Cassin, U.S. Expl. Exped., p- 415, pl. 42 (1858, lat. 64° 8., long. 104° W.). Pagodroma nivea, Cones, Proc. Ac. Nat. Sci., Philad.. 1866, pp. 160, 171; Sharpe, Voy. ‘ Hrebus’ and ‘ Terror, App., p. 37, pl. 84 (1875); Salvin, P. Z.8., 1878, p. 737 (ice-barrier); Moseley, Notes Nat. ‘Challenger, p. 253 (1879, Antarctic ice-pack) ; Salvin, Cat. B. Brit. Mus., XXV., p. 419 (1896); Forbes, Bull. Liverp. Mus., IL, pp. 48-50 (1:99); Racovitza, Vie des Animaux Antarct., p. 17 (1900); Saunders, Antarctic Manual, p. 229 (1901); Borch- grevink, First on Antarct. Cont., pp. 64, 219, 228, 226, 230, 239; Bernacchi, S. Polar Regions, p. 226 (1901); Hanson, antea, pp. 84, 85, 86, 91, 92, 93, 94, 96, 98, 99, 100, 102, 104. 45 H. g ad. Pack-ice, 62° 52’ S.L., 159° 25’ B.L, Dec: aist, 1898. (N. Hanson.) Wing 11°8. Iris dark brown ; bill black ; feet and webs grey. 47 H. g ad. Pack-ice, 62° 52' S.L., 159° 25’ E.L., Dec. 31st, 1898.. Wing 11°6. 48H. g . Pack-ice, 62° 62’ SL, 159° 25' HAL Dee. Silat: 1898. Wing 10°3. 57 H. ¢ ad. Pack-ice, 63° 27' S.L., 160° 6' E.L., Jan. Ist, 1899. Wing 11°8. 59 H. 9 ad. Pack-ice, 63° 27’ 'S.L., 160° 6’ E.L., Jan. Ist, 1899: Wine w=: 63 H. ¢ ad. Pack-ice, 64 8 Sil, 160°.52' BL Jan 5, 1899! Wing 11°5. Aves. 149 68 H. 9 ad. Pack-ice, 65° 3’ S.L., 161° 42’ E.L, Jan. 12th, 1899. (NV. Hanson.) Wing 11°8. a. 9 ad. Cape Adare, April 27th, 1899. Wing 10°6. b. 2 ad. Cape Adare, April 28th, 1899. Wing 9°9. ce. 6 ad. Cape Adare, April 29, 1899. Wing 10°6. d. 9 ad. Cape Adare, April 30th. (4. B. Evans.) Wing 9°8. e. @ ad. Cape Adare, Dec. 13th, 1899. (2. B. Evans.) Wing 10°6. fog. 6 aa. Deer loth, 1899) (A.B. Evans.) Wing 10-1. The difference in size between specimens of the Ice Petrel is somewhat remarkable, and at first I thought that there must be two species of Pagodroma, as the size of the bill is so much less in certain individuals, and the length of the wing varies also. I have therefore given the dimensions of the latter in the series of specimens brought home by the ‘ Southern Cross, and it will be seen that this variation in the length of wing is not due to any difference of sex, as in the males it ranges from 10°1 to 11°8 inches, and in the females from 9°8 to 11°8 inches. The eggs are white, and measure :—Axis 2°01 to 2°38; diameter 1°35 to i 67. , Mr. Howard Saunders gives the following concise account of the range of this species :—“ This bird has been obtained as far north as the Falkland Islands, but it does not occur in any numbers until Lat. 60° S. is passed, whence it can be traced as far southward as man has penetrated. Every expedition has noticed it. Ross found it laying its bluish-white egg, measuring 2*2 by 1:6 inches, among the crevices of the cliffs at Cockburn Island ; Surgeon Webster, of H.M.S. ‘ Chanticleer, met with the bird from January to March on Deception Island, South Shetlands; and the German expedition found it nesting at the end of December on South Georgia. From the Enderby Quadrant it has not yet been recorded.” The Ice Petrel was first seen by Mr. Hanson (supra, p. 84) on the 31st of December, 1898, directly the ship got into the pack-ice, and four specimens were preserved on that day. On the 1st of January, 1899, no less than fifteen of these birds were killed, and some were preserved. On most days in this month he seems to have noticed the species (supra, pp. 85, 86). On the 30th and 31st, when the ‘Southern Cross’ was still in the pack-ice, Mr. Hanson procured some more specimens (p. 91). On the way north towards the open sea, he records having seen a few Ice Petrels sitting resting on the ice on the 9th of February, but they do not appear to have been seen after leaving the pack (p. 93). They were again found off Victoria Land 150 Southern Cross. on the 15th of February among the large flocks of Thalasswca antaretica (p. 93), but they were not often seen near Cape Adare when the party first landed. One is recorded on the 4th of March, and another on the 31st (pp. 94,96). On the 13th of April, however, a number were seen by Mr. Hanson (p. 97), and several were obtained by himself and Mr. Evans near Cape Adare towards the end of the month (see list of specimens). On the 24th of April, Mr. Hanson says that a gale was blowing and he saw a number of Ice Petrels fishing in the mashed-up ice (p. 98), and again on the 26th he writes :—“To-night, at 9 p.m., I heard, just above my head, a bird cry four or five times. The note sounded like ‘kaw-kaw. It was too dark to see the bird, but it was the cry of the Pagodroma. I had heard it before on the 30th of last month” (p. 98). Twelve specimens were procured on the 10th of May by Mr. Hanson and Mr. Evans (p. 99). The species was now apparently more scarce, as a single specimen is recorded as having been seen on May 15th (p. 100), and again on June 17th (p. 102). Mr. Hanson’s last note is on the 13th of September, 1899 :—“ Yesterday they observed some Pagodroma nivea on Duke of York Island. They kept about 1,000 feet up in the mountain, and when they flew, they played about in pairs, incessantly giving vent to the before-mentioned sound ‘kaw-kaw, but they were perfectly silent when sitting on the rocks ” (p. 104). Mr. Borchgrevink writes (p. 64):—“ Since we entered the ice, we were met by quite a different bird-life to that we had seen in the open sea. Pagodroma nivea and Tagalassoica [lege Thalasseca] glacialoides were best represented. They were always seen swimming about in the open spaces in the ice, seeking food which mainly consisted of crustacea. Only in a few instances a very small fish, like a herring in shape, has been found in them.” He noticed the species from time to time soaring about the peninsula at Cape Adare (p. 124) during a very heavy gale. Again he writes (p. 200) on the 9th of November :—“I travelled to the eastward of Cape Adare amongst very heavy screw-ice. Many Pagodroma nivea were resting among the rocks ; they kept up a continual noise during the night.” He continues on p. 219:—“ From the time we first entered the icy regions they had soared around the vessel. They were difficult to distinguish against the pure white snow. Spotless and white, this bird, with its large black eyes, black beak, and black, webbed feet, is perhaps the most striking bird of the Antarctic regions. It seemed almost transparent as it sailed swiftly along in the rays. The couple are greatly attached to one another, and the courage of the male bird Aves. 151 to help his mate when in danger is marked. It builds its nest in cavities of the rocks, or cracks in the mountain side, and lays but one egg.” On the 15th of November (p. 222) he writes :—‘“ How different it was to travel on those bright nights, instead of having to work in the darkness as we did in the winter-time.” “Many of the Pagodroma nivea were about” (p. 222), “and the air sounded with their original and remarkable half-whistling, half- shrieking voices. They did not seem to have immediate intentions of settling down to the quiet family life of the season; they were still seen to flirt about in pairs in the air, though some of them began ICE PETREL IN ITS NESTING-PLACE. (By permission of Sir George Newnes, Bart.) to repair their old nesting-places in cavities of the rocks. Their nests were still in many instances filled with snow, and the bird was gradually thawing a hollow downwards towards the rock by sitting at the place from time to time. They were, however, very restless, and I expected that still a fortnight would go before they would begin to lay their eggs. “On the 20th November I discovered a fine Payodroma on its nest some 300 feet above my tent. I at once set to work, and managed to mine a hole through the roof of the cave in which it was resting, so that the light could come in for photographic purposes. 152 Southern Cross. We were unable to get a photo of the nest as it was, on account of the depth and darkness of the cave. But Mr. Bernacchi managed to get some very fine photos, showing the characteristic stratifica- tions of the rocks.” On the 10th of December, 1899, Mr. Borchgrevink started on his last sledge journey into Robertson Bay, “ principally for the purpose of securing eggs of the different birds.” He “secured Pagodroma eggs,’ and says that the hunt was “arduous, and at times involved difficult climbing” (p. 231). Mr. Bernacchi gives the following note (p. 226) :—‘“ Towards the end of November a short sledge journey was undertaken to the end of Robertson Bay, for the purpose of collecting eggs of the Snow Petrels. Travelling on the surface of the bay ice, which had already commenced to break up, and was traversed by huge cracks and open lanes, was difficult work. The surface snow, too, was soft and slushy. A large number of eggs, however, were gathered.” On p. 204 he writes :—“ The Snow Petrel (Pagodroma nivea) nests high up on the mountain sides of South Victoria Land, in long tunnel-like holes under the large slabs of rock, some being as much as six feet in depth, others only a foot or two. The actual nest is as crude as that of the Skua-Gull. The female sits on the nest long before she lays her single egg; when the bird is approached in its nest it expectorates a reddish fluid towards the intruder. This fluid has a most obnoxious fishy odour, and no doubt is a very effective means of defence. They are able to eject it to a distance of eight feet, and, if it catches the garments, the smell clings to them for many days after. I believe this method of defence is common to most Petrels. Some dozens of small white eggs were gathered at a height of 800 feet above the sea,” During the voyage of the ‘ Belgica, Dr. Racovitza says (p. 17): “The most faithful of our winged companions was the White or Snow Petrel. It is one of the most graceful little birds possible to see. Its plumage is of a satiny white, purer even than the white of the snow itself. Its eyes are of jet, its bill and feet are black, and its flight is rapid and graceful. It seeks its food, which consists of small marine animals, when skimming over the cracks and channels in the ice. With a sudden plunge it seizes its prey, scarcely ruffling the water as it does so. Between whiles it makes long excursions over the ice, and nothing can be more pleasing than to see these little white woolly-looking objects disporting themselves over the white pack-ice. “But it is better not to make too intimate an acquaintance Aves. 153 with these lily-white beings, for thus one is saved from some cruel disillusions. Its voice is shrill and disagreeable, and its ways are deplorably low caste. It possesses the faculty of being sea-sick at will; and when one attempts to seize it, it discharges full in one’s face the oily contents of its chest. I can affirm, from personal experience, that one does not come off with the perfume of the rose. One must add, however, to do strict Justice, that it merits extenuating circumstances ; for this unpleasant habit of the bird serves as a pro- tection for its feeble person, and that is a reason of a certain value.” GENUS OSSIFRAGA, Hombr. and Jacq. OSSIFRAGA GIGANTEA. Procellaria gigantea, Gm., Syst. Nat., I., p. 563 (1788); Gould, B. Aust., VIT., p- 45 (1848). Ossifraga gigantea, Gigl., Faun. Vert. Oceano, p. 48 (1870); Sharpe, Phil. Trans., CLXVILI. (extra vol.), p. 142 (1879, Kerguelen Isl.); Salvin, P. Z.58., 1878, p. 787; Moseley, Notes Nat. ‘ Challenger, p. 134 (1879, Tristan da Cunha), pp. 180, 183 (Crozet Islands), p. 205 (Kerguelen Isl.), p. 254 (edge of pack-ice); Buller, B. N. Zeal., 2nd ed., II., p. 225 (1888); Salvin, Cat. B. Brit. Mus., XXV., p. 422 (1896); Racovitza, Vie des Animaux Antarct., p. 18 (1900); Borchgrevink, First on Antarctic Cont., p. 64 (1901); Saunders, Antarctic Manual, p. 231 (1901); Bernacchi, 8. Polar Regions, pp. 78, 316 (1901); Hanson, antea, pp. 86, 93, 94, 96. Giant Bird, Borchgrevink, ¢. c. p. 54 (1901). Gigantic Petrel, Borchgrevink, ¢. c. p. 220 (1901). Giant Petrel, Bruce in Burn Murdoch, Edinb. to Antarctic, p. 363 (1894, Danger Isl.) ; Cook., First Antarctic Night, p. 229 (1900); Hanson, antea, pp. 82, 83, 86, 90. Nelly, Burn-Murdoch, Edinb. to Antarctic, p. 315 (1894). No. 80 M. ? ad. Pack-ice, 65° 43'S.L. 164° 93, E.L., Jan. 16th, 1899. (Nicolai Hanson.) Iris brown; bill dirty yellow; feet sooty brown; webs black. No. 2 g alb. Campbell Island, May 28th, 1899. (Captain Jensen.) a.b. 6 Y imm. Cape Adare, Jan. 2nd, 1900. (Hugh Evans.) c. @ semi-alb. Cape Adare, Jan. 13th, 1900. (Hugh Evans.) The Campbell Island bird is pure white, excepting for a few leaden grey feathers scattered over the back and breast. I take the following note on the distribution of this great Petrel from Mr. Howard Saunders’s essay in the Antarctic Manual’ (pp. 230, 231) :— 154 Southern Cross. “The Giant Petrel (Ossifraga gigantea), which approaches the larger species of Albatros in size, was observed by Dr. McCormick soaring over Possession Island, Victoria Land, and the ‘ Belgica’ found it a constant attendant in the ice-pack. The ‘ Nelly,’ as sealers call it, is, in fact, the Vulture of the sea, visiting every spot where carcases and refuse of Seals and Penguins, or any other means of subsistence, can be found. Its breeding and habits on Marion and Kerguelen Islands have been described by Moseley and others, and the bird probably nests on Heard Island; Webster found it on Deception Island, South Shetlands, from January to March; and, as regards South Georgia, where the eggs are laid in the beginning of November, the practical Weddell remarks that these are inferior in taste to those of other species. The beak of this voracious bird is very powerful, and assertions have often been made by sailors that it will attack a drowning man and accelerate his death. Dr. McCormick states that when, after leaving Kerguelen, the boatswain of the ‘ Erebus’ fell overboard and could not be saved, the Giant Petrels swooped at him as he struggled to keep afloat, and it is doubtful if they did not actually strike him with their bills; while Mr. Arthur G. Guillemard states that a sailor, who was picked up, had his arms badly lacerated in defending his head from the attacks of an ‘ Albatros,’ which may well have been this Giant Petrel.” The first specimen recorded by Mr. Hanson was on October 30th, 1898 (antea, p. 82), when the ‘ Southern Cross’ was nearing the Crozet Islands, and the species was again observed as the ship approached Tasmania, being noticed nearly every day. On December 28th, when nearing the ice-pack, the Ossifraga is again recorded (antea, p. 83), and it was seen on several occasions in the ice in January (antea, pp. 86, 90). On the 26th, Mr. Hanson writes: “Saw some Giant Petrels. These birds must have a very keen sense of sight or smell, for no sooner is a Seal skinned on the ice than they put in an appearance” (antea, p. 90). When the ‘ Southern Cross’ was retracing its steps after its long imprisonment in the ice, he remarks (p. 93), under date of February 11th: “ Of birds, I have seen all my old acquaintances of the ice-pack, except the Penguins and Giant Petrels.” The latter species, however, reappeared when the ship was hove to off Victoria Land, on the 16th and 17th of February (antea, p- 93). By the 7th of March it was getting scarcer near Cape Adare, and was only to be found singly (antea, p. 94), but he captured two specimens in the middle of March (antea, p. 94), and the last one recorded was seen on the 31st of that month (antea, p. 96). Mr. Bernacchi (p. 316) says that during the summer the Giant Aves. B55 Petrel was frequently seen at Cape Adare, and down near the Great Ice Barrier. Mr. Borchgrevink’s account of the species is as follows (p. 220) :— “The Gigantic Petrels also visited Camp Ridley. They were very scarce during the summer, but we saw several of them during the autumn. We did not find one of their nests, and their visits to the peninsula were always short and interrupted; and, to a great extent, I ascribe their visits to Robertson Bay and our peninsula to strong gales at sea, which drove them in towards shore for shelter. In fact, during the strongest gale wa had in the autumn, they arrived at Camp Ridley the day before the gale commenced, and left imme- diately after it was over. So I, at least, came to look upon their arrival as the sign of an approaching gale. These large birds, which in their flight much resemble the Albatros, vary somewhat in colour —perhaps as much as the Zestris—from dark brown to light faded brown ; and albinos are occasionally seen. I secured one of these latter, and Captain Jensen secured another. We had both of us great difficulty in obtaining a specimen; a noble, rare bird as he is, he seemed to soar about higher and more lonely than the rest, and remarkable was it that an albino—although of exactly the same species as the dark one—was seldom or never seen in its company. Whether this is because the others combine against him and hunt him because of his whiteness, or because he, in modest ignorance of his value, seeks his own sphere I do not know, but certain is it that he, willingly or compulsorily, soared about in higher regions than the rest.” Mr. Burn-Murdoch, who was on the ‘ Balaena,’ gives the following note on the species (p. 315) :— “ A number of Nellies or Giant Petrels come circling over us as we slowly drift from our shelter to leeward. They gorge themselves with the ‘ cran’ (scraps of Seals’ flesh cut off the blubber: this name is also given to the carcase of the Seal when its skin and blubber has been stripped off), that is constantly being thrown over our sides, then fly back to the snow and sit down beside their Penguin friends. Strange, ugly birds they are, the apparent coarseness of their build, and their grey-green clumsy beaks and rough brown feathers, give the impression that Nature has turned them out in a very wholesale fashion. Some of them are partly white, and a few, of the same kind of bird I belheve, perhaps one in twenty, are pure white, all but one or two brown feathers. The different stages of colouring are rather like those of the Gannet. We call them ‘Scavengers.’ They appear to be on a friendly footing with the living Penguins, and when one 156 Southern Cross. of the latter dies the Nellie swallows it, and the relations of the deceased do not seem to mind. Two Penguins that were shot the other day were gobbled up before there was time to row the boat round a piece of ice to pick them up.” Dr. Racovitza’s account is as follows :— “The Giant Petrel is a hideous and repulsive bird. The size is that of a Goose, and the extent of wing in the males, which are larger than the females, exceeds two metres. Some are entirely white, and others entirely brown, but the colour often consists of a mixture of chocolate brown, white and grey, which imparts a generally dirty aspect to the bird. Add to this a formidable hooked bill of a flesh colour, and large webbed feet, and you have an ensemble which would never gain a prize in any beauty show started by the feathered races. For the rest, its vile employment is on a par with its vile appearance. The Giant Petrel performs on the pack-ice the ré/e of the Vultures. It is a knacker of repute, who knows how, in the course of his wrial manceuvres, to discover the corpses of Seals and birds out on the pack-ice. Constantly in motion, it traverses immense dis- tances in search of its food. When the object is detected, it descends to its meal at once, gorging itself with blubber and meat, more or less decomposed, to such an extent that it is not able to fly. Do not believe that this is a good time to approach it! The Giant Petrel has the same faculty as the Snow Petrel for ridding itself of an enemy. With a vigour equalled by its size, it discharges the contents of its digestive canal, and, in a twinkling, you are covered with bits of blubber and partially-eaten meat, together with the oil from its stomach. If the projectile of the Snow Petrel is not otto of roses, the bomb fired by the Giant Petrel spreads around a smell calculated to astound even a zoologist, who during his experiences has to see, or rather suffer from, all sorts of queer effects.” DAPTION, Steph. DAPTION CAPENSIS, Procellaria capensis, Linn., Syst. Nat. I., p. 218 (1766); Milne-Edwards & Grandid., Hist. Madag. Ois., p. 671 (1885). Daption capensis, Gould, B. Austr., VII., pl. 53 (1847); Gigl., Faun. Vert. Oceano, p. 46 (1870); Sharpe, Phil. Trans., CLX VIII. (extra vol.), p. 118 (1879, off Kerguelen Isl.) ; Moseley, Notes Nat. ‘ Challenger, p. 134 (1879, Tristan da Cunha), p. 183 (Crozet Islands), p. 229 (Heard Island); Salvin, Aves. bey Cat. B. Brit. Mus., XXV., p. 428 (1896); Borchgrevink, First on Antarctic Cont., pp. 54, 64, 66 (1901); Saunders, Antarctic Manual, p. 230 (1901). Cape Pigeons, Burn-Murdoch, Edinb. to Antarctic, p. 281 (1894); Bernacchi, S. Polar Regions, pp. 15, 315 (1901); Hanson, antea, pp. 81, 82, 84, 85, 86, S701, 93: Noi 2, Ay 6 ad: “37° 3) Sis 8°) Wis, Oct. 15th, 1898. Iris dark brown; bill black ; feet black with a little grey on the inside, webs grey. Nas: 3.4.5.6, 7, A. 2? ¢ ad, 38° 29'S.1L,,.5°5 W.L,, Oct. U6th, 1898. Soft parts as above. Nos. 98, 9) 10) 13, -A. 6 ad. 12 9 ad. 47° 27 Si 0 20 EL, Oct. 18, 1898. Nos14, 16, 117, 18,19, A. 2 ad-d5. A. gad. 39° 55 S:L.;3° 16' K.L., Oct. 19th, 1898. No: 20, A. @ ad. 44° 52'S.L.,, 5 Nos. 42, Ac 9: g ad. 62° 52 1898. No. 56, A. 9 ad. Shot on the pack-ice. 63° 27’ S.L., 160° 6' fas. Jan. Isé, 1899; No. 60, A. 6 ad. Shot on the pack-ice. 63° 41'S.L, 160° 16’ EK.L., Jan. 2nd, 1899. No. 61, A. 6 ad. Shot on the pack-ice. 63° 40’ S.L., 160° 36’ E.L., Jan. 4th, 1899. No. 66, A. 6 ad. Shot on the pack-ice. 65° 3’ S.L., 161° 42’ E.L., Jan. 11, 1899. No. 69, A. ¢ ad., 70, 71, A. 2 ad. Shot on the pack-ice. 65° 3’ S.L, 161° 42’ E.L., Jan. 12th, 1899. A. ? ad. Shot on the pack-ice. Feb. 3rd, 1899. 7° 32’ E.L., Nov. 2nd, 1898. SLs, Loo? 25) Hale Dee. 3iist, In the ‘ Antarctic Manual, Mr. Howard Saunders observes :— “The well-known Cape Petrel, or ‘Cape Pigeon’ (Daption capensis), is another of the medium-sized species which has hitherto succeeded in concealing its eggs from the gaze of naturalists, although the bird has been found in burrows with its young on Kerguelen, and there can be no doubt that it breeds on South Georgia, as well as other suitable localities in the Antarctic regions. It occurs throughout the Southern seas, and has even been obtained on one occasion off Ceylon. At long intervals individuals have been taken in the North Atlantic, from the United States to the British Islands; but among the numerous birds captured at sea many are known to have been 158 Southern Cross. carried hundreds of miles before their eventual liberation, and this may account for occurrences so far beyond the usual limits.” The first Cape Pigeons are recorded in Mr. Hanson’s diary as having been noticed by him on the 8th of October, when between St. Vincent and the Cape, and many were snared by him between the 8th and 29th of that month (antea, p. 81). The 2nd of November was the last time that he observed Cape Pigeons in flocks before reaching Tasmania (p. 82). By the 25th of November, when nearing Tasmania, they had nearly all left the ship (antea, p. 82): but he notes that when the latter entered the ice-pack on the 30th of December, “our old acquaintance, the Cape Pigeon, also appeared again” (p. 83). He procured specimens in the pack from the Ist to the 12th of January, 1899. On the 29th he notices that the birds disappeared, so that up to that time they must have been generally observed in the pack (p. 91). On the 12th of February, when the ship had escaped from the ice and regained the open sea, Cape Pigeons were again observed, and they were also seen during the hurricane off Victoria Land on the 15th of February (p. 93). Mr. Borcherevink mentions his having seen Daption capensis in the ice-pack, especially on the 12th of January, when they were “swimming about in the open water catching crustacea” (p. 68). He also speaks of the species as moulting at the end of December, “and flying with some difficulty ” (p. 54). Mr. Bernacchi writes:—“ A general favourite among seamen is the Cape Pigeon, a pretty, busy little sea bird about the size of a dove, but plumper, with a black head and an elaborate pattern in black, grey, and white upon its wings. Around the stern of any passing ship large numbers of fluttering visitors hover continually, their shrill cries and unweary manceuvres contrasting pleasantly with the deep monotone made by the driving keel through the foaming sea. In common with most Southern sea-birds having hooked beaks, they are easily caught with hook and line, but will not live in captivity. Thoughtless passengers often amuse themselves by shooting these graceful wanderers, although what satisfaction may be found in reducing a beautiful living thing to a useless morsel of draggled carrion is not easy to see.” 1 Cf, Hanson’s Diary for October 18th, 1898 (antea, p. 81). Aves. 159 PRION, Lacép. PRION BANSKI.? Prion banksi, Gould, Ann. and Mag. N. H., XIII., p. 366 (1844); id., Handb. B. Austr., IT., p. 474 (1865); Gigl., Faun. Vert. Oceano, p. 44 (1870); Salvin, P. Z. 8., 1878, p. 739 (Marion Island and at sea near Crozets); Buller, B. N. Zeal., 2nd ed., II., p. 211 (1888); Salvin, Cat. B. Brit. Mus., XXV., p. 434 (1896). Nos. 28, 29, E. g¢ ad. [Cape Seas], 42° 23’ S.L., 20° 32’ E.L., Oct. 24th, 1898. Only one specimen of Prion was in the collection, and this is undoubtedly P. banksi. Mutton Bird, Borchgrevink, First on Antarctic Cont., pp 52, 54 (1901); Hanson, antea, pp. 88, 86, 92. P.S.—The “Mutton Bird” of Australia is Puffinus tenuirostris (Temm.), which is Puffinws brevicaudus of Gould’s ‘ Handbook’ (IL., p. 549). Nospecimen was procured by the ‘Sowthern Cross’ expedition, so that I can only conjecture that this is the species intended by Mr. Borchgrevink and Mr. Hanson in their notes. It was noticed at sea on nearing Tasmania (antea, p. 83), and on several occasions on the voyage from Hobart to the pack-ice. Some were even noticed in the ice-pack itself from the 6th to the 10th of January (antea, p. 86), and many were seen in the open sea on the return of the ship, after its long imprisonment, on the 7th of February (p. 92). On the 13th of February, Mr. Hanson also speaks of a ‘Grey Petrel,’ which was again seen off Victoria Land on the 16th of the same month (p. 93). * Whether it was this species which is recorded as Prion vittatus by Mr. Hanson and Mr. Borchgrevink, I have no means of judging, as specimens do not seem to have been obtained. The former (antea, p, 82) noticed a species of Prion round the ship from November 13th to 18th on the voyage to Tasmania, and when approaching the last-named island. On leaving Hobart it seems to have been again noticed, and Mr. Hanson states that, on nearing the ice-pack, “ Prion vittatus” appeared, after the ‘ Southern Cross’ had passed the 60th degree of south latitude (antea, p. 82). He says that it was the only species which followed them in among the ice, the others having left before they sighted it. On the 23rd of January, 1899, Mr. Hanson states (antea, p. 90) that he obtained a specimen of Prion vittatus, the first he had seen that year, when the ship was in the ice-pack, but the skin of this bird, which would have been so interesting for the identification of the species, was not in the collection brought to the Museum. A species of Prion was again noticed when the open water was reached after the ‘ Southern Cross’ came out of the ice-pack, before entering it for the second time (antea, p. 93). Mr. Borchgrevink’s first notice of “ Prion vittatus” is on the 20th of December, 1898, and again on the 21st. After leaving Tasmania (p. 58) on the 29th, “ Prion vittatus”” appeared in far greater quantities than he had ever seen them before (p. 54). On the 80th he mentions the species again among other kinds of Petrels, as recorded also by Mr. Hanson (antea, p. 83). He further says that it followed the ship for some distance into the pack, but it left long before the latter came to the dense pack. 160 Southern Cross. DIOMEDEA, Linn. 1. DIOMEDEA EXULANS. Diomedea exulans, Linn., Syst. Nat., L, p. 214 (1766); Gould, B. Austr., VII., pl. 38 (1844); id. Handb., I., p. 427 (1865); Gigl. Faun. Vert. Oceano, p. 49 (1870) ; Sharpe, Phil. Trans., CLX VIII. (extra vol.), p. 145 (1879, Kerguelen) ; Moseley, Notes Nat. ‘ Challenger, p. 134 (1879, Tristan da Cunha, breeding), p- 171 (Marion Island), p. 180 (Crozet Islands); Salvin, Cat. B. Brit. Mus. XXV., p. 441 (1896); Hanson in Borchgr. Antarctic Cont. App., p. 822 (1901). No.1 A. g. 42° 23'S.L., 20° 32’ E.L., Oct. 24th, 1899. Iris brown, the eyelids bluish grey; bill bluish livid, the tip white ; feet light bluish red, with the webs of the same colour. No.2 A. @. 44° 26'S.L., 37° E.L., Oct. 29th, 1898. Soft parts as above. Neither bird is completely adult, though the male has the secondaries for the most part white, with brown frecklings; on the crown are the remains of a brown patch. In the younger female the crown is dull brown, and the entire wing is blackish, as pointed out by Mr. Salvin. No. 1 is the specimen mentioned by Mr. Hanson (antea, p. 81) on the 24th of October, 1898. ‘This morning, as soon as I came on deck, I caught a large Albatros.” And again on the 29th he says :— “Caught a large Albatros. It is a little darker than the first, and perhaps a year younger. The number of Albatroses about the ship increases every day. Last night I observed at one time eight large ones” (p. 82). Previous entries in his diary record the occurrence of the species on the voyage south to the Cape seas. Nearing Tasmania, towards the end of November, Albatroses were noticed, and one was caught on the 25th, but was apparently not preserved. These may have been Diomedea regia, and not D. exulans, as may also have been the Albatros recorded by Mr. Borchgrevink as “plentiful” on December 20th, the day after the ‘ Southern Cross’ left Hobart. He saw some more on the 23rd (p. 53). Mr. Hanson observes (antea, p. 93) on the 14th of February :— “ A Diomedea, apparently D. exulans, followed us also for some time, and I believe that this is the first time that this bird has been seen so far south (69° 13'S. Lat.),” but the species seen may have been D. vegia. It was noticed when the ‘Southern Cross’ had left the ice-pack and was in the open sea again. Aves. 161 2. DIOMEDEA REGIA. Diomedea regia, Buller, Trans. N. Zeal. Inst., XXIII., p. 2830 (1891); Salvin, Cat. B. Brit. Mus. XXV., p. 443 (1896). No. 11, imm., Campbell Island, Oct. 4th, 1899. (Capt. Jensen.) No. 12, juv., Campbell Island, Oct. 5th, 1899. No. 13, juv., Campbell Island, Oct. 6th, 1899. No. 14, juv., Campbell Island, Oct. 7th, 1899. No. 19, ad., Campbell Island, Oct. 7th, 1899. Three specimens carry a great deal of nestling down. One is full- grown, with white back and white breast, but still bears nestling down round the neck and on the breast. The only one which has no down on the plumage has the wings black, with white margins to the wing-coverts ; the scapulars also are for the most part black, with white bases and fringes, but showing a tendency to become more entirely white. The other whitish bird was procured on the 13th of January, 1900. It is more grey than white, and seems to be in an intermediate stage of some kind. The other birds are in the dark brown young plumage, with the throat rather lighter brown. 3. DIOMEDEA MELANOPHRYS. Diomedea melanophrys, Boie in Temm., Pl. Col. V., pl. 456 (1828) ; Gould, B. Austr. VIL., pl. 48 (1884); id., Handb. II., p. 488 (1865) ; Salvin, P. Z.8., 1878, p. 740 (Christmas Harbour, Kerguelen); Sharpe, Phil. Trans, CLX VII. (extra vol.), p. 146 (1879); Moseley, Notes Nat. ‘ Challenger, p. 254 (1879) ; Milne-Edwards and Grandid., Hist. Madag. Ois., p. 669 (1881); Baird, Brewer and Ridgw., Water B. N. Amer., IL, p. 357 (1884); Buller, B. N. Zeal., 2nd ed., II., p. 198 (1888); Salvin, Cat. B. Brit. Mus., XXV., p. 447 (1896) ; Borchgrevink, First on Antarctic Cont., pp. 538, 54 (1901); Hanson, antea, pp. 81, 83; Hanson in Borchgr. Ant. Cont. App., pp. 821, 324 (1901). Thalassarche melanophrys, Gigl. Faun. Vert. Oceano, p. 57 (1870). Yellow-billed Mollymawk, Hanson, antea, pp. 82, 83. No. 4B, dg ad. 33° 37’ S.L., 9° 54’ E.L., Oct. 13th, 1898. Iris greyish-brown ; bill yellow, tip red; feet fleshy-red, the webs of the same colour. No. 3 B, 6 ad. 33° 37'S.L., 9° 54’ E.L., Oct. 13th, 1898. Soft parts as above. No. 13 B, ? ad. 44° 20 S.L., 68° 28’ E.L., Nov. 6th, 1898. Soft parts as above. M 162 Southern Cross. No. 20 B, 9 ad. 44° 23’ S.L., 72° 5’ E.L., Nov. 7th, 1898. Soft parts as above. No. 22 B, 6 ad. 44° 23’ S.L., 72° 5’ E.L., Nov. 7th, 1898. Soft parts as above, Although Mr. Hanson has given the colour of the bill as the same in all the specimens, there is a good deal of hlack near the tip. In some the general colour of the back is rather browner, and the white head and neck are shaded with grey; all these points I believe to be characteristic of the immature bird. The first specimens captured by Mr. Hanson were those of October 13th, 1898, which he prepared on the following day (antea, p. 81). The species is also recorded as the “ Yellow-billed Molly- mawk” on November 6th and 7th (p. 82); and he again mentions it by this name as noticed after leaving Hobart, on the 21st and 24th of December. It was one of the species which accompanied the ship to the ice-pack, but left before it entered the ice on the 30th of December (p. 83). On emerging from the pack in February, the Yellow-billed Mollymawk was again seen (p. 93). Mr. Borchgre- vink observed the species on the same days recorded above by Mr. Hanson. He also records “ Diomeda chlororhyncha” [sic], as having been noticed by him on the 26th of December, six days after leaving Hobart, but the species is not mentioned by Mr. Hanson. The latter states (antea, p. 13) that the ‘‘ Short-tailed” Albatros was also seen on nearing Tasmania, on the 27th of November. Mr. Borchgrevink also says that on leaving Tasmania “ the Short-tailed Albatros followed the ship, until the 20th December, when no more were to be seen” (pp. 52, 53). Which species of Albatros is here intended I cannot determine, but it cannot have been the Short-tailed Albatros (Diomedea brachyura) of Gould’s ‘ Handbook’ (IL., p. 433), which is the northern D. albatrus of Pallas [¢f. Salvin, Cat. B. Brit. Mus. xxv., p. 444]. THALASSOGERON, Ridew. 1. THALASSOGERON CULMINATUS. Diomedea culminata, Gould, Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist., XIII., p. 361 (1844, South Pacific and Atlantic Oceans); id., B. Austr., VIL, pl. 41 (1848); id., Handb. B. Austr., II., p. 486 (1865); Sharpe, Phil. Trans., CLX VIII. (extra vol.), p. 147 (1879); Moseley, Notes Nat. ‘ Challenger, p. 129 (1879, ‘Tristan da Cunha), p. 183 (Crozet Islands); Hanson in Borchgr. Ant. Cont. App., pp. 322, 333 (1901). Aves. 163 Thalassareche culminata, Gigl., Faun. Vert. Oceano, p. 59 (1870). Thalassogeron culminatus, Baird, Brewer and Ridgw., Water Birds N, Amer., IL., p. 358 (1884); Salvin, Cat. B. Brit. Mus., XXV., p. 451 (1896) ; Sharpe, Hand-list B., [., p. 129 (1899). Black-and-yellow- billed Mollymawk, Hanson, antea, pp. 81, 82, 98. Black-billed Mollymawk, Hanson, wntea, pp. 82, 83, 93. No. 56,C, ¢ 42° 23'S.L., 20° 32' E.L., Oct. 24th, 1898. Iris light brown; bill black, with yellow edge above and _ below, the tip red; feet and webs fleshy grey. Nos, 9,10) 145 15, €; 12 B, ¢ adi: 44°20" S.L, 68° 28 H.I:., Nov. 6, 1898. No. 17, C, 9 ad. ~ 44° 23’ S.L.; 72° 5' E.L., Nov. 7th, 1898. Nese 8s19) Cee 2 imm, 45°9' S.L., 77° 13’ ELLs Nov. 9th; 1898. Bill black, the tip yellow. The younger birds are recognised by their black bill and browner plumage, the whole head and sides of face being leaden grey, and the throat paler grey. There is no trace of the yellow band along the culmen, but a slightly paler appearance at the base of the lower mandible; otherwise the bill is black. In the youngest example there are indications of lighter brown edges to the feathers of the mantle. The white head and throat are only gradually assumed and are evidently the signs of very old birds. In the majority of specimens these parts are of a beautiful dove-grey. This species is of wide distribution in the Southern oceans. Mr. Hanson records the first capture of the Albatros, with “black-and- yellow bill,” on the 24th of October, 1898 (antea, p. 81). Two more were caught on the 2nd of November (p. 82), but were apparently not preserved, and on the 6th of the same month four “ black-billed ” specimens were obtained. This Albatros followed the ship to Tasmania, and is recorded nearly every day in Mr. Hanson’s Diary. After leaving Tasmania, it was seen on the 26th of December (antea, p. 83) and is again recorded as occurring in the open sea, after the ship emerged from the ice-pack in February (p. 93). PHG:BETRIA, Reichenb. PHGBETRIA FULIGINOSA. Diomedea fuliginosa, Gm. Syst. Nat. I, p. 568 (1788); Gould, B. Aust., VII., pl. 44 (1848); Salvin, P. Z. S., 1878, p. 740 (Ice Barrier); Sharpe, Phil. Trans. CLXVIII. (extra vol.), p. 148 (1879, Royal Sound, Kerguelen) ; M 2 164 Southern Cross. Moseley, Notes, Nat. ‘ Challenger, pp. 180, 183 (1879, Crozet Islands), p. 254 (margin of the pack ice); Saunders, P. Z. §., 1880, p. 165 (lat. 37° 59’ S., long. 29° 18’ E.); Scl. Ibis, 1894, p. 498 (edge of pack ice); Hanson in Borchgr. Ant. Cont. App., p. 822 (1901.) Phebetria fuliginosa, Gould, Handb. B. Austr., IT., p. 441 (1865); Coues, Proc. Atad. Nat. Sci., 1866, pp. 186, 188; Gigl., Faun. Vert. Oceano, p. 60 (1870) ; Baird, Brewer and Ridgw., Water Birds, N .Amer., II., p. 359 (1884); Salvin, Cat. b. Brit. Mus., XX VI. p. 453 (1896); Saunders, Antarctic Manual, p- 280 (1901); Bernacchi, 8S. Polar Regions, p. 816 (1901). Diomeda fuliginosa, Borchgrevink, First on Antarctic Cont., pp. 58, 54 (1901). Sooty Albatros, Hanson, antea, pp. 82, 83, 93; id. in Borchgr. Ant. Cont. App., p. 324. No. 7, D, g@. 42° 23'S.L., 20° 32’ E.L., Oct. 24th, 1898. Tris dark brown; bill black, with a white streak on either side of the lower mandible; feet and webs greyish brown. No. 23, D, 9 ad. Nov. 8th, 1898. Iris dark brown ; a blue edge along the under mandible. No. 24, D, g ad. 45° 9'S.L., 77° 30’, Nov. 9th, 1898. No..25, D, 9 ad?. 46°90 SiL.(%2 30 Now 1th soe: The Sooty Albatros has also a wide range over the Southern oceans, and extends to the edge of the ice-pack, where a specimen was obtained by the ‘ Challenger’ on the 10th of February, 1874. Mr. Hanson’s diary records many observations of the species, and his first specimen was obtained in the Cape seas on the 24th of October, 1898. On the voyage to Tasmania it was seen on the 2nd of November, and thence nearly all the way thither (p. 82). On the 24th and 28th of December the Sooty Albatros was seen on the voyage from Hobart to the ice-pack, but it was last seen on the 30th when nearing the latter, which it did not enter. When the ‘ Southern Cross’ left the ice-pack for its second attempt to penetrate to Cape Adare, this Albatros was observed directly the ship regained the open sea (p. 93). Mr. Bernacchi (p. 316) states that the Sooty Albatros actually entered the ice-pack, and was occasionally seen during the month of January, 1899, but I think that the Ossifraga must have been mistaken for the present species, as it seems almost certain that Hanson would have recorded the fact. Aves. | 165 OrpER LARIFORMES. STERNA, Linn. 1. STERNA VITTATA. Sterna vittata, Gm., Syst. Nat., I., p. 606 (1788); Pelzeln, Reise Novara, Vog., p. 152 (1865, St. Paul’s Island); Saunders, P. Z. 8., 1876, p. 647, 1877, p. 795 (Inaccessible Island, Tristan da Cunha); Sharpe, Phil. Trans., CLXVIII. (extra vol.), p. 1138 (1879, Kerguelen Island); Saunders, Cat. B. Brit. Mus., XXV., p. 51 (1896); id., Antarctic Manual, p. 233 (1901). No. 15, 9 ad. Campbell Island, Oct. 15th, 1899. (Capt. Jensen.) On this species Mr. Howard Saunders gives the following note :— “There is ample evidence that Terns are found in large numbers in the South Polar Regions, and even within the Antarctic circle, for Bellingshausen, of the Russian ship ‘ Wostok,’ has recorded Terns on the 18th February, 1820, 68° S., while McCormick saw one in 76° 52' S., and 178° W., said he had previously observed ‘ flocks’ on the ice between 65° 66’ S., and in about 158° W. On the third attempt of the ‘ Hrebus, McCormick noticed Terns breeding on Cockburn Island. Webster found birds of this family in the South Shetlands, and the Dundee whalers brought back specimens from that neighbourhood, which are referable to a well-known South American species, Sterna hiruwndinacea, akin to our own common Tern, though quite distinct. This distribution might be expected, and it may be reasonably assumed that all the Terns found to the southward of America are of this species. But the species found off Victoria Land has still to be identified, and all that can be said is that, inasmuch as the ‘ Southern Cross’ expedition obtained at Camp- bell Island an adult of Sterna vittata, there is a probability that this species may go as far as Victoria Land.” 2. LARUS SCOPULINUS. Larus scopulinus, Gray in Dieffenb. Trav. N. Zeal., 11. App., p. 200 (1843: New Zealand); Buller, B. N. Zeal., 2nd ed., II. p. 55, pl. XXIX. (1888); Saunders, Cat. B. Brit. Mus., XXV., p. 238 (1896). No. 1,imm. Campbell Island, May 2nd, 1899. (Capt. Jensen.) Nos. 16, 17, g 9 ad, Campbell Island, Oct. 16th, 1899. (Capt. Jensen.) 166 Southern~ Cross. Two species of true Gulls occur within the Antarctic area. One of these is the Southern Black-backed Gull (Larus dominicanus), which was found by Dr. McCormick breeding on Cockburn Island, and it was also met with by Capt. Fairweather of the ‘ Balaena’ in Lat. 64° 18’ S. (¢f. Saunders, ‘Antarctic Manual, p. 232). The same observer obtained a specimen of Larus scoresbit in Lat. 64° 55’ S., in the vicinity of the South Shetland Islands (cf. Saunders, /.c.). It was probably Gabianus pacificus, which Mr. Hanson noticed off the coast of Tasmania (cf. antea, p. 83) as very like Z. marinus. MEGALESTRIS, Bp. 1. MEGALESTRIS MACCORMICKI. (Plate IX.) Lestris, apparently a new species, McCormick, Voy. Discov. Antarctic, I., p. 154 ; Possession Islands, off Victoria Land (71° 56’ 8.L., 171° 15’, E.L.) Stercorarius antarcticus, (nec Less.), Saunders, P. Z. §., 1876, p. 822; id. Journ. Linn. Soc. Zool., XV., p. 393 (1878). Stercorarius maccormicki, Saunders, Bull., B. O. C., IlL., p. 12 (Dec. 1898, Possession Islands). Megalestris maccormicki, Saunders, Cat. B. Brit. Mus., XXV., p. 321, pl. 1 (1896); Sharpe, Hand-l. B. I., p. 14£ (1899); Saunders, Antarctic Manual, pp. 231, 287 (1901); Bernacchi, 8. Polar Regions, pp. 74, 317 (1901); Hanson, antea, p. 94, 96, 97, 98. Megalestris antarctica (nec Less.), Racovitza, Vie des animaux dans PAntarctique, p. 39 (1900). Skua-Gulls, Borchgrevink, First on Antarctic Cont., pp. 105, 193, 216, 218, 228, 226, 242, 257, 262, 291 (1901); Bernacchi, ¢.c., pp. 286, 244 (1901); Hanson, antea, pp. 89, 94, 95, 96. No. 3, B, ¢ ad. Pack-ice, 66° 4’ S.L., 166° 50’ E.L., Jan. 20th, 1899. Iris dark brown; bill slaty black; feet and webs black. (NV. Hanson.) No. 4, 5, B, ¢@ @ ad. 'Pack-ice, 66> 34° Si, 160.75) Bag Jan. 26th, 1899. (N. Hanson.) Soft parts as above. a.b. g @ juv. Cape Adare, Feb. 19th, 1899. (WV. Hanson.) c. ad. Cape Adare, Oct. 29th, 1899. (H. B. Evans.) d. 9 ad. Cape Adare, Nov. 6th, 1899. (i. B. Evans.) e. g ad. Cape Adare, Nov. 20th, 1899. (ZH. B. Lvans.) d. g ad. Cape Adare, Nov. 29th, 1899. (H. B. Evans.) e. g pull. Cape Adare, Dec. 29th, 1899. (A. B. Hvans.) About three days old. Aves. 167 g.h. g pull. Cape Adare, Jan. 9th, 1900. (H. Bb. Hvans.) k. 6 9 ad. Cape Adare, Jan. 14th, 1900. (//. B. Evans.) Ff. 2 pull. Cape Adare, Jan. 8th, 1900. (H. B. Evans.) ]. . @ juv. Mount Melbourne, Feb. 6th, 1900. (#7. B. Evans.) 2 / Nestling (about two days old). Covered with greyish-white down, with a pinkish-brown tinge on the interscapular region and on the rudimentary wings. As the nestling grows older, the brown tinge becomes more prevalent. The full-grown young birds, killed in February, are much darker than the adults, and are sooty grey, with edgings of lighter sooty erey to the feathers of the upper surface. Two of these young birds have a lighter grey hind neck, and are paler grey below, while the third has no lighter area in the hind neck, and is everywhere darker and somewhat melanistic. The sign of an old bird is undoubtedly the yellow on the hind neck and throat, and this becomes more and more bleached, like the rest of the plumage. The eggs of this Skua are plentifully varied in colour. There are at least three distinct types of ground-colour—an olive brown, more or less dark, an olive-grey stone-colour, and a pale green. The latter are not so plentifully spotted as the rest of the series, having faint brown spots and lines, with nearly obsolete underlying spots and blotches of purplish grey. The series measures :—Axis, 2*58— 3°09; diameter, 1:86-2:08. The brown eggs have the underlying marks very distinct, but not sO prominent or so dark as the overlying spots and blotches, which take a variety of shapes, and are sometimes confluent near the larger end of the egg, so as to form a large irregular patch. Of this species, Mr. Howard Saunders writes in the ‘ Antarctic Manual * :— “ After the Penguins and some of the Petrels, the most prominent species within the Antarctic circle is a predacious and aggressive Gull, McCormick’s Skua, named after its virtual discoverer. It was first obtained at Possession Island, Victoria Land, where a pair had taken up their residence in the midst of a colony of the Adélie Penguins, and subsequently examples were obtained or seen nearly as far south as 78°, while Long. 178° W. was the furthest record in the direction of America. The‘ Belgica’ brought back four examples, from lat. 82° and 86° W., in the ice-pack. The ‘Southern Cross’ obtained a fine series, from the downy plumage upwards ; these young birds being of a dark slaty grey, and very different from those of the 168 Southern Cross. other Great Skuas, of which four representatives are now recognised. The species known as the ‘ Bonxie,’ of the Shetlands, frequenting the North Atlantic, is not known south of the coast of Morocco; but in the Southern Ocean, from the New Zealand area to Heard, Kerguelen, Marion and Crozet Islands, and westward to the Falklands, is found a larger and darker Skua (Megalestris antarctica), which seems to breed as far south as the South Shetlands and Cockburn Island, and I have examined a specimen obtained by the Dundee whalers. Some six or seven degrees of latitude separate this dark form from McCormick’s Skua, which is a much paler bird, almost dirty straw-colour about MACCORMICK’S SKUA. (By permission of Sir George Newnes, Bart.) the head and neck. The fourth species, I/. chilensis, has the under parts of a warm chestnut colour. Further specimens of these Southern Skuas, with notes on their geographical distribution, are much wanted, but anything approaching the extermination of a colony is to be deprecated.” This large Skua was observed in large numbers on several occasions by the ‘ Southern Cross, and a great many were shot by Mr. Hanson at Cape Adare, but only two of the skins thus procured were in the collections brought to England, and the series consists principally of skins prepared by Mr. Evans after Mr. Hanson’s death. Aves. 169 The first specimen was procured by the latter in the ice-pack on the 20th of January, 1899 (antea, p. 89). Two more were obtained on the 26th (p. 90). This Skua was one of the species noticed on landing at Cape Adare on the 17th of February (p. 93), and on the 3rd of March Mr. Hanson shot eighty-two specimens, as the birds were becoming destructive to the stores of Seal and Penguin-meat. As winter approached the Skuas became less plentiful, but fourteen were shot on the 12th of March (p. 94). On the 26th of the month, Mr. Hanson records the finding of two young birds “hardly able to fly,” at an altitude of 1, °050 ‘feet (p. 95). The species was noticed in diminishing numbers throughout April up to the 20th, when Mr. Hanson’s diary mentions that none had been recently seen (p. 98). Mr. Bull (Cruise of the ‘ Antarctic,’ p. 182) speaks of the mortality among the Penguins as frightful in Victoria Land, judging by the number of skeletons and dead birds lying about in all directions. At Cape Adare he says, “the raptorial Skua-Gull was present, as everywhere in the neighbourhood of Penguin nurseries, and was busily occupied with its mission in life, viz., the prevention of over-population in the colony.” Mr. Borchgrevink says that the Skuas were in great numbers on the arrival of the Expedition at Cape Adare, but began to get scarce in the middle of March (p. 105). On the 31st of October they returned, and he shot five of them (p. 193). He writes :—‘ The worst enemy of the Penguin is the Skua-Gull, which constantly soared over their nests, watching for an opportunity when they might steal an egg or catch a young one. As I already observed in 1895, I now also often saw two of these birds attack a Penguin family ; whilst one kept the old ones away, the other took the young one” (pp. 215, 216). The Skua-Gulls arrived somewhat later than the Penguins, and their nesting also took place later. They had their nests in the heights, for instance, 1,000 feet up on Cape Adare, amongst the rocks, while a small Skua rookery was also to be found some fifty feet above the peninsula, on a small rocky gallery close to the perpendicular wall of the Cape. Their eggs were of a greyish brown, with dark brown stains. Gancuilly: two eggs were found in each nest. The young ones were exceedingly pretty in their fluffy coats of light grey down. The old Skuas were very bold at ordinary times, and attacked us frequently with wings and beak when we climbed the rocks, but when they had young ones their indomitable courage and audacity surpassed that of any other bird of prey I have seen” (p. 218). On November 20th he ' See also Mr. Bull’s account, antea, p. 128, E70 Southern Cross. writes :—“ We daily saw fresh proofs of the audacity of the Skua- Gulls. On several occasions they attacked the dogs, and nearly all of us were, on more than one occasion, also attacked by them. They shot down from a great height in the air straight on our heads, hit us with their wings, only to rise again and renew the attack. We killed several of them with short sticks” (p. 223). On November 27th we learn that Mr. Evans (p. 226) “brought in his first Skua- Gull’s egg. The colour was light green, brown or grey, with dark brown spots” (!). On the 27th of December, 1899, Mr. Borchgrevink SKUA-GULL ON NEST. (By permission of Messrs. Hurst & Blackett.) says that he caught some very fine specimens of young Skua-Gulls when he went to the top of Cape Adare (p. 242). The species was also observed on Possession Island (p. 257), and again near Mount Melbourne on February 5th on a beach where “there were no Penguins, but a great many Skuas, with nearly full-grown young ones” (p. 262). The note of the bird, according to Mr. Borchgrevink, is a “cruel screech” (p. 291). Mr. Bernacchi has also several notes on the species. On landing at Cape Adare a great number of Skua-Gulls “seemed to resent our A ves. LTE visit, for they repeatedly darted at our heads, and made a noisy outery ” (p. 74). On the 3rd of February, 1900, some young ones were procured on Possession Island (p. 236). He also writes :—‘ At nine o'clock in the evening of the 5th of February we landed in a boat on a pebbly beach at the foot of Mount Melbourne. The place upon which we landed was a pebbly bank, even larger in extent than that at Cape Adare, entirely free from snow and ‘ponds, and occupied by Penguins and Skua-Gulls” (p. 244). Dr. Racovitza’s notes on the species as observed by him during YOUNG SKUA-GULLS IN NEST. (By permission of Messrs. Hurst & Blackett.) the voyage of the ‘ Belgica’ are as follows:—‘ Among the Gavi there was our old friend the Brown Skua-Gull, against whom I have a considerable grudge. One day when I was at the foot of the high chiff on De Cuverville Island, I saw, by the aid of my spy-glass, on a platform in the perpendicular wall, a little tuft which seemed to me not to be formed of moss, but of real grass. It was the first time I had made such an identification, so I felt that I must at all hazards try to reach this little platform and capture this unique specimen of a plant. I laid aside my gun and collecting-bag, and was soon scaling, with the aid of my alpenstock, the wall of the cliff{ The 172 Southern Cross. task was not easy ; one had to hang on with the tips of the fingers to the rough rocks, or to hoist oneself by the force of one’s wrists by sticking the alpenstock into crevices. I was already a great height up, when two of these Skuas began to interest themselves in my affairs. They had made their nest on the top of the cliff, and there were two little nestlings, covered in down, sitting quietly in the nest. The father and mother, evidently believing that I wanted to carry off their progeny, addressed themselves to the task of preventing my upward climb. “With vigorous strokes of their wings, they threw themselves upon me, and attempted to strike me with their wings and bills. With my left hand gripping a point of rock, one foot resting on a tiny excrescence and the other hanging in the air, I fenced with my stock with all the force of my right arm, glancing all the time at the beautiful bed of pebbles upon which I had the chance of extending myself after a fall of thirty metres, and I vowed that henceforth I would never part with my gun. A few well-directed blows with my stock rid me for a few moments of my enraged aggressors, and I was thus enabled to reach the platform and at last secure the little plant I was in search of. My contest with the Brown Skuas must not prevent my rendering justice to a brave enemy, whom I recognise as the most courageous bird of the Antarctic, the true representative of the Eagle among the birds ot the ocean.” MEGALESTRIS ANTARCTICUS. Lestris antarctica, Less. ‘lraité d’Orn., p. 616 (1831, Falkland Isl.; New Zealand) ; Gray in Dieffenb., Trav. N. Zeal., 1I., App., p. 200 (1843): id. Voy. ‘ Hrebus’ and ‘ Terror, p. 18 (1846). Stercorarius antarcticus, Gray, List Bb. Brit. Mus. Anseres, p. 167 (1844, Campbell Isl.) ; Gigl. Faun. Vert. Oceano, ». 61 (1870); Sharpe, Phil. Trans, CLXVIII. (extra vol.), p. 109, pl. 7, figs. 1, 2 (1879, Royal Sound and Christmas Harbour, Kerguelen); McCormick, Voy. Discovery, I., p. 142, cum tab. (1844, Campbell Isl.); Buller, B. N. Zeal., 2nd ed., p. 63 (1888), Megalestris antaretica, Saunders, Cat. B. Brit. Mus. XXV., p. 321,pl. I. (1826). No. 18. Campbell Island, Oct. 20th, 1899. (Capt. Jensen). This species is much darker than JZ. maccormichi, and has an extensive range over the islands of the Southern oceans, but does not extend to the Antarctic ice-pack. Aves. 173 OrpER PELECANIFORMES. PHALACROCORAX, Briss. PHALACROCORAX CAMPBELLI. Urile campbelli, Filhol, Buli. Soc. Philom. (2), II., p. 132 (1878, Campbell Is!.). Phalacrocorax campbelli, Filhol, Mém. Pass. Venus 2 Vile Campbell, III., pt. HL., p. 55 (1885); Ogilvie Grant, Cat. B. Brit. Mus. XXVL., p. 387 (1898). No. 3, ? ad. Campbell Island, May 29th, 1899. (Capt. Jensen.) Nos. 5, 6, 6 ad. Campbell Island, June 10th, 1899. (Capt. Jensen.) N.B.—Mr. Howard Saunders speaks of Cormorants being found breeding on Deception Island, South Shetlands, and again on Cock- burn Island (‘ Antarctic Man., p. 234). Dr. Forbes identifies the last-named bird as Phalacrocorax atriceps of King [Bull. Liverp. Mus., II., p. 48]. 174 Southern Cross. Vo ELS iis: By G. A. BOULENGER, F.RB.S. (Plates X1I.—X VIII.) LEAVING out a few Fishes obtained on the way to the Antarctic region and about New Zealand and Tasmania, as well as a number of others, the decomposed condition of which precluded any attempt at identification, the collection on which this report is based con- sisted of about 200 specimens, referable to sixteen species, eight of which are new, two belonging to undescribed genera. CHONDROPTERYGII. SPINACIDAE. 1. EUPROTOMICRUS LABORDII, Q. et G. A single female specimen from Campbell Island, south of New Zealand. First discovered by Quoy and Gaimard near Mauritius, this very rare little Selachian has since been reported from the Antarctic Ocean, west of Cape Horn (R. O. Cunningham, Proc. Zool. Soc., 1899, p. 732). TELEOSTEL. SCOPELIDAE. 2. SCOPELUS ANTARCTICUS, Gthr. A single specimen was obtained on an ice-floe in Robertson Bay. NOTOTHENIIDAE. Not long ago,' whilst examining the skeletons of the “Tra- chinoid” Fishes with a view to a more natural arrangement of this 1 Ann. and Mag. N. H. (7) viii., 1901, p. 261. Pisces. 175 artificial group, I came to the conclusion that a valuable character existed in the position of the fenestra at the base of the pectoral fin, situated either in the scapula or between the latter and the coracoid. Although I had myself pointed out the variable position of this fenestra within the limits of a natural family, the Mormyridae,* | felt justified in assigning to it the importance of a family character in the higher group Acanthopterygians, the more so as various authors? had even regarded it as worthy of defining Sub-orders or Orders. In this, however, I was mistaken ; and, after having reduced its importance to that of a family character, I must now abandon its use for anything higher than generic definition. This result is brought about by the study of the ‘Southern Cross’ collection. The genus Notothenia, the type of the family Notothe- niidae, is possessed of a pectoral arch similar to that of the Z’rach- inidae, Callionymidae, and Gadidae, i.e. with the scapular fenestra between the scapular and coracoid bones, as I have ascertained on the type species of the genus, NV. corticeps, Richards., as well as on all the other species represented in the British Museum. But now, on examining the condition of things in some of the new fishes dis- covered in Robertson Bay, which, so far as external characters are concerned, do not differ materially from Notothenia, I find, to my ereat surprise, that the fenestra is situated in the scapula, as in the Leptoscopidae. It is perfectly clear, therefore, that the value of the character in question has been over-rated, and its claim to anything higher than generic importance is out of the question. Even this might be contested by some systematists, but the facility with which the point may be ascertained, without injury to the specimen, by lifting up the skin and muscles at the base of the pectoral fin, should encourage the use of a character which is after all of import- ance and may still help in defining family groups other than the very generalised Nototheniidae. These differ from the Zrachinidae, Percophiidue, Parapercididae, Leptoscopidac, and Uranoscopidae in having a single nostril instead of the two possessed by most Teleosts. I have attempted, in the following synopsis, to enumerate and define the genera grouped under the Nototheniidae. The pectoral arch has not been examined in the genera marked with an asterisk ; otherwise all except Zrematomus conform to the type to which Notothenia belongs. The air-bladder is constantly absent, and every form examined 1 Poiss. du Bassin du Congo, p. 50 (1901). 2 Cope, Trans. Amer. Philos. Soc. (2), xiv., 1871, p. 458. Gill, Proc. Acad. Philad., 1884, p. 170. Jordan and Evermann, Fish. N. Amer., iii., p. 2528 (1898). 176 Southern Cross. by me, including Bathydraco, has pseudobranchiae. The ventral fins are never close together, as in the Zrachinidae and Uranoscopidae. I. Gill-membranes free or narrowly attached to the isthmus. A. Dorsal formed of two portions, which may be united at the base. 1. Two lateral lines, the lower of which may be confined to the caudal region; palate toothless. a. Body covered with ctenoid scales; teeth in several series; snout not spatulate. a. Anterior dorsal formed of slender, flexible rays. Scapular foramen in scapular bone..............ssscetescsceeees Trematomus, &. 1. Scapular foramen between scapula and coracoid ............ Notothenia, Rich. 8, Anterior dorsal formed of short, pun- Sent SPINES «ov ccecaenaeer seas wemesene Macronotothen, Gill.* b. Body covered with very small cycloid scales; teeth ina single series; snout NOG SPAtUlAte 5. cos -ncitsiseicorhiswenicaves Dissostichus, Smitt.* c. Body naked; snout spatulate. Lateral line with granulated plates ........ .....cescsceeceees Chaenichthys, Rich. uateralline without plateste.cehesnseccees rence aaeereraes Champsocephalus, Gill. 2. Three lateral lines; body naked; snout spatu- late ; palate toothless ............ ivanasmers Cryodraco, Dollo.* 5. A single lateral line. a. Body scaly. Teeth on vomer and palatines ; head armed...............008 Centropercis, Ogilby.* Teeth on vomer and palatines; opercle with a flat spine... Psewdaphritis, Casteln. Teeth on vomer only; a praeorbital spine............ceeeceees Acanthaphritis, Gthr. Palate toothlesss.<;0c..<.caacusassssnessuseussveses desteseseenaaveaee Eleginops, Gill. b. Body naked; habit cottoid; opercle strongly armed............... hesabsonande Bovichthys, ©. & V. B. A single dorsal; snout long and flattened ; palate toothless. 1. Two lateral lines. a. Body naked; opercle armed. Lateral lines without bony plates ..............cscsceeeeeseeees Gymnodraco, g. n. Tuaterallines ‘with bony plates j.)..c..csereaceon ceases emenense Parachaenichthys, ¢.n.* | b. Body covered with extremely small scales; no opercular spines............ Gerlachia, Dollo.* 2. Lateral line single; body covered with ex- tremely small scales. No opercular spines’, -.cicorvteocs se ccaceoteeswecesreeeeee eee Bathydraco, Gthr. Opercular spines .oihccntcoasescnsweus es SnOUSoSHDOSoeeGaneensonseny Racovitzaia, Dollo.* ? II. Gill-membranes broadly united to the isthmus ; habit cottoid ; body naked ; head armed; palate toothless Hapagifer, Rich. The genus Pagetodus, Rich., rests on an insufficient description and figure. ' Based on Chaenichthys georgianus, Fischer, from South Georgia Island. * The distinctive characters of these genera have unfortunately been inverted in the synopsis given in Ann. and Mag. N. H. (7) viii. 1901, p. 266. Pisces. 177 TREMATOMUS, gen. n. Differing from Notothenia in the scapular fenestra being pierced in the scapula instead of between the latter and the coracoid. Synopsis of the Spectes. I. Interorbital width 3 to 33 times in length of head; lower jaw projecting beyond upper; gill-rakers 18 to 20 on lower part of anterior arch. D. VI-VIII, 32-36; A. 82-33; Sq. 90-100 ~*; lateral 30-31 ? linesistronely- marked) tUbUlaRy. secccmes cases cesieciedcaces ves. 1. newnesi, sp. 1. D. V-VI, 84-37; A. 31-33; Sq. 97-110; lateral lines ill- CCEMER sereneetceranecscie ceo sosaeae cadlet eaten cteccieitonsncrenau secs 2. borchgrevinki, sp. n. II. Interorbital width 43 to 53 times in length of head; lower jaw not projecting beyond upper ; gili-rakers 12 to 15 on lower part of anterior arch. D. V-VII (usually VI), 88-41; A. 34-385; Sq. 65-75 5 20-24 ? TMLETOL Dital TESIONSCAlYijeacaccedenseerwdsoes-seence=ereeorsc Or NOISONT, Sp. Ne D. IV-VI (usually V), 35-38; A. 32-35; Sq. 66-80 55-; interorbital region naked or with a few scales...........066 4, bernacchit, sp. n. As regards the skeleton, which I have been able to examine in the four species, the characters are essentially the same, except that the ossification is stronger, and the skull more massive, in the species of Group I. than in those of Group II. The parapophyses begin on the second or third vertebree and soon become very strong; they bear the rib and the epipleural, which are inserted close together. Nuinber of vertebrae :— T. newnesi. 20 + 34 = d4 T. borchgrevinki. 20 + 82 = 52 T. hansont. 21 + 35 = 56 T. bernacchit. 17 + 35 = 52 3. TREMATOMUS NEWNESI, sp. n. (PLATE XI.) Depth of body 4 to 42? times in total length, length of head 33 to 4 times. Diameter of eye 3 (young) to 4 times in length of head, interorbital width 3 to 33 times; maxillary extending to below centre or posterior third of eye; lower jaw projecting beyond the upper; upper surface of head naked; cheek and opercle densely scaled. Gill-rakers long and slender, 18 to 20 on lower part of anterior arch. Dorsal VI-VIII,’ 32-36; longest rays ? to } length of head. Anal 32-35; longest rays } length of head. Pectoral 1 Out of 70 specimens, 48 have VII, 19 have VIII, and 3 have VI. N 178 Southern Cross. truncate behind, a little shorter than head, reaching beyond origin of anal. Ventral 2 to # length of head. Caudal rounded. Caudal peduncle as long as deep. Scales 87-100 565; lateral line yy. Dark olive, uniform or with darker spots or marblings; anterior dorsal blackish, other fins greyish, often with small black spots. Total length, 190 mm. Forty-seven specimens found about Duke of York Island, at a depth of 3 to 5 fathoms, and 23 from Cape Adare, 4 to 8 fathoms. Measurements and numbers of fin-rays and scales of some of the specimens! :— 1 esa a 9/10/11 Duke of York Island . . | 190! VII | 33 | 33 | 44 | 33 | 4 | 34 | 93] go | tf " eR oh 190 Vin | 32 | 32 | 42 | 32 | 33 | 82 | 92 | 8, | 48 rk, 180 | VIL | 36 | 35 | 43 | 34 | 34 | 34 | 100 | a | 48 é 180 | VIII | 34 | 32 44 | 32/321] 32] 98 | 8% | 48 ; - 180 | VII | 34 | 32 | 44] 34 | 32 | 35 | 94] 3% | 42 4 170 | VIE | 34 | 32] 4 | 34 | 33) 34] 88 | of | 48 , : 1170 | VI | 36 | Bk 44 | 4 | 82/32) 95 | | $2 |170| vit | 35} 32/4 | 32/4 [3 | 90] a | 42 B 170 | vit | 34| 33 | 43 | 33 | 32} 32] 93 | a | 48 f 7 170 | VII | 34 | 32 | 42 | 33 | 82 | 32] 92) 3 | + x “A re - . | 170 | VIL | 34] 33 | 44 | 388 | 3h | 34] 87] a | $8 . » » + «| 165) VIL | 36 | 34 | 48] 32 | 32] 82) 95] a | 4 7" » » « = | 165) WEI) 35 32) 42 \eei4 sal :o5 cel ee ¥ » +s | 155 | veer} 94 | 34 | 4g | a2 | 32 | 3a] 90 | we | 43 F » oe | 200" VEEL | 350134 | 4g ge | 32 Spl oO zeae : » » «+ «| 140) WIE | 36 | 33 | 42/39 | 33 | 34 | 891 3 | #8 ¥ mee ea ate lealles |e. 32 |3 | 34 | 100 | 8 | $2 Cape Adare. . . . .| 115| VIN | 35 | 33| 42/3413 | 82) 98) | 4 ok ee sn |) OO) WHE 185 837) 4a Bp Ss pay) soniieer eae | * This and the following tables read thus:—1. Total length (in millimetres). 2. Rays in anterior dorsal. 3. Rays in second dorsal. 4. Rays in anal. 5. Depth of body in total length. 6. Length of head in total length. 7. Diameter of eye in length of head. 8. Interorbital width in length of head. 9. Scales in a longi- tudinal series (above upper lateral line). 10. Scales in a transverse series. 11. Tubular scales in the lateral lines. Pisces. 179 4+. TREMATOMUS BORCHGREVINKI, sp. n. (PLATE XII.) Depth of body 4 to 5 times in total length, length of head 33 to 4} times. Diameter of eye 3 (young) to 43 times in length of head, interorbital width 3 to 3} times; maxillary extending to below anterior border or anterior third of eye; lower jaw projecting beyond the upper; upper surface of head naked ; small patches of scales on cheek and on upper part of opercle; openings of sensory canals on head very large. Giull-rakers moderately long, 18 to 20 on lower part of anterior arch. Dorsal V—VI, 34-37; longest rays } to 3 length of head. Anal 31-33; longest rays 2 to 3} length of head. Pectoral somewhat truncate behind, * or ? length of head (nearly as long as head in the young). Caudal rounded. Caudal peduncle as long as deep or a little deeper than long. Scales 97-110; lateral line very indistinct, reduced to mere pits, tubular scales entirely absent or very few. Yellowish, with more or less indistinct dusky spots, forming vertical bars on the sides; a spot above the shoulder and another at the base of the pectoral fin; fins whitish, the dorsal usually with rather indistinct dark streaks. Six specimens measuring up to 275 mm. from Duke of York Island, on the surface among the ice floes, and 6 from Cape Adare, caught near the surface. One of these has been figured in Bernacchi’s ‘South Polar Regions,’ p. 98. Measurements and numbers of fin-rays and scales :— ite PS |e 4 5 6 7 8 9 if PE a cere OR RO PEE Se Duke of York Island . | 275|V | 37 | 33 | 43 | 42 4 3 98 se 250 | VI 35 |) Bie || 4g | 4 sees. || 100 39 Sty . | 170 | S5pn sill 2426 | gene ese ess” 100 eS 3 }125| V| 85 | 82 | 43 | 32 | 3g | 33 | 98 ee ee; Mea | 36 SPM shee Se ea Se 1a 97 Cape Adare | 225) VIj 35 33 44 33 4s 3 104 ee: | 225 | VI} 35 B21 5 36 | 4 3 «| 105 ae: P1On|) Vi | 35 | 33 | 44 | 32 | 4 3 99 ss 190) "Vi 34 | 31 |. 4e | 8£ | 4 3 | 110 oS 160| V | 35 | 33 | 48 | 32 | 34 | 3} | 105 eer l120|vr| 34 | 31 he 34 | 3 3 | 97 180 Southern CyYoss. 5, TREMATOMUS HANSONI, sp. n. (PLatTE XIII.) Depth of body 53 to 43 times in total length, length of head 3} to 4 times. Diameter of eye 32 to 4 times in length of head, interorbital width 41 to 5 times; maxillary extending to below anterior third or centre of eye; lower jaw not projecting beyond the upper; cheek, opercle, occiput, and interorbital region densely scaled; openings of sensory canals on head large. Gill-rakers short, 13 to 15 on lower part of anterior arch. Dorsal V—VII,! 38-41; longest rays about 4 length of head. Anal 34-35; longest rays about + length of head. Pectoral rounded, a little shorter than head, reaching beyond origin of anal. Ventral 2 to # length of head. Caudal rounded. Caudal peduncle as long as deep. Scales 65-75 s=; upper lateral line 38-44, lower usually formed of a series of pits, or reduced to a few tubular scales. Brownish, lighter beneath, with large dark spots or marblings or more or less regular cross-bands ; fins greyish, dorsals, pectorals, and caudal usually with more or less distinct darker bars. Total length, 280 mm. Seventeen specimens from Cape Adare, 4 to 8 fathoms, and 1 from Duke of York Island, 3 to 4 fathoms. Measurements and numbers of fin-rays and scales of some of the specimens :— 1 2 SES 18) nO LOS ene Cape Adare . 980) | VI S984 |. Se re OM alee ~ a 270.) Vile |)-393) 35. Be 8k 4A on ib aise is 265 | VI | 41 | 85 | 88) 32|4 |5 | 67 | oe] 41 9 , 250 | VIE | 88 | 34 | 34 | 38/4 |5 | 65 | | 42 9 , 250 | VI | 40| 35) 44/4 (4 15 | ZI | a5 | 39 9 5 220 | VI | 40 | 35} 42] 32/4 | 42 | 73 | o | 45 ” ” 210 V | 40/ 35 | 44) 3868) 4 | 5 70 | gy | 39 i 205 | VI | 40|35|4 | 32|4 |5 | 65 | & | 40 Ne ae | 205 | VI | 40/35|4 | 32|33/5 | 65 | | 38 Ta |195| VI | 40 | 35 | 42 | 32 | 33/5 | 70 | 8 | 44 aa 190 | VI | 39 | 35 | 44| 32/4 |5 | 68 | 8 | 40 ie eS 190| VI | 39|385/44/4 |4 | 42] 68 | =, | 39 > a 165 | VI | 38 | 35 | 43 | 34 | 32] 5 | 65 | 2h | 42 he ee | GOL) WI ROR Sa aise Sean Goer aes Duke of York Island . . | 175] VI | 39 | 84 | 44 | 32 | 32) 5 | 70 | B& | 42 1 Usually VI; of the 18 specimens examined, only one has five rays, and one seven. Pisces. 181 6. TREMATOMUS BERNACCHII, sp. n. (PuatEe XIV.) Depth of body 3} to 4 times in total length, length of head 33 to 4 times. Diameter of eye 34 to 4 times in length of head, interorbital width 5 to 53 times; maxillary extending to below anterior third or centre of eye; lower jaw not projecting beyond the upper; cheek, opercle, and occiput densely scaled; interorbital region naked or with a few scales; openings of sensory canals on head large. Gill-rakers short, 13 to 15 on lower part of anterior arch. Dorsal IV—-VI,’ 35-38; longest rays about 3 length of head. Anal 32-35; longest rays about 4 length of head. Pectoral rounded, 2 length of head, reaching origin of anal or a little beyond. Ven- tral # to 2 length of head. Caudal rounded. Caudal peduncle deeper than long. Scales 66-80 ==; upper lateral line 31-40, lower usually formed of a series of pits or reduced to a few tubular scales. Brownish, lighter beneath, with large dark spots, usually forming two or three alternating series on the side; fins grey, upper half of anterior dorsal black or blackish. Total length, 250 mm. Thirty-nine specimens from Cape Adare, 5 to 8 fathoms, and 5 from Duke of York Island, 3 to 4 fathoms. Measurements and numbers of fin-rays and scales in some of the specimens :— 1 2 Sree | GO fege f h ) B) yeaa ye aly CapeAdare. . . . .|250| V | 36 | 33 | 32 | 82) 4 | 53 | 72 | 2 | 36 Ee Se 280) Ve 88 ).33) an 8814 oh | 68)! a. | 86 ae 230 | Vv |35|35|32/34/4 |5 | 75 | & | 40 simantl 2200 | Vv |37|34|33|34/4 | 58] 77 | & | 37 oe 920 | V |35|338|382|/34/4 |5 | 75 | 8 | 32 6 is 220| V |36|33|34|32/4 |5 | 68 | $f, | 35 ome 200 | IV. | 37| 35 | 34 | 3814 | 52 | 80 | & | 37 Sey ig 215| V | 35|33|3%| 34] 4 | 54 | 72 | 3 | 35 95 oe : 200 Vv 38 | 33 | 4 3% | 4 5) 73 | x | 35 » ” : 200} VI | 36} 33/4 | 34 | 32) 5 | 74! & | 36 name 3f Bch | vw 1951/95) 4 | 3214 | 5a | 77 | se [31 3 ” C 180 | IV | 87} 34] 34 | 34/4 | 5 | 70 | Sea) 35 ae a 180| v | 36| 34| 32] 32 | 3¢] 5a | 76 | | 35 Mn. 170| V |36/34|4 | 34 | 32] 52 | 67| 2 | 35 a ee 165| V | 38| 32/4 | 32 | 38] 54 | 77 | | 35 Duke of York Island 230 | V | 37 | 32|4 | 383 /) 32) 5 | 70} & | 34 a aa tae is5| Vv |35/ 33/4 | 34/32/58 | 68) 8 | 31 A ee 180| V_ | 38 | 32 | 3¢ | 33 | 32 | 58 | 75 | & | 35 Gs foe os. 170| V | 38|35|4 | 32 | 32 | 54 |-66 | 48, | 33 : ee 120| V |35|32|4 | 38 | 34 | 53] 79 | 3 | 35 182 Southern Cross. NOTOTHENIA, Richardson. The identification of the fishes of this Peri-Antarctic genus is beset with great difficulties, in the absence of a general account of them, and this deficiency has resulted in the description of a good number of purely nominal species. An attempt to reduce the number of species described from the Fuegian district has recently been made by Professor Smitt,! but a careful examination of the large material in the British Museum has failed to convince me of the soundness of his conclusions. In no species do I find the number of rays in the anterior dorsal varying as much as from 4 to 7, as Professor Smitt believes, nor does the size of the eye prove to be an unreliable character, provided the comparison be made of similar- sized specimens ; and the width of the interorbital region, compared to the-length of the head, is still more important as not varying with age. Autopsy of a number of individuals among the material at hand has satisfied me that sexual dimorphism does not account for the differences in the proportions of the parts of the head which has been ascribed to it. In his endeavour to settle questions of species by means of elaborate tables of measurements, the Professor appears to have lost sight of many really important specific characters, and I consider his contribution as a misleading guide to the study of this difficult group. My conclusions are embodied in the following synopsis of the species, concerning which I wish to point out that I have myself counted, with the greatest care, the fin-rays and scales in nearly all the specimens at my command. Except for the definition of N. canina and N. jilholi, which are only known to me from the descriptions, all the characters are taken from specimens in the British Museum. The length of the head is measured to the extremity of the opercular bone. The scales in a longitudinal series are counted above the lateral line, from the origin of the latter to the end of the muscular part of the tail; those in the transverse series are counted from the middle of the anterior dorsal to the lateral line, and from the latter to the mid-ventral line, some distance in front of the vent. The lateral line, in these fishes, consists partly of tubules and partly of more or less distinct impressions or pits; only the tubular scales are counted. For the purpose of uniformity, the scales have been almost invariably counted on the left side of the specimens. 1 Bih. Vet, Ak, Handl., xxiii., iv., 1897, No. 3. Pisces. 183 Synopsis of the Species. J. Anal with 28 to 35 rays. A. Interorbital width 32 to 6 times in length of head. 1. Six or seven rays to anterior dorsal; interorbital region and occiput scaly. D, 38-34; A. 31-33; Sq. 75-86 3 ventral fin % length OLGA ani teeew smasaneematenaatee vous je saassecuceeseceneerectaness 1. tessellata, Rich.! D. 32-33; A. 80-381; Sq. 68-71 5; ventral fin $ length of head's) very strone)camine teeth: . <...ccc0s.-css.eccnesesesess 2. canina, Smitt. D, 28-30; A. 28-30; Sq. 50-52 +. ; ventral fin $ length ON CAC ee as veces ten Tate eoe Sow enaninn teatonmoaGewounenate coins 3. sima, Rich.” 2. Five or six rays to the anterior dorsal; interorbital region and occiput naked, D. 32-38; A. 28-31; Sq. 67-90 F®; cheek entirely or WAMU VEMAK EC e a. onean act secaesceae ence t eleaet tee nacamauesalad 4, coriiceps, Rich.* D, 86; A. 33; Sq. 87 =3 cheek densely scaled............... 5. cyaneobrancha, Rich. B. Interorbital wiath 7 to 8 times in length of head. 1. Sq. 48-54 =" ; A, 28-31. 13-14 ? D. VI-VII, 29; ventral 2 length of head; interorbital GE OMESCAlivan meets sap Meene came ac sels nes eMaeGsleeSectemmenweesee 6. marionensis, Gthr.* D. VI, 33-35; ventral nearly as long as head ; interorbital TEOIOMP MAKE) ree gcse ascecactiven dads seas eoiaae genecwres smcaveeaeeee 7. elegans, Gthr. 2, Sq. 66-77 s-s,; A. 31-33, D. V-VI, 35-37; ventral # to # length of head; inter- GEO balereSlOMUs Alive a ctaceasetcieettess elise slecas oceanic encdesas 8. longipes, Stdr.? D. IV, 387; ventral 2 to } length of head; interorbital NEPIOW MAK ECO seesisevasiansioss seas hes orem eacsecasndecrenvcsseaesactes 9. nicolai, sp. n. C. Interorbital width 10 to 11 times in length of head; interorbital region scaly, D. IV-V, 35-37; A. 38-35; Sq. 59-66 ;4;; ventral as long as or a little shorter than head.................2seeeeeees 10, mizops, Gthr. D. VI, 30; A. 32; Sq. 68 a3 ventral 3 length of head...... 11. acuta, Gthr. II. Anal with 23 to 25 rays. A. Interorbital width 3 to 33 times in length of head. D. VII-VIII, 26-27 ; Sq. 100-112 2; gill-rakers 15 or 16 on lower part of anterior arch; caudal emarginate......... 12. colbecki, sp. n. 1 WN, veitchit, Gthr., 1874. 2 N. squamiceps, Ptrs. 1876. N. cornucola, f. sguamifrons, Smitt, 1897. 3 N. purpuriceps, Rich., 1844. N. cornucolu, Rich., 1844. N. virgata, Rich., 1845. N. marginata, Rich., 1845. N. cornucola, ff. calva et intermedia, Smitt, 1897. WN. modesta, Stdr., 1898. 4 N. angustifrons, Fischer, 1885. ® N, squamifrons, Gthr., 1880, N, tessellata, f. megalops, Smitt, 1897. 184 Southern Cross. D. VI, 28-29; Sq. 65-68 8 se; gill-rakers 10 to 12; caudal TOUNC CG e cea ce iv etated pereant sock schs hone eee eee 13. microlepidota, Hutt. B, Interorbital width 23 to 23 in length of head. D. IV, 29-30; Sq. 58-62 8 gill-rakers 10 or 11; caudal truncate or slightly emarginate ..................00. 14. macrocephala, Gthr.? Ill. Anal with 18 to 20 rays. D. VII, 24-25 ; Sq. 100-110; head scaly above ............ 15. filholi, Sauy. Notothenia phocae, Rich., and N, magellanica, Forst., have not been identified. 7. NOTOTHENIA NICOLAI, sp. n. (PLATE XY.) Depth of body nearly 4 times in total length, length of head 3} to 34 times. Diameter of eye 3 times in length of head, interorbital width 7 to 8 times; maxillary extending to below anterior fourth or anterior third of eye; lower jaw projecting beyond the upper; upper surface of head naked ; cheek and opercle densely scaled, Gill-rakers rather short, 11 or iS on lower part of anterior arch. Dorsal IV, 35-37; longest rays } length of head. Anal 31-33; longest rays + length of head, Pectoral rounded, a little shorter than head, reaching beyond origin of anal. Ventral 2 to 3 length of head. Caudal rounded. Caudal peduncle nearly as long as deep. Scales 69-77 35,3 lateral line “8. Olive-brown, with more or less dis- tinct cross-bars, and with or without small black spots; fins dark brown, anterior dorsal black. Total length, 230 mm. This new species, named in memory of Nicolai Hanson, is repre- sented by four specimens from Cape Adare, at a depth of 5 to 8 fathoms, and one from Duke of York Island, 4 fathoms. Measurements and numbers of fin-rays and scales in these specimens are here given. 1 SS Pa Sa G ay ase OotOn Lt CaperAdarome. = = eee. ar 230 | IV | 37 | 33) 4 | 33 | 3 7 | 70 | wer! 38 sae 1900) EV. Sb 11e92 4: 1 3n os Age reaikenna aha) ee 1600) SEV. 1°37. (8324) 4alese 1) s32) 7 GO a ening ts 145 | IV | 37 | 82) 4) 83) 3/7 | 70) x | 48 Duke of York Island . . | 160) IV | 37] 31] 4 | Be] 318 1 77 | se | 1 N. parva, Hutt., 1879. 2 N. maoriensis, "Haast, 1873. N. angustata, Hutt., 1875. N. hassleriana, Stdr., 1875. NW. antaretica, Ptrs., 1876, NV, arquta, Hutt., 1879. N. marmorata, Fischer, 1885, Pisces. 185 8. NOTOTHENIA CORIICEPS, Rich. Robertson Bay, 5 to 7 fathoms. 9. NOTOTHENIA COLBECKI, sp. n. (PuaTE XVI.) Depth of body 4 to 5 times in total length, leneth of head 31 to 33 times. Diameter of eye 4 (young) to 6 times in length of head, interorbital width 3 to 33 times; maxillary extending to below anterior third or centre of eye; lower jaw projecting beyond the upper ; head smooth or papillose, granulate, only the upper part of the cheek and opercle being scaly. Gill-rakers rather short, 15 or 16 on lower part of anterior arch. Dorsal VII-VIII, 26-27; longest rays about 2 length of head. Anal 23-24; longest rays about 3 length of head. Pectoral rounded, 2 length of head, not reaching beyond origin of anal. Ventral about 3 length of head. Caudal emarginate. Caudal peduncle longer than deep. Dark olive above, yellowish beneath; fins dark brown, dorsal, anal and caudal tipped with yellowish. Total length, 380 mm. Twelve specimens from Campbell Island, south of New Zealand. Measurements and number of rays and scales of some of the specimens :— Campbell Island . . . | 380| VII | 27/234 | 33/6 | 8 | 106 | 42 | 52 a. . . . | 280) VIE | 27} 23] 42/32) 5 | 8 | 100 | 42 | x9 My 130 ‘Vu 27 | 23) 43 | 33/5 | 3 | 112 | a8 | gg | 9 29 eet | na VII | 26 | 24 | 43 | 34 | 42 | 33 | 105 | 22 | 32 64 30 - % eee | | ae 26 | 24,5 | 382 |4 | 34 112 | 35 10. NOTOTHENIA MICROLEPIDOTA, Hutton. Auckland and Campbell Islands. This species grows to a length of 400 mm.; and the very massive adults have quite a cottoid physiognomy. 186 Southern Cross. 11. NoTOTHENIA MACROCEPHALA, Gthr. Campbell Island. BOVICHTHYS, Cuv. et Val. 12. BovICHTHYS VARIEGATUS, Rich. Several specimens from Campbell Island. GYMNODRACO, gen. n. Body elongate, depressed in front, compressed behind, naked ; two lateral lines. Snout flattened, much produced; mouth large, jaws with a single series of closely-set, curved compressed teeth, and with very large canines anteriorly, those of the mandible exposed in front of the snout; palate toothless. Gill-cover with two spines, the upper very strong and with a hooked branch. Gill-membrane narrowly attached to isthmus; branchiostegal rays 6. A single, long dorsal fin, formed of articulated rays ; a similar anal fin. Scapular fenestra between the scapula and the coracoid. Ver- tebrae 20 + 28; ribs and epipleurals very slender, inserted behind well-developed parapophyses on the praesacral vertebrae. 13. GYMNODRACO ACUTICEPS, sp. n. (Puate XVII.) Depth of body 8 to 9 times in total length, length of head 3 to 31. Head strongly depressed, twice as long as broad ; snout acutely pointed, as long as postocular part of head; nostril rather large, not tubular, nearer the eye than the end of the snout; interorbital region broad and slightly concave ; diameter of eye 5 times in length of head, equal to interorbital width; maxillary extending to below anterior border of eye; lower jaw strongly projecting beyond the snout, which is overlapped by the very strong backwardly directed canine teeth with which the symphysis is furnished; the anterior canine teeth of the praemaxillaries directed forward, the posterior stronger and directed backward; opercle armed with a very strong, flat spine, with an upper hooked branch as in Harpagifer ; subopercle with a small spine. Dorsal 28-30, originating a little in advance of Pisces. 187 the vent, its length nearly twice its distance from the head ; longest rays } to} length of head. Anal 24-26, originating below sixth or seventh ray of dorsal; rays nearly as long as dorsals. Pectoral rounded, subtruncate behind, } to 2 length of head, not reaching vent. Ventral a little shorter than pectoral. Caudal truncate. Caudal peduncle 1} to 12 as long as deep. Lateral lines appearing as tubes or pits in a series of small scales embedded in the skin; the upper extends from the gill-opening to about the vertical of the origin of the dorsal, the lower from below the extremity of the upper to the root of the caudal fin, running along the middle of the caudal region. Brownish olive, belly whitish; more or less distinct irregular dark brown spots on the head, back, and sides of the caudal region ; fins ereyish. Total length, 300 mm. Five specimens were obtained at Cape Adare, in + to 8 fathoms, in April and November, 1899. This curious fish has been noticed by Bernacchi, ‘To the South Polar Regions,’ p. 209, and a photograph of it is given in Borch- erevink’s book, p. 115, middle figure. LEHEPTOSCOPIDAE. PLEURAGRAMMA, gen. n. Body rather elongate, compressed, covered with large, thin, cycloid scales; lateral line absent. Snout flattened, but not spatulate ; mouth large, with bands of villiform teeth; a pair of canines at the prae- maxillary symphysis; lateral mandibular teeth in a single series, unequal in size; palate toothless. Opercle ending in a point; no spines on the head. Gill-membrane free ; pseudobranchiae present ; branchiostegal rays six. Two distinct dorsal fins, the first short and formed of slender simple rays, the second, as well as the anal, long. Skeleton feebly ossified; suborbital chain very slender; scapular fenestra in the scapula; vertebrae 19 + 34, praecaudals without parapophyses. 14, PLEURAGRAMMA ANTARCTICUM, sp. n. (PLATE XVIII.) Depth of body about 5 times in total length, length of head 34 times. Snout flattened above, with feeble bony ridges, nearly as long as the eye, the diameter of which is contained 3 or 3} times in length 188 Southern Cross. of head ; interorbital region flat, with a feeble median ridge, its width 4} times in leneth of head; maxillary extending to below anterior third or centre of eye; lower jaw projecting beyond the lower, with a symphysial knob; upper surface of head naked; large thin scales on opercle. Gill-rakers long and slender, 23 to 25 on lower part of anterior arch. Dorsal VI, 37-40; the anterior rays of the first division longer than those of the second. Anal 30-34. Pectoral scarcely longer than ventral, about 2 length of head. Caudal emargi- nate. Scales 45 or 46 in a longitudinal series, 12 in a transverse series. Silvery, brownish on the back, speckled with blackish. Total length, 165 mm. This description is based on several specimens, in very bad state of preservation and falling to pieces, obtained on the ice barrier at 78°35° 8. lat., the farthest point at which fishes have yet been obtained in the Antarctic region. Owing to the condition of the specimens, the figure here given of the entire fish must be regarded as, to some extent, a restoration, which I believe, however, to be correct. BLENNIIDAE. 15. TRIPTERYGIUM VARIUM, Bl. Schn. Auckland Island, 5 fathoms. PLEURONECTIDAE. 16. RHOMBOSOLEA TAPIRINA, Gthr. Campbell Island. Pisces. 189 EXPLANATION OF PLATES. PuatTe XI. Trematomus newnest (p. 177), with upper view of head and side view of skull. Puate XII, Trematomus borchgrevinkt (p. 179), with upper view of head and side view of skull. PuatTe XIII. Trematomus hansoni (p. 180), with upper view of head and side view of skull. PLaTE XIV. Trematomus bernacchit (p. 181), with upper view of head and side view of skull. PLATE XV. Notothenia nicolat (p. 184), with upper view of head. PLATE XVI. Notothenia colbecki (p. 185), adult, reduced to 2 with upper view of head, and young, natural size. Puate XVII. Gymnodraco acuticeps (p. 186). PuatE XVIII. Pleuragramma antarcticum (p. 187). 190 Southern Cross. Vi. TUNICAT® By W. A. HERDMAN, D.Sc, F.RS. (Plates XTX-X XIII.) Turis collection does not contain many species, but some of the specimens are of very large size. Unfortunately some of them are in very bad condition, and none are really well preserved. Even when refinements of killing and fixing are impossible it should be easy for all collectors of Tunicata to make simple incisions through the test into the interior of the animal—whether it be a simple Ascidian or a colony—before dropping the specimen into alcohol, and that makes a very great difference in the condition of the internal organs after preservation. However, in some of the present cases, from the ragged appearance and the broken-down condition even at the surface of the animal, I am inclined to think that no precautions and care would have availed, as the specimens were probably dead and decomposing colonies when collected. Although our knowledge of the Antarctic Tunicate fauna is very limited, still we know that the Southern seas generally have a rich Tunicate fauna. Quoy and Gaimard long ago remarked, “La Nouvelle-Hollande, dans sa partie sud, et la Nouvelle-Zélande, sont les lieux de prédilection des Ascidies en général;” and the Aus- tralian fauna includes over 180 known species of Ascidians, a greater number than that known from the shores of North-West Europe, a corresponding coastal area in the northern hemisphere, and the one that has probably been most exhaustively worked up. The south coast of Australia is in about 40° south latitude. Whether species remain as abundant as we go still further south we do not yet know ; but on the shores of Kerguelen Island (about 50° south latitude) and in the Straits of Magellan (about 55° south latitude), not only are species of Ascidians numerous, but they abound in individuals, and moreover are, as a general rule, of large size. Between latitudes 40° and 55° 8. the ‘ Challenger’ obtained twenty-eight species of simple Ascidians and thirty-nine species of compound. At far southern stations such large and remarkable forms as Ascwuia challengeri, Tunicata. 191 A, placenta and A. meridionalis, Corynascidia suhmi, Abyssascidia vasculosa, Eugyra kerguelenensis, Ascopera gigantea and A. pedun- culata, Molqula gigantea and M. pedunculata, Goodsiria coccinea and G. pedunculata, Culeolus recwmbens and C. perlucidus, Fungulus cinereus, Bathyoncus mirabilis, Styela lactea, S. sericata, S. grandis, S. conveaa, and Pharyngodictyon mirabile, Colella peduneulata and C. conereta, Amaroucium variabile, Chorizocormus reticulatus, Tylo- branchion speciosum, Atopogaster gigantea and A. elongata, were evidently a marked feature of the fauna. Since the ‘ Challenger’ expedition the ‘ Belgica’ and the ‘ Valdivia’ have brought home col- lections from the far south. These are being worked out, but no results in regard to the Tunicata have so far* been published. The present collection, made by the officers of the ‘ Southern Cross’ along the beach and in the shallow water at Cape Adare, Victoria Land, consists of two species of simple Ascidians belonging to the family Cynthiidae, six species of compound Ascidians, five of which are Polyclinidae, and of a number of specimens of Salpidae, all of which seem to belong to the chain-form of Su/pa runcinata-fusiformis. Four of the species seem new to science: a 7ylobranchion, a Poly- clinum, and two species of Psanumaplidium, but none of these can be said to be in any way remarkable. The Tylobranchion is interesting as adding a new species to a genus only known from the Southern Ocean. ee CD eas TAL ASCIDIAE SIMPLICKS. Faminty CYNTHIIDAE. Susp-FaMILY BOLTENINAE. Boltenia pachydermatina. (Plate XIX., figs. 1 and 2.) (See ‘Challenger’ Rep., Pt. I., p. 89; also Cat. Tunicata Australian Mus., Pl. Cym. I., fig. 1.) About twenty specimens of this large species were obtained from “ Adventure Bay, Tasmania, 12th Dec., 1898, along the beach.” The individuals range from 8 cm. to 22 cm. in total length, and closely 1 December, 1901. 192 Southern Cross. resemble those figured in the Catalogue of the Tunicata in the Australian Museum. The species shows considerable variation in external form and also in internal structure. But the present specimens, although varying in the proportions of stalk to head,.and in the amount of corrugation of the surface, are all clearly members of the species and agree in essential characters, such as the peculiarly convoluted dorsal tubercle. There is some variation shown in the branchial sac, not only in different individuals, but also in different regions of the same sac. Some parts are like the specimen figured in the ‘ Challenger’ Report (Pl. VIL, fig. 7), with many (six to nine or so) stigmata in each mesh. Other parts are much more solid (see Pl. XIX., fig. 1) and contain only two or four circular stigmata in a mesh, and some- times only one large opening (figs. 1 and 2 show two such irregular parts of the same branchial sac). The latter condition recalls the branchial sac of the allied abyssal genus Culeolus, and suggests the possibility that the condition in the latter may be a secondary one due to the fusion of stigmata, or possibly to the arrest of subdivision of stigmata, so that as the sac grows older stigmata may become much enlarged. In all cases the vessels of the branchial sac contain spicules as figured in the Australian Museum Catalogue (Pl. Cyn. I, fig. 2). The test is also crowded with short knobbed spicules like those of Aleyonaria. In some places the test is mottled on the surface with circular black spots, which are seen in sections to be due to spherical masses of yellow-brown pigment granules. It is not improbable that these pigmented masses are the remains of parasitic algae. SuB-FAMILyY STYELINAE. Styela lactea. (Plate XIX., figs. 3-8.) (See ‘ Challenger’ Rep., Pt. I., p. 156.) Half-a-dozen specimens of this species were found “ washed up on the beach” at Cape Adare on 6th April, 1899. The largest measures 8:5 em. in antero-posterior extent by 5°5 cm. dorso-ventrally, and the smallest shows 3 cm. and 2 cm. for the same two dimensions. These specimens are considerably larger than the ‘Challenger’ specimens obtained at Kerguelen Island, the largest of which measured 4°5 em. in length and 3:5 cm. in breadth. The Cape Adare specimens show a marked posterior pad-like thickening, upon which the animal evidently rested (see Pl. XIX., Tunicata. 193 fig. 3); but sections show that although the test is thickened in this region, the pad is really due more to a great increase in the bulk of the mantle than of the test. In one specimen examined (fig. 4) the thickest part of the test, at the posterior end, measured 5 mm., while the mantle underneath it reached the extraordinary thickness of 10 mm. Over the rest of the bedy both test and mantle are thin. The mantle though thin is muscular, and has distinct external circular and internal longitudinal layers of fibres. The branchial sac does not extend to the posterior end of the body, but leaves a considerable cavity which is occupied by the alimentary canal. The stomach and intestine thus come to lie posteriorly to the branchail sac (fig. 7). The endostyle shows large glandular thickenings, forming pad-like masses placed alternately at its sides (see fig. 6). There are very broad shelf-like horizontal membranes on each transverse vessel (fig. 5); otherwise the branchial sac is as shown in the ‘Challenger’ Report. There are two long gonads on each side of the body, and in addition to these there are many irregular tag-like “ endocarps”’ (see fig. 8). ASCIDIAE COMPOSITAE. Famity POL YCLINIDAE. Tylobranchion antarecticum. (Plate XX., figs. 1-6.) External appearance.—This is a small colony with a rounded slightly lobed upper surface. Each lobe contains a small group of two or three ascidiozooids placed vertically in the transparent test. The colour is light grey, the test being lighter and the ascidiozooids a little darker and showing opaque in the transparent mass, Test.—The lower part of the colony is a solid mass of test about 1 em. in thickness, and covered with adhering and imbedded sand evrains, the upper part is soft and transparent. Mantle-—Thin with prominent muscle bands running longi- tudinally. Branchial sac.—Large, with numerous stigmata. There are no internal longitudinal bars, but the transverse vessels bear large papillae which bifurcate at the free end (figs. 5 and 6). Ascidiozooid—From 5 to 7 mm. in length, exclusive of the long post-abdomen or ectodermal tube. The visceral part (abdomen) is 0 194 Southern Cross. slightly longer than the branchial sac (thorax), while the post- abdomen may be twice as long as the rest of the body, bringing the whole up to about 20 mm. (figs. 2 and 5). At its posterior end the post-abdomen spreads out a little. It is then a plain ectodermal tube. The Dorsal Tubercle has a plain circular opening. Figure 4 shows its relations to the nerve ganglia and the peripharyngeal bands. Tentacles about 12, simple, all the same size. The Stomach has longitudinal ridges (figs. 2 and 3). The intestine is large, and rather irregularly dilated. This colony was obtained off Cape Adare on January 2nd, 1900, from a depth of 20—24 fathoms, where the temperature of the water was 29° Fahr. It is preserved in formol. In the bottle along with it is a large mass of the gelatinous spawn of some mollusc. The appearance of the animal suggests the genus Diazona, which, however, has internal longitudinal bars. It seems best to put this new species in the genus 7'ylobranchion, established in the ‘ Challenger’ Report for a species (Z. speciosum) of which three colonies were obtained at Kerguelen Island from depths between 10 and 100 fathoms. Tylobranchion speciosum, while agreeing in general anatomy with the present species, differs from it in form of colony (see ‘ Challenger’ Rep., Part Il. Pl. XXII, fig. 1) and proportions of ascidiozooid, and in details of most organs. It shows, however, the same bifid papillae on the transverse vessels of the branchial sac. Atopogaster elongata. (Plate XXI., figs. 1-10.) (See ‘ Challenger’ Rep., Pt. II., p. 178, 1886.) This is a species that was trawled up in quantity during the ‘ Challenger’ expedition at Station 313 in the Strait of Magellan, from 55 fathoms. The ‘ Challenger’ colonies presented a great variety in form, and the specimens now before us do so to an even greater degree. On plate III. we show a few prevalent shapes selected from the hundred or so in the collection. The greater number of the specimens, over fifty, were obtained washed up on the beach at Cape Adare on April 6th, 1899. A handful of the smaller ones (figs. 6 and 7) look like nothing so much as a group of new potatoes. The larger colonies (figs. 1, 2, 4, and 8) are more irregular in form. Other specimens were obtained :— “ April 24th,” one specimen. Tunicata. 195 “Cape Adare, 25th January, washed up on beach,’ twenty specimens. “Cape Adare, 7-10 fathoms, 23rd January, 30° Fahr.,” five specimens. “Cape Adare, 21st January, 1900, washed up on beach,” twenty specimens. “Cape Adare, 5th January, 1900, on the beach,” eleven colonies. A well-grown colony measures 9 X 4X3 cm., another is 6x 2x 2em. The longest is 10 cm., and some of the smallest are nearly globular, being about 2°5 x 2cm. They are all of a dark grey colour, and are very hard and solid to the feel. The test is very compact, and in many cases no trace of ascidiozooids can be seen unless the colony is cut open. In sections they show as long yellow bodies in the grey test. A few of the colonies were evidently attached by one end, others apparently near the middle, but many not at all—probably most lay free on the bottom. In many cases the colony is the same in character all over its surface, but in others (see figs. 9 and 10) the lower parts may be much wrinkled and rougher, forming a stalk for the upper end or “head,” which is of a lighter grey, and softer, and shows the anterior ends of the ascidiozooids distinctly. The branchial sac is large, and shows many large stigmata. Polyclinum adareanum. (Plate XXIL., figs. 1-0.) External appearance.—Colony large, globular or pear-shaped, with a rounded upper end. The lower end is rather narrower and may be wrinkled and incrusted with sand. Test.—Grey, tough; firmer on the surface where it forms a cuticle, softer inside, looser in texture on the top of the colony, and strengthened with sand in the lower part. Ascidiozooids arranged in systems of eight or ten in a circle round a common cloaca. . Branchial sac, with about twenty rows of numerous small stigmata. There are very strong muscle bands in the transverse vessels. Languets.—A row of short curved tentacle-like processes, shorter than their distance apart and not flattened. Locality.—“ Cape Adare, 6th April, 1899, washed up on beach,’ half-a-dozen colonies; and “Cape Adare, 21st January, 1900, washed up on beach,” one colony. This last colony measures 9°5 x 6°5 x 3°5 em., while the largest of the series is 14 x 12 x 10 em., and the smallest 6 x 4 x 3 em.; the rest are all about 0 2 196 Southern Cross. 12x 9x 5ecm. Some of the colonies (Pl. XXIL., figs. 1 and 2) are rather like turnips in appearance, others longer and more cylin- drical, like large sausages. The ascidiozooids are large, measuring over 1 cm. in length, and up to 1°5 mm. in breadth (dorso-ventrally). In some the wrinkling of the surface layer of test at the posterior end is very close (fig. 6), and in some the darkening of the surface with sand grains is more marked than in others. The minute black sand grains may even adhere to the test over the upper end, where they are placed around the apertures of the ascidiozooids in such a way as to mark out the systems with dots (fig. 4). The systems are about 1 cm. in diameter, and the common cloaca measures 1:5 mm. across. Figure 5 shows the test covering a system as seen from the underside when sliced off. This species comes near Polyclinum gigantewm and P. globosum, found at Port Jackson, Australia. Psammaplidium nigrum. (Plate XXIII., figs. 1-3.) Hxternal appearance.— The colony is large, flat, and _ soft, measuring 10 x 6 X 1 cm., nearly black in colour, and finely sandy all over. It is marked with conspicuous coarse granulations, which indicate the anterior ends of the ascidiozooids, and is also marked out into polygonal areas by slight creases (see Pl. XIIL, fig. 1). The Test is very soft and flimsy, easily torn, and giving no stiff- ness to the colony. It is of a dark grey colour even when free of sand. Most of the sand is in the surface layer, but there is a little throughout. The sand grains are dark, which adds to the black appearance of the colony. The Branchial sac has at least a dozen rows of numerous small stigmata (fig. 3). The Mantle is muscular. There is a rather large muscular branchial siphon, and a large atrial languet. Locality.“ Cape Adare, 26 fathoms, 14th November, 1899.” In addition to the colony described above there is a second, measuring 4 x 3 x 1 em. (see fig. 2). Both colonies are remark- ably soft and flabby. This and the black colour are characteristic features of the species. Psammaplidium antarcticum. (Plate XXIIL., figs. 4-6.) External appearance.—Colony irregular in form, or rising into a convex mass in centre, quite firm with a thick layer of black sand over the surface. Size of one colony 8 x 6 X 4 cm. Tunicata. lO The Test is hard. It has very much less sand inside than on the surface (fig. 5), but there is some throughout. The Branchial sac has many rows of large stigmata (fig. 6). Locality —“ Cape Adare, 26 fathoms, 14th November, 1899.” This species is, I think, distinct from the last. It is very different in texture and habit, and the appearance of the colonies is quite distinct. They were found together. There were three colonies of this species; the dimensions above are those of the largest ; all are firm and solid to the touch. Famity DISTOMIDAE. Distaplia ignota. (Plate XX., figs. 7-9.) (?) ignotus, Herdman, ‘ Challenger’ Rep., Pt. I1., p. 251, 1886. ? Julinia australis, Calman, Quart. Journ. Mic. Sci., 1894, p. 1. In the collection brought home by the ‘ Challenger’ expedition from the Strait of Magellan, there were two large Polyclinid-like colonies which I had to report upon. The species was sufficiently distinct and striking to render me certain that it was undescribed, but the specimens were in such very bad condition anatomically that I felt it impossible to refer the new species with certainty to its proper genus. Consequently I described and figured it under the heading, “ (2) ignotus, n. sp.” (see ‘Challenger’ Rep., Part LL, p. 251). I had also examined a specimen in the British Museum collection (measuring about 3 feet in length), labelled from the Antarctic, which I found to belong to the same species, and which curiously enough was also, like the ‘ Challenger’ specimens, in a very bad state of preservation; and I made the suggestion, in the ‘Challenger’ Report, that all these colonies had been dead and partially decomposed when they were found and put in spirit. My remarks on the species ended with the sentence, “It is to be hoped that some future explorers in the Southern Seas may be successful in obtaining specimens of this, probably the largest known species of compound Ascidian, in a living condition.” The present collection contains no less than four large colonies or fragments of this same species, and it is most disappointing to find that they also are in a decomposed condition, so that very little more can be made out with certainty in regard to the minute anatomy. Still, I think I am now justified, from the specimens I have before me, in saying that this gigantic species ust be referred to the family Distomidae, and probably to the genus Distaplia ; consequently I now, until 193 Southern Cross. further evidence is forthcoming, consider the name of the species to be Distaplia ignota, Hrdn. In 1894 Mr. Calman! described, under the name of Julinia australis, a large colony from the Antarctic, which he considered to be “nearly related, if not identical,’ with my ‘ Challenger’ species. Mr. Calman’s specimen had been found by Dr. C. M. Donald floating on the surface of the sea in the north of Erebus and Terror Gulf, where it is said that “ considerable quantities were seen.” Although partly ragged and beginning to decay, Mr. Calman’s specimen was in sufficiently good condition to enable him to make out all essential points in the anatomy, and he correctly refers the species to the family Distomidae. I cannot, however, agree to his statement that it “evidently forms the type of a new genus,” as I think if there is anything evident it is that, from the general shape and structure of the ascidiozooid and from the atrial Janguet and the incubatory pouch, Calman’s form fits into the genus Distaplia. Moreover, the specimen collected by Dr. Donald is very probably, as Calman suggested, the same species as the ‘Challenger’ and the British Museum specimens, all of which must now therefore be known by the name Distaplia ignota. In the present collection there are :-— 1. Three large fragments, measuring respectively 19 cm., 21 em., und 26 cm. in length, and from 3 to 6 cm. in diameter, from “ Cape Adare, beginning of January, 24 fathoms.” 2. One smaller specimen from ‘“ Cape Adare, 16th December, 1899, on surface, 28°9° Fahr.” 3. Many irregularly shaped and more or less spreading masses from “Cape Adare, 2nd January, 1900, 20-24 fathoms, 29° Fahr.” The colonies in this bottle are in very bad condition, and were probably all dead and more or less decomposed when collected. There are a number of Amphipoda and Pycnogonida with the Ascidians in the bottle which seem to be in fair condition, so probably it is not the method of preservation that is at fault. The average size of colony is 7 x 4 x 1cm. Some of the smaller lumps (fig. 7) are more rounded, and are no doubt the youngest colonies present, others (fig. 8) become irregularly lobed and spreading, and finally the largest grow out into long cylindrical masses (fig. 9). Some of these are attached by the greater part of one surface to small stones and fragments of sea-weeds, and so, no doubt, lay on the sea-bottom; but it is easy to understand how they might become detached in storms and be washed up on beaches, 1 Quart. Journ. Mie. Sci., vol. 387, p. 1. Zunicata. 199 or even when decomposing be found floating on the surface. The specimens collected on 16th December, 1899, and by Dr. Donald in the Erebus and Terror Gulf, floating on the surface, were, doubtless, detached and probably decaying masses from colonies at the bottom. The central parts of the colonies are occupied by very loose test, much vacuolated, and penetrated by canals in which run ectodermal processes or stolons from the ascidiozooids. These processes end in dilated bulbs, and have numerous buds in the test around them, recalling the condition in the stalk or basal part of some species of the closely allied genus Coledla. THALIACEA. Famity SALPIDAE. Salpa runcinata-fusiformis, Chamisso—Cuvier. This was the only species of pelagic Tunicate in the collection, and all the specimens belong to the aggregated or chain form. They were found as follows :— “Cape Adare, 5th April, 1899, ten specimens.” These are all small, the largest being 2 cm. in length. “Cape Adare, 9th April, 1899,” thirty specimens, of sizes up to 4 cm. in length. “Cape Adare, 30th April, 1899,” forty specimens, “found on the surface, and on beach; temperature of water 28°6° Fahr.” “Cape Adare, 10th May, 1899, on surface and along beach, temperature of water 28° Fahr.” Fifty specimens from 2°5 to 3°5 cm. long. Some of the specimens show lines of minute denticles projecting from the surface of the test. This is a species that seems to be abundant in the Antarctic. The ‘ Challenger’ expedition obtained it both in tropical seas (north of the Admiralty Islands, under the equator) and also in several localities far south, such as “off Prince Edward Island,” “ near Heard Island,” and at “Station 152, Antarctic Ocean, lat. 60° 52’ S., long. 80° 20’ E., surf. temp. 34° 5’ Fahr. ; about 160 specimens of the ageregated form, many of them large.” But the present is probably its furthest south record. Apparently the southern forms are usually larger than those found in warmer seas, 200 Southern Cross. If we take account of all localities from 40° south latitude south- wards to the Antarctic Continent, we find that the following pelagic Tunicates have been obtained in the area :— Pyrosoma giganteum. Doliolum ehrenbergi. Salpa costata-tilesii. S. echinata. S. cordiformis-zonaria. S. cylindrica. S. runcinata-fusiformis. S. democratica-mucronata. S. africana-maxima. A ppendicularia. Only two of these species have been found in the corresponding latitudes round the North Pole. EXPLANATION OF PLATES. PLATE XIX. Fig. 1.—Part of the branchial sac of Boltenia pachydermatina showing variations. Fig. 2.—Another part of the same branchial sac. lig. 3.—Styela lactea, Hrdn., from side, nat. size. Fig. 4.—Section of posterior end of same to show thickened pad of mantle and test. Fig. 5.—Alimentary canal of Styela lactea. Fig. 6.—Some of the endocarps x 2. Fig. 7.—Part of the endostyle. PLATE XX. Pig. 1.—Tylobranchion antarcticum, nat. size. Figs. 2 and 8.—Ascidiozooids enlarged. Fig. 4.—Dorsal tubercle. Fig. 5.—Branchial sac. Fig. 6.—A papilla, Figs. 7, 8, and 9.—Colonies of Distaplia ignota, Hrdn. PLaTE XXI. Figs. 1-10.—Shapes of colonies of Atopogaster elongata, Hrdn. Puate XXII. Figs. 1 and 2.—Colonies of Polyclinum adareanum. Fig. 3.—Systems of ascidiozooids. Fig. 4.—Arrangement of pigment. Fig. 5.—Common cloacal aperture from inside. Fig. 6.—Lower end of a colony. Figs. 7, 8, and 9.—Branchial sacs. PLatTe XXIII. Figs. 1 and 2.—Colonies of Psammaplidium nigrum. Fig. 3.—Branchial sac of same. Fig. 4—Colony of Psammaplidium antarcticum. Fig. 5.—Section of edge of colony. Fig. 6,—Part of branchial sac. 201 VOR We Ovir Urs eux. By EDGAR A. SMITH, F.ZS. (Plates XXIV, XXV.) Or the twenty-eight species quoted or described in the following account, all, with the exception of seven, are from Cape Adare, Victoria Land, or Franklin Island, a little further south. These seven are mostly from Auckland and Campbell Islands, south of New Zealand, practically in the same latitudes as Kerguelen Island, of which the molluscs in several instances are identical with those of Cape Adare. In view of the fact that these are the first collections described from this remote region, it is not surprising that such a large proportion of the species appear to be new. It is worthy of note, however, that, with the exception of the new genus Newnesia, and Philine, no generic types were obtained which are new to the Antarctic fauna. The genus Philine ranges from the Arctic region to New Zealand, and some of the species appear to be very widely distributed. For example, the common British P. aperta ranges from Norway to the Cape of Good Hope, and a scarcely distinguishable form, P. angasi, occurs in Australia and New Zealand. The occurrence therefore of this widely-dispersed genus in Antarctic waters is not surprising. This collection furnishes only negative evidence with regard to the similarity of Arctic and Antarctic mollusca. It is, however, none the less interesting, and may be regarded as not only the first, but a satisfactory instalment of the species which inhabit these inhospitable regions. CEPHALOPODA. POLYPUS CAMPBELLI. (Pl. XXIV., figs. 7-11.) Corpus breve, bursaeforme, supra saturate sordide olivaceum, infra dilute cinna- momeum ; caput et superficies superior brachiorum colore simile tincte ; corpus supra et infra granulosum, granulis supra superficiem inferiorem parvis et confertis ; supra utrumque oculum cirrus parvus, compressus ; brachia superne carinata, ad basim cute brevi conjuncta, longitudine subaquantia; acetabula magnitudinis mediocris; par septimum supra brachia lateralia, maximum, valde prominens. 202 Southern Cross. The body of this Octopus is short and purse-like, dark, dirty olivaceous upon the dorsal surface and buff beneath; body finely eranular above and below, the granules small and very close together on the ventral surface; above each eye is a small compressed cirrus. Arms (in spirit), keeled above, connected at the base by a short web, all of about the same thickness. The right dorsal is shorter than the left, probably bitten by a fish or crustacean; it has thirty-eight pairs of suckers, the left having sixty-seven pairs. The suckers are of moderate size excepting the seventh pair from the base on the two lateral pairs of arms: these are enormously developed and stand out 4 mm. from the surface and are about the same in diameter. It is curious that the upper of the left lateral pair has developed only a single large sucker instead of two. ‘The presence of these large suckers indicate the male sex of the specimen, and this is sub- stantiated by the hectocotylized lower arm of the right lateral pair. This has only thirty-six pairs of suckers, whereas the corresponding arm on the other side has seventy-five pairs. Length from web between dorsal arms to the end of body 48 mm., width of body across back 24 mm., from back to front 19 mm. Habitat—Campbell Island. GASTROPODA. NEOBUCCINUM EATONI. Buccinopsis eatoni, Smith, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., 1875, Vol. XVI., p. 68. Neobuccinum eatoni, Smith, Phil. Trans. Roy. Soc., Vol. CLXVIIT., p. 169, Pl. IX., figs. 1, la (1879); Tryon, Man. Conch., Vol. TII., pp. 100, 197, Pl. LXXVIL., figs. 357, 358. Halntat—Cape Adare, 7-10 fathoms. This Antarctic whelk has hitherto been only known from Kerguelen and Heard Island. The specimens in the present collection are mostly a little narrower than those from Kerguelen and generally rather darker in colour, in some instances being dark purplish brown. The colour of the interior of the aperture is also of a somewhat deeper brown tint. The following measurements will show the variation in the proportions of two selected examples. APERTURE. Length. Diam. Length. Width. 50 3l 24 14 55 28 24 13 Mollusca. 20 OW CHLANIDOTA VESTITA. Cominella vestita, Martens, Sitzungsb. Gesell. naturforsch. Fr. Berlin, 1578, p. 20. Neobueecinum vestitum, Watson, ‘ Challenger’ Gasteropoda, p. 216. Buecinum (Chlanidota) vestitum, Martens, Conch. Mittheil., Vol. L, p. 43, Pl. IX., figs. 3a—c. Chlanidota vestita, Tryon, Man. Conch., Vol. III, p. 201, Pl. LXXIX., fig. 391. Habitat.—Cape Adare, 24-26 fathoms. Previously known only from Kerguelen Island. The specimens from Cape Adare are almost identical with those from Kerguelen. Some of them, however, are less contracted at the base of the body- whorl, and others are of a reddish-brown colour, which is most observable within the aperture. They do not offer much variation in form, but some specimens are a little stumpier than others. Very remarkable is the small size of the operculum, which occupies less than one-fourth the length of the aperture. EUTHRIA AUCKLANDICA. (Pl. XXIV., figs. 12, 13.) Testa fusiformis, rufo-fusca, longitudinaliter costata et transversim lirata; spira turrita, conica, ad apicem mammillata; anfractus 6 regulariter crescentes, primus laevis, nitens, globosus, caeteri supra leviter excavati, dein convexi, costis rotundatis, superne in excavatione fere obsoletis, circiter 11 instructi, lirisque transversis supra et inter costas continuis (in anfr. penult. 4, ultimo 9 quarum infima caeteris magis conspicua) ornati, ultimus infra medium con- tractus; apertura intus rufo-fusca, antice in canalem obliquum recurvum producta; labrum tenue; columella albida, ad medium leviter arcuata, callo tenui nitido induta. Longit. 93 mm., diam. 43 mm. Apertura cum canale 5 longa, Habitat-——Auckland Islands, 10 fathoms. It is possible that the above may not be the dimensions of a full-grown specimen of this species, for there is a look of immaturity about all the four examples obtained. Still I have not hesitated to describe this form as a new species, as it is so clearly characterized by the peculiar oblique lira around the anterior narrowed extremity of the last whorl. In addition to the longitudinal ribs and the transverse ridges, the surface exhibits very fine lines of growth and some traces of fine spiral striae. 204 Southern Cross. LITTORINA (PELLILITORINA) PELLITA. Pellilitorina pellita, Martens and Pfeffer, Jahrb. Hamburg. Wiss. Anstalt., II., 1886, p. 79, Pl. L., figs. 6a-6F. Hatlitat—Cape Adare, 7 fathoms. A very interesting species originally described from New Georgia. The single example in the present collection contains the soft parts. The animal is deep black, with the sole of the foot pale and the operculigerous lobe white. The hairs of the periostracum are arranged in spiral series, in shallow grooves, three in the penultimate and seven in the last whorl. LITTORINA (PELLILITORINA) SETOSA. Littorina setosa, Smith, Phil. Trans. Roy. Soc., Vol. CLXNVIIL., p. 172, Pl. 1X., fic. 6. Pellilitorina setosa, Pfeffer, Jahrb. Hamburg. Wiss. Anstalt., III., 1886, p. 77, ee Osea PAGERS Littorina (Pellilitorina) setosa, ‘l'ryon, Man. Conch., Vol. IX., p. 255, Pl. XLVI., figs. 37, 38. Hatbitat.—Cape Adare, 24 fathoms. Kerguelen Island (Smith and ‘ Challenger’ Expedition). Also New Georgia (Pfeffer and Martens). Only one young specimen obtained. PALUDESTRINA ANTARCTICA. (Pl. XXIV, fig. 16.) Testa elongata, fusco-purpurea, imperforata, lineis incrementi tenuibus striata ; spira producta, turrita, ad apicem obtusa; anfractus 4-5, perconvexi; apertura rotunde ovata, longit. totius } haud aequans; labrum tenue, margine columellari pallido, anguste reflexo. Longit. $8 mm., diam. 23 mm. Habitat.—Cape Adare, 8 fathoms. Quite distinct from P. caliginosa (Gould), from Terra del Fuego and Kerguelen Island, being smaller and quite differentinform. The spire is more elongate, the whorls more convex, and the aperture rounder. The operculum is very thin, pale yellowish, striated with lines of growth, and consists of about two whorls. Mollusca. 205 EATONIELLA PALUDINOIDES. (Pl. XXIV., fig. 18.) Testa ovato-conica, perforata, fuscescens, lineis incrementi tenuibus striata; spira ad apicem obtusa; anfractus 4, valde convexi; apertura irregulariter ovato- rotundata, leviter obliqua; peristoma continuum, margine externo simplice, tenui, columellari obliquo, vix reflexo. Longit. 1} mm., diam. 1mm. Apertura $ longa, 3 lata. Habitat.—Cape Adare, 8 fathoms. Allied to #. subrufescens (Smith), from Kerguelen Island, but of a more robust form, the body-whorl being broader, and the apex of the spire more obtuse. The opercula are very similar on both surfaces. RISSOA ADARENSIS. (Pl. XXIV., fig. 17.) Testa oblongo-ovata, supra angustata, alba, laevis, nitida, rimata, hic illic ilines incrementi striata; spira elongata, ad apicem rotundata, obtusa; anfractus 43, valde convexi, sutura leviter obliqua sejuncti; apertura obliqua, ovato-piriformis, longit. totius 3 adaequans; peristoma continuum, margine externo leviter incrassato, columellari antice expanso, effuso. Operculum tenue, paucispirale, simplex. Longit. 2? mm., diam. 13 mm. Habitat.—Cape Adare, 24 fathoms. A pure white shell, with a smooth surface, except that in the upper whorls there is a trace of faint longitudinal costation. LAMELLARIA MOLLIS. (Pl. XXIV., figs. 19-21.) Animal globosum, subpellucidum, albidum; cutis dorsalis (notaewm) crassissima, laevis, antice supra caput subprofunde fissa; pes dilute coriaceus, elongatus, postice angustatus, antice truncatus, utrinque productus, margine anteriore duplice vel transversim sulcato; tentacula mediocriter brevia, acuminata, oculis parvis leviter prominentibus ad basim externam instructa; testa mem- branacea. Longit. 65 mm., diam. 45 mm., alt. 40 mm. Habitat.—Cape Adare, 6-29 fathoms. In spirits this species has a globose, somewhat gelatinous appearance, and is remarkable on account of the shell being mem- branous only, without any shelly thickening, so that on removal from the spirally coiled viscera it at once collapses. The foot in 206 Southern Cross. front has a double edge and is somewhat produced or auriculate on each side, and is completely concealed beneath the enormously developed notaeum. The measurements given above are only approximate, as, owing to contraction of the animals at the time of death, the form and natural dimensions become altered and diminished. LAMELLARIA CONICA. (Pl. XXIV., fig. 4.) Testa ovata, superne acuminata, conica, tenuis, pellucida, periostraco tenui pallido induta, lineis incrementi curvatis conspicuis sculpta; anfractus quatuor, celeriter accrescentes, duo superiores (protoconcha) flavescentes, aliis crassiores, con- vexiusculi, ultimus maximus, ventricosus, infra suturam anguste marginatus ; apertura magna, inverse late auriformis; peristoma tenue, margine columellari arcuato, leviter incrassato, callo tenui appreso labro juncto. Longit. 18 wm., diam. 14 mm. Apertura 14 longa, 10 lata. Halitat.—Cape Adare, 28 fathoms. Only a single specimen of this interesting species was obtained. The animal is much contracted in spirit and of a buff colour, but when alive is said to be reddish-brown. The mantle investing the shell is very thin above, but thicker at the sides, and in the contracted state has a granose or finely warty appearance. The foot is short, some- what quadrate in front and tapering behind. The tentacles are very short and blunt, the eyes at the outer bases being conspicuous and prominent. ‘The apical whorls exhibit one or two spiral shallow sulei, but this feature may not be constant. NATICA DELICATULA. (Pl. XXIV., fig. 6.) Testa globosa, tenuis, anguste perforata, pellucido-albida, periostraco dilute virescente tenui induta, lineis incrementi tenuibus obliquis striata; spira obtusa; anfractus tres celeriter crescentes, convexiusculi, ultimus globosus, infra suturam concave impressus, antice descendens ; apertura semicircularis ; labrum tenue; columella incrassata, reflexa, superne leviter dilatata, labro callo tenui juncta. Diam. maj. 7} mm., min. 6 mm., alt. 72 mm. Apertura 6 mm. longa, 83 mm lata. Operculum tenue, testaceum, extus leviter concavum, album, infra flavescens. Habitat.—Cape Adare, 26 fathoms. The single specimen obtained has the spire much eroded. The suture dividing the whorls is rather deep, but hardly channelled. Mollusca. 207 CANTHARIDUS PRUNINUS. Cantharidus pruninus, Gould; Pilsbry, Man. Conch., Vol. XT., p. 122, Pl. XLVI., figs. 60, 61; Pl. XXXIV., fig. 1, var. perobtusa. var. minor. Testa minima, Longit. 8 mm., diam. maj. 62 mm., min. 6 mm. Habitat. Auckland Islands, 10 fathoms. A few specimens were obtained, which, although apparently adult, are not a quarter the size of other examples from the Aucklands. In form, colour, and sculpture, however, they are quite similar. The species also occurs at Campbell Island. CALLIOSTOMA AUCKLANDICUM. (Pl. XXIV., fig. 5.) Testa parva, conica, obtecte umbilicata, roseo-purpurea; anfractus sex, primus laevis, convexus, involutus, pallidus, vel flavescens, caeteri levissime convexi, liris spiralibus tenuibus roseo-purpureis cincti, infra suturam nodosi vel subplicati, striis incrementi obliquis confertis concinne sculpti, ultimus ad peripheriam angulatus, infra concentrice liratus, in medio excavatus et albus; apertura subquadrata, margaritacea, laevis; peristoma ad marginem acutum, roseo- limbatum, intus leviter incrassatum ; columella alba, subobliqua, superne leviter reflexa, antice subdentata. Diam. maj. 8 mm., min. 7 mm., alt. 7} mm. Operculum tenue, corneum, multispirale. Habitat.—Auckland Islands, 10 fathoms. The general tone of this species is purplish-rose, but under the lens the narrow sulci between the spiral lirae are dirty whitish, and the small umbilical excavation is also white. The spiral threads increase in number upon the whorls with the growth of the shell, there being about eight upon the penultimate, the uppermost, or that just below the suture, being somewhat nodose or subplicate. The body-whorl has eight lirae above the angle and ten or eleven below. PHOTINULA EXPANSA. Photinula expansa (Sowerby); Pilsbry, Man. Conch., Vol. XI. p. 279, Pl XXXIX., fos. 51, 524 Habitat—Cape Adare, 24 fathoms. One very young specimen (34 mm. in diameter), at which age there is a small umbilical perforation, but the reflection of the columella has already commenced. This species is also known from the Straits of Magellan, Falkland Islands, South Georgia, and Kerguelen Island. 208 Southern Cross. PHILINE ANTARCTICA. (GED -O-G A aiiles ahs) Testa magna, semiconvoluta, tenuis, alba, periostraco tenuissimo nitente induta, lineis incrementi conspicuis sculpta; spira involuta, depressa, excavata; > anfractus 2-3, ultimus maximus, antice latior quam supra, callo lato tenui parietali amictus; apertura subpiriformis, longit. totam aequans; columella cariniformis, spiralis, usque ad apicem intus perspicua. Longit. 29 mm., diam, maj. 21 mm. Habitat.—Cape Adare, 20 fathoms. A fine species, not unlike Scaphander lignarius in form. More convolute than usual and consequently with a more contracted aperture. The periostracum is peculiarly shining, having a some- what metallic look. The cephalic disc is oblong, rounded in front, widening behind, where it is slightly notched in the middle. The foot is about the same length as the head-dise, but broader. The mantle investing the shell is thickened into a ridge around the spire and forms a blunt end to the animal. Only a single specimen was obtained. PHILINE APERTISSIMA. (Pl. XXIV., figs. 2, 3.) Testa compressa, ovata, tenuis, alba, periostraco tenui pallido induta, lineis incrementi valde curvatis striata; spira nulla, involuta, excavata; apertura latissima, longitudinem totam aequans; columella cariniformis, spiralis, intus usque ad apicem perspicua, callo lato parietali tenui superne labro juncta. Longit. 113 mm., diam. maj. 9 mm. Habitat.—Cape Adare, 24 fathoms. Much smaller than P. antarctica, with a more patulate aperture and less convoluted. Four specimens were collected. NEWNESIA ANTARCTICA. (Pl. XXV., figs. 1-6.) Animal testa omnino tectum; caput compressum, antice truncatum, in medio leviter incisum, postice forma tentaculi utrinque productum; oculi inter bases tenta- culorum siti; pes mediocriter latus, antice quadratus, postice haud valde acuminatus, in medio glandula minuta instructus; parapodia nulla; pallium margine anteriore incrassato, postice in lobum magnum tenuem testam amplectentem productum; os maxillis corneis haud instructum; lamellae in - stomacho nullae; radula 0.1.0.; dentes centrales 27, conici, triangulares, acuminati, ad apicem prorsum curvati, denticulis quinque parvis utrinque armati, ad basim leviter concavi. Mollusca. 209 Testa globosa, tenuis, subpellucida, albida, periostraco tenuissimo nitido induta; spira depressa; anfractus tres convexi, sutura profunda sejuncti, ultimus maximus, incrementi lineis tenuibus arcuatis sculptus, undique spiraliter confertim punctato-striatus; apertura late inverse auriformis, maxima, longit. totius 59, aequans; labrum tenuissimum, margine columellari leviter reflexo appresso. Long't. 20 mm., diam. 18 mm. Apertura 18 longa, 14 lata. Habitat.—Cape Adare, 20--24 fathoms. This very interesting Tectibranch is well distinguished by its very peculiar type of radula. The absence of epipodia and gizard plates also separates it from those genera which it somewhat resembles in shell characters. The general form of the shell is most like that of Hydatina. The globose outline, the visible convolute spire, the form of the aperture and the character of the columella are very similar. JI have much pleasure in associating with this interesting new genus the name of the promoter of the expedition, Sir George Newnes, Bart. DORIS KERGUELENENSIS. Archidoris Kerguelenensis, Bergh, Nudibranch., ‘Challenger’ Exped., p. 88, Pl ess L—22: ; fabitat.--Cape Adare, 20-28 fathoms. Very like the well-known northern species D. tuberculata. Also found at Kerguelen Island. The largest specimen is considerably larger than that described by Bergh, being 67 mm. long, 29 mm. broad, and 21 mm. in height. The rhinophore-openings are 15 mm. apart. LIMACINA ANTARCTICA. Limacina antarctica, Woodward, Man. Moll., p. 207, Pl. XIV., fig. 41; Fischer’s Man. Conch., Pl. XIV., fig. 41; Velseneer, Pteropoda, ‘ Challenger’ Exped., pe 22, Pl. I, figs. 3, 4. Habitat.—Surface, 66°, 20', S. Lat., 164°, 37', E. Long. The shell is so excessively thin that it appears to get more or less broken when captured. In the only fairly preserved example in the present collection the spire is even less raised than it is represented in any of the above-quoted figures. 210 Southern Cross. CLIONE ANTARCTICA. (Pl. XXV., figs. 7, 8.) Corpus elongatum, postice acuminatum, extremitatem posticam versus utrinque leviter ‘carinatum, sordide albidum, semitranslucidum, punctis opacis albis minutis undique notatum, punctisque fuscis supra dimidium anticum plus minus pictum; massa viscerum rufescens, longit. totius 3 adaequans; caput mediocre, tentaculis tribus brevibus acutis subaequalibus utrinque instructum ; pes parvus, lobis anterioribus tenuissimis antice junctis (in exemplis spiritu conservatis), angulum acutum conformantibus, lobo postico minimo, acuminato ; alae subovatae, foliiformes, ad extremitatem acuminatae. Longit. tota 22 mm., diam. corporis 8 mm., longit. corporis 18 mm. Habitat.—Cape Adare. Apparently smaller than the Arctic C. /imacina, differing also in form, colour, etc. It is a shorter species with numerous close-set pigment spots. Some examples show an indication of a linear constriction near or a little above the middle. The anterior lobes of the foot are united in front and form a A shaped angle above. SPONGIOBRANCHAEA AUSTRALIS. Spongiobranchaea australis, d’Orbigny ; vide Pelseneer, ‘ Challenger,’ Pteropoda Gymnosomata, p. 19, Pl. I., figs. 6, 7. Habitat.—Off Cape Adare, at surface. Of a sooty blackish colour excepting the postmedian constriction, which is dirty whitish, varying much in form, according to the contraction which has taken place at death. Obtained by the ‘Challenger’ Expedition in lat. 36° 22’ S. and by dOrbigny in lat. 54° 30'S. LAMELLIBRANCHIATA. ANATINA ELLIPTICA. (Pl. XXV., figs. 9, 10.) Anatina elliptica, King and Broderip, Zool. Journ., Vol. V., p. 3885; Reeve, Conch. Icon., Vol. XLV., fig. 14; Griffith’s Anim. Kingd., Vol. SING, Tl, ONT. fig. 3; Smith, G Challenger,’ Lamellibranch. 5 Ds mG: prismatica, Sowerby, Proc. Zool. Soc., 1834, p. 87. Habitat.—Franklin Island, 10 fathoms. Other localities are Kerguelen Island and South Shetland. Mollusca. 211 This species is the giant of the genus, one of the examples in the present collection measuring nearly four inches in length and more than two inches across. Externally this shell bears a strong resemblance to Mya truncata of northern and Arctic seas. CARDITA ASTARTOIDES. Cardita astartoides, Martens; vide Smith, Lamellib., ‘ Challenger’ Exp., p. 212, Pl. XV., figs. 2—2c. Habitat —Cape Adare, 24 fathoms. Also known from Kerguelen Island and in 150 fathoms between that island and Heard Island. Only one small specimen obtained by the present expedition. VENUS (CHAMELAEA) MESODESMA. Venus (Chamelaea) Mesodesma, Quoy and Gaimard ; vide Smith, ‘ Challenger’ Rep., Lamellibranchiata, p. 131. Habitat—Auckland Islands, 10 fathoms. One small example of a yellowish grey tint, without any colour- markings. New Zealand and Tristan da Cunha are other localities for this well-known species. YOLDIA EIGHTSI. Nucula eightsii, Couthouy; vide Jay, Cat. Shells, 1839, ed. iii, p. 115, Pls Ie, figs. 12, 13. Leda (Yoldia) eightsi, Hanley, in Sowerby’s Thes. Conch., Vol. Ii p. 142; Pl. CCX XX., fig. 164. Yoldia eightsi, Sowerby, Con. Icon., Vol. XVIII, Pl. V., fig. 26. Habitat-—Franklin Island, 10 fathoms. New South Shetland (Jay). Allied to Y. subaequilateralis (Smith), from Kerguelen Island, but distinguishable by its different form and larger cartilage-pit. The periostracum also is darker, and the valves a little more convex. 212 Southern Cross. LISSARCA AUCKLANDICA. (Pl. XXIV., figs. 14, 15.) Testa minima, aequivalvis, valde inaequilateralis, convexa, purpureo-rufa, lineis incrementi tenuibus, postice sublamellatis, sculpta, striis tenuissinis paucis postmedianis radiantibus ornata; umbones leviter prominentes, approximati sed haud contigui; dentes utrinque circiter quinque; valvarum margines (practer prope partem anteriorem marginis ventralis et ad medium lateris postici) intus fortiter denticulati. Longit. 43 mm., diam. 24 mm., alt. 83 mm. Habitat—Auckland Islands, 10 fathoms. Closely allied to Z. rubro-fusca (Smith),’ from Kerguelen Island, but of a different form, being less oblong, having the umbones less terminal and the hinge-teeth somewhat different. A faint depression is observable extending from the umbo down the posterior end. PECTEN COLBECKI. (Pl. XXV., fig. 11.) Testa tenuis, magna, compressa, rotundata, purpureo-rufa, costis radiantibus circiter 18 subobsoletis, vel: minime prominentibus instructa, concentrice confertim striata; margines dorsales aequales, late concavi; linea cardinis aeque leviter concava; auriculae subaequales, antica valve dextrae iuferne haud profunde sinuata; pagina interna rufescens. Longit. 70 mm., alt. 70, diam. 16. Habitat.—F¥ranklin Island, 10 fathoms. A large very thin species of which only a single right valve was obtained. It is remarkable for its rich purplish red or plum colour and the feebleness of the radiating costation. The costae are somewhat more pronounced towards the umbo than upon the rest of the surface, and are about twelve in number. Other intervening and more feeble ribs are developed at a later period of erowth. The concentric sculpture consists of very fine thread-like lamellae which are more remote in the early stages of growth than at a later period. The auricles are striated with fine lnes of growth, and anterior, in the valve described, exhibits a faint raised ray down the middle. There does not seem to be any species bearing sufficient resemblance as to suggest a comparison with the present form. The Arctic P. greenlandicus of Sowerby has even a thinner shell, but in size, colour, and sculpture is quite distinct. 1 Phil. ‘Trans..Roy. Soc., 1879, Vol CLX VIII, p. 185; Ply IX hey, Mollusca. 212 EXPLANATION OF PLATES. PLATE XXIV. Fig. 1.—Philine antarctica. Figs. 2, 3.— Philine apertissima. tig. 4.—Lamellaria conica. Vig. 5.—Calliostoma aucklandica. Fig. 6.— Natica delicatula. Fig. 7.—Polypus campbelli, dorsal view. Fig.8.— ,, - ventral side. Fig. 9— ,, 5 lateral view of part of arm. Fig. 10.— __,, 3 end of hectocotylized arm. Fig. 11— _,, 5 oral end of a lateral arm. Figs. 12, 138.—Euthria aucklandica. Figs. 14, 15.—Lissarca aucklandica. Fig. 16.— Paludestrina antarctica. Fig. 17.—Rissoa adarensis. Fig. 18.—Eatoniella paludinoides. Fig. 19.—Lamellaria mollis, dorsal view, mantle cut open. Fig. 20.— 2 », side view. Rig. 21.— 35 ,, ventral side. Puatte XXYV. Fig. 1.—Newnesia antarctica, ventral side. Fig. 2.— Fe - dorsal view. lig, 3.— 5 ¥ lateral view. Ries, 45 0: ,, 5 shell. Fig. 6.— * p tooth of radula, front (b) and side view («). > Figs. 7, 8.—Clione antarctica. Figs. 9, 10.--Anatina elliptica. Fig. 11.—Pecten colbecki. 214 Southern Cross. VIIL ECHINODERMA. By F. JEFFREY BELL, M.A. (Plates XX VI-X XVIII.) THE collection of Echinoderma is poor in species though compara- tively abundant in specimens. The condition in which they arrived can hardly be said to be satisfactory, and it is to be seriously considered by collectors whether they should continue to use formol for objects which contain a large quantity of carbonate of lime. It will be observed that the collecting stations were not numerous and that there are but slight differences in the depth or temperature of the water. The interest of the collection centres in the instructive series of variations of Cycethia simplex, and in the two well-marked new genera of Ophiuroids. a ANAC TEN O GO Nd Dae I HOLOTHURIOIDEA. 1. CUCUMARIA CROCEA. Holothuria crocea, Lesson, Cent. Zool. (1832), p. 153, Pl. LIL. Cucumaria crocea, Wyv. Thomson, Journ. Linn. Soc. XIII. (1878), p. 55; Lampert, Seewalzen (1885), p. 149. Station.—Franklin Island, February 9th, 1900, 10-24 fathoms, 29°8° Fahr. Distribution. Apparently cireumpolar, as it has already been reported from Kerguelen and the Falkland Islands. 2. THYONE, sp. There is a five-banded species in the collection which will, I hope, be more fully represented in the collections of the ‘ Discovery.’ Eichinoderma. Dis 3. HOLOTHURIA, sp. There is likewise a species of Holothuria, on which I propose to suspend my judgment. BAGO LNG OIG O8N DA ALE ae II ASTEROIDEA. 4. ASTERIAS NEGLECTA. Asterias neglecta, Bell, Proc. Zool. Soc., Lond., 1881, pp. 94 and 506. The name I gave this species had reference to its past; it might well be regarded as prophesying its future. For twenty years the single specimen found by Dr. Cunningham in the Straits of Magellan has been unnoticed and without a companion; as a larger specimen comes from Franklin Island we are led to suppose that the distribu- tion of this southern species is circumpolar. 5. ASTERIAS ANTARCTICA. Asteracanthion antarcticum, Liitken, Vidensk. Meddel., 1856, p. 105. Asterias antarctica, Perrier, Arch. Zool. Expe. LV. (1875), p. 315. This species does not appear to have been studied by any other naturalists than the two named above. I had begun a correspondence with the late Dr. Liitken regarding our lately acquired specimens, but the state of his health and his lamented death prevented my having the advantage of his judgment. As Litken’s specimens came from the Straits of Magellan, and the ‘ Southern Cross’ examples from Cape Adare (28 fathoms), it may be supposed that the distribu- tion of the species is circumpolar. 6. CYCETHRA SIMPLEX. The following appears to be the synonymy of this species; to Professor Perrier belongs the credit of having been the first to 216 Southern Cross. recognise its great variability, and his establishment of seven species after the appearance of Mr. Sladen’s ‘ Challenger’ report can only be regarded as a piece of Gallic gaiety. Cycethra simplex, Bell, P. Z. 8. 1881, p. 96; Studer, Abh. Ak. Berl. (Anhang), (1884) [5], p. 41; Verrier, Miss. Cap. Horn. (1891), 10s Ike, WAP electilis, Sladen, ‘ Challenger’ Rep., Ast. (1889), p. 377. nitida 5 - - lob ee i pinguis = 3 5 pear , elongata, Perrier, Miss. Cap. Horn. (1891), p. K. 172. x media i % Pe p. K. 174. - asterindg ss 53 - Jos Ie IAG. zs subelectilis ,, = a jos TKS Mteill. 6 calva , - . p: K. 183: i regularis * 4 & p- K. 184. i. asteriscus ,, “4 es i Professor Perrier’s observations on the variability of this singular form, which it fell to my lot to describe, from a single specimen, twenty years ago, are fully borne out by the very interesting series before me. Distribution.—Apparently circumpolar. Stations—Cape Adare: 5:7 fathoms: Nov. 22nd, 1899 (28°9° F.). Cape Adare: 24 fathoms: Jan. 2nd, 1900 (29° F.). Cape Adare: 26-28 fathoms: Jan.-9th, 1900 (29: 2° F-). Cape Adare: April 6th, 1899. Franklin Island: 10 fathoms: Feb. 9th, 1900 (29°8° F.). Frankhn Island: 10-24 fathoms: Feb. 9th, 1900 (29°8° F.). Robertson Bay: 2 fathoms: Sept. 27th to Oct. 2nd, 1899. ODONTASTER MERIDIONALIS. Astrogonium meridionale, HE. A. Smith, Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist. XVII. (1876), p. 109. Odontaster meridionalis, Bell, P. Z.8., 1¢98, p. 261, ibique citata; Leipoldt, Zeit. f. Wiss. Zool., lix. (1895), p. 620. A young specimen of this variable species was found washed up on shore at Cape Adare after a gale. I cannot think that Prof. Verrill (Trans. Connect. Acad. x. (1899), p. 202) has sufficiently weighed the variability of this starfish and its allies. Its distribution would appear to be circumpolar. Eichinoderma. iy III OPHIUROIDEA. A large number of specimens of two species were collected, both of which are representatives of new generic types, allied to Ophiura (Ophioglypha of Mr. Lyman), but distinguished by several striking characters. These new genera are perhaps the most valuable additions to our zoological knowledge made by the ‘Southern Cross’ Expedition. There are also two specimens of an Ophiactis, which recalls at once O. asperula, Phil., known from the southern parts of South America, but which is distinguished by the want of delicate spines at the edge of the disc; the condition of preservation of the collection does not justify one in coming to any conclusion as to the exact position of this form. There are moreover three specimens of a creature which appears to be allied to, if not a member of, the genus Ophiomusium, but this is a group which requires revision before any addition is made to it; it will be sufficient to put on record that an Ophiomusium-like Ophiurid has penetrated into Antarctic waters. 7. OPHIOZONA INERMIS. An Ophiozona with two small tentacle-scales at base of arm and none further out. Three minute peg-like arm-spines. Radial shields inconspicuous and separated. Side arm-piates large and meeting below. Diameter of disc, 10 : 9: 12 mm. Length of arm (ca.), 25 : 25 : 28. This is a type not uncommon among Ophiurids, where there are many forms so distinct as to be called “species,” but exhibiting no morphological characters of any apparent interest or significance. Cape Adare, 26 fathoms, 28°5° Fahr. @PHIOSTHEIRA. This new genus is remarkable for the possession of a large keel-like plate on the disc, at the base of each arm, which completely overshadows the radial shields. The arms are compressed laterally, so that they are almost triangular in cross-section; the upper arm- plates are separated from one another by a slight groove, and stand up high so as to give both a serrated and a keeled appearance to the 218 Southern Cross. arm; the arm-spines are numerous, but so small as to merge imper- ceptibly into the tentacle scales. Under arm-plates small, separated from one another by the side plates, which unite in the middle line. Like Ophioglypha it has “ the innermost pair of tentacle pores shaped like slits, surrounded by numerous tentacle scales, and opening diagonally into the mouth slits.” Mouth-papillae as in Ophioglypha (Ophiura). It is very likely that Ophiostewra is derived from Ophiuwra, but the keel-like plates on the disc, the serrated keel formed by the upper arm-plates, and the reduction in size of the arm-spines, are points by which this Antarctic form may be distinguished from any Ophiurid yet known to us. 8. OPHIOSTEIRA ANTARCTICA. (Pl. XX VI. and XXVII_). With the exception of the large plates noted in the generic diagnosis nothing definite can be said as to the plates on the upper surface of the disc, for, as Plate XXVII. shows, the most extraordinary variations are to be seen. The colour of the specimens in spirit is more constant; the ereater part of the disc is dark grey, and the arms cream-yellow. The disc is high and arched; the arms taper gradually and carry about eight very short spines; the side arm-plates have a swollen appearance. Diam. of disc. Length of arms (¢a.). S mm. 20 mm. (( 2a) rave 19 mm. 10 mm. 26 mm. Stations—Cape Adare: 26 fathoms: Noy. 4th, 5th and 10th, 1399 (288° EF): Cape Adare : 20 fathoms : Jan. 6th, 1900 (20° F.). Cape Adare: 24 fathoms: Jan. 6th, 1900 (20° F.). OPHIONOTUS. A genus allied to Ophiwra (Ophioglypha), but distinguished by having a number of supernumerary arm-plates, no incision to the disc above, and no comb of spines at the base of the arms. These characters in combination appear to be sufficient to justify the formation of a new genus, and an opportunity such as this may be taken for pointing out that an exhaustive revision of the genus Ophiura would be a real service for students of brittle-stars. Etchinoderma. 219 9. O. vicroriaz. (Pl. XXVIIZ). Dise large, rounded, smooth and shining above, with numerous small scales; the scales below slightly larger; the whole covered with a smooth skin. Arms broad at base and narrowing rapidly but not abruptly, quite delicate at tip; arm-spines moderately stout, pointed, generally three, with two tentacle-scales ; beyond the middle of the arm one scale. Diam. of D.sc. Length of arm. Breadth at base. 30 mm, — 7mm. 27 mm. 74 (ca.) mm. 6°5 mm. 24 min, 70 (ca.) mm. 6 mm. Stations.— Cape Adare : 24 fathoms : Nov. 4th, 1899 (28°8° F.). Cape Adare: 26 fathoms : Nov. 14th, 1899 (28°8° F.). Cape Adare: 20-24 fathoms: Jan. 2nd, 1900 (29° F-). Cape Adare: 27 fathoms: Jan. 9th, 1900 (29:2° F.). Franklin Island: 10 fathoms: Feb. 9th, 1900 (29°8° F.). IV. ECHINOIDEA. 10. ECHINUS MARGARITACEUS. Echinus margaritaceus, Lamk. Anim. s. Vert. (1816), p. 47; A. Ag. Rev. Ech. (1872), p. 124, tbiyue citata ; id. op. cit., p. 493; id., ‘ Challenger’ Rep., Echin. (1881), p. 117. It is with some diffidence that I assign to this species (of which it is known that specimens exhibit marked variability) two examples from Franklin Island (29°8° Fahr., 10-24 fathoms), as they appear to want the large pedicellariae that are so characteristic of the creature ; the general condition of the collection, with other points for consideration, apparently justifies the course adopted. Distribution.—Appareutly circumpolar. 11. HEMIASTER CAVERNOSUS. Tripylus cavernosus, Philippi, Arch. f. Nat., 1845, p. 345. Faorina antarctica, Gray, Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist. VII.(1851), p. 182; éd., Cat. Ree. Echin. B. M. i. (1855), p. 57. Hemiaster cavernosus, A. Ag. Rev. Ech. I. (1872), p. 1382; id., ‘ Challenger’ Rep. (1881), p. 177. This species has been so fully discussed by Professor Alex. Agassiz in his ‘ Challenger’ Report that it would be superfluous to 220 Southern Cross. dilate on it here. It is of some interest to note that Gray’s specimens were collected by Ross in the “ South Polar Seas.” Distribution.— Circumpolar. Stations —Cape Adare : 20-24 fathoms : Jan. 2nd and 9th, POOO (295 Es): Cape Adare : 26 fathoms : Nov. 10th, 1899 (28° F.). Franklin Island : 20-24 fathoms : Feb. 9th, 1900 (29°8° F.). EXPLANATION OF PLATES. Prate X XVI. Ophiosteira antarctica. Fig. 1.—The animal, natural size, from above. Fig. 2.—The disc, from above, magnified four times, showing the large keel- shaped plate between the radial shields. Fig. 3—The same, showing an abnormal increase and diminution of the plates in two rays, x 4. Fig. 4.—The disc from below, magnified four times, showing the Ophiura-like arrangements of the oval skeleton. ' Fig. 5.—The disc from the side (interradial view), x 4. lig. 6.—An arm, near its base, from above, x 8. Fig. 7—An arm, from the side, showing the gap between the upper arm- plates, x 8. Fig. 8.—An arm, from below, showing the small under arm-plate, the large side arm-plates meeting in the middle line below, and the short arm-spines, x 8. Figs. 9, 10, 11—Views of the arm at some distance from the base, from above, from the side and from below, all x 8. Pirate XXVIII. Five photographs of the disc of Ophiosteira antarctica to show tlie extraordinary variations of the plates of the disc. PuaTE XXVIII. Ophionotus victoriae. Vig. 1—The creature from above, natural size. Fig. 2.—The disc, from below, x 2, showing the same Ophiura-like character of the mouth as Ophiosteira. Fig. 3.—An arm, near the base, from above, x 4, showing the way in which the side arm-plates encroach upon the upper arm-plates, and their mode of breaking up. Fig. 4.—The same, from below, x 4, showing the encroachment of the side arm- plates on the under arm-plates. Figs. 5, 6.—An arm near its end, from above and from below, x 4. 221 Le INS he Ex: APTERA. COLLEMBOLA. By GEORGE H. CARPENTER, B.Sc. Lonp., (Plate XLVII.) THE presence of at least one species of springtail on the Antarctic Continent is not the least interesting fact established through the voyage of the ‘ Southern Cross. ight specimens of an Isotoma were collected. on Geikie Land at the head of Robertson Bay (about 71° 40'S. Lat., 169° 50’ E. Long.) in the month of November, 1899, by Dr. Klovstad, who found the insects among lichens when engaged in a botanical expedition.! Springtails are fairly numerous in the Arctic regions, as many as sixty-one species being recorded in the recent comprehensive summary of Schaffer.2 Among these the genus Tsotoma is predominant, sixteen of the sixty-one species belonging to it. It is of interest that the first discovered Antarctic springtail should prove to be an Isotoma, especially as the genus has been traced into the southern hemisphere only during the last few years. The insects were mounted as microscopic preparations in balsam shortly after their capture. Unfortunately, the delicate integument of springtails renders them very liable to shrivel in such a medium, and all the specimens are more or less distorted. But from the number of slides available, it has been possible to make out all the principal structural features of the insect. Isotoma is readily 1 C¢. E. Borchgrevink, ‘First on the Antarctic Continent,’ London (1901), pp. 231-2. 2 ©. Schiffer, ‘Die Arktischen und Sub-Arktischen Collembola,’ in Rémer and Schaudinn’s ‘ Fauna Arctica,’ Jena (1900), pp. 237-258. 222 Southern Cross. distinguished from other genera of its family by the forwardly directed head, the close equality in length between the third and fourth abdominal segments, and the entire absence of scales. As might have been expected, the Geikie Land Isotoma does not seem to be referable to any described species, though, as will be seen, it closely approaches one from Tierra del Fuego. Faminry ENTOMOBRYIDAE. ISOTOMA KLOVSTADI. Plate XLVII., figs. 1-8. Antennae 1:6 times as long as the head, the second seement shghtly longer than the third, but markedly shorter than the fourth. Eight ocelli on each side; post-antennal organ elongate, about twice as long as an ocellus. Feet without tenent hairs; both upper and lower claws without teeth; third abdominal segment slightly longer than the fourth. Spring (apparently borne on the fifth abdominal segment) with very slender dentes, 2} times as long as the manu- brium; mucro narrow and elongate, with straight ventral edge, prominent apical and sub-apical teeth, and two less prominent dorsal teeth close together. Colour.—Dark blue-violet ; legs and spring yellowish-brown. Length.—2 mm. This springtail seems to be related to the common European and American /sotoma palustris (Miller); in that species, however, the feelers are relatively longer and the mucro much shorter and thicker than in this. No member of the genus Isotoma was known outside the Holarctic region until Lord Avebury in 1879 recorded an unde- terminable species from Kerguelen.1 Kecently, however, several species have been described by Schaffer from the southern regions of America, and it is one of his Fuegian Isotomae—ZJ. silvatica*—that of all hitherto known species seems the nearest to our insect from Geikie Land. The feet of Z. silvatica seem to agree almost exactly with those of /. Klovstadi. So do the antennal segments in their relative lengths. Only in the Antarctic insect the antennae as a ' Sir J. Lubbock, ‘Collembola in “The Collections of Kerguelen Island,”’ Phil. Trans., CLX VIII. (1879), p. 249. * C. Schiffer, ‘Hamburger Magalhaensische Sammelreise: Apterygoten,’ Hamburg (1897), p. 18, figs. 84-7. [nsecta. 223 whole are relatively longer than in 7. silvatica, while in the latter species the third and fourth abdominal segments are equal to one another, and the mucro is comparatively short and stout. It could, however, be readily derived from the mucro of J. Klovstadi, as the general arrangement of the teeth is identical in the two species. The post-antennal organ in J. si/vatica is more rotund than in our insect. Several of the specimens were so mounted as to exhibit portions of the jaws. It seemed advisable, therefore, to figure the parts visible—the labium (Fig. 3) and the extremity of a maxilla and its palp (Fig. 2). The maxillary palp in this species is prolonged into a thin leaf-like process bearing four bristles, while the fifth bristle is borne on a very prominent papilla. Our knowledge of the distribution of these insects is as yet too incomplete to elucidate any details of ancient geography. But the existence of a species of this order of wingless insects in Geikie Land —a species belonging to a genus widely spread in the northern hemisphere— cannot but support the theory of a former extension of the Antarctic Continent. And the further fact that the species is closely related to a Fuegian insect is consistent with the view that there may have been a southern route of migration between eastern and western lands. EXPLANATION OF FIGURES. Prats XLVI. Fig. 1.—Isotoma Klovstadi. Dorsal view, x 18. Fig. 2.—Left maxilla (ventral aspect), showing head and extremity of palp, x 850. Fig. 3.—Labium (ventral aspect), x 350. Fig, 4.—Ocelli and post-antennal organ of right side, x 200. Fig. 5.—Fore-foot, x 350. Fig. 6.—Hind-foot, x 350. Figs. 7, 8.—Mucro drawn from two specimens to show variation, x 350. 224 Southern Cross. Pia G Ore HEMIPTERA PARASITICA. PEDICULID A. By THE Hon. N. C. RoTHSCHILD, B.A. ECHINOPTHIRIUS SETOSUS. Pediculus setosus, Lucas, Magazin de Zool., IV., p. 121, f. 12. Thirteen specimens of this species were secured by the ‘ Southern Cross’ Expedition from the Antarctic Seal (Ogmorhinus leptonyx) on October 6th, 1899 (cf. Borchgrevink, ‘ First on Antarctic Continent,’ | p. 184). This species is known to be a parasite of the common seal (Phoca vitulina). I have, however, failed to find any distinguishing characters between the thirteen specimens from the South Polar Seas and examples from the better known host. Piaget’ characterizes the genus Echinopthirius as possessing four- jointed antenne, pointing out, moreover, that by this character Echinopthirius may be readily distinguished from Hamatopinus. I am inclined to consider Piaget to be mistaken in this respect, as the first two joints of the antenne are, under a low power, some- what difficult to distinguish. Lucas, moreover, in his description of Pediculus setosus, mentioned the five-jointed antenne. ' Les Pédiculines, Vol. I., p. 656, 225 Nee oe ty ae Eley PA. ACARINA.' Par LE Dr. BE. L. TROUESSART, Président de la Société Zooloyique de France, Membre Correspondant de la Zoological Society of London. PENTHALEUS BELLI. Ew ovale allongé avec les flancs sub-paralléles, le sillon thoracique formant en dessus et sur les flanes une saillie transversale bien marquée au niveau du premier tiers du corps. Abdomen arrondi en arriere. Couleur (sur la préparation dans le baume) d’un brun verdatre, avec les pattes plus claives (tres probablement rouges sur le vivant). Rostre bien découvert, & palpes robustes, présentant la forme typique du genre: le 1 article tres court, le 2° allongé, renflé a Vextrémité, le 3° plus court que le 2°, le 4° un peu plus long, aminci a’ son extrémité et terminé par des poils tactiles assez courts et plumeux. Chéliceres de la forme normale dans ce genre. Tronc ovale. Face dorsale tronquée an avant par Vouverture du camérostome, qui est assez resserrée, en forme de cou, et dépourvue de dilatation en forme de collerette évasée, ’épistome coupé carrément ou méme un peu échaneré en avant, ne recouvrant que la base du rostre; cette face dorsale est nettement séparée par le sillon thoracique en région thoracique et région notogastrique, arrondie en arriere mais légerement échancrée de chaque coté de la protubérance anale. (Je n’ai pu voir les yeux.) Face ventrale fortement échancrée en avant par louverture du camérostome; les épimeres formant deux groupes, lantérieur (épimeéres 1 et 2) en forme de plaque sternale, les hanches de la 1 paire fortement dilatées et saillantes Q 226 Southern Cross. de chaque coté du rostre, deux fois plus larges que le 1 article des pattes; celles de la 2° paire pas plus larges que le 1° article. Kpimeres postérieurs (3 et 4) largement séparés sur la ligne médiane et placés vers le milieu de la longueur totale du corps. De chaque cdté, en dehors des hanches, il existe une ligne longitudinale saillante, partant des cotés du camérostome, ot elle est un peu dentelée, et se terminant a l’extrémité de labdomen par une petite bosse, de telle sorte que cette extrémité présente, de chaque cété de la protubérance anale, une échancrure plus marquée qu’a la face dorsale. En dedans des épiméres on voit une seconde ligne longitudinale, partant de la plaque sternale pour aller rejoindre la face interne de la petite bosse latérale. Plaque génitale (? ) grande et large, sub-quadrangulaire, a angles fortement arrondis, l’ouverture en forme de fente longitudinale. Anus infere, a cadre petit, elliptique, situé en dessous de la protubérance qui termine l’abdomen. Une paire de poils plumeux a Vextrémité de ’abdomen. Paties gréles, de 5 articles (par soudure du 3° au 2°), sensiblement de la longueur du corps et décroissant de taille dans Vordre suivant: 1,4, 3,2. La 1° paire a premier article court, conique; le 2° trés long, étranglé a sa base, la soudure du 3° bien visible vers les # de la longueur totale; le 4° moitié plus court; le 5° un peu plus court que le précédent ; le 6° un peu plus long, terminé par une double eriffe assez faible et un petit pulvillum en brosse. L’extrémité du tarse est brusquement atténuée et un peu échancrée en dessus, permettant aux griffes de se relever verticalement. La 2° paire plus courte, a 2° article presque moitié plus court que celui de la premiere paire, la soudure du 3° placée vers les 2 de V’article. Les deux paires postérieures semblables, mais la 4° paire presqu’aussi longue que la premiere. Des poils plumeux assez courts au tarse; d’autres poils plus longs et tres gréles assez rares sur les autres articles. Le tronc en est presqu’entierement dépourvu, sauf a lextrémité de Vabdomen. Longueur totale 0°62 mm.; largeur 0°35 mm, Tous les exemplaires examinés sont femelles et renferment 3-4 ceufs gros et d’un jaune orangé avec une petite tache rouge. Habitat—Sur les Mousses du Cap Adare (Terre Victoria). Lespece est dédiée a Mr. Francis Jeffrey Bell, Emeritus Professor in King’s College, London. Remarques, rapports et différences—La soudure du 3° article des pattes au 2° est la régle dans ce groupe: je l’ai constatée sur les genres Penthaleus, Halotydeus, Notophallus et Norneria ( =Scyphius). A rvachnida. 227 Penthaleus Belli, est une espece parfaitement typique, que j’al comparée ici & P. ovatus, Koch (Berlese, “ Acari, Myriopod. Scorp, Ital.,” fase. 60, no. 2); elle en differe par son trone plus allongé, a flancs sub-paralléles. Elle differe d’une autre espece antarctique (qui sera décrite dans la Partie Zoologique de PExpédition Antarctique Belge), par absence d’une large collerette, rabattue sur le rostre, qui caractérise cette derniére espece (Penthaleus villosus, Trt.), par le dernier article des palpes plus allongé, et par absence d’une fine pubescence qui couvre tout le trone sur lespece du détroit de Gerlache. 228 Southern Cross. x1 CRs ak Clie By I. V. HODGSON. (Plates XXIX-XL.) For the opportunity of examining the collection of Crustacea brought home by the ‘ Southern Cross’ Expedition, I am indebted to Professor F. J. Bell, and I am much more indebted to him for his kind assistance and advice during the progress of the examination. The collection came to me in about sixty bottles, for the most part of two-ounce capacity. The state of preservation of the specimens is a matter which calls for some comment; as a rule, far too many specimens were crammed into one bottle, the result being that they arrived at the Museum in a more or less macerated condition ; some were very bad. A summary of the results may be expressed as follows :— Decapoda . . . . 6 genera, 6 species, including 1 new species Schizopoda” 3. on Ly | Ah; 99 EN Isopoda i any On es 3» LOL5 Fe Pycnogonida . ae 29 aes: Cumacea . he BI Copepoda 2 yn oe With regard to the Amphipoda, I sincerely regret that my duties have prevented me from seriously dealing with this group. A preliminary examination has been made, and the species roughly sorted out; from this I should assume that there are upwards of thirty-five species in the collection, and that at least twenty-five will prove to be new. This group then, as might have been expected, is the most important of the Arthropod phylum.? The Cumacea was represented by a single mutilated specimen from Cape Adare, and Iam unable to assign even its generic rank. Two genera of Copepoda were found in a bottle containing an assortment of specimens, but they were so macerated as to be useless for identification. They represented two genera of Calanids. It is * I am glad to say that Mr. A. O. Walker has kindly undertaken to examine it.—F. J. B. Crustacea. 229 noteworthy that no Decapods were found within the Antarctic circle or anywhere near it, and further that no new genera were discovered ; most of the species belong to well-known genera, and on the whole show a close relationship to northern forms. I am also indebted to the Rev. T. Stebbing, F.R.S., for assistance with regard to the Isopoda, and more particularly to Mrs. L. E. Sexton for the drawings, which have been made with extreme care under very disadvantageous conditions. CRUSTACEA THORACOSTRACA. 1. DECAPODA. Famiry PORTUNIDAE. NECTOCARCINUS ANTARCTICUS. Portunus antarcticus, Jacquinot and Lucas, Voyage au Pole Sud (Hombron and Jacquinot), vol. iii. (1853), Crustacea, p. 51. Nectocarcinus antarcticus, A. Milne Edwards (21, p. 407.) This species was one of the discoveries of Dumont d’Urville on his celebrated voyage to southerp regions. It was also obtained by Ross (16). The large genus Portunus was broken up into numerous genera by Milne Edwards in 1861 (21), and that author ascribes as the distinctive features of the genus Nectocarcinus the presence of only four anterolateral teeth on the carapace, and the sub-lanceolate character of the dactylus of the last pair of thoracic appendages. In the paper cited above, Milne Edwards assigns three species to this genus, and figures two of them, but not this species. Milne Edwards does not refer to the dactylus of the last thoracic appendage of this species, which is broadly ovate and typically “ portunid,” and is so figured by Mr. Miers in the ‘ Zoology of the “ Hrebus” and “ Terror,’ and shown by the specimen in the National collection. The ‘ Southern Cross’ specimens are two in number, an adult male and a young one, and were taken at the Auckland Islands in ten fathoms. Distribution—Known only from New Zealand and Auckland Islands, 230 Southern Cross. FAMILY PERICERIDAE. PRIONORHYNCHUS EDWARDSI. Prionorhynchus Edwardsii, Jacquinot and Lucas, Voyage au Pole Sud, Zoology, vol. iii. (1853), Crustacea, p. 8; Rathbun (25, p. 243). A single specimen of this species was taken at the Auckland Islands on Dumont d’Urville’s voyage to the South Pole, and upon this the genus was established. The genus is characterised by the depressed lamellate and emarginate rostrum. In describing the species, MM. Jaecquinot and Lucas allude to a second specimen, a female, in the possession of the British Museum, and it would appear that their figure was drawn from this specimen. The figure in question is admittedly defective; the tubercles on the carapace are much too prominent, while the rounded elevations with which they are associated are not indicated, neither is the granular nature of the appendages shown. Two specimens, ¢ and @?, occur in the National collection, but nothing is stated as to the locality from which they were obtained. The ‘ Southern Cross’ specimens, three in number, were taken at the Campbell Islands in 1898, and are all much larger than the specimens alluded to above. The carapace and the greater part of the appendages are concealed by a dense incrustation of Polyzoa, and in addition to this, on the two smaller specimens, there is an interesting growth of a stout foliaceous green alga. These growths very largely conceal many details of structure, but there can be no doubt as to the identity of the species. The granular character of the limbs, which has been made a specific character, is practically absent, but enough remains on the female specimen to show that this feature is doubtless dependent on age. Another point to which it is desirable to call attention is the abdomen of the ?. In the specimen in the National collection the abdomen is narrow, and scarcely covers more than half of the sternal area, whereas in the ‘Southern Oross’ specimen the abdomen is much broader, and entirely occupies the sternal area. This latter specimen bears ova, the condition of which indicates they were not far from hatching. 1 g. Size of carapace, 160 x 135 mm. 2 6. Size of carapace, 133 x 114mm. Two legs and a cheliped missing. 3 2. Size of carapace, 114 x 102mm. _ Both chelipeds missing. Bearing ova. Istribution.—This species is only known from the Campbell and Auckland Islands. Crustacea. 225 FAMILY MAIIDAE. PARAMITHRAX PERONI. Paramithrax Peronii, Milne Edwards, Hist. Nat. des Crustacés, vol. i., p. 324; Jacquinot and Lucas (15, p. 10); Miers (17, p. 5); Haswell (9, p. 13). Two small ovigerous females of this species were obtained in Adventure Bay, Tasmania. As with numerous members of the Maioid Crustacea, these specimens are covered with alge, sponges, &c. A few dried specimens, showing considerable variation in size, occur in the National collection, and from the available information it appears clear that this crab is not uncommon in the shallow waters of the South Australian region. Distribution.—“ Indian Ocean” (20), “ Australia” (17), “New Zealand ” (15). FAMILY PINNOTHERIDA. HALICARCINUS PLANATUS. Cancer planatus, Fabr., Ent. Syst. ii. (1793), p. 446. Halicarcinus planatus, White, Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist. xviii. (1846), p. 178. Hymenosoma planatum, Haswell, Cat. Austral. Crust. (1882), p. 114, ibique citata. This is a very abundant and widely distributed species in the Southern Hemisphere. It is subject to a considerable amount of variation, but this after all is confined to comparatively narrow limits. These variations and the immense area over which this species is distributed has led to the existence of a number of synonyms. The ‘Southern Cross’ specimens are three in number, males, and quite small, being barely a quarter of an inch across the carapace, and were obtained at Auckland Islands in ten fathoms. The habitat of this species seems to vary from between tidemarks, rock-pools to a depth of 150 fathoms, and a bottom of sand, mud or 00ze. The National collection contains a large number of specimens from various localities, showing a circumpolar distribution. 222 Southern Cross. FamMity GALATHBEIDAE. MUNIDA SUBRUGOSA. Munida subrugosa, Miers, Zool. Voy. ‘ Hrebus’ and ‘ Terror, Crustacea (1874), p- 8; Henderson (10, p. 124); Milne Edwards (22, p. F 36). This is one of the widely distributed species of the Southern Hemisphere and is very closely allied to its congener M. rugosa of the northern region. A. Milne Edwards (22) points out that it is subject to a not inconsiderable amount of variation, and Professor Henderson, relying on the distribution of spines on the dorsum of the carapace, names a particular variety australiensis. Mr. Miers invari- ably maintained that IZ. gregaria, which is found in company with this species in the Falkland region, is only the young of MZ. swbru- gosa. General opinion does not, however, favour this view, though it is generally admitted that the only reliable points of distinction are to be found in the maxillipeds, The specimens brought home by the ‘ Southern Cross’ expedition were numerous and were obtained at the Auckland and the Campbell Islands. None of them, however, show the distinctive features of Professor Henderson’s australiensis, although it is true that the characteristic row of four spines is usually present. These should be sub-equal, but they are not, for the outer ones are extremely minute and not readily seen. Spines on or near the cervical groove may or may not be present and are usually minute. The absence of spines is more noticeable in the Auckland Island specimens, but as these are much smaller it is only to be expected. Fifty-one specimens, 6, @, and young, Auckland Islands. Ten fathoms. Thirteen specimens, ¢, Campbell Islands. Distribution.— Circumpolar. Famiry HIPPOLYTIDAE. In dealing with the Crustacea Macrura of the ‘Challenger’ Expedition Spence Bate (1) sub-divided this family into some ten genera, but these do not appear to be generally accepted. At any rate, a number of new species belonging to the family have been described since the appearance of that report, and in many cases (Milne Edwards, 22) without either reference to Spence Bate’s classification, or the essential features upon which it is based. This Crustacea. 222 can only cause confusion, and having no desire to add to it I have accepted Spence Bate’s classification in its abbreviated form as quoted by Mr. Stebbing in his “ Crustacea ” (30). This summary admirably answers all practical purposes and serves to discriminate fairly readily between a large and increasing number of species. The genus Merhippolyte of Spence Bate had two species assigned to it by its author and, for the reason alluded to above, I have not been able to ascertain whether any further additions have been made. MERHIPPOLYTE AUSTRALIS. (Pll EX.) Carapace rather short, the posterior two-thirds straight, the anterior third produced into a prominent rostrum, the two together bearing seven or eight prominent teeth. The rostrum is deep and bears two or three teeth on the under margin. The carapace bears a stout spine at the outer margin of the orbit and another exists at the lower angle. Posteriorly the carapace is curved backwards. Pleon smooth, epimera large, those of the first three segments rounded and the second much the largest, the remainder are pointed posteriorly, the last being small and spinous. Telson moderately long, narrow, five spines at the extremity, two pairs of spines and a few setae on the dorsal surface. First antenna. A stout three-jointed peduncle, of which the basal joint is longer than the other two and bears a very large spine, reaching to the extremity of the following joint. Of the two multiarticulate flagella, the inner one is long and somewhat tapering, the outer one is exceedingly stout for nearly two-thirds of its length and then suddenly becomes quite slender. Second antenna. The basal joint bears a stout spine externally at the articulation of the exopoditic squame. The second joint of the two-jointed peduncle of the flagellum is long and the two basal joints of the flagellum are larger than the remainder. The flagellum is comparatively long. The squame is spinose at its exterior termination and bears a close fringe of long setae; the broadest part of the squame is rather less than one-third of its length. A row of red pigment spots (in spirit specimen) occurs along the margin of the muscles of the organ. Eye large, pyriform, cornea hemispherical with ocellus con- tiguous. Mandible is stout, with a broad cutting edge bearing five blunt 234 Southeri Cross. teeth. The molar process is a somewhat oval pad surrounded by a close fringe of stout papillae. The palp is well developed and consists of a three jointed appendage, the joints being nearly uniform in length but differing considerably in breadth from the basal one. First maxilla. The coxa is somewhat crescentic in shape, the horn directed forwards and thickly covered with long spinose setae ; the basis is large, irregularly oval, and its inner margin very thickly covered with stout setae; the endopodite is a curved, tapering joint, its truncate end being indented and the inner lobe bearing two long setae. Second maxilla consists of a small rounded setose coxa, and a large bilobed basis, the distal lobe being much the largest, both are setose. The endopodite is a comparatively long, slender process armed at the extremity with two slender spines. The scaphognathite is large and its entire margin is setose, excepting the innermost posterior portion. It is truncate in front and fairly broad, curved and narrow behind. First maxillipede is lamellar, the coxa is comparatively small and somewhat rounded, the basis is half as large again, the inner margin being slightly incurved and the distal margin rounded, both coxa and basis are very setose. The endopodite is a two-jointed setose appendage with a terminal claw. The exopodite is a thin lamellar appendage provided with long setae, and from its inner margin arises a multiarticulate flagellum which bears long plumose setae at its extremity. Second maxillipede is a large lamellar appendage. The propodos is almost the largest joint, and somewhat pyriform in shape; it is reflexed on the remainder of the limb. ‘The dactylus is a narrow band-like joint which runs along the apparent posterior half of the propos. Both are richly setose. The exopodite is a large multi- articulate flagellum, setose, more particularly at its extremity; at the base is a fan-like appendage of numerous segments. Third maxillipede. The first joint is small, the next is very long and stout, with small tufts of setae throughout its entire length, and these not confined to any part of the margin. The two following joints are not so long as the latter, and the longer terminal one appears to be broken ; if so, the wound is an old one, and the tip is much discoloured. These two joints bear horizontal rows of setae throughout their length. The thoracic appendages vary in size; the first two are chelate, the former being very stout and with small tufts of setae throughout its length; these are specially noticeable at the extremity of the Crustacea, 235 propodos and dactylus. The chela of the second appendage is similar but smaller, and the entire limb is much more delicate and, by a good deal, the longest of the series. The carpus is divided into fourteen more or less distinct joints, and of these the most distal is as long as any other two. Of the remaining appendages, the next or third is the longest. It is stoutly built, and the carpus and meros respectively, bear one and two distal spines. The inner margin of the propodos and dactylus bear smaller spines along their entire length, and the latter terminates in two claws. The fourth and fifth are similar, but the propos in the latter bears a conspicuous tuft of setae at the distal extremity. In the specimen most closely examined it was found that the second and fourth appendages were obviously replacements due to injury, as they were very much less than normal size. The pleopods consist of a stout peduncle and a lanceolate exo- and endopodite, the pair forming the caudal fan being large and ovoid. The exopodite is scarcely as long as the endopodite, but is obscurely divided near the extremity ; this division is marked by the presence of a stout spine on the outer border. Another stout spine exists at the proximal end, but this belongs to the peduncle. The telson is long and gently tapering, rounded at the extremity, which bears five spines among the setae. The middle one of these is small, the adjacent pair are very long and the outer of moderate size. The dorsal surface bears two pair of lateral spines and a few stout setae near its Junction wrth the body. This species is a very close ally of Hippolyte magellanicus of Milne Edwards (22, p. F. 46), but the specific descriptions afforded by that work are by no means satisfactory. Four specimens of this species were taken at Auckland Island in ten fathoms. The speci- mens varied in size from thirty-eight to twelve millimetres, measured from rostrum to telson. The species also appears subject to some variation as regards the rostrum; the specimen examined had § teeth, two of the others %, and in one of these a lower tooth was very small, and the fourth specimen had 3 teeth. a 5 = A large member of the Palaemonidae was taken from the stomach of a seal on Duke of York Island, but it is in such a mangled condition that no satisfactory description can be made. 236 Southern Cross. 2. SCHIZOPODA. Professor Sars, in his ‘ Challenger’ Report (27) on this group, gives a synopsis of all the species of Huphausia known at the date of publication of that report. Mr. Stebbing (31), in describing a new species from the Falkland Islands, adds the more recently discovered species to the synopsis of Professor Sars. The latter author gives a brief critical summary of the characters usually made use of in determining the species. In spite of deficient information on many points, I have decided to describe the two following species as new ; concerning one, Z. glacialis, there can be no doubt, but with regard to the other, #. australis, there may be some question as to whether or no it is not identical, the differences noted being due to age. The locality is the same, the date of capture does not vary by a fortnight (12 days). Size is the most conspicuous difference, and at present it is very much open to question whether the proportions of the joints of the appendages are trustworthy characters. EUPHAUSIA GLACIALIS. (PL XOEKe) Body about twenty-five millimetres long, from rostrum to telson. The anterior part of the carapace is keeled and produced into a short and broad rostrum, of which the base occupies the entire width of the carapace. The ventral margin of the carapace bears a small spine anteriorly and a larger one laterally about the middle of its length. The hinder margin is produced backwards to form a pair of lateral rounded wings. The pleon segments are very nearly equal. Telson comparatively long and slender, lateral appendages large with a slight outwardly directed curve. Uropods approximately two- thirds the length of the telson. yes large, pyriform, the cornea very large, and a luminous organ in close connection with it externally. First antenna. The first joint of the peduncle is at least twice the length of the second, and at its distal extremity it bears a membranous lappet on one side and a spine on the other. The second joint also bears a small lappet, and the third carries two sub- equal multiarticulate flagella ; the outer flagellum has a swollen base and this bears a few sensory setae, Crustacea. 227, Second antenna. Basal joint of peduncle large and bearing a long slender spine externally at the base of the antennal squame. The spine bears a row of forwardly directed teeth on its inner margin, The squame is of moderate size, outer margin straight, terminating in a small tooth, distal margin somewhat rounded, only very slightly projecting beyond the tooth and like the inner margin setose ; setae long. The multiarticulate flagellum is of moderate length and supported on a three-jointed peduncle, the proximal joint is small and the following one the longest, the three together being about three-quarters the length of the squame. Mandible. Cutting edge irregularly dentate, the two jaws being dissimilar. The molar process is large and its extremity covered with closely set ridges. The palp is very long, three jointed. The basal joint is short, the middle one is the largest, but only by a little, and sparingly setose. The terminal joint is more slender, and near the distal extremity bears a few stout setae, the terminal ones being long and pectinate. First maxilla normal; the free margin of the coxa is rounded and bears spinose setae, those which are proximally situated being the longest ; the inner margin of the basis is truncate and beset with short spines. The palp is ovoid and carries a few stout setae. The epignath is very large and thin, ovoid and without setae. Second maxilla. The coxa and basis are both bilobed; in the former case the lower lobe is the largest, and in the latter the distal lobe is nearly twice the size pf the other. The lower coxal lobe is rounded, the other lobes merely having their angles more or less rounded off. The inner margin of both segments of the two joints are closely beset with stout setae, most of which are spinose, and they occur on the surface of the appendage, some distance from its edge. The palp is ovoid, and a little longer than the basis; it bears comparatively long setae on its inner edge. The epignath is narrow, about as long as coxa and basis together, and is sparingly setose. Maxillipede. The dactylus is about half the length of the propos, and the carpus has the same proportion to the meros. The ischium is the longest joint, twice the length of the meros, and slightly exceeds the exopodite in length. Its inner margin is provided rather sparingly with comparatively short setae and long plumose setae throughout its entire length. The exopodite consists of a basal portion, which terminates on the outside in an obtuse point, and a terminal natatory portion setose only on the outer margin. The proportions of the first maxillipede practically hold good for the two following appendages, the ischium, however, increasing in 238 Southern Cross. size to the penultimate limb. In the thoracic appendages, strictly so-called, these proportions fail. In the last three limbs the carpus shortens, and the meros is not only longer in proportion, but of equal size in the three limbs. The pleopods are subequal in size and of uniform structure, with, of course, the exception of the last. The coxa is very short, its distal margin being very sinuous; the basis is comparatively long and stout. The exopodite is the largest, lanceolote, with long plumose setae on the distal one-third of the outer and two-thirds of the inner margin. The endopodite is smaller, its distal portion being more equally setose on both sides, and the inner margin bears a long finger-like process about the middle of its length. The uropods are large, the basipodite is broad, and bears on its rounded outer margin a row of plumose setae. The exopodite reaches to the origin of the telsonic appendages, and very closely resembles the antennal squame in structure. The endopodite is about the same length, tapering, and has long plumose setae on both sides. The telson is proportionately broad at the base ; about one quarter of its length it tapers somewhat rapidly for a short distance, and then very gradually. Between the distal half and the origin of the lateral appendages are three teeth on either side. Beyond the third spine, which is the largest, the telson tapers quickly, and then terminates in a lanceolate manner. The appendages are a pair of large, some- what outwardly curved blades. Some twenty to thirty specimens of this species were taken between the ice-floes on January 135, 1899, in lat. 65°52° long. 162°32° E. Temperature 31° Fahr. EUPHAUSIA AUSTRALIS. Body about forty-five millimetres in length from rostrum to telson, and very stoutly built. In general anatomical details this species so closely resembles the last that I was disposed to regard glacialis as the young of this form. Close examination proves that the two forms seem distinct, and it is only necessary here to call attention to the points of difference. The carapace is precisely similar, save that the rostrum is narrower; its base does not occupy the entire width of the carapace. First antenna. Occurs both as singular and plural. The lappet at the distal extremity of the first joint is bi-lobed, and that at the end of the second extends to half the length of the third joint. Crustacea. 239 Mandible. Second joint of palp a little stouter, and sparingly setose. First maxilla. Very similar. Second maxilla. Palp somewhat more conical. Maxillipede. Proportions of the joints differ slightly, and may be represented as follows: dactylus, 4; propodos, 5; carpus, 6, and meros, 11. The two following maxillipedes do not differ con- spicuously from this, but in the two first thoracic limbs proper the dactylus is rather less than half the length of the propodos and the carpus is more than half the length of the meros. In the last limb the proportions are, dactylus, 4°55; propos, 4°5; carpus, 3; meros, 19°5. The telson is much more slender, but otherwise precisely similar. A score or so of individuals of this species were taken between the ice floes in lat. 62° 8. on the 1st of January, 1899, the temperature not recorded. They were in a terribly bad state of preservation. 3. CUMACEA. A single specimen of this group was taken off Cape Adare, but it is in a mutilated condition. CRUSTACEA ARTHROSTRACA. Le ESO EO DAC. TANAIDAE. Like many others, this family stands much in need of revision. Fifteen genera, containing something like sixty species, have been described, and many of these are only known from single specimens. (Dollfus, 8.) The species are separated by very minute characters, and very little is known concerning their life histories and the extent to which sexual dimorphism occurs. Mr. Beddard has described in the ‘ Challenger’ Reports (2) a species under the name of Paratanais dimorphus, but this species does not seem to belong to any of 240 Southern Cross. the genera defined by Professor G. O. Sars in his “ Crustacea of Norway” (29). The species described below is obviously a close relation of Mr. Beddard’s P. dimorphus, and, considering the present state of our knowledge, I have preferred to place this ‘ Southern Cross’ species with his rather than constitute a new genus, merely notifying the fact that Professor Sars’ (29) and Mr. Beddard’s (2) genus Paratanais are not in accord. But for the structure of the uropods I should have placed this and Mr. Beddard’s species in Sars’ genus LHeterotanats. PARATANAIS ANTARCTICA. (Pl. XXXI.) Cephalon very large, pyriform, eyes distinct at the base of the antennae. Thoracic segments very slightly tapering, the first one is the broadest, and less rounded laterally than the others. The fourth and fifth are sub-equal in length. The abdomen continues uniformly the slight taper of the thorax, and the first segment is longer than the following five, but the last is longest as well as narrowest, and is ovoid in shape, with a terminal setose projection in the middle line. The uropods are conspicuous, and comprise a short and stout peduncle, with two-jointed exo- and endopodites, the former being the largest. First antenna. Peduncle two-jointed, the first joint being two and a half times as long as the second, The flagellum is three- jointed; the first joint is very small, with two setae; the second also carries two setae distally, and is twice as long as the rounded terminal joint, which carries four long setae. | In the female it is triarticulate. Second antenna. Peduncle three-jointed. The joints are stout, and not very large; the first is shortest and the second longest, the third carries a slender spine distally. The flagellum is three-jointed. The first joint is about as long as the peduncle, but much more slender, and somewhat curved. The second joint is about half the length, and both bear distally one or two setae. The terminal joint, which carries four setae, is minute. Mandible. Cutting edge incurved, with fine serrations on the frontal margin. Molar tubercle well developed. Maxillipede five-jointed. The dactylus small, digitiform, with four long setae, propodos longer and much stouter, inner margin expanded about the middle of the joint, bearing four long setae. Carpus with three long setae near the inner distal extremity, and the meros expanded externally round the carpus. Crustacea. 241 Thoracic appendages. The first of these in the male reaches an extraordinary development. The dactylus is very long and slender, much curved near its extremity. The propodos is more than half as long, stout, and has articulated to it a piece which is curved through aright angle. This piece bears a tooth at the extremity on the outer margin, and a rounded projection or tubercle on the inner. The carpus is distinctly shorter than the propodos, and is broad, somewhat irregular proximally. The meros is very large and irregular, besides being considerably and irregularly expanded distally. It bears a large lateral wing externally near the proximal end. The remainder do not present any striking features. The three anterior pairs are a little longer and more delicate than the posterior three. These latter have one or two truncated spines at the termination of some of the joints. Pleopoda. A rounded basipodite, with ovoid exo- and endopodites arising some little distance apart. The exopodite is smallest, and both have long setae on the inner margin. Uropoda. The two-jointed exopodite equals in length the first joint of the endopodite. The former terminates in two long setae, the latter possesses four. Owing to an accident with the preparations further anatomical details cannot be given. Size about 4 mm. Eight specimens, four ¢§ four 2, were taken off Cape Adare, in 20 to 24 fathoms, from the roots of seaweed. Temperature 29° Fahr. GNATHIA. Of this interesting genus a very large number of species, some- thing like twenty-five, are known, nearly all of them coming from European waters. For our knowledge of these species we are mainly indebted to the works of M. Hesse (11 and 12) and Professor G. O. Sars (29). Mr. Beddard has described four species from the ‘Challenger’ collections, and, with the exception of the species described below and another from New Zealand, these are all that are known from extra-European seas. GNATHIA POLARIS. (Pl. XXXIL) Specific character. Pointed cephalon, more pronounced in male. Scythe-like character of the mandibles in male, and the markings on the two penultimate segments of the thorax. R 242 Southern Cross. Description of Male. Body of nearly uniform diameter. The cephalon is broad, roughly quadrangular, the postero-lateral margins being somewhat rounded. The frontal margin bears a broad triangular rostrum in the middle line; it then becomes straight for a short distance on each side the rostrum, and then incurved, to terminate witha stout pre-ocular spine. Eyes small. The anterior portion of the thorax is separated from the posterior by a conspicuous constriction. Of the three posterior seg- ments, the first is marked in the middle line with an ill-defined rect- angular patch, the second bears a median longitudinal groove, and the third is very strongly curved. The abdomen comprises the normal number of segments, and terminates in an elongate triangular telson. Antennae. The first antenna consists of a three-jointed peduncle, the last jot being longer than the other two together, and a four- jointed flagellum. The second has a four-jointed peduncle, the two last being large and sub-equal, and the two proximal ones being much shorter. The flagellum is six-jointed. Mandible. The mandibles are scythe-like in general appearance, the amount of curvature at the free end being variable. The inner margin is somewhat sinuous, and the outer drops abruptly a little short of its middle. Maxillipede. This consists of a roughly triangular plate attached by its broad base; the inner margin is straight, the anterior slightly sinuous, and the outer is very oblique. The masticatory lobe is a clavate process bearing two stout knobbed setae, which interlock with those from the opposite side. The palp consists of four rounded segments, tapering from the first, and each bearing some half-dozen long setae on its outer margin. Gnathopod. This consists of two segments, the first being a large pyriform plate, the more rounded inner margin bearing long plumose setae. The terminal segment is very small, oval, and bears a few long plumose setae towards the extremity, and a few small setae on the inner margin. Pereiopoda. Sub-similar, sub-equal. They present no very obvious peculiarities, save that the inner margin has a number of button-like tubercles distributed along it. Description of Female. The fully developed female possesses an enormously swollen body. The cephalon is comparatively small, obtusely pointed in Crustacea. 243 front. Two thoracic segments are readily distinguishable, and the other three can at times be made out. Both pairs of antennae, the pereiopoda and the abdomen closely resemble those of the adult male. In the younger individuals and larvae the cephalon is narrower, and bears very large eyes upon lateral tubercles. The mouth organs, which are at these stages of the normal number, are produced into a more or less conical structure in front of the head. A fairly large number of specimens of this species were taken at various times off Cape Adare, most of them coming from a depth of twenty fathoms or thereabouts. In one case the tube was labelled : “90-24 fathoms. From the roots of seaweed.” But all presented the appearance of living in a similar habitat. They were dirty, and as a general rule more or less covered with some growth, which con- cealed some structural features and gave them a velvety appearance. The specimens include well-developed males and females, as well as larvae. SPHAEROMIDAE. Considering the great confusion that exists among the numerous members of this family, it is with some hesitation that I put forward two new species. The difficult problem is to assign to these species the genus which might meet with general approval. Authors do not appear to be agreed on the subject of generic distinctions, and on that account I may have added to the existing confusion. Notwith- standing the obvious differences in form I have placed both species in the genus Cymodocea (Leach). The anatomical details do not appear to me to warrant their separation. CYMODOCEA ANTARCTICA. (Pl. XXXIIL, fig. 2.) Body ovoid, about twice as long as broad. Pleon terminating in a triangular shield with the extremity excavated. It is of a greenish colour, more or less irregularly splashed with a warm brown. Cephalon comparatively small and having a somewhat truncated anterior margin with a small rounded projection between the antennae. Eyes small, at the postero-lateral angle, which is produced on to the succeeding segment. Thorax. The first segment arches outwards, and is half as broad again as the cephalon. It is as long as the two succeeding segments, R 2 244 Southern Cross. and, 12 common with all, bears distinct epimera. These are very well developed and prolonged backwards in the three posterior segments. Abdomen. Four apparent segments are visible, the second of them bearing distinct epimera. The terminal segment is triangular, its extremity being excavated. The uropods arise a short distance from its anterior margin but do not reach the opposite extremity ; they are lanceolate in shape. First antenna. Except that Kinberg found “appendices omnes lobi cephalici laeves”— “vielleicht aber nur in Folge des schlechten Erhaltungszustandes ” (hlers, 1897, Hamburg, p. 14). : 266 Southern Cross. sometimes scattered over the surface, 7.¢., extra-mareinal, as shown in fix, 2, Pl. XLI. The rest of the elytral surface is beset with very minute bosses resembling the pustules on a much smaller scale, but not like the definite spines noted in the preceding variety. An interesting point is raised by the contemplation of fig. 3, Pl. XLI., namely, as to the probability of Hermadion longicirratus, Kinberg, being co-specific with Harmothoé spinosa. What makes the former a Hermadion appears to be merely the exposure of free segments behind the elytra, as in Lagisca.‘ If, however, this character fails to prove a sure guide, as in the case of the lagiscoid variety described above, then the extraordinary resemblance between the posterior and anal cirri of the example figured here and those of Kinberg’s specimen of Hermadion longicirratus (‘ Kug. Resa.,’ Taf. VI., fig. 33) cannot fail to impress, the chief difference being that, in the latter, some of the posterior segments were not concealed by the elytra. Prof. Ehlers (1897) is doubtful whether Hermadion longicirratus should be separated from H. magalhaensi, Kbg., the two forms having been obtained at the same point of the Magellan Strait. As indicated above, my observations rather lead me to believe that iinbere’s H. longicirratus is generically distinct from H. magalhaensi, and belongs to the series of Harmothoé spinosa. The form known as Lagisca vesiculosa (Gr.) is not contained in this collection. It chiefly differs from the typical H. spinosa in the presence of vesicular swellings at the posterior border of the elytra in addition to the smaller pustules, some of which are borne upon the vesicular elevations. Prof. Ehlers (1897, p. 15) has the following suggestive remark: “Bei grésserem Material wird sich feststellen lassen, ob die Polynoé vesiculosa [i.e. Lagisca vesiculosa (Gr.) = L. antaretica, McInt.| nicht ganz in den Varietiitenkreis der Harmothoé spinosa, Kbg., einzube- ziehen ist.” 2. HARMOTHOE CROSSETENSIS. (Pl. XLIII., figs. 8 and 9-11.) Lagisca crosetensis, McIntosh, 1885, ‘ Challenger’ Rep., p. 88. Elytra hirsuta parce fimbriata, spinis magnis confertis munita. The collection contains two specimens dredged in 26 fathoms off Cape Adare in company with H. spinosa, var. typica, ete. They are well-marked forms, presenting a hirsute appearance, due alike to 1 The type of Hermadion is H. magatlhaensi (sic), Kbg., a well-marked species not represented in the ‘ Southern Cross’ collection. As employed by Kinberg, his genus Hermadion also included Malmgren’s conception of Lagisca. Polychaeta. 267 the erect setae of the dorsal fascicles and to the abundance and size of the spines on the elytra. It is a variety to which the term spinosa would be much more appropriate than to v. ¢ypica. I was at first tempted to place this species as a variety in the series of H. spinosa, as I could find no essential divergence, except in the character of the elytra, which are known to vary considerably. But besides the fact that the collection contains no appreciable eradation between this extreme variety and the typical form, there is also a slight difference apparent in the setae (Pl. XLII, fig. 5). It will be interesting to learn, from the examination of a larger series, whether or not the autonomy of this species can be maintained. With regard to the bidentation of the ventral setae, which is a generic character of Harmothoé, in the present variety the sub-ter- minal denticle is obsolete, but may be seen in very rare cases. Prof. McIntosh describes and figures it. Below the curved tip the inner surface of the seta is convex, a point also noted by the author of the ‘ Challenger’ Report. The ‘ Southern Cross’ specimens, however, are a variety or sub-variety distinct from the ‘ Challenger” specimens, as shown by the chgracter of the elytral spines, which are acuminate at their tips in the former and laciniate in the latter (figs. 10-11, Ele Xen): The two varieties are therefore as follows :— 1. H. crosetensis, var. acuminata, n. 2. H. crosetensis, var. laciniata, n.' I counted thirty-eight segments (including the buccal), with body-length of 23 mm., width 9 mm. over the setae, 6 mm. without the setae. In the v. Jactniata the slender elytral fimbriae are not merely marginal or sub-marginal, but are scattered over the surface in amongst the spines. Some of the individuals of H. spenosa are infested with crustacean ectoparasites, which are attached to the body of the worm by a rostral process which pierces the integument and appears to end in a disc inside. These parasites superficially resemble the Saccopses terebellidis found on Terebellides stroemi rather than the Herpyllobius arcticus which occurs on H, imbricata.? Other specimens present peculiar growths upon the head, whose nature I have not determined. 1 The laciniate tips of the elytral spines of Lagisca crosetensis are not noted by Prof. McIntosh, op. c7t. 2 Levinsen, G. M. R.: ‘Om nogle parasitiske Krebsdyr, der snylte hos Annelider,’ Vid. Medd. Copenhagen, 1877-8, p. 551. 268 Southern Cross. GATTYANA. McIntosh, W. C. ‘British Annelids,’ Part II., ‘Polychaeta. Amphinomidae to Sigalionidae.’ Lay Soc. Moncgraph, 1900, p. 285. Syn. Nychia, Malmgren, pre-occupied. Setae superiores debiles, plerumque tenuiores quam setae ventrales ; setae ventrales apice integro; elytra scabriuscula, dorsum tegentia; palpi papillis minutis clavatis truncatis obsiti. 3. GATTYANA CRISTATA. (Pl. XLIV., figs. 1-4.) Pars media dorsalis segmentorum omnium crista transversa praedita; setae superiores tenerae asperae interdum apice penicillato; elytra perfimbriata, tuberculis crenatis munita. Three specimens of this interesting species, the first representa- tive of the genus to be recorded from Antarctic waters, were dredged off Franklin Island in 10 to 20 fathoms. Length of largest specimen 24 mm.; width from below, including parapodia, but not including setae, 8 mm.; number of segments, thirty-five. Characteristic for the species are (1) the cristate dorsum of each segment ; the first crest on the first elytra-bearing segment is rotund, the rest becoming more drawn out transversely until the maximum is reached. (2) The crenate tubercles of the sub-orbicular elytra. These tubercles are of large size and comparatively few in number in the posterior half of the elytron, graduating in size from the more numerous smaller verrucae of the anterior half. The elytra also carry numerous long filiform fimbriae, both marginal (external and posterior) and extra-marginal. (3) The tufted tips of the larger dorsal setae. The tip of the setae is produced into a slender flagellum surrounded by a tuft of fine long setulae; often the flagellum is absent, either lost or undeveloped, and then the setae terminate in a brush. These setae resemble the penicillate setae of Panthalis oerstedi. The most dorsally placed setae are feeble and flexible. MALMGRENIA. McIntosh, 1876, char. emend. McIntosh, W. C., 1876. Tr. Zool. Soc., London, IX., p. 376. Id., 1900, Ray Soc. Mon., p. 379. Prostomium lyriforme; processus omnes corporis (viz., palpi, tentaculum, antennae, cirri, elytra) glabri vel subglabri; setae ventrales distincte vel obsolete bidentatae. " Of. McIntosh, op. cit., 1900, p. 403, and Pl. XUL., fig. 51. Polychaeta. 269 In his recent diagnosis of this genus, Prof. McIntosh speaks of “the median and lateral tentacles springing from the front as in Lepidonotus.” It was Grube’ who first drew attention to the divergent series of Polynoids typified respectively by Lepidonotus and Harmothoé. In Prof. MeIntosh’s monograph the reader is left in doubt as to which series the genus is to be assigned, and on turning to the figure of the head (Pl. XXVIII., fig. 15) it seems to me that the median and lateral tentacles do not arise from the frontal border as in Lepidonotus. In a still more recent memoir on the Aphroditidae written by M. Darboux? we find the genus Malmgrenia included among the synonyms of Harmothoé itself. Under these circumstances it is unfortunate that there should be ambiguity in the defini- tion and illustration of the genus. The bases of the tenta- culum and antennae in Malmgrenia are contiguous, but the latter are inserted at a distinctly lower level. 44 MALMGRENIA CRASSICIRRIS. (Pl. XLIL., figs. 3-4, and Pl. XLIV., figs. 5 and 6.) Elytra reniformia brunnea albolineata striis candidis duabus longitudinalibus ; setae ventrales apice bidentato denticulo accessorio intermedio ; cirri ventrales tumidi subulati. The two white stripes upon a dark madder-brown background on each elytron give this species a characteristic appearance totally unlike anything else in the collection. Seen from below, the whitish fleshy ventral cirri convey an equally distinctive impression. When the elytra are removed, the intensely white prostomium and the whitish elytrophores stand out prominently from the general dark madder-brown ground colour, The largest ‘specimen was unfortunately mutilated behind, only thirty-one segments being preserved with the fragment, which measured 17 mm. in length and 6:5 mm. over the setae. A com- plete specimen, 14 mm. long by 4:5 mm. wide (over the setae), had forty segments. The dorsal setae are much shorter and stouter than the ventral 1 Grube, E.: ‘ Bemerkungen iiber die Familie der Aphroditeen III., Polyonina,’ see p. 59. Jahresber. Schles. Ges., 1875 (Breslau, 1876). 2 Darboux, J. G.: ‘Recherches sur les Aphroditiens,’ Bull. Sci. France et Belgique, XX XIII, 1400, see p. 106, 270 Southern Cross. setae, in this respect bearing a resemblance to Malmeren’s genus Laenilla." The dorsal setae are nearly smooth, but faint serrations can be observed along the convex border with a high magnification. The ereatest peculiarity in the parapodial armature is presented by the ventral setae, which have gaping bifid tips with a small accessory tooth between the larger prongs. The number of paired alternating spinous rows on the ventral setae is about twelve, the eighth row occurring at the point of maximum dilatation. Several specimens were obtained off Cape Adare in 20 to 26 fathoms at a temperature of 29° Fahr. In the state of preservation in which they arrived they proved to be excessively fragile, the cirri and elytra breaking off with the greatest ease and even the intersegmental junctions giving way. PHYLLODOCEIDAE. 5, PHYLLODOCE MADEIRENSIS. (Pl. XLII., fig. 5, and Pl. XLIV., fiz. 7.) t=) Phyllodoce (Anaitis) madeirensis, Langerhans, P., 1880. Zeitschr. wiss. Zool., XXXIII., p. 807. Ehlers, E., 1897, op. cit., p. 25. Prof. Ehlers pointed out that the Antarctic representative of the Madeiran Phyllodoce differs from the original type in the character of its setae, the terminal spiniform process of which is very much longer than in the latter. On account of the serial distribution of papillae on the extruded proboscis, this species should presumably be regarded as a Phyllodoce, s. str., and not as an Anwitis.? The proboscis has six lateral rows of papillae, ten to twelve ina row, and a median dorsal series of seven. All the papillae are characterised by a patch of chocolate-brown pigment on their posterior faces only (Pl. XLIL,, fig. 5). ' Many of Malmeren’s genera have been rejected by subsequent systematists, and among others the type species of ZLaenilla, Ll. glabra, is now named Harmothoé setosissima (Sav.), McIntosh, 1900, p. 845. I do not quite see the necessity for sinking the name Laenilla in Harmothoé, especially since the type species turns out to be valid (apart, of course, from synonymy), and, in fact, the distinction between Laenilla and Malmgrenia is drawn extremely fine, the cirri of Laenilla being sparsely papillose, and the head of a different shape. 2 Of. Malmgren, 1865, Ofv. Ak. Forh. Stockholm, pp. 94, 95, and Gruhe, 1890, Jahresber. Schles. Ges. fiir 1879, p. 208. Polychaeta. 275 The posterior border of the prostomium is emarginate, with a nuchal papilla in the notch.’ With regard to the tentacular cirri, Langerhans states that the first (buecal) segment carries three pairs of tentacular cirri with annulate bases,? while the second segment bears one pair of tentacular cirri and one cirrus ventralis foliaceus, but no setae. This description tallies with Malmeren’s diagnosis of Anwitis, but is not in accord with my observations. In the ‘ Southern Cross’ specimen, with proboscis three parts extruded, it is quite evident that the dorsum of the true buccal segment is invisible from above, unless it is represented by the nuchal papilla. Below and at the sides, however, the buccal segment is clearly visible and bears laterally a pair of cirri;* the second segment bears two cirri on each side, namely, the most dorsally placed long cirrus in the figure and the shortest pair of cirri below it;* the third segment bears a pair of tentacular cirri, namely, the long cirrus immediately below the most dorsally placed cirrus on each side in the figure; below this last tentacular cirrus there is a cirrus ventralis foliaceus, as described by Langerhans. ‘ The following table recapitulates the foregoing observations :— Segment I. One pair of tentacular cirri and a median dorsal nuchal papilla. Segment II. 'T'wo pairs of tentacular cirri, namely, a dorsal and a ventral pair. Segment III. One pair of tentacular cirri and a paired cirrus ventralis foliaceus. One specimen, 72 mm. long, 3 mm. wide over the parapodia, was taken off Cape Adare in 20 to 24 fathoms. ALCIOPIDAE. VANADIS. Appendix terminalis pedum cirriformis; setae compositae capillares; antennae V. 6. VANADIS ANTARCTICA. (Pl. XLIV., fig. 8, and Pl. XLVI., figs. 1-2.) Alciopa antarctica, McIntosh, 1885, ‘ Challenger’ Rep., p. 175. Vanadis antarctica, Apstein, 1900. ‘Die Alciopiden und Tomopteriden der Plankton Exped.,’ Bd. II., H. b., p. 11. * The notch is deeper and more acute than shown in the figure. * The annulation of the cirrophores cannot be discerned in the ‘ Southern Cross’ specimen. * The longer of the two short cirri on each side in the figure, * Tt is necessary to examine in side view to see these relations properly. 272 Southern Cross. Apstein transferred this species tentatively to the genus Vanadis on account of the presence of “a short filiform cirrus” (McInt.) on the parapodium. But one of the essential characters of Vanadis is the possession of setae compositae, while Prof. McIntosh attributed setae simplices to his Alciopa antarctica which, if correct, would have justified the constitution of a new genus. A true Vanadis had already been recorded from the Southern Seas, namely, V. greefiana, Grube, 1877,’ taken between Kerguelen and Australia. In the present species the buccal segment resembles that of Vanadis formosa, figured by Apstein. It does not appear in dorsal view, but seen from below it consists of two broad lobes, each bearing a stout tentacular cirrus at its outer edge and meeting in the middle line in a small triangular piece. Behind the bilobed buccal segment follow two narrow segments, each with a pair of tenta- cular cirri borne upon cirrophores. The fourth segment bears a pair of dorsal cirri with rounded tips and a rudimentary parapodium, but no setae. The fifth and sixth segments in the female bear large spherical dorsal cirri modified to form receptacula seminis. A small mammilla on each receptaculum represents the apex of the modified cirrus. In addition to these remarkable organs?” the fifth and sixth segments likewise bear a small pharetra setarwm, from which the long slender setae project, and a small ventral cirrus. In Vanadis formosa the receptacula are borne upon different segments (viz., 4th and 5th), and there are no setae on these segments (Apstein). The occurrence of a pinnigerous but apparently achaetous seoment, between the segments which carry the tentacular cirri and those which bear the receptacula seminis, is a distinctive feature of Vanadis antarctica @ . An incomplete female with 115 segments measured nearly 9 inches in length. The anterior portion of the body, including the first eight or nine setigerous segments, is slender, cylindrical, and porrect. The sexes are easily distinguished by the absence of the enlarged dorsal cirri of the anterior setigerous segments in the male and their presence in the female. Behind, and at the base of the more posterior parapodia, there are large black glands more prominent in the male. The general colour in spirit is translucent brown, banded in the abdominal region. 1 Pharetra setarum in appendicem brevem filiformem exeunte; setae compositae. (Grube, Monatsber. Ak. Berlin, 1877, p. 524.) 2 Originally described by Hering in 1860; cf. Hering, ‘Zur Kenntniss der Alciopiden von Messina,’ S.-B. Akad. Wien, Bd. 101, Abth. 1, 1892. Polychaeta. 278 If the long slender setae are gathered into a bunch it is almost, if not quite, impossible to determine their composite nature, but when spread out there is seen to be a very long appendix jointed to a still longer shaft (Pl. XLIV., fig. 8). Numerous examples, male and female, were obtained at Cape Adare “on the surface along the beach,” during latter end of April and beginning of May, 1899; temperature 28°6° Fahr.; “very plentiful for a few days but afterwards not seen again.” The downwardly directed lens of the specimen figured by McIntosh (op. cit. Pl. XXVIIL, fig. 4) is evidently due to unnatural shrinkage. It is stated in a footnote that the Alciopidae of the ‘Challenger’ collection were in an indifferent condition, but it is true that the lens has a downward inclination. The achaetous segment which I have described between the third pair of tentacular cirri and the first pair of receptacula seminis - (or the corresponding segment in the ¢) is represented in the figure quoted above, but is not referred to in the text; also the setae in the minute parapodia of the receptaculiferous segments were not observed by Prof. McIntosh. These setae are shorter and finer than the rest and might easily be overlooked, even if they were not lost from the specimen. One of the ‘ Southern Cross’ specimens had the proboscis exserted ; it is seen to be surmounted by a crown of twelve soft conical papillae of which four are dorsal, six ventral and two lateral, the last being larger than the rest (Pl. XLVL,, fig. 2). The skin of the dorsal surface is loose, and below it occurs an infusion of blood rendering it probable that the proboscis is protruded by fluid pressure as with Phyllodoce, according to Ehlers. Grube appears to have based his description of V. greefiana on a male specimen which was re-examined and figured by Dr. Apstein (Arch. Naturg. Bd. 59 (1), 1893, p. 145), who, more recently (1900), has declared it synonymous with V. formosa, Claparede. Apstein’s earlier figures of V. greefiana do not quite agree with his later figures of V. formosa in regard to the number of anterior achaetous segments in the male, and, in the absence of the female, it is difficult to say why V. greefiana should be regarded as co-specific with V. formosa rather than with V. antarctica. Apstein (op. cit. 1893) gives the information that the precise locality in which V. yreefiana was taken was Long. 67° 30’ E., Lat. 35° 20'S. at 274 Southern Cross. SYLLIDAE. 7. TYPOSYLLIS HYALINA. (Pl. XLYV., figs. 1-3.) Syllis hyalina, Grube, 1863, Arch. Naturg., p. 45; Marenzeller, 1875, SB Ak. Wien, UXXIIL., Abth. 1, p. 129; Ehlers, 1897, op cit., p. 36. Typosyllis hyalina, Langerhans, 1879, Zeitschr. wiss. Zool. XX XII., p. 535. A single specimen was dredged in company with Maldanids and Ariciids off Cape Adare, January 17, 1900, in 8 fathoms. The body, 54 mm. in leneth by 2 mm. average width, maintains an even transverse diameter until near the hinder end, where it tapers to a point terminated by two breviarticulate anal cirri with thirteen to fourteen joints. The tentaculum impar has about seventeen joints indistinct towards the base. Dorsal cirrus II is longer than the tentacular cirri and than all the rest, having twenty clear joints and two or three indistinct joints at the base. Cirrus III has about sixteen joints, cirrus IV eighteen, and then the cirri somewhat lessen and become fusiform with about fifteen joints, and equal in length to little more than half the width of the body, again becoming some- what longer and slenderer towards the posterior end. The eyes are in a wide trapezium, the anterior pair, as usual, being the larger. This species belongs to a section of the genus characterised as follows :— Cirri dorsales breves ; setae bidentatae.! The anterior segments present a banded appearance due to two reddish-brown pigment tracts bounding a clear transverse space which occupies the crest of each segment; the posterior band is generally interrupted in the middle line (fig. 2). 8. EUSYLLIS KERGUELENSIS. Eusyllis kerguelensis, McIntosh, W. C., 1885, ‘ Challenger’ Rep., p. 191 Khlers, E., 1897, t. c., p. 42. This is a Syllid of large size, long cirri and smooth convex dorsum, resembling in its habitus a Hesionid, as Ehlers points out.? ' Carus, J. V., 1885, Prodromus Faunae Medit.,’ Vol. I., p. 227. In the present species the bidentation of the setae is often obscure. ? It is curious that a minute Syllid belonging to the same sub-division, Husyllina, namely, Syllides longocirrata, Oerst., s!.ould have been also compared toa Hesionid by Langerhans (1879, Zeitschr. wiss. Zool. XXXII., p. 549). Besides being a minute species the dorsal cirri are articulate except the first three, which are shorter and clavate. Polychaeta. 245 The single specimen, obtained off Cape Adare in 20 to 24 fathoms, is a fragment with thirty-six anterior segments, upwards of 12 mm. in length and nearly 3 mm. across the body without the feet; 5 mm. over the setae. The dorsal cirri are long and smooth, but under the microscope faint articulations can be discerned near the free end. They stretch across the dorsum, measuring therefore about 5 mm. in length. The dorsal cirri of the first three segments are shorter than the succeeding, graduating in size from the first, until at the fourth segment the normal filiform dorsal cirri commence. ‘The stout antennae are equal to or slightly exceed the length of the palps which meet together quite at the base. The eyes are in a wide sub-rectangle, the anterior pair the larger. ARICIIDAE. 9. ARICIA MARGINATA. ; (Pl. XLV., fig. 4.) Aricia marginata, Ehlers, 1897, op. cit., p. 95. A poorly preserved incomplete specimen was taken off Cape Adare in 8 fathoms, January 17, 1900. The anterior body-region comprises the achaetous buccal segment and thirteen setigerous segments which carry dorsal fascicles of long slender capillary setae, one side of which is notched like a file, the notches slightly imbricating; and oval dorso-ventrally elongated neuropodial fascicles of stout aciculiform crochets, which present a tristichous arrangement. The ventral crochets are stout dark-brown spines with a curved blunt end and low serrations on the convex border. 10. SCOLOPLOS KERGUELENSIS. Scoloplos kerguelensis, McIntosh, 1885, op. cit., p. 355; Ehlers, 1897, op. cit., js Vite One specimen washed up after a gale with Harmothoé at Cape Adare, January 25, 1900; others dredged in 8-10 fathoms. Both dorsal and ventral setae are simple and capillary ; after the ninth setigerous segment the pharctrae setarum become dorsal. Length 7°25 mm.; segments fifty-six, the last few being achaetous. Toe 276 Southern Cross. OPHELIIDAE. 11. TRAVISIA KERGUELENSIS. (Pl. XLIL., figs. 1-2.) Travisia kerguelensis, McIntosh, 1885, op. cit., p. 357; Ehlers, 1897, op. cit., p. 97. In this worm the mouth lies between the first and second setigerous segments, and in front of the first setiger there is an achaetous segment presumably homologous with the peristome of other forms, but here in front of the buccal orifice. In the figures given by McIntosh and Ehlers the lateral organs (Seitenorgane), which superficially resemble those of the Capitellidae,’ are not shown. They he between the notopodial and neuropodial fascicles and appear as pits in the pleural wall, commencing in the first postoral segment and ending in the twenty-first postoral (Pl. XLIL., fig. 2). The segmental nephridiopores are seen below the ventral fascicles, commencing at the fifth postoral and ending at the thirteenth postoral segment. The posterior segments give rise to rounded papillae which eventually form a fringe round the pygidium. Two specimens were obtained from Cape Adare in 7 to 10 fathoms ; length 20 mm., maximum width nearly 8 mm. MALDANIDAE. RHODINE. Malmgren, 1865, op. cit., p. 189, Char. emend. Uncini in segmentis uncinigeris anterioribus biseriales, in ceteris uniseriales, sine fasciculo setularum sub rostro, in segmentis IV anticis setigeris nulli, in ceteris numerosi. In his description of Rhodine sima, Ehlers? seems to have been the first to indicate that the uncini are biserial in a limited number of segments only, uniserial in the rest. 12. RHODINE LOVENI. (Pl. XLVI., figs. 3-5.) Rhodine lovéni, Malmgren, A. J., 1867, ‘ Annulata Polychaeta,’ Taf. X., fig. 61. Several specimens of this interesting species were obtained off Cape Adare in 8 fathoms, 17th January, 1900; sea temperature 30° Fahr. ' Of. Hisig, ‘ Monograph der Capitelliden.’ They closely resemble the corresponding organs in a Dasybranchus which I have examined. 2 Ehlers, 1887. ‘£ Florida-Anneliden,’ p. 189. Polychaeta. 277 The tube consists of agglutinated particles of black and red sand. The prostomium has two grooves above, separated by a low keel ; there is no limbus. The head is not only coalescent with the achaetous buccal segment, but also with the first setigerous segment, so that the animal is provided with a long porrect neck. The plane of fusion of the buccal with the first setigerous segment is indicated dorsally by a peculiar transverse crest, which is apparently obsolete in some, though present in most specimens. Of course the length and appearance of the segments will depend upon the state of contraction of the worm during preservation. The second and third setigerous segments are each provided with a collar which embraces the segment in front; the seventeenth to the twenty-fourth setigerous segments are elegantly campanulate, the bell becoming deeper in the posterior segments. There are not more than twenty-four segments on the most complete specimen, but the worm is fragile, the campanulate see- ments especially separating with great ease. Seoements four to ten are not longer than they are broad; from the eleventh they increase in length, commencing to decrease again after the twenty-first setigerous segment. Segments four to nine inclusive carry ventral shields (scuta ventralia). The uncini commence with a biserial disposition on the fifth setigerous segment and become uniserial at the fifteenth." I should estimate that the total length would be about 70 to 80 mm. TEREBELLIDAE. Sus-FAMILY AMPHITRITEA. Malmeren. THELEPUS. Leuckart, 1849; char. emend. Malmgren, 1865; sens. ampl., Grube, 1877. a, Leuckart, R., 1849: ‘Zur Kenntniss der Fauna von Island.’ I. Arch. Naturg., XV. 1, p. 169. 8. Malmeren, A. J., 1865: ‘Nordiska Hafs-Annulata’” Ofv. Ak. Forh., p. 386. y- Grube, A. E., 1877: ‘Anneliden-Ausbeute S.M.S. “ Gazelle.”’ Monatsber. Ak. Berlin, p. 544. Branchiae filiformes, acervis transversis filorum simplicium compositae, paria duo (Thelepus, s. str.) vel tria (Neottis); fasciculi setarum capillarium a sezmento tertio (IL"° branchifero) incipientes, per segmenta numerosa (plura quam XXX) obvii. 1 [ have ascertained from material in the National Collection that the uncini are uniserial in the abdominal segments of the northern type. 278 Southern Cross. Since Grube’s amplification of the scope of the genus Thelepus there has been a tendency to drop the name Neottis Malmgren. It can be shown, I think, in several ways that this is ill-advised, but for the present it is sufficient to point out that there is a Weottas antarctica, McInt.,! and a Thelepus antarclicus, Kbe., which are two different species.2 Whenever a species of Thelepus, s. ampl., is recorded from any locality, the first question that rises to my mind is, “Is it not a Neottis ?” 13. THELEPUS ANTARCTICUS. (Pl. XLV., fig. 6.) ay antarcticus, Kinberg, J. G. H., 1866,‘ Annulata Nova, Ofv. Ak. Forh., p. 045. It is noteworthy that not one of the three collections of Antarctic Polychaeta recently examined by Prof. Ehlers? contained this highly characteristic species. Not only is it a true 7helepus, s. stv., but it is probably co-specific with the northern type, Thelepus concinnatus (Fabr.). One fragment, comprising the head and thirty setigerous segments, upwards of 2 inches long, was dredged off Cape Adare in 8 fathoms, January 17, 1900. The fore-part of the body or thoracic region comprises approxi- mately the first twenty-five setigerous segments, which differ from the abdominal segments in their greater girth, but not in respect of the parapodial armature. A mid-thoracic segment measures 7 mm. crosswise by 2 mm. lengthwise ; an abdominal segment, 35 mm. X 4 mm.; so that an average abdominal segment is equal to half the width and twice the length of a typical thoracic segment. The entire dorsal surface is characterised by a rich glandular pustulose structure which still preserves a slimy surface. The 1 Neottis antarctica, McIntosh, 1876, = Neottis spectabilis, Verrill, 1875, = Thelepus spectabilis (Verr.), Ehlers, 1897. 2 Unless I am quite mistaken, M. Malaquin (1894, ‘ Annélides . . . de la goélette Melita, Rev. biol. Nord France, VI., p. 418) completely confused them, and I do not know what species he had before him. 3 Ehlers, E., 1897. ‘ Polychaeten.’ Ergebnisse Hamburg. magalhaensischen Sammelreise, 11th Lief. Ehlers, E., 1900. ‘Magellanische Anneliden der schwedischen Expedition.’ Nachr. Ges. Gittingen, Heft 2, p. 206. Ehlers, E., 1901. ‘Die Anneliden der Sammlung Plate.’ ‘Fauna Chilensis,’ Ed. II., Heft 2, p. 251 (Suppt. V., Zool. Jahrb.), Polychaeta. 279 translucent hypodermal pustules are of varying sizes, irregular in their distribution, larger and more abundant than in the specimens of Thelepus cincinnatus which I have examined. The tori wneinigert commence on the third setigerous segment, and thereafter the tori and capillary fascicles co-exist to the end of the specimen (and of the body, Kinberg), there being no mutation of segments in regard to the distribution of setae, except that the tori become more pro-eminent in the abdominal segments, while the dorsal capillary fascicles suffer a slight reduction. The simple filiform branchiae are more numerous on the second than on the third segment, the latter being the first setigerous segment. The specimen offered certain chaetographical abnormalities. In the nineteenth setigerous segment there was no forws on the left side ; the twenty-fourth and twenty-fifth pharetrae (notopodium and newro- podium) of the right side had no antimeres on the left side; finally, the twenty-fifth right capillary fascicle was not subtended by the usual torus. The uncini are uniserial throughout and exactly resemble those of Thelepus cincinnatus figured by von Marenzeller,’ being charac- terised by the presence of two rows of accessory uncinules at the vertex and by a rounded process (mucro) at the distal end of the basal portion. NICOLEA. Malmgren, 1865, op. cit., p. 380. Branchiae arborescentes, paria duo; fasciculi setarum capillarium a segmento quarto [i.e. first postbranchial] incipientes, in segmentis cirea XV—XVII obvii. The relations of this genus to the Phyzelia of Savigny, Quatrefages and Kinberg have been dealt with by the Baron de St. Joseph.’ 14, NICOLEA AGASSIZI. (Pl. XLV,, fig. 5.) Phyzelia agassizi, Kinhberg, 1866, op. cit., p. 345. Nicolea agassizi (Kbg.), Ehlers, 1897, op. cit., p. 182. The collection contains five specimens taken off Franklin Island in 10 fathoms and Cape Adare in 20 to 24 fathoms. The larger 1 Marenzeller, F. von, 1884. ‘Zur Kenntniss der adriatischen Anneliden,’ III. S.-B. Akad. Wien, Bd. 89, p. 206. 2 Ann. Sci. Nat. (7th Sér.), T. XVII., p. 180 ef seq. 280 Southern Cross. specimens from Cape Adare measure up to 60 mm. in leneth, of which about two-thirds go to the attenuated abdominal region and one-third to the tumid thoracic region. The tort wneinigert commence on the second setigerous segment. The wneint are uniserial at first, but at the seventh uncinigerous segment their vertices become turned alternately in opposite directions, a condition which is thus described by Kinberg :— “ Uncini breves, series simplices fingentes, in segmentis posterioribus regionis anterloris antrorsum et retrorsum vergentes alternantes.” This alternation of the uncini occurs in ten uncinigerous segments, from the seventh to the sixteenth (the last thoracic segment) inclusive. The wneini are fringed at their vertices by two rows of uncinules, those of the front or major series being not less than five in number in a transverse row, when seen in frontal view; the distal end of the basal portion of the wneimus is obtusely rounded, and there is a low protuberance in the concave border of the basal portion. The second gill is smaller than the first, and commences to branch from the base; the first gill has a stout stipe, the branches, which spread out in a more or less palmate manner, occupying the upper three-fifths of it. . In the intersegmental grooves behind the third and fourth capillary fascicles there is a low whitish ovate body which possibly has relation to the reproductive system. In one of the larger specimens, these bodies have the form of short, stout, subulate, cirriform papillae, which occur near the posterior dorsal border of the respective capillary fascicles in the intersegmental grooves. SUB-FAMILY POLYCIRRIDEA. Malmeren. EREUTHO. Malmeren, A. J., 1865, ‘ Nordiska Hafs-Annulater,’ Ofv. Ak. Forh., p. 391. Pars antica corporis solummodo fasciculis setarum capillarium praedita; pars postica toris uncinigeris munita; pinnulae uncinigerae a segmento XIV", ze. primo pone segmentum ultimum setigerum incipientes; caput cirris tentacularibus longis numerosis obsitum; branchiae nullae. The above diagnosis is Malmeren’s, slightly altered so as to include a species based upon a single specimen, whose autonomy must remain a matter of doubt until more examples are obtained. Polychaeta. 281 15. EREUTHO ANTARCTICA. (Pl. XLIL., fig. 6, and Pl. XLVI., fig. 6.) Fasciculi setarum capillarium a segmento tertio incipientes in segmentis XI obvii. Capillary setae in eleven segments followed by twelve uncini- gerous segments ; specimen measuring about 15 mm. in length over all, apparently incomplete behind ; posterior three-fifths of thoracic region swollen and ovigerous, ova showing through the body-wall ; uncini uniserial, confined to abdominal region ; tentacles grooved on their inner faces. The form of the uncini (Pl. XLVLI,, fig. 6) curiously resembles that of the uncini of Polycirrus kergquelensis, McInt.,’ rather than those of other species of the genus,” more especially in regard to the length of the manubrium, thus indicating the validity of the species. One specimen was taken at Cape Adare, 25th January, 1900, washed up after a gale. ADDENDUM. Besides the material obtained in the neighbourhood of Cape Adare, there is a very small tube of worms from the Auckland Islands. These include a small Nereid, of which the proboscis is not extruded, and a Hesionid allied to Oxydromus. As the latter is of some interest zoogeographically I append a brief description, naming it Oxydromus aucklandicus. The antennae and the styles or terminal joints of the biarticulate palps are fusiform with filiform acuminate tips; the median antenna (tentaculum) is much shorter than the paired antennae and, like them, frontal in origin; eyes in a wide trapezium, the anterior larger and crescentic ; the tentacular cirri are all lost, only their bases remain- ing, and repeated examination only revealed traces of six pairs; the dorsal rami of the parapcedia are inseparably connate with the cirrophores of the dorsal cirri, as in Podarke viridescens, Ehl., and are armed with a few delicate simple setae; ventral setae with long graduating falciform appendix with finely serrulate edge and bidentate apex; there are forty-two setigerous segments; length 15 mm.; width over the setae 4 mm., without the setae, 3 mm. Locality.—Auckland Islands, one specimen from ten fathoms. 1 * Challenger’ Rep., Pl. XXVIII, fig. 22. 2 E.g., Ereutho smitti, Malmgren, 1865, from Spitzbergen, and E. kerguelensis, McIntosh, 1885, from Kerguelen. 282 Southern Cross. EXPLANATION OF PLATES. Puate XLI. All figures relate to Harmothoé spinosa. Fig. 1.—Anterior end of specimen of 43 mm. and 37 segments. (N.B.—The fimbriae of the elytra are not shown in the figure.) Fig. 2.—Three of the middle segments of another to show extra-marginal as well as sub-marginal verrucae. Fig. 8.—Posterior end of a third example; total length 22 mm., 37 segments. Fig. 4.—Several segments with elytra removed and seen from above, showing parasites. PLatTE XLII. Fig. 1.—Travisia kerguelensis from the left side; the position of the mouth is indicated by the dark shading between the first and second setigerous segments. Fig. 2.—Portion of lateral body-wall of same showing areolation of the epidermis, the laminated branchia behind the dorsal fascicle, the lateral organ (Sectenorgan) between the dorsal and ventral fascicles and the segmental orifice below. Fig. 83.—Malmgrenia crassicirris. Several segments seen frum below showing thickened ventral cirri and pigment markings. Fig. 4—Same. Anterior end. The second elytron on the left side of the figure is really the third, the second being lost from the specimen. Fig. 5.—Head of Phyllodoce madeirensis with proboscis partially extended. Fig. 6.—EHreutho antarctica from the left side. Puate XLITI. Fig. 1.—Tip of ventral seta of H. spinosa, var. fullo, x Zeiss, 4D. Fig. 2.—Tip of ventral seta of H. spinosa, var. typica, x 4D. (The sub-apical denticle is represented by a shoulder.) Fig. 3.-—Tip of ventral seta of H. crossetensis, var. acuminata, x 4D. Fig. 4.—Tip of ventral seta of H. spinosa, sub-var. lagiscoides, x 3p. (The rows of setulae commence far down as in 3.) Fig. 5.—Tip of ventral seta of H. spinosa, another specimen. x 3p. (The rows of setulae commence high up as in 2, but the bidentation of the tip is obsolete, being indicated by a convex limbus or border somewhat resembling No. 38). Fig. 6.—Elytral spine of /7. spinosa, sub-var. lagiscoides, X 38D. Fig. 7.—Hamate boss from elytra of a specimen apparently intermediate between var. fullo and var. typica, X 8D. Fig. 8.—Head of //. spinosa (drawn from specimen dredged off Cape Adare in cix fathoms, December 16th, 1899; thirty-eight segments, all elytra, lost; in this case the tentacular cirri are unequal, in others they are equal); same individual as No. 5. Fig. 9.—Prostomium with tentaculum and antennae of H. crossetensis, var. acuminata. Fig. 10.—Portion of elytral margin of same, showing unequal acuminate spines and fimbriae. Fig. 11.—Portion of an elytral scabrilla of H. crossetensis (McInt.) from the Crozet Islands, showing the lobed tip (var. laciniata). Polychaeta. 283 PLATE XLIV. Fig. 1.—Prostomium with ceratophore and antennae, and first elytrophoral segment of Gattyana cristata. The first dorsal crest has a rounded knob-like appearance. Fig, 2.—Dorsal penicillate seta of G. cristata, x 3c. Fig. 3.—Ventral seta of same, X 3A. Fig. 4.-—Crenulate scabrilla of elytra of same, x 3c. Fig. 5.—Head of Malmgrenia crassicirris. Fig. 6.—Ventral seta of same, x 38D. Fig. 7.—Seta of Phyllodoce madetrensis, x 3c. Fig. 8.—Seta of Vanadis antarctica, x 3d. Pirate XLV. Fig. 1—Head of Typosyllis hyalina with proboscis extruded; ¢ = tooth seen through dorsal wall of proboscis. Fig. 2.—An anterior segment (about 19th) of same to show the pattern of pigmentation. it Fig. 3.—Dorsal cirrus of 19th segment of same. Fig. 4.—Seta from one of the anterior ventral fascicles of Arteta marginata, X 8D. Fig, 5.—Uncinus of Nicolea agassizi, X 8D. Fig. 6.—Uncinus of Thelepus antarcticus, x 3D. Riga) XenAVAle Fig. 1—Anterior end of Vanadis antarctica (¢) from below; / = lens; 2,3 = tentacular cirri; 7. s. = receptacula seminis. 3S: Fig. 2,—Coronary papillae on the extruded proboscis of same. Fig, 8.—Anterior end of Rhodine loveni from above. Fig. 4.—Nineteenth setigerous segment of same from above. Fig. 5.—Uncinus of same, x 3D. Fig. 6.—Uncinus of Hreutho antarctica, x 4D. 284 Southern Cross. XID Gary hae By Ay, SHPPGEY? Miva: PRIAPULOIDEA. PRIAPULUS CAUDATUS. Lam. (For early synonomy, see Baird, Proc. Zool. Soc. Lond. 1868, p. 104.) ? Priapulus tuberculato-spinosus. Baird, op. cit., p. 106. Priapulus tubereulato-spinosus. De Guerne.! Two specimens of this species were found washed upon the beach at Cape Adare. The larger one was injured anteriorly, the smaller measured 6°5 cm. in total length, to which the tail contri- buted 1:5 cm. It is thus recorded for the first time from the shores of the Antarctic land. I follow Fischer in regarding these Antarctic forms as belonging to the species P. caudatus, Lam. The species seems widely distributed in the southern hemisphere. Dr. Fischer’s specimen came from Navarin Island.2 M. de Guerne records the species from Orange Bay, from the Straits of Magellan, and from the Falkland Islands, where indeed a specimen had been obtained by the Antarctic Expedition under Sir James Ross,? and Dr. Michaelsen* has described and figured two examples from South Georgia. The distribution of this species is a striking case of what is termed the phenomenon of bipolarity. P. caudatus occurs along the coasts of Greenland, Norway, and Great Britain, and in both the North and Baltic Seas, but, except for two specimens referred to 1 ¢Mission Scientifique du Cap Horn,’ 1882-1883, p.G.9. Paris, 1891. 9 2 «Ergebnisse der Hamburger Magalhaensischen Sammelreise.’ Gephyreen, p. 6. (1896.) 3 Baird, P. Zool. Soc., London, 1868, p. 106. 4 Jahrb. Hamburg. Anst., VI. Jahr., 1888, p. 80. Gephyrea. 285 in full in Dr. Michaelsen’s article recorded from the Mediterranean and Indian Oceans, the species has not been met with again until we reach a latitude of about 50°S. The genus too seems also bipolar in its distribution. J. bicawdatus lives in the North Sea and Arctic Ocean, and is represented in habits and its two tails by M. de Guerne’s Priapuloides australis from the neighbourhood of the Magellan Straits. P. glandifer, Ehlers, and P. brevicaudatus, Ehlers, are, in the opinion of Koren and Danielsen’ and of Dr. Michaelsen, not specifically distinct from P. caudatus, and in fact Professor Ehlers’ himself regarded these species as requiring confirmation.* Mr. Shipley was also good enough to determine three specimens of Phascolosoma capsiforme (Baird, Proc. Zool. Soc. Lond. 1868, p. 83) from Cape Adare, 20-24 fathoms.—F. J. B. XIV. NEMATODA. Dr. von Linstow has been so good as to examine the few round worms in the collection. They all belong to JLeptosomatum antarcticum (see v. Linstow, JB. Hamburg. wiss. Anstalt IX. (1892); 2; p. 59. NOV OSE ODA; Dr. von Linstow is also my authority for recording Bothriocephalus tectus (t.c., p. 73) from Ross’s Seal. 1 «Fauna littoralis Norwegiae.’ III. Heft. Bergen, 1877. 2 Feitschr. wiss. Zool., XI., 1862, p. 205. ’ Tt is not Mr. Shipley’s fault that this report did not appear before Feb. 15th, 1902, when were published Mr. Storikow’s remarks on the geographical distribution of some Priapulids (Zool. Anzeig., xxv. p. 155).—F. J. B 286 Southern Cross. X Vidi PE Oo 7 Oe: By R. KIRKPATRICK. THE Polyzoa obtained from the Antarctic region comprise eight species and one variety, one species being new. The seven known. species have all been found before in the Southern hemisphere, either off Australia, Kerguelen Island, or Cape Horn. The specimens encrust seaweed and tubes of Spirorbis antarctica. The list of species is as follows :— 1. Porella hyadesi, Jullien. 2. Inversiula nutrix, Jullien. 3. Schizoporella hyalina (Linn.), normal form. A. - 35 3 var. discreta, Busk. a eatont, Busk. . Smittia landsborovii, Johnston. . Idmonea organizans, VOrbigny. . Lichenopora canaliculata, Busk. . Alcyonidium flabelliforme, sp. n. DW 1S? Ore Co PORELLA HYADESI. 1888. Porella hyadesi, Jullien, ‘ Mission Scientifique Cap Horn.’ Zoologie. Tom. VI., ‘Bryozoaires,’ p. 56, Pl. III., fig. 5. The two specimens in the present collection differ from the description and figure by Jullien in having a wall-like prolongation on each side of the orifice; but this feature is much more pronounced in one specimen than in the other; in ocecial cells the lateral walls fuse with the mucronate avicularian cell and with the ocecia to form a square secondary orifice. There is a specimen from Port Phillip in the Busk Collection labelled (wrongly, I think) Porella rostrata (Hincks), which differs from Jullien’s type only in having minute rounded mammillae on the surface. Locality.—Cape Adare, 8 fathoms, encrusting seaweed. Distribution.—Port Philip, Victoria; Tierra del Fuego; Cape Adare. Polyzoa. 287 INVERSIULA NUTRIX. 1888. Inversiula nutrix, Jullien, ‘Mission Scientifique Cap Horn.’ Zoologie. Tom. VI., ‘Bryozoaires,’ p. 44, Pl. IV., fig. 8. The single example of this species encrusts the coils of a specimen of Spirorbis antarctica. The median pore differs slightly from that of the specimens from Cape Horn figured by Jullien (Bryozoa, Cape Horn, p. 44, Pl. IV., fig. 8) in being orbicular rather than semi-lunar, and in having three or four denticles instead of only two. The operculum (0°192 mm. in long. diameter) has a thickened rim and a shagreened surface. The bosses are probably degenerate avicularia; incineration reveals oval depressions for mandibles. No ocecia are present. Locality.—Cape Adare, 10 fathoms. Distribution—Cape Horn ; Cape Adare. SCHIZOPORELLA HYALINA. 1766. Cellepora hyalina, Linnaeus, Syst. Nat., Hd. XIL, p. 1286. 1880. Schizoporella hyalina, Hincks, Brit. Mar. Pol., p. 271. Several patches occur, encrusting seaweed. Locality— Cape Adare, 8 fathoms. Distribution.—Cosmopolitan. SCHIZOPORELLA HYALINA, var. discrcta. 1854. Lepralia discreta, Busk, Brit. Mus. Cat., p. 85, Pl. CI., figs. 3, 4. 1879. Lepralia hyalina, var. disereta, Busk. Phil. Trans., Vol. CLX VIII. pa loi 1889. Schizoporella hyalina, var. discreta, Jelly, ‘Syn. Cat Bryozoa,’ p. 228. Patches encrust seaweed. Locality — Cape Adare, 8 fathoms. Distribution.—Falkland Islands; Fuegia; New Zealand (Brit. Mus. Coll.); Swain’s Bay, Kerguelen ; Cape Adare; California. SCHIZOPORELLA EATONI. 1879. Lepralia eatoni, Busk. Phil. Trans., Vol. CLXVIIL, p. 196, Pl. X., figs. 7, 8. 1889. Schizoporella eatoni, Jelly, Syn. Cat. Mar. Bryozoa, p. 226. 288 Southern CYOoss. A prominent umbo is present on the front surface of each zocecium, and at a little distance from the umbo is a double row of pores separated by a sharp line. A well-marked shield-like area is marked off on the front of each cell. The pores are semi-circular and sharp-edged in the younger, but square and with crenulated edges in older cells; the pores are not continued round the orifice, but stop short at the ends of the proximal edge; a row of pores is present, however, round the base of the ocecium. The stout oral spines, usually four in number, are articulated at the base. The double row of pores is present in the type specimen from Kerguelen, but they are not nearly so apparent or well defined. Locality.—Cape Adare, 8 fathoms, on seaweed. Distribution.—Kerguelen Island ; Cape Adare. SMITTIA LANDSBOROVI. 1849. Lepralia landsborovii, Johnston, Brit. Zooph., Ed. II., p. 510. 1880. Smittia landsborovii, Hincks, Brit. Mar. Pol., p. 341. A small avicularium with spathulate mandible is sunk deep in the peristome, the secondary orifice of which is clithridiate and flush with the front surface of the zocecium. An umbo is present on each cell just below the orifice, and also on the ocecia. Locality.—Cape Adare, 18 fathoms, encrusting Spirorbis antarctica. Distribution.—Arctic Regions, Kara Sea, Jan Mayen, East Greenland ; Norway ; Great Britain; Florida; Australia; Falkland Islands ; Cape Adare. IDMONEA ORGANIZANS. 1839. Tubulipora organizans, d’Orbigny, Voy. Amér. Merid., Vol. V., Part 1V., p. 19, Pl. 1X., figs. 1-3. 1879. Tubulipora organizans, Busk. Phil. Trans., Vol. CLXVIII., p. 198, Pl. X., figs. 20-25. This species is represented by a minute fragment of a colony encrusting seaweed. The zocecia are arranged here, as in the Kerguelen specimen, in regular alternating series, with about four to eight zocecia in each row. Locality. —Cape Adare, 8 fathoms, on seaweed. Distribution.—Kerguelen Island ; Falkland Islands ; Cape Adare. Polyzoa. 289 LICHENOPORA CANALICULATA. 1879. Discoporella canaliculata, Busk. Phil. Trans., Vol. CLAVIII., p. 199, Pl. X., figs. 12-14. 1889. Lichenopora canaliculata, Jelly, Syn. Cat. Mar. Bryozoa, p. 154. The specimen forms a circular disc, 3°25 mm.in diameter. In the centre is a space clear of zocecia and with the cancelli closed, but with a thin walled expanded funicular spout—the orifice of the ocecium. . The orifice in complete cells is bi-denticulate, and the fillet, which is a well-marked feature on the type specimen from Kerguelen, is here often reduced to a mere ridge. Locality.—Cape Adare, 8 fathoms, encrusting seaweed. Iistribution.—Kerguelen Island; Cape Adare. ALCYONIDIUM FLABELLIFORME. Zoarium forming a flabelliform bilaminate expansion, spreading out from a short sub-cylindrical stem. Colour olive-brown. Texture soft and fleshy ; surface smooth. Zocecia polygonal, about 0°75 x 0:55 mm., in circular groups, each group being composed of six or seven zocecia arranged concentrically round a small central zocecium 0-2 mm. in diameter. Locality—Cape Adare; washed up on the beach. The new species is nearly related to A. flustroides (Busk), obtained by the ‘ Challenger’ from Station 142, south of Cape of Good Hope, 150 fathoms. In both species the zoarium is bilaminate, but the form of the colony in each case is very different; again, in Busk’s species the zocecia are much more elongated and are arranged in irregular longitudinal lines. The solitary specimen is 14 cm. in height, 12 cm. in breadth, and 1 to 1°5 mm. in thickness. The stalk is 1 cm. in height and 0-9 em in diameter. The surface, which is probably quite smooth in the living animal, is much wrinkled by the action of alcohol. The margin is rounded, but deeply incised in three places, thus giving rise to two smaller laminae growing in nearly the same plane as, and partly apposed to, the main lamina. On holding the specimen up to the light the zocecia and “brown bodies” are clearly visible. The orifices of the zocecia are flush with the general surface, and barely distinguishable. The tentacles appear to be about fourteen in number. U 290 Southern Cross. XV 1 ASN Ta O 7a ALCYONARIA. CLAVULARIA. PAR i Dr LOUIS: ROULE: CLAVULARIA FRANKLINIANA. (Plate XLVIL., Figs. 1-3c.) Habitat—Tle Franklin, par 10 brasses. Diagnose.—Colonies a stolons membraniformes, irréguliers, courts. Zooides assez rapprochés par leurs bases, volumineux, mesurant a Vétat de contraction jusqu’a 25 millimetres de longueur sur 4 a 5 millimetres de diametre. Paroi de la colonne mince, assez trans- parente sur les zooides contractés pour laisser discerner les cloisons internes; les espaces intermédiaires se montrent comme huit bandes paralléles, plus foncées. Tentacules courts, mesurant 4 a 5 milli- metres de longueur; 9 a 10 branches latérales, assez courtes, de chaque cdté. Spicules tentaculaires mesurant de 70 a 200 w de longueur, couverts d’épines minimes. Spicules de la région colum- naire sous-tentaculaire nombreux, serrés, mesurant de 300 a 400 uw de longueur, couverts d’épines assez fortes. Spicules de la région columnaire basilaire et des stolons mesurant de 250 a 300 mw de longueur, couverts de fortes épines parfois bilobées et trilobées. Les espéces connues du genre Clavularia sont nombreuses. Walther May les énumere dans son travail récent (‘ Beitrage zur Systematik und Chorologie der Aleyonaceen’ : Jenaische Zeitschrift fiir Naturwissenschaft, 1900). Hickson a déecrit voici peu plusieurs A nthozoa. 291 types de Vhémisphere austral (“A Revision of the genera of the Aleyonaria Stolonifera’: Transactions of the Zoological Society of London, 1895). Maleré cela, je n’ai pu rapporter a aucune d’elles, avec précision, les échantillons que j’ai étudiés. Force m’est de créer avec ces derniers une espéce nouvelle, au risque de faire double emploi avec des formes déja observées par les auteurs, mais décrites insuffisamment. En pareil cas, les figures explicites importent surtout. Afin d’éviter de mettre, 4 mon tour, quelque obscurité dans ma descrip- tion, afin de permettre aussi une identification possible, j’ai pris le parti de dessiner avec soin les caracteres saillants exprimés par la diagnose, et je vais 2 nouveau insister sur eux. Les colonies, du moins celles que j’ai eues a ma disposition, se composent dun petit nombre de zooides, une dizaine en moyenne, rapprochés par leurs bases, et rayonnant en dehors d’elles comme les fleurs d’un capitule. Ces groupes s’attachent a de menus objets, brins dalgues ou autres, Les individus d’une méme colonie n’ont point une taille identique; les uns mesurent parfois le double des autres, et je n’ai observé en cela aucune disposition réguliere. Les plus grands comptent 25 millimetres de longueur sur 5 millimetres de diamétre. Les échantillons, conservés dans l’alcool, étaient tres contractés. Les dimensions des individus vivants sont donc plus considérables de beaucoup. Ces Clavulaires se signalent ainsi par la grande taille de leurs zooides, et par leur faible quantité dans chaque colonie. La paroi de la colonne est fort mince. Les zooides vivants doivent étre d’une grande transparence. Méme contractés par laction de l’alcool servant a les conserver, et rendus opaques, les espaces interseptaires tranchent en sombre. Ils dessinent huit bandes longitudinales, paralléles, qui parcourent la colonne entiére de la base au sommet. Les tentacules sont assez courts ; souvent leur état de contraction est tel quwils se laissent a peine discerner. Les plus grands mesurent 4 a 5 millimetres de longueur. Leur forme est celle d’un cone aplati, 4 large base. Chacune des deux rangées de leurs branches latérales comprend huit a dix éléments. Les branches sont courtes, et sensiblement cylindriques. Les plus élevées, voisines du sommet du tentacule, sont moins longues que les autres, et aussi larges. Un espace encore considérable sépare ces branches terminales, au nombre de deux ou de trois, de celles qui sont situées plus bas. Ces derniéres se placent souvent, dans les deux rangées, a des niveaux différents, et ne se font pas rigoureusement face. u 2 292 Southern Cross. Les spicules des tentacules, assez nombreux, surtout dans la région basilaire de ces organes, sont tres variables. [1s ne se ressem- blent que par leurs épines, abondantes et petites. Is different par leurs formes et leurs dimensions. Les uns sont gros et courts, a peine deux fois plus longs que larges. D’autres sont courts et fort ininces. Les plus nombreux ont l’aspect de baguettes échinulées, dont la longueur égalerait six a dix fois la largeur. Les dimensions en longueur oscillent entre 70 et 200 p. Les spicules de la moitié supérieure de la colonne, abondants et serrés, ont une allure plus uniforme. Ils ressemblent a des baguettes eylindriques, faiblement amincies a leurs deux extrémités, dont la longueur égale,en moyenne, douze a quinze fois la largeur. Certains, plus rares que les précédents, sont plus gros, plus courts, et possedent une extrémité élargie; dans ces spicules en massue, la longueur (300 a 400 w) vaut, en moyenne, sept a huit fois la largeur. Les épines sont assez fortes; elles ont V’aspect de mamelons saillants, largement coniques, tournés en divers sens. Les spicules de la moitié inférieure de la colonne et ceux des stolons ont des dispositions moins variées. Leur forme est celle de batonnets noueux, tellement leurs épines sont grandes et fortes ; plusieurs de ces dernieres sont bilobées. A cet égard, une pro- eression réguliere se manifeste des parties supérieures aux zones basilaires de individu: les spicules tentaculaires ont les épines les plus petites, presque comparables a des granules superficiels ; les spicules du sommet de la colonne portent des épines plus longues ; enfin les spicules inférieurs ont les épines les plus grosses. Chez ces derniers, la longueur mesure huit a dix fois la largeur; elle compte en moyenne 250 a 300 ym. La Clavularia Frankliniana se rapproche surtout de trois especes connues et décrites : 1° Cl. inflata, Schenk (Abh. Senck. Ges., XXIII. (1896), p. 48), et sa variété Cl. luzontana, W. May (Jenaische Zeit- schrift fir Naturwissenchaft, 1900), de Ternate et de Luzon; 2° C7. rosea, Stider, de Kerguelen (Monatsbericht der koniglich preussischen Akademie der Wissenschaften, 1878, p. 633); 3° Cl. elongata, Stider et Wright, des Agores, par 1000 brasses (‘Report of “ Challenger,” ’ vol. 31, 1889, p. 257). La Cl. Frankliniana differe de la premiere par ses spicules de forme un peu différente et de taille plus restreinte ; de la deuxieme par ses zooides plus grands et groupés d’une autre maniere ; de la troisieme par l’allure dissemblable de ses spicules. A nthozoa. 293 EXPLICATION DES DESSINS. Fig. 1.—Une colonie de Clavularia Frankliniana. Grossissement, 2/1. Fig. 2.—Un tentacule. Gross., 6/1. Fig. 3a.—Spicule des tentacules. Gross., 3800/1. Fig. 3b.—Spicule du sommet de la colonne. Gross., 800/1. Fig. 8c.—Spicule de la base de la colonne. Gross., 00/1. ALCYONIUM PAEHSSLERT. By SYDNEY J. HICKSON, F.R.S., Owens College, Manchester. Three specimens and a fragment of an A/eyoniuwm were sent to me. The largest is 40 mm. in height and about 55 mm. in greatest breadth. The spicules of the anthocodiz are long narrow spindles 0:3-0°4 mm. in length; the spicules of the ccenenchym are clubs 0°15 mm. in length and short spindles 0*2 mm. in length. The colour of the spicules is pale yellow and of the colony orange. The specimens should be included in W. May’s species Aleyoniwim paessleri, from Smyth Sound (see Hamburger Magalhaensischen Sammelreise, Alcyonarien, 1899, p. 6), but differ from the types in their orange colour. They were taken in 24 fathoms off Franklin Island. 204 Southern Cross. XV Te 2 CaN eagle WITH AN ACCOUNT OF THEIR PECULIAR BROOD CHAMBERS. By JOSEPH A. CLUBB, M.Sc., (Plates XLVIII.-LII.) A SMALL collection of Actinians was made by the ‘Southern Cross’ Expedition of 1899-1900. All the specimens were collected off Cape Adare, South Victoria Land, the winter quarters of the expedition, and were dredged at a depth of from 20 to 30 fathoms, in water having a temperature ranging from 28°8° Fahr. in November, 1899, to 292° Fahr. in January, 1900. The preservatives used were formaline and spirit, and the specimens in the former fluid were in better preservation than in the latter, where, owing to inefficient corks to the bottles, the volatile spirit had evaporated, leaving a fluid which could not be called preservative. Although there are upwards of sixty specimens, it is somewhat remarkable that there appear to be but two closely allied species, and, as the females of both possess special brood chambers, they are of great biological interest. I wish here to record my thanks to Professor Jeffrey Bell for placing the collection in my hands, and thus affording me the opportunity of investigating them, for the large number of specimens has enabled me to work out in some detail the appearance and structure of these remarkable chambers, which are apparently peculiar to Arctic and Antarctic species. As the brood chambers are almost identical in both species, | have appended this part of the work after the description of the species. The two species belong to the family Bunodactide,* and, while possessing the typical hexamerous arrangement of mesenteries and 1 T have adopted the suggestion of Prof. Verrill (7, II., p. 42) that, as the name Bunodes is preoccupied for a genus of Eurypteroids, the actinian genus Bunodes should be changed to Bunodactis, and in accordance with the usual custom the family name Bunodidx becomes bunodactide. A ctiniae. 295 tentacles, the character of the sphincter muscle in both species is more in accordance with that of Urticina crassicornis, the paradigm * of the genus Urticina, than with that of Bunodactis verrucosa, the paradigm of the genus Bunodactis. I consider the character of the sphincter of more importance than the pentamerous or decamerous ” arrangement of the tentacles and mesenteries, and am of opinion that this latter character should not be retained as diagnostic of the genus Urticina, as suggested by Mr. Haddon (3 p. 445), and I have therefore placed the two new Antarctic species under the genus Urticina. FamMILty BUNODACTIDA. Urticina suleata. External characters.—The specimens are all greatly contracted, and in most cases the oral disc and tentacles are entirely hidden. The colour of the preserved specimens is a dirty brown with a distinctly green cast. There is no record on the collectors’ labels as to colour of this species when living. The column is soft to the touch and is covered with verruce, which in the contracted state of the specimens are closely packed together. They are largest in the equatorial zone and slightly diminish in size above and _ below. There are forty-eight vertical rows, corresponding in position with the inter- and intra-mesenteric spaces. In female specimens a distinct modification of the upper portion of the column is noticeable. The body-wall in its upper third is less firm to the touch, thinner, and the verruce are almost obliterated by longitudinal furrows which run from a well-marked constriction * (fig. 1) to the parapet, where they are deepened and intensified in the more contracted specimens. Male specimens also show this modification of the body-wall, but in a much less marked degree. On some of the specimens gravel and sand particles are still adherent to the verruce. In the healthy living condition, doubtless, a continuous layer of foreign particles is formed around the column. The foot disc is distinct and muscular. The largest specimens measure 5 cm. in height, 5 em. in diameter at widest part, and 3 cm. diameter of foot disc. 1 [The author prefers this word to the more generally used “type.”—F. J. B.] 2 Prof. Verrill states (7, 1V., p. 216) that he has found many specimens of Urticina crassicornis hexamerous, both as to tentacles and mesenteries, and other workers have shown that whenever it was possible to examine a large number of specimens of the same species a great amount of variation existed in this respect. $ This constriction marks the zone of invagination of the body-wall to form the ‘brood chambers ” (see p. 301). 296 Southern Cross. Tentacles.—These are forty-eight in number, in four cycles, 6+6+12+4 24. Fig. 8 diagrammatically represents the arrange- ment of the cycles of tentacles in relation to the inter- and intra- mesenteric spaces. It will be seen the older and inner three cycles (6 + 6 + 12) open from the intra-mesenteric spaces, while the outer marginal and youngest cycle opens from the inter-mesenteric spaces. In most cases there is a distinct longitudinal grooving, and transverse sections of the tentacles show in well-marked instances that the meso- glceea participates in the formation of the grooves (fig. 3), although this is not always the case. The muscles of the tentacles are ecto- dermal and are well developed. (Esophagus.—This extends fully three-fourths the length of the retracted column. Two well-marked siphonoglyphs are present at opposite angles. Celenteron and Mesenteries—There are twenty-four pairs of mesenteries in three cycles, 6 + 6 + 12, all complete. There is no trace even in the largest specimens of a fourth cycle. The presence of a cycle of tentacles communicating with the inter-mesenteric spaces suggests the final and adult condition of mesenteries and tentacles. Two pairs of directive mesenteries are present in the usual relation with the siphonoglyphs. All the mesenteries except the directives are fertile. One variation from the typical arrangement of tentacles and mesenteries was dissected. The specimen, which possesses brood chambers containing embryos, had but eighteen pairs of mesenteries and thirty-six tentacles, and the two pairs of directives were asymmetrically placed, being separated from one another on the one side by ten pairs and on the other by six pairs of mesenteries. The longitudinal muscles of the mesenteries are very well deve- loped, and form large swellings which stand out prominently from the surface and are quite distinctly seen with the naked eye even in young specimens. (The longitudinal muscles on the mesenteries of embryos taken from the brood chambers are surprisingly well deve- loped) (see fig. 20). Transverse sections of the muscle of the adult specimen show (fig. 5) a compact mass of mesoglceal supporting lamella, many greatly branched and all invested with muscle fibres. The parieto-basilar muscle (fig. 5, p.b.m.) is seen arising from the mesentery some distance from the body wall, as the section is taken rather low down near the foot disc. The arrangement of the muscles on the mesenteries is quite regular—the longitudinal muscles on the sides facing the intra-mesenteric spaces, and the A ctiniae. 207 parieto-basilar muscle on the sides facing the inter-mesenteric spaces, in all except the directives, where the arrangement is reversed. Sphincter Muscle.—There is a strongly circumscribed endodermal sphincter, which projects into the ccelenteron and is constricted off from the body-wall to such an extent that in transverse section the connection appears but a mere stalk (fig. 2). As here shown it is oval in section, but doubtless it may vary in shape with the degree of contraction. There is a single median supporting trunk of mesogloeal connective tissue springing from the mesoglcea of the body-wall, from which radiating lamelle arise covered with an investing layer of muscle fibrillee (fig. 2, m.). Body-wall—sSections of the body-wall show the mesoglcea com- paratively thin, especially in the upper portion. There are, however, strong circular endodermal muscles present, supported by mesogloeal lamelle (fig. 4) which are often branched. These strong circular muscles of the body-wall form one of the principal characters dis- tinguishing this species from the following one, where the corre- sponding endodermal muscles are much feebler, supported by short, simple, mesogloeal lamelle, and where, however, the mesogloea itself is thicker and firmer, thus compensating for the weaker muscles (fig. 9). Lrood Chambers..—Each adult female possesses peculiar brood chambers completely separated from the ccelenteron and formed by invaginations of the body-wall from a zone completely surrounding the body, about one-third of the distance below the parapet (fig. 1). Usually four embryos are present, and in later stages of development they form conspicuous prominences symmetrically placed around the column. In some instances the contained embryos are so large that in contraction the whole of the oral dise and tentacles of the mother, as well as the upper third of the column itself, are with- drawn so as to lie below the level of the ridge formed by the contained embryos. Halbitat.—Dredged from a gravelly bottom in 20-24 fathoms of water, off Cape Adare, South Victoria Land. Urticina carlgreni. As one of the distinctive characters of this as well as the preceding species is the presence of “brood chambers,’ I have ventured to name this species after the Swedish naturalist, Oskar Carlgren of Stockholm, whose valuable work on the Actinozoa has ! For more detailed account, see p. 299. 298 Southern Cross. added so much to our knowledge of the group; it was he who in 1893 (1 p. 231) first called attention to the presence, in some Arctic actinians then under observation, of special “ Brutriumen ” quite distinct and separated from the ecelenteron. External characters.—Like the preceding species all the specimens are greatly contracted. The colour, when living, as noted on collectors’ labels, was light red (large specimens) and white (small specimens), but all trace had disappeared in the preserved specimens. Verruce present, arranged in forty-eight vertical rows, but smaller and less distinct than in U. sulcata. There is also less modification of the upper portion of the column, but there is a tendency to form similar longitudinal furrows, although the body-wall retains its firmness and is no thinner than the lower portion. Some of the specimens still retained foreign particles adhering to the verrucae (fig. 6). This species is somewhat taller and more slender than U. suleata. The largest individual measured 6 cm. in height and but 3°4 cm. in breadth at its widest part (fig. 6). Tentacles.—Similar in arrangement and number to U. sulcata (6 +6 + 12 + 24) (fig. 8). There is a slight tendency observable, in some individuals only, to a longitudinal grooving, but in no case have I observed that the mesoglcea participates. sophayus.—The cesophageal wall is much corrugated, and the cesophagus extends into the ccelenteron for a considerable distance. Two well-marked siphonoglyphs are present. Colenteron and Mesenteries—There are twenty-four pairs of complete mesenteries, including two pairs of directives in relation with the siphonoglyphs. All the mesenteries except the directives are fertile. The longitudinal muscles are well developed and are seen as distinct swellings on the faces of the mesenteries. Fig. 10 gives details of structure in transverse section, also showing structure of ovary (ov.) and mesenterial filament (m.f.). The parieto-basilar muscle (p.b.m.) is large and distinct. Sphincter.—The sphincter muscle is strongly circumscribed, endodermal, and projects as a strong band into the ccelenteron. In transverse section (fig. 7) the main supporting mesoglceal trunk is seen to break up into two secondary branches, a small one near the base and a large one running the length of the muscle. From each of these main trunks mesoglceal outgrowths radiate, supporting the muscle fibres. Body-wall.—The body-wall is thick and firm to the touch. The mesoglcea forms a stout supporting lamella (fig. 9), but the circular A ctiniae. 299 endodermal muscles are feeble, supported by short simple outgrowths of the mesoglcea, and contrast greatly with those of U. suwleata. Brood Chambers.—The adult females possess brood chambers similar in position and appearance to those of U. suleata, except that the contained embryos do not form such distinct prominences on the body-wall, nor are there any instances where the oral disc, tentacles and upper third of the column have sunk by contraction below the level of the top of the brood chambers. One individual has been preserved in a very interesting stage, showing one of the embryos partly out of the brood chamber, and two others visible from the outside, the opening to the chamber extending round almost half of the circumference of the column (figs. 18 and 19). Each individual in this species usually contained six embryos. fabitat.—Dredged from a gravelly bottom in 20—28 fathoms of water, off Cape Adare, South Victoria Land. Several of the specimens dissected had a single specimen of a species of Amphipoda among the retracted tentacles, apparently commensal. My friend Mr. Alfred O. Walker, to whom I submitted it, informs me it is a new species of Jassa—J, goniamerus. THE APPEARANCE AND STRUCTURE OF THE BrooD CHAMBERS DISTINCT FROM THE C@LENTERON. In the year 1869 Professor Verrill (6 p. 490-492) described in two species of Actinia (Phellia arctica, Verrill, and Epiactis prolifera, Verrill) from the Arctic seas, a series of well-defined pits scattered over the surface of the body-wall, in which the eggs are retained until hatched, when the young embryos are provided with tentacles. Later, in 1899, he described some additional species (7, V. p. 375) belonging to the Bunodactidw, also possessing these peculiar pits, and gives figures. Each pit is formed by a hollow in the mesogloea into which the ectoderm is invaginated. In 1893 Dr. Carlgren published a preliminary announcement, “Uber das Vorkommen von Brutriumen bei Aktinien” (1 p. 231). Here he described two types of brood chamber: (1) when the ecelenteron itself acts as such—a condition of things which obtains in some British species; and (2) the formation of pit-like depressions generally scattered on the lower part of the column. These latter apparently are similar structures to those described by Verrill in 1869 and 1899. But Carlgren goes on to describe how 300 Southern Cross. these pit-like depressions, each containing an embryo and involving at first only an invagination of the ectoderm into a hollow in the mesoglcea, may be gradually enlarged, by the growth of the embryo earrying the body-wall inwards, invaginating all three layers—the ectoderm, mesoglcea and endoderm, and forming cavities lying completely within the column. He gives a figure (1 p. 237) showing a section through such a chamber containing an embryo, measuring from 1 to 1°5 mm. in diameter, and illustrates the condition of the invaginated ectoderm, mesoglcea and endoderm forming the wall of the cavity. The figure also shows the opening to the exterior, and that the chamber is completely separated from the ecelenteron. In the general relation of the wall-layers this chamber ereatly resembles the brood chambers, about to be described, of the two species from the Antarctic, but is of very much smaller dimensions. Professor Verrill’s specimens do not appear to exhibit this further development of the ectodermal pits into sac-like invaginations of the whole body-wall, involving all three layers, such as Carlgren describes, although the external appearance of the specimens figured by each author are very similar and certainly suggest the same structures. Dr. Kwietniewski in 1898 (5 p. 121) mentions that a new species of Leitealia from Spitzbergen, which he describes, possesses a similar “ Brutraum” in the body-wall, containing a developing embryo, but differing from the species described by Carlgren in 1893, in having it placed immediately below the parapet in the upper part of the column instead of on the lower portion. In 1899 Dr. Carlgren (2 p. 14) gave some further particulars, but no figures, of “Brutraumen” found in Condylactis georgiana from the collection of the German South Polar Expedition of 1882-83, which he says are of similar character to those he described in a Zealia in 1893 (1 p. 234). They extend generally over the whole body-wall, are numerous, and contain from one to three embryos. Such then is a brief account of the literature’ on brood chambers distinct from the ecelenteron, in Actinians. 1 Dr. Carlgren, in a quite recent paper, published in August, 1901 (2a p. 468), gives additional particulars and figures of the specimens mentioned in his “ Vor- liufige Mitteilung” (1 p. 281), published in 1893. He here describes these specimens under the names of Actinostola sibirica and Epiactis marsupialis, both new species. In addition he describes a new genus of Paractid under the name of Marsupifer Valdivizx, which possesses six brood pouches arranged radially, and opening by separate apertures on the body-wall about two-thirds the height of the column from the foot-dise. Each brood chamber contains a large number of embryos, the smallest about thirty and the largest about one hundred. An important character of this new genus Marsupifer is the presence of two sphincter muscles, one placed about the normal position, and the other just above the openings of the brood pouches. A ctiniae. 3201 In both the species from the Antarctic that I have described the brood chambers are practically identical, differing only in minor details, so that the description here given must be understood to apply to both species, unless otherwise noted. Specimens possessing brood chambers in these two species may be at once recognised, in whatever stage of development they may be in, by the presence of a constriction or groove more or less marked, in the body-wall, running completely around the animal at a distance from the parapet of about one-third in the total height of the column. In addition the body-wall above the constriction is more or less wrinkled, and the verruce become confused with vermiculate furrows, especially in Urticina sulcata, where also the body-wall is thinner than in the lower part of the body. In this last-named species, specimens having well-developed embryos in the brood chambers have this upper thin-walled portion of the column, as well as the oral disc and tentacles, withdrawn in the contracted condition to the level of the top of the brood chambers. The thinning of the body-wall above the invagination constriction is not so noticeable in U. carlgreni. The earliest phase in the development of the brood chambers that I find among these Antarctic specimens shows a series of invagina- tions of the body-wall along the line of this constricted zone. The invaginations are already considerably advanced and form distinct sacs from 2 to 3 mm. deep, projecting on the inside of the body- wall into the ccelenteron (fig. 11). They appear to have arisen by invaginations of the body-wall corresponding to the mesenteric spaces, for, when looked at from below, the lower ends of the inva- ginations are seen projecting between the mesenteries. Horizontal sections, however, show that the partition walls between adjacent invaginations have broken down and the cavities are more or less continuous, but extend deeper in the mesenteric spaces. This last feature—the sending of prolongations down between the mesen- terles—is characteristic of all stages in the development of the chambers that I have examined, and suggests their method of gradual enlargement. As seen from the figure, which is taken from a specimen of U. carlyreni (fig. 11), the chambers are absolutely empty and open freely directly to the outside. The walls consist of invaginated ectoderm, mesoglcea, and endoderm, which three layers are fairly thick, except at the innermost parts, where both mesoglea and endoderm are thinned out somewhat, especially the former. The junction of adjacent cavities appears to go on until there 302 Southern Cross. remains but from four to six larger cavities. Horizontal sections, through specimens which exemplify the next stage of development of the brood chambers, taken through the animal just below the zone of invagination, show at that level several cavities (usually four in U. suleata, six in U. carlgreni), filled with compact solid masses, and occupying the same relative position as the cavities in the earlier stage. Vertical sections passing through the invagination zone show these cavities at this stage to be more or less closed to the exterior. Figs. 12 and 13 are illustrations of such sections, the former of U. carlgreni, the latter of U. suleata. In the former there are curious interlacing outgrowths of the mesoglcea carrying the inva- ginated ectoderm with them, and in this way a complete closing of the brood chamber to the outside world is effected. In the latter case, which is taken from the specimen figured (fig. 1), although the mouth is closed by the juxtaposition of the invaginated ectoderm, there is only very slight indication, at the lower end of what was the opening to the chamber, of the interlacing outgrowths of mesogloea shown as being present in the U. carlgreni example. It is probable that this latter condition is a slightly earlier stage in development. Of the two examples figured the brood chamber in U. carlgreni is 11 mm. deep, while that of U. sulcata is about 6 mm., measured from the invagination constriction. The walls are fairly stout, the layers being of average strength except at the innermost parts where the mesogloea and endoderm appear somewhat thinned out. The invaginated ectoderm is formed of tall columnar cells for the ereater part, but they become somewhat lower towards the bottom of the chamber. A series of horizontal sections through the brood chambers illus- trates their relation at this stage to the adjacent organs of the body. Two of these sections are represented in figs. 14 and 15, which are taken through the chamber, the upper part of which is represented in vertical section in Fig. 12. Here it is seen that the chamber completely severs each mesentery into two parts, passing between them on the outer side of the longitudinal muscle. It is interesting to notice that although the invaginated endoderm investing the brood chamber has already become continuous with the corresponding layers of the divided mesenteries, the mesogloal layers have not yet so joined, and on the inner side of the brood chamber the mesogloea of each mesentery is turned back upon itself, away from the mesoglcea investing the brood chamber (fig. 14). Fig. 15 represents a section of the horizontal series near the bottom of the chamber, and shows the same mesenteries; but each is now entire A ctiniae. 303 from body-wall to cesophagus, with lobes of the chamber projecting between them. It will be noted from the two sections figured that this consecutive series of horizontal sections includes a_ pair of directive mesenteries. Each chamber is completely filled with a compact mass of rounded cells, exceedingly rich in food yolk and measuring from 0°35 to 0*4 mm. in diameter. Usually distinct cell membranes are present, but in one specimen examined the limiting membrane is very indistinct. I examined three specimens of about this stage and find each somewhat different in the character of these cells. The difference is mainly in the appearance of the cell mem- brane and the greater or lesser granular appearance of the cell contents. In one specimen the outer layer of cells abutting on the wall of the brood chamber are roughly cuboidal in shape and very much freer from food yolk than the more centrally placed cells, suggesting a more rapid assimilation of the food yolk into protoplasm in these ‘cells. I cannot but regard each of these cell masses, notwithstanding the relatively enormous size of the constituent cells, as a deve- loping embryo. It is known, although considerable uncertainty still prevails regarding the earlier developmental processes, that in many cases among the Anthozoa cleavage results in the formation of a solid morula, and Kowalevsky’s observation (4) on Actinia parasitica (Adamsia rondeletii) supports this. He says: “Cleavage is regular, but as the result of it there arises not a blastodermic vesicle, but only an ageregation of cells, which becomes covered with cilia and swims about as a larva.” The researches of E, B. Wilson on the development of Renilla (8) show that here also a solid morula is formed, consisting of irregularly rounded cells, heavily charged with food yolk, and in which at first no differentiation exists, but where later an outer layer gradually becomes marked off in character by appearing less granular, through the conversion of the contained food yolk into protoplasm, and so forms the ectoderm. Unfortunately, except the specimen showing a slight differentiation of the outer layer of cells, I have found no intermediate stages between the condition just described and the larva with all the primitive layers formed. A specimen of U. suleata possesses four embryos in the brood chambers, which may be described as bilaminar, pyriform, or more elongated vermiform planule, possessing an ectoderm and an endodermic epithelium, with a sustentative lamella (mesoglea) secreted between them, but with no trace of cilia so characteristic of free-swimming planule. The interior is filled with a dense mass 304 Southern Cross. of food yolk. The embryos are exceedingly irregular in form and lie abutting one with the other—the end of one fitting into a socket in the adjacent one, and they appear moulded to the contour of the chamber by pressure due to the contraction of the mother animal. The cavities containing the larvee appear to be continuous one with the other at this stage, and thus form a continuous chamber lying in the ccelenteron surrounding the cesophagus. The invagination opening is still effectually closed to the outside. One of the larve when sectionized showed in a longitudinal section the invagination to form the cesophageal opening (fig. 16), and transverse sections revealed the presence of mesenteries, in an early stage of develop- ment, arising from the body-wall and projecting into the solid food yolk mass (fig. 17). Near the oral end twelve mesenteries representing the first cycle are apparent, and as the sections approach the aboral end these gradually increase in size, and between each pair there appear slight indications, also in pairs, of the second cycle. These larve are from 1 cm. to 1°5 cm. in length and from 0*5 to 1 cm. in diameter. Much older embryos than these, measuring from 1 cm. to 1:5 cm. in diameter, were found in brood chambers of both U. suleata and U. carlgreni. Several of these specimens have the brood chambers opening freely to the outside through the original invagination opening, the contained embryos evidently approaching the stage when they are set free and begin an inde- pendent existence. One specimen of U. carlgreni had been killed with one of the embryos escaping from the brood chamber (figs. 18 and 19), others of the contained embryos being also visible. The opening extended almost half way round the body and showed every appearance of further extension. On sectionizing these older embryos they are found to possess three cycles of mesenteries. Fig. 20 represents a sixth part of a transverse section through an embryo of corresponding age of U. sulcata, including a pair of directive mesenteries. As there shown the first cycle of mesenteries is complete and the second cycle is well advanced. The longitudinal muscles are well developed and already give indication of the strength of the adult structures. The parieto-basilar muscle is also plainly visible. The third cycle has as yet no indication of muscle- structure. From a close examination of the consecutive series of sections I can make out the existence of twenty-four tentacles, of which six appear to be larger than the others and to be in communication with the intra-mesenteric spaces of the first cycle. In all the embryos the oral disc and tentacles are entirely retracted A ctiniae. 305 and hidden, as is the case with most of the adult specimens. This denotes the presence of an already functional sphincter, a figure (fig. 21) of which is shown taken from a longitudinal section as well as functional mesenterial muscles. There is little or no food yolk now left in the cclenteron, another fact which denotes the early approach of a separation from the parent. There are thus four distinct stages in the appearance of the brood chamber and its contents, represented by the specimens of these two Antarctic species. The earliest condition shows the developing invagination of the body-wall of the parent, forming cavities from 2 to 3 mm. in depth, but absolutely void of contents, and freely open to the outside through the invagination openings. Then comes the second stage, with the chamber considerably increased in size (6-11 mm. in depth), completely closed to the outside and now containing developing embryos in the solid morula stage. Then follows the condition shown by the specimen of U. swlcata (the only specimen found illustrating this stage), with the embryos greatly advanced in development, possessing a three-layered body-wall, developing mesenteries, invagination to form cesophagus, and filled with a dense mass of food yolk, but with the brood chamber still completely closed to the outside. The fourth and last condition shows the embryo just about to be set free, with three cycles of mesenteries (one cycle complete), well-developed muscles, twenty-four tentacles, all or almost all the food yolk absorbed, and the chamber generally freely open to the outside through the original invagination opening. From the fact that a specimen of U. carlgreni, containing embryos of this last stage in brood chambers open to the outside, possesses in addition, between the older brood chambers, a series of new invaginations corresponding to the first stage described, there is reason to believe that each brood chamber only serves for one embryo, and that on its escape the walls of the chamber atrophy and new chambers are formed for the next brood. Dr. Carlgren (1 p. 237) suggested that possibly the occurrence of these special brood chambers may be connected with an external fertilization of the ova, but, while not denying the possibility of such in these species, there is no evidence in the appearance of either his specimens or the ‘ Southern Cross’ specimens of any departure from the usual internal impregnation. In all probability, after fertilization in the body cavity, the eggs in early stages of cleavage are transferred directly, by the aid of the tentacles, to the brood chambers, the entrances to which are soon afterwards closed. From the fact that, so far as yet observed, the possession of these x 306 Southern Cross. special brood chambers in Actinians is limited to Arctic and Antarctic species, there certainly is reason to believe that some common conditions of environment have brought about their development. Among Echinoderms, species from Kerguelen Island and other points in the southern and northern oceans have been shown to possess similar chambers for the protection of the developing embryo. But in this group, not only are there in these species special nurseries formed, but the embryos themselves develop directly, without the intervention of a locomotive pseud- embryonic stage, and with no trace of pseudembryonic appendages or provisional organs, so characteristic of echinoderm development as we are acquainted with it in our own seas. In Sir Wyville Thomson’s words (9 p. 245), “It is a significant fact that while in warm and temperate seas ‘ plutei’ and ‘bipinnari’ are constantly taken in the surface net, in the southern seas they are almost entirely absent.” There is therefore some justification for Kwiet- niewski’s suggestion (5 p. 122) that the surface ice affects the plankton and is especially fatal to free-swimming larvee, and hence it becomes necessary that special protection should be provided, so that development may take place without free-swimming larval stages. But viviparous Actinians, in which the ccelenteron acts as a brood chamber, and where the young are only set free when they are in a position to at once attach themselves by the muscular foot disc, are fairly widely distributed. It is therefore difficult to advance a reason why these particular Arctic and Antarctic species have not followed the apparently more economical habits of their fellows, but have evolved along special lines, and formed brood chambers distinct and entirely separated from the ccelenteron. It may be that the young in these special chambers are retained for a much longer period than would be convenient in the ccelenteron, and this, no doubt, is of considerable importance to the species when possibly the struggle for existence is severe. In conclusion I wish to record my appreciation of the kindness of the Committee of the Liverpool Museums in granting me permission to use the Museums’ laboratory and apparatus in carrying out the work, and to express my thanks to Dr. Forbes, Director of Museums, for his cordial co-operation in procuring me access to the necessary literature—always a very great difficulty to workers in the provinces. A ctiniae. 307 PAPERS REFERRED TO. 1. Carnne@ReN, OskAR.—‘ Uber das Vorkommen von Brutriitumen bei Aktinien.’ (Vorliufige Mitteilung.) Ofversigt k. Vetenskaps Akad. Forh., 1898, Stockholm. 2. CARLGREN, Oskar.— Ergebnisse den Hamburger Magalhaensischen Sammel- reise; Zoantharien,’ 1599. 2a. CARLGREN, OskKAR.—‘ Die Brutpflege der Actiniarien.’? Biol. Centralbl., XXI. (190L), p. 468. 3. Happon, A.—‘ Actiniaria of Torres Straits’ Trans. Roy. Dublin Soc., VI., Series 2 (1897). 4. KowaLevsky, A.—‘ Investigations on the development of Invertebrates’ (Russian), Mem. Roy. Soc. Friends of Nat. Sci., Anthrop. and Ethnog., Moscow, 1873. See Jahresb. Anat. u. Phys., 1875. 5, Kwirtniewski, Casimir R.—‘ Actiniaria von Ost-Spitzbergen,’ Zoologische Jahrbiicher, 1898, p. 121. 6. Verrinu, A. E.—‘Notes on Radiata. Trans. Conn. Acad.,1., pp. 328 and 492, 1867-71. 7. VERRILL, A. He Descriptions of imperfectly known and new Actinians, with critical notes on other species.’ 11.—V., American Journal of Science, V1. (1899). &. Wirson, BE. B.—‘'The Development of Renilla’ Phil. Trans., London, CLXXLV. (1883). 9. WyvitLe THomson, Sir C.—‘ The Voyage of the “Challenger,” ’ 1877. EXPLANATION OF PLATES. With the exception of figs. 1, 6, 18 and 19, which are represented natural size, and the diagrammatic drawing (fig. 8), all the figures have been drawn from sections as seen under Swift’s 1-in. obj., No. 2 eye-piece, slightly enlarged. The sections were made by the Cambridge rocking microtome, from tissues stained in picrocarmine, embedded in the usual way, and mounted in Canada balsam. LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS. Bete =: = % «= = brood chamber: Cfo a ea se ) e ecelenteron. @d.. . =. » «. « « « directive mesenteries. Cc. uke OS ge se re CChOderm: Ce os) Gs ee CMbLYOS: Chae ee ees sa endoderm, im.ec.. . . + ~~ . imvaginated ectoderm. men. . . . . . . imvaginated endoderm. m.mg. . . =. . . .,invaginated mesogloa. UTA On nn ae) ULV ablon openings Eins) =) 2 4) a | .. longitudinal muscle: MCS Reve, | & = =, mesenteries. Mite fiat 9 eis) li =) ~ moesenterial filaments. Gets ge a Wes os) te PRESOB LOCA: Mts ens) «64 «+s > muscle lamellex, 308 Southern Cross. OG. s) « «© « a) sy) ge keesOphagie: oe.im.. . « «- . ~~ « Oesophageal invagination. OD... © ss 8 “ae cP covarye p.b.m . . . . . . parieto-basilar muscle. Sek da 1) ol Gee eastphones ygghe U. > 2) Se eee SA eeverrice: Ys lt Rie ee) ee ood eyollke. I, 1, 1L,1V. . . . . cycles of mesenteries or tentacles. Puate XLVIII. Urticina sulcata. Fig. 1.—Reproduction from photograph of young female specimen (natural size), showing invagination constriction and well-marked sulcation of body-wall above it. F ig. 2 2,—Transverse section of the sphincter muscle. Fig. 3.—Transverse section of one of the tentacles. Fig. 4.—Longitudinal section of a portion of the body-wall. Vig. 5. —Transverse section of mesentery near aboral end, showing the longi- tudinal and parieto-basilar muscles. Prats XLIX. Urticina carlgreni. Fig. 6.—Reproduction from photograph (natural size) showing foreign bodies still adherent to verruce. Fig. 7.—Transverse section of sphincter muscle. Fig, 8.—Diagrammatic figure illustrating the arrangements of the cycles of tentacles in relation with the intra- and inter- mesenteric spaces. Although the tentacles are somewhat larger according to age, the difference in the diameter as represented by the circles in the drawing is exaggerated. (‘The same arrangement as here depicted pertains in U. sulcata also. ) Fig. 9.—Longitudinal section of a portion of the body-wall. Fig. 10.—Transverse section of a fertile mesentery. Puate L. Brood Chambers and Embryos. Fig. 11.—Longitudinal or vertical section of body-wall of a specimen of U. carlgreni passing through a brood chamber in an early stage of invagination and quite empty. Fig. 12.—Longitudinal or vertical section through the ‘body- -wall of a specimen of U. carlgrent passing through the opening toa brood chamber of an older stage than Fig. 11, containing a developing embryo and closed to the outside. Fig. 13.—Similar section through the Senin of U. sulcata, figured (Fig. 1) with brood chamber of a little earlier stage to Fig. 12. Puate LI. Brood Chambers and Embryos. Fig. 14.—Transverse or horizontal section of the same specimen as Fig. 12 CU. caur'lg greni), passing through about the middle of the brood chamber. Fig. 15.—Similar section of the same individual, passing through the brood chamber near its lower end, showing the prolongation of lobes of the chamber into the mesenteric spaces. A ctiniae. 309 Puate LII. Brood Chambers and Embryos. Fig. 16.—Longitudinal section through larva of U. suleata taken from brood chamber. Fig. 17.—Transverse section of the same, showing developing mesenteries. Fig. 18.—Specimen of U. carlgreni killed with brood chamber open and with an embryo escaping. Fig. 19.—The same with incision through outer wall of chamber and body-wall. Fig. 20.—Transverse section through advanced embr yo of U. sulcata showing about one-sixth of the section. Fig. 21.—Transverse section through the sphincter muscle of the same. ) P 210 Southern Cross. XIX Ee ah O77, @ ae A PRELIMINARY ACCOUNT, By EDWARD T. BROWNE, University College, London. THE ‘ Southern Cross’ specimens arrived whilst I was working through a large collection of Medusae made by Mr. R. Vallentin in the Falkland Islands. The closeness of these islands to the Antarctic Circle led me to make at once a preliminary examination of the ‘Southern Cross’ Collection to see if the medusoid fauna at Cape Adare, where all the specimens had been taken, bore any resemblance to the Medusae of the Falklands. I may here say that the Medusae of the Falklands are closely related to the Medusae of Great Britain, and that the Cape Adare specimens belong to other types. It was sad work to open bottle after bottle and to find the specimens more or less macerated and often in fragments. Most of the specimens are absolutely useless, and only a few show generic characters. The collection gives just a glimpse of a rich and most, interesting medusoid fauna at Cape Adare, and it is unfortunate that more care has not been taken over the preservation and storage. Tt is quite probable that most of the specimens looked in excellent condition when first preserved, and that the mischief occurred later —maceration through not using sufficient formaline or alcohol, and fragmentation through not filling up the bottles to the brim and excluding air-bubbles. All the bottles contained a large air space, and most were only about two-thirds full of fluid. For animals so delicate as jelly-fish, using the term in its old and widest sense, it is absolutely necessary to reduce air-bubbles to their smallest dimensions.